International Codes V8i

STAAD.
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 1)
International Design Codes Manual

DAA037810-1/0001
Last updated: 6 July 2010
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
TRADEMARK NOTICE
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, STAAD.Pro are registered or nonregistered
trademarks of Bentley Sytems, Inc. or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the
property of their respective owners.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
© 2009, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used
pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and
proprietary information of Bentley Systems, Incorporated and/or third parties
which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or
otherwise made available without proper authorization.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
International Design Codes Manual — i

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDS
If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America, its
agencies and/or instrumentalities ("U.S. Government"), it is provided with
restricted rights. This software and accompanying documentation are "commercial
computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation,"
respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and "restricted
computer software" pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use,
modification, reproduction, release, performance, display or disclosure of this
software and accompanying documentation by the U.S. Government are subject to
restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212,
52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable. Contractor/Manufacturer
is Bentley Systems, Incorporated, 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341- 0678.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and
International treaties.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

To view the End User License Agreement for this product, review: eula_en.pdf.
ii — STAAD.Pro
TABLE OF CONTENTS
About STAAD.Pro 2
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation 3
Getting Started and Tutorials 3
Examples Manual 3
Graphical Environment 3
Technical Reference Manual 3
International Design Codes 3
Section 1 Australian Codes 5
1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design Per AS3600 - 2001 5
1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design Per AS 4100 - 1998 11
Section 2 British Codes 23
2A. British Codes - Concrete Design Per BS8110 23
2B. British Codes - Steel Design Per BS5950:2000 41
2B1. British Codes - Steel Design Per BS5950:1990 68
2C. British Codes - Design Per BS5400 90
2D. British Codes - Design Per BS8007 94
2E. British Codes - Design Per British Cold Formed Steel Code 97
Section 3 Canadian Codes 127
International Design Codes Manual — iii

3A. Canadian Codes - Concrete Design Per CSA Standard
A23.3-94 127
3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design Per CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-S16-01 134
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel
Code 164
3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-086-01 172
Section 4 Chinese Codes 201
4A. Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-2002 201
4B. Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 50017-2003 210
Section 5 European Codes 223
5A. European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2 223
5B. European Codes - Steel Design Per Eurocode 3 229
5C. European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1 299
Section 6 Egyptian Codes 323
6A. Egyptian Codes - Concrete Design Per Egyptian Code -
ECCS203 323
6B. Egyptian Codes - Steel Design Per Egyptian Code # 205 329
Section 7 French Codes 337
7A. French Codes - Concrete Design Per B.A.E.L 337
7B. French Codes - Steel Design Per the French Code 342
Section 8 German Codes 353
8A. German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045 353
8B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code 360
Section 9 Indian Codes 371
9A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS456 371
9A1. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS13920 394
9B. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS800:1984 415
9C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS802 432
iv — STAAD.Pro
9D. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
451
9E. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800:2007 457
Section 10 Japanese Codes 465
10A. Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per 1991 AIJ 465
10C. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ 474
Section 11 Mexican Codes 497
11A. Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987 497
11B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican Code 511
Section 12 Russian Codes 523
12A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per Russian Code (SNiP
2.03.01-84*) 523
12B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code SNIP
2.23-81* (Edition 1990) 546
Section 13 South African Codes 567
13A. South African Codes - Concrete Design Per SABS-0100-1
567
13B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard
SAB0162-1:1993 574
Section 14 American Aluminum Code 601
Section 15 American Transmission Tower Code 613
15A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per
ASCE 10-97 613
15B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per
ASCE Manuals and Reports 618
Section 16 Steel Design per American Petroleum Insti-
tute Code 625
Section 17 ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes 639
17A. ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code 639
17B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code 649
International Design Codes Manual — v

Section 18 American Society of Mechanical Engineers
– Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Codes 659
18A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes 659
18B. ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code 670
18C. ASME NF 3000 - 1998 Code 682
Section 19 Norwegian Codes 695
19A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD 695
Technical Support 751
Index 753
vi — STAAD.Pro
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the
various international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as
additional codes by Research Engineers. In other words, they do not come with the
standard package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented in this
document may be actually pertinent to the individual user's package.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual and the STAAD Examples Manual. Effort has been made to provide some
basic information about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design
approach. A brief outline of the factors affecting the design along with references to
the corresponding clauses in the codes is also provided. Examples are provided at
the appropriate places to facilitate ease of understanding of the usage of the
commands and design parameters. Users are urged to refer to the Examples Manual
for solved problems that use the commands and features of STAAD. Since the
STAAD output contains references to the clauses in the code that govern the
design, users are urged to consult the documentation of the code of that country
for additional details on the design criteria.
International Design Codes Manual — 1

About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with
applications primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and
highway structures, industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams,
retaining walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other embedded structures, etc.
The program hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task.
1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands

for creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are
represented using lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented
using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are
represented using brick elements. These utilities allow the user to create the
geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as desired, assign
materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply
loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design
parameters etc.
2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite
element analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum,
time history, steady state, etc.).
3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and
timber members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns,
slabs and shear walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel
members.
4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining
displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam,
plate and solid stress contours, etc.
5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other
widely accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas
like reinforced and prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel
connection design, etc.
6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to
access STAAD.Pro’s internal functions and routines as well as its graphical
commands to tap into STAAD’s database and link input and output data to
third-party software written using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA,
FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link in-house
or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.
2 — STAAD.Pro
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation

The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described below.
These manuals are normally provided only in the electronic format.
All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. If you wish
to obtain a printed copy of the books, visit the docs.bentley.com site to check
availability and order. Bentley also supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no
cost for those who wish to print them on their own. See the back cover of this book
for addresses and phone numbers.
Getting Started and Tutorials

This manual contains information on the contents of the STAAD.Pro package,
computer system requirements, installation process, copy protection issues and a
description on how to run the programs in the package. Tutorials that provide
detailed and step-by-step explanation on using the programs are also provided.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD
engine. The examples represent various structural analyses and design problems
commonly encountered by structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI)
of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis
and design, result verification, and report generation.
Technical Reference Manual

This manual deals with the theory behind the engineering calculations made by the
STAAD engine. It also includes an explanation of the commands available in the
STAAD command file.
International Design Codes

This document contains information on the various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum
design codes, of several countries, that are implemented in STAAD.

The documentation for the STAAD.Pro Extension component(s) is available
separately.
4 — STAAD.Pro
Section 1
Australian Codes
1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design Per AS3600 -

2001
1A.1 Design Operations
STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design based on the Australian
code AS3600-2001 Australian Standard-Concrete Structures.
1A.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed.
l For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

l For Columns: Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
1A.3 Member Dimensions

Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain
section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. The following

example shows the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and
250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely
imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
1A.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the
design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently
used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be
changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 1A.1 of this manual
contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is
necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before
performing the concrete design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number
till it is specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 1A.1 Australian Concrete Design per AS 3600 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE AUSTRALIAN Invokes design per AS3600 - 2001.
Design Code to follow. See section
5.48.1 of the Technical Reference
Manual.
FYMAIN* 450/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing
steel.
FYSEC* 450/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary
reinforcing steel.
FC** 40 N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress.
CLEAR 25 mm For beam members.
40 mm For column members
6 — STAAD.Pro
Section 1 Australian Codes
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar
size.
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar
size.
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement
bar size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement
bar size.
RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of longitudinal
reinforcement in columns.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This
value defaults to ZD as provided
under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design.
This value defaults to YD as provided
TRACK 0.0 BEAM DESIGN:
For TRACK = 0.0, output consists of
reinforcement details at START,
MIDDLE and END.
For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments
are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
For TRACK = 2.0, required steel for
intermediate sections defined by
NSECTION are printed in addition to
TRACK 1.0 output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
With TRACK = 0.0, reinforcement
details are printed.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of 1.0 will
mean spiral reinforcement.
* - applicable values are 250, 400, 450 and 500 as per Table 6.2.1 of the AS 3600-
2001code.

** - applicable values are 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, and 65 as per Clause 6.1.1.1 of the
AS 3600-2001 code.
1A.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members.
There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. One
option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of
axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end
moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the
duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type
of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS.
The PDELTA ANALYSIS will accommodate the requirements of the second- order
analysis described by AS 3600, except for the effects of the duration of the loads.
It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the
effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must
be realized that the evaluation of slenderness effects is also by an approximate
method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical
formula and assumptions on sidesway.
Considering all of the above information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS, as performed by
STAAD may be used for the design of concrete members. However the user must
note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must
be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and
moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based
on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load
etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically.
1A.6 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active
beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different
sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g.
0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to
determine the design force envelopes.
8 — STAAD.Pro
Design for Flexure
Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and
hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all
active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections is
designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently,
design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the
output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass,
effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer
of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the
preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in
single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second
pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the
basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of
flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per AS 3600. Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which
will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical
consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD
at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.
Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional

moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the
maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional
moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear
reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD
program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces
acting on these sections.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL

FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.7 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active
load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for
square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular
columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may
cause slightly conservative results in some cases. All major criteria for selecting
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by AS 3600 have been
taken care of in the column design of STAAD.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.8 Slab/Wall Design

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command
specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2, and Chapter 6 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained
from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference
10 — STAAD.Pro
Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as

longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is
denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, MAXMAIN,
MINMAIN and CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other
parameters mentioned in Table 1A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
Figure: Element moments

Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design Per AS 4100 -

1998
1B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the
specifications recommended by Standards Australia for structural steel design (AS
4100) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the

principles of elastic analysis and limit state method of design. Facilities are
available for member selection as well as code checking.
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of
limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into
consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended
use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and
serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are
strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load
and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel
structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of
limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design
loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability.
Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths,
desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the
program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and
identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation
of AS 4100. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
1B.2 Analysis Methodology

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design.
Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by
the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading
specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or
P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and
the results combined with static analysis results.
1B.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD
may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified
using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the
STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
12 — STAAD.Pro
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to
be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a
database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since
the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered
during the analysis of these members. An example of the member property
specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may
be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
Welded Beams
Welded Beams are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115
23 56 TA ST WB1200X455
Welded Columns
Welded Columns are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WC400X114
23 56 TA ST WC400X303

Parallel Flange Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST PFC75
6 TO 10 TA ST PFC380
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are
available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
11 TA D PFC230
17 TA D C230X75X25 SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back to back double channel

PFC230 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with
a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels.
Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle
section is specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness
of 6 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the
z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Double Angles
Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by
means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In
case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
33 35 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD A75X50X6
14 — STAAD.Pro
43 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)
Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube
is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is
available in the steel table. In these examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5
inch size tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch size tube
section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10 times the width, and 16
times the thickness.
1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5
6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be
performed for TUBE sections specified in this latter manner.
Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)
Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe is
as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is available
in the steel table.
1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5
6 TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE
followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20
length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes
specified in this latter manner.

Sample File Containing Australian Shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 11 100 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 10
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN
* UB SHAPES
1 TA ST UB200X25.4
* UC SHAPES
2 TA ST UC250X89.5
* CHANNELS
3 TA ST PFC125
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
4 TA D PFC200
* ANGLES
5 TA ST A30X30X6
* REVERSE ANGLES
6 TA RA A150X150X16
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS)
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
16 — STAAD.Pro
1B.5 Section Classification

The AS 4100 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus,
local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as
compact, non-compact or slender depending upon their local buckling
characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the
section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class.
STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user
specified shapes. Design is performed for all three categories of section as
mentioned above.
1B.6 Member Resistances

The member resistance is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined
in AS 4100. This depends on several factors such as members' unsupported
lengths, cross-sectional properties, support conditions and so on. The procedure
adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistance is explained here.
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members are based on two limit
states. Limit State of yielding of the gross section is intended to prevent excessive
elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section
with the minimum effective net area. The user through the use of the parameter
NSF (see Table 1B.1) may specify the net section area. STAAD calculates the
tension capacity of a member based on these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2
respectively of AS 4100. Parameters FYLD, FU, Kt and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive strength of members is determined based on Clause 6.1 of the

code. It is taken as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member
capacity. Nominal section capacity is a function of form factor (Cl.6.2.2), net area of
the cross section and yield stress of the material. The user through the use of the
parameter NSC (see Table 1B.1) may specify the net section area. Note here, that
this parameter is different from that corresponding to tension. The program
automatically calculates form factor. Nominal member capacity is a function of
nominal section capacity and member slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). Here
user is required to supply the value of a (Cl.6.3.3). Table 1B.1 gives the default
b
value of this parameter (named ALB). The effective length for the calculation of

compressive strength may be provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ,
LY and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
Bending
The allowable bending moment of members is determined as the lesser of nominal

section capacity and nominal member capacity (ref. Cl.5.1). The nominal section
moment capacity is the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling
and is expressed as the product of yield stress of material and effective section
modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section modulus is a function of section type
i.e. compact, non-compact or slender. The nominal member capacity depends on
overall flexural-torsional buckling of the member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Interaction of axial force and bending
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here also the
adequacy of a member is examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and
member capacity (ref.Cl.8.4.5). If the summation of the left hand side of the
equations, addressed by the above clauses, exceed 1.0 or the allowable value
provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is considered
to have FAILed under the loading condition.
Shear
Shear capacity of cross section is taken as the shear yield capacity. User may refer
to Cl.5.11 in this context. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force
acting on the cross section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any
of the ratios (for both local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the section is considered to have
failed under shear.
1B.7 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table 1B.1 may be used to control the design
procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to
the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an
application's specific needs.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently
used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design
requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly
model the physical structure.
18 — STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till
it is specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 1B.1 Australian Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE AUSTRALIAN Invokes design per AS4100 - 1998.
Manual.
KY 1.0 K value for general column flexural
buckling about the local Y-axis. Used to
calculate slenderness ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for general column flexural
buckling about the local Z-axis. Used to
LY Member Length for general column flexural
Length buckling about the local Y-axis. Used to
LZ Member Length for general column flexural
Length buckling about the local Z-axis. Used to
FYLD 250.0 MPa Yield strength of steel.
FU 500.0 MPa Ultimate strength of steel.
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check slenderness ratio against
the limits.
1.0 = Suppress the slenderness ratio
check.
Default limit for compression = 180.0
Default limit in tension = 400.0
Any value greater than 1.0 is used as
the limit for slenderness in
compression.
TMAIN 180.0 Slenderness limit in tension. Slen-
derness limit is checked based MAIN
parameter.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only minimum design

results.
1.0 = Report design strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full details of design.
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth (Applicable
for member selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum required depth (Applicable
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect to
the design strength.
IST 1 Steel type - 1 - SR, 2 - HR, 3 - CF, 4 -
LW, 5 - HW
PHI 0.9 Capacity reduction factor
NSC 1.0 Net section factor for compression
members = An / Ag
(refer cl. 6.2.1)
ALM 0.0 Moment modification factor (refer cl.
5.6.1.1)
If ALM is 0.0, it is automatically
calculated based cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise
the input value is used.
ALB 0.0 Member section constant (refer cl.
6.3.3)
If ALB is 0.0, it is automatically
calculated based on TABLE 6.3.3(1),
6.3.3(2); otherwise the input value is
used.
KT 1.0 Correction factor for distribution of
forces (refer cl. 7.2)
SKT 1.0 A twist restraint factor given in Table
5.6.3(1)
SKL 1.0 A load height factor given in Table
20 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
5.6.3(2)
SKR 1.0 A lateral rotation restraint factor given
in Table 5.6.3(3)
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments
and those at locations specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design for moments at
twelfth points along the beam.
UNT Member Unsupported length in bending
Length compression of the top flange for
calculating moment resistance.
UNB Member Unsupported length in bending
Length compression of the bottom flange for
DFF None “Deflection Length”/ Maxm. Allowable
(Mandatory local deflection.
for deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting start point for
member calculation of “deflection length”
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for
1B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties
of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per AS 4100
requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at every twelfth point along the
beam. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the
start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER

CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic sections.
1B.9 Member Selection

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight
member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and
moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type
as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel
will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are
originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Composite and prismatic sections cannot be selected.
Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4
1B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format.
The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AS 4100 specification which
governs the design.
22 — STAAD.Pro
Section 2
British Codes
2A. British Codes - Concrete Design Per BS8110

It is strongly recommended that the user should perform new concrete design
using the RC Designer Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD files
to be run.
STAAD has the capability of performing design of concrete beams, columns and
slabs according to BS8110. The 1997 revision of the code is currently
implemented. Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a
section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and
moments.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and
control the design to BS8110. These parameters not only act as a method to input
required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual

Section 2 British Codes
design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional

design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2A.1 contains a complete list
of available parameters with their default values.
Table 2A.1 - British Concrete Design BS 8110 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Invokes design per BS8110.
CODE BRITISH Design Code to follow. See section

Manual.
FYMAIN *460 Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For
2
N/mm slabs, it is for reinforcement in both
directions)
FYSEC *460N/mm Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement
2
a. Applicable to shear bars in beams
FC * Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength

30N/mm2
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25
32 40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable
to shear reinforcement in beams
CLEAR * 20mm Clearance of reinforcement measured

from concrete surface to closest bar
perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size
Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.

(Only applicable for shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending )
EFACE *0.0 Face of support location at end of beam.
(NOTE : Both SFACE & EFACE must be
24 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
positive numbers.)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed

with beam design report. Column design
gives no detailed results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel %
and spacing. For columns gives a detailed
table of output with additional moments
calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0
List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at each
section of member
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design moments
are magnified
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to be
considered in finding critical moment for
beam design. The upper limit is 20.
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This value
default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This value
default is as provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z
direction only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y
direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z
directions
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y
direction for column design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout

without considering torsional moment
Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout
with Mxy used to calculate WOOD &
ARMER moments for design.
A= Skew angle considered in WOOD
& ARMER equations where A is the angle
in degrees.
SERV 0.0 0.0 = No serviceability check performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check for
beams as if they were continuous.
beams as if they were simply supported.
beams as if they were cantilever beams.
* Provided in current unit system
2A.3 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations

STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness
effects in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is
equivalent to the procedure presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In
this section, the code recognizes that additional moments induced by deflection
are present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by the
design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used in the design for concrete
in STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects
of these second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the
design. In a PDELTA analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the
26 — STAAD.Pro
structure, the additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These
can be compared to those calculated using the formulation of BS8110.

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section
properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following
example demonstrates the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX)
is not provided for these members. If shear area areas ( AY & AZ ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note
that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from
YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.
2A.5 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all
active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate
the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is ten, unless that
number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment
values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed with cut-off
lengths calculated to include required development length.
Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the procedure
includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup
sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The program will scan from each end of
the member and provide a total of two shear regions at each, depending on the

change of shear distribution along the beam. If torsion is present, the program will
also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4. A table of shear
and/or combined torsion is then provided with critical shear.
Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. Table 2A.2 shows a sample
output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following
annotations apply to Table 2A.2
1) LEVEL - Serial number of the bar centre which may contain one or more
bar groups.
2) HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its
local y axis.
3) BAR INFO - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and
their size.
4) FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing
bar.
5) TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing
bar.
6) ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook or
(STA,END) continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END).
TABLE 2A.2- ACTUAL DESIGN OUTPUT
B E A M N O. 2 DESIGN R E S U L T S - FLEXURE
LEN - 3854. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 300. X 600. mm
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
mm mm mm STA END
1 29. 6- 8 MM 0. 3854. YES YES

CRITICAL POS MOMENT = 55.31
KN-M AT 1927. mm, LOAD 3
REQD STEEL = 261.mm2, ROW =
0.0014, ROWMX= 0.0400,
ROWMN = 0.0013
MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR
SPACING = 189./ 33./ 40. mm
2 565. 6- 8 MM 0. 3854. YES YES
28 — STAAD.Pro
CRITICAL NEG MOMENT = 55.31

KN-M AT 1927. mm, LOAD 4
REQD STEEL = 261.mm2, ROW =
0.0014, ROWMX= 0.0400, ROWMN =
0.0013
MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING =
189./ 33./ 40. mm
B E A M N O. 2 DESIGN R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR AND TORSIONAL LINKS AS FOLLOWS
FROM - TO SHEAR TORSN LOAD
LINK NO. SPACING mm C/C
mm kN kNm S
T SIZE S T S+T S T S+T
END 1 1156 84.4 12 4
2 8 mm 3 5 9 335 199 116
2697 END 2 86.6 12 3
2 8 mm 3 5 9 335 199 116
EXTRA PERIPHERAL LONGITUDINAL
TORSION STEEL: 402 mm2 EVENLY
DISTRIBUTED
* TORSIONAL RIGIDITY SHOULD
CONFORM TO CL.2.4.3 - BS8110 *
2A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active
loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load and is displayed. The
requirements of BS8110 Part 1 - section 3.8 are followed, with the user having
control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY
parameters as described in table 2A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using
the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is
short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial
bending, the recommendations of 3.8.4.5 of the code are considered.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For
rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be

arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases.

Table 2A.3 shows typical column design results.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0
would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage,
column size and critical load case.
TABLE 2A.3 -COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT

COLUMN No. 1 DESIGN RESULTS
FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 RECT SIZE - 300. X 600. MM,
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 875. SQ. MM.
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION
8 12 MM 0.486 3 EACH END

(ARRANGE COLUMN REINFORCEMENTS SYMMETRICALLY)
BRACED /SHORT in z E.L.z = 4500 mm ( 3.8.1.3 & 5 )
BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y = 4500 mm ( 3.8.1.3 & 5 )
END MOMS. MZ1 = 1 MZ2 = 25 MY1 = 53 MY2 = 40
SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ = 0 MOMY = 2
DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM. = 64 AXIAL LOAD = 84
DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM. = 64 AXIAL CAP.= 187
2A.7 Slab Design

Slabs are designed to BS8110 specifications. To design a slab, it must first be
modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with
section 5.51.3 of the Technical Reference Manual.
A typical example of element design output is shown in Table 2A.4. The
reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted
as transverse reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The following parameters are those
applicable to slab design:
1. FYMAIN - Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
2. FC - Concrete grade
3. CLEAR - Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both surfaces.
30 — STAAD.Pro
4. SRA - Parameter which denotes the angle of the required transverse

reinforcement relative to the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of
WOOD & ARMER design moments.
Other parameters, as shown in Table 2A.1 are not applicable.
WOOD & ARMER equations.
Ref: R H WOOD CONCRETE 1968 (FEBRUARY)
If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the design will be based
on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA
parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce WOOD &
ARMER moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new
design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the
section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will
assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is
given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element local x-axis to
the reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and
shown in the design format.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with
the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output
is as follows:
TABLE 2A.4 -ELEMENT DESIGN OUTPUT
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS
MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS.

PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre
FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD
(mm2/m) (kN-m/m) (mm2/m) (kN-m/m)
WOOD & ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT: 13 UNITS: METER KN
LOAD MX MY MXY MX* MY*/Ma* ANGLE
1 0.619 0.249 0.000 2.226 1.855 30.000 TOP
1 0.619 0.249 0.000 0.000 0.000 30.000 BOTT
3 0.437 0.184 -0.007 1.586 1.358 30.000 TOP

3 0.437 0.184 -0.007 0.000 0.000 30.000 BOTT

13 TOP : 195. 2.23 / 1 195. 1.86 / 1
BOTT : 195. 0.00 / 3 195. 0.00 / 3
2A.8 Shear Wall Design
Purpose
Design of shear walls in accordance with BS 8110 has been added to the features
of the program.
Description
The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design of shear walls.
It performs in-plane shear, compression, as well as in-plane and out-of-plane
bending design of reinforcing. The shear wall is modeled by a single or a
combination of Surface elements. The use of the Surface element enables the
designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of
the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are
presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements
thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for
user specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is
10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output
includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the
concentrated (in-plane bending) reinforcing and the link required due to out-of-
plane shear.
General Format
START SHEARWALL DESIGN

CODE BRITISH
FYMAIN f1
FC f2
HMIN f3
HMAX f4
VMIN f5
VMAX f6
32 — STAAD.Pro
EMIN f7
EMAX f8
LMIN f9
LMAX f10
CLEAR f11
TWOLAYERED f12
KSLENDER f13
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END
The next table explains parameters used in the shear wall design
command block above.
Table 2A.8 - Shear Wall Design Parameters

Parameter Name Default Value Description
FYMAIN 460 Mpa Yield strength of steel, in current units.
FC 30 Mpa Compressive strength of concrete, in current units.
HMIN 6 Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm –
is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diam
HMAX 36 Maximum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm –
is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diam
VMIN 6 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range 6mm – 36
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter
VMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range 6mm – 36
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter
EMIN 6 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in edge zo
– 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will a
diameter bar.
EMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in edge z
– 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will a
diameter bar.
LMIN 6 Minimum size of links (range 6mm – 16mm). If input is 6 (
the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
LMAX 16 Maximum size of links (range 6mm – 16mm). If input is 6 (
the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.


CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current units.
TWOLAYERED 0 Reinforcement placement mode:
0 - single layer, each direction
1 - two layers, each direction
KSLENDER 1.5 Slenderness factor for finding effective height.
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the
shear wall design.
Example
.
.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 to 5 gen pin
6 to 10 gen pin
11 to 15 gen pin
19 to 16 gen pin
.
.
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
34 — STAAD.Pro
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68e-005
ALPHA 5.5e-006
.
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE BRITISH
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 460
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Notes
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-

node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element
mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For
instance, the line 2 TO 5 GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes
between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously
subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional
11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned
pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually
accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite
element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE
PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START
SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code

that will be the basis for the design. For British code the parameter is
BRTISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list
of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear
wall components.
Technical Overview
The program implements provisions of section 3.9 of BS 8110:Part 1:1997 and

relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The wall is
designed as unbraced reinforced wall. The following steps are performed for each
of the horizontal sections of the wall set using the SURFACE DIVISION command
(see Description above).
Checking of slenderness limit
The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For out-of-plane
direction, the wall is assumed to be simply supported. Hence, the provisions of
clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are applicable. The default effective height is 1.5
times the clear height. User can change the effective height. The limit for
slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force output)
Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to
the foundation.
Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated) reinforcement
distance, d, is taken as 0.8 horizontal length of the wall. Flexural design of the wall
is carried out in accordance with the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural
(concentrated vertical ) reinforcing is located at both ends (edges) of the length of
the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2
times horizontal length on each side. This length is inclusive of the thickness of the
wall. Minimum reinforcements are according to table 3.25.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2.
Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into
consideration the effect of axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and
checked against the minimum area as per clause no. 3.12.7.4.
Design for compression and out-of-plane vertical bending (denoted by Fy and My
respectively in the shear wall force output)
36 — STAAD.Pro
The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and bottom), axially loaded
with out-of-plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections
occurring at mid-height. Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded
column with uni-axial bending. The minimum reinforcement percentage is as per
table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement percentage of vertical reinforcement is as
per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if necessary are calculated as per the provisions of
clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is
calculated as per 3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per
table 3.8 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the
provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force
output)
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear is checked
against the whole section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The
axial load in this case is the in-plane shear. The section is again designed as axially
loaded column under uni-axial bending as per the provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra
reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if necessary, is reported.
Shear Wall Design With Opening
The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with
rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to
allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are
available for user selected locations.
Description
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings.

Due to the presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall
panels.
1. Shear wall set-up

Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element
perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments,
opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the
opening(s).
SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1,

..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION
od1, ..., odk
where:
n1, ..., ni - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,

s - surface ordinal number,
sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node
distance on the surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, ..., odk - divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not
include all node-to-node segments, or if any of the numbers
listed equals zero, then the corresponding division number is
set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the
SET DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set
as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
where:
xd - number of divisions along X axis,

yd - number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of

the surface where output is requested. The output is provided for
sections located between division segments. For example, if the number
of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at
the center of the edge).
38 — STAAD.Pro
2. Stress/force output printing

Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of
the wall. The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG x) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2)
LIST s1, ...,si
where:
x - local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a - distance along the x axis from start of the member to the
full cross-section of the wall,
d1, d2 - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to x, delineating a
fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is desired.**
s1, ...,si - list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is
directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is

assumed. If command AT is omitted, output is provided for all
sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections
will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE
DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted,
the output is generated based on full cross-section width.
3. Definition of wall panels

Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:
START PANEL DEFINITION
SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3
z3 x4 y4 z4
ENDPANEL DEFINITION
where:
i - ordinal surface number,

j - ordinal panel number,

ptype - WALL
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the panel
Note: Design of COLUMN and BEAM panels is currently not available.
4. Shear wall design

The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code
BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows:
(...)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s
TRACK tr
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should be:
0 - indicates a basic set of results data (default),
1 - full design output will be generated.
If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the
wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or
SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a
distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then
reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and
vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective
interrupted bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c
from the start of the panel.
40 — STAAD.Pro
2B. British Codes - Steel Design Per BS5950:2000

2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of
limit state design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are
designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit state are
recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate
limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is
deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being
surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist
the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability.
criteria. This procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of allowable
member depths, desired section type or other such parameters. The code checking
portion of the program checks that code requirements for each selected section are
met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built
into the program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual
design process. See section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these
sections. In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees,
composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes and angles, there is a
provision for user provided tables.
STAAD.Pro 2006, has introduced the additional option to design tapered I shaped
(wide flange) beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See section 2B.13 for a
complete description.
Single Angle Sections
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 we must
consider four axes; two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. In
a TRACK 2.0 design output, the ‘Buckling Calculations’ displays results for the ‘v-v’,
‘a-a’ and ‘b-b’ axes. The effective length for the v-v axis, L , is taken as the LVV
vv
parameter or LY * KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by
which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the
LEG parameter, see section 2B6.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The

effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the effective length in the b-
b axis as LZ * KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with
either an ST or RA specification and is connected by its longer leg, i.e. a-a axis is
parallel to the longer leg.


42 — STAAD.Pro
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library

during the analysis of these members.
Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the
sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the
tools of the graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available:
Universal Beams, Columns And Piles
All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following
examples illustrate the designation scheme.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186
Rolled Steel Joists
Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight omitted.
In those cases where two joists have the same specifications but different weights,
the lighter section should be specified with an "A" at the end.
10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A
Channel Sections
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in
STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation
scheme as in BSI tables may be used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76

Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are
available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify a double channel,
e.g. D CH102X51, D CH203X89 etc.
51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)
Tee Sections
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to
the universal beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22
(tee cut from UB254X102X22)
Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications
may be used to describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or
reversed angle, RA specification. Note, however, that only angles specified with
an RA specification can be designed.
The standard angle section is specified as follows:
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-
V axis specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-
V axis in the tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18
Double Angles
inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an
equal angle, either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
44 — STAAD.Pro
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections.
Note: If the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section
properties must be defined with an 11th value which defines the radius of
gyration about an individual sections’ principal v-v axis (See Technical
Reference Manual, 5.19 User Steel Table Specification)
To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the
numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the
decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will
illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP213.2
(specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness)

Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside
diameters of the section. For example,
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units)
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of
specification is used.
Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:
Example:

15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and
Thickness) and not by any table designations.

(a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units)
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE
sections specified this way.
2B.5 Member Capacities

The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the
section. This is a significant departure from the standard practice followed in
BS449, in which the limiting condition was attainment of yield stress at the
extreme fibres of a given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as
the basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to the influence
of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as
either Class 1, plastic, Class 2, compact, Class 3, semi-compact or Class 4, slender,
which governs the decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment
capacity. The section classification is a function of the geometric properties of the
section. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for both hot
rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender sections, BS5950 recommends
the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is
again a function of the geometry of the section and is automatically determined by
STAAD for use in the design process.
Axial Tension
In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension
capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the
basis of the effective area as outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates
the tension capacity of a given member per this procedure, based on a user
supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be
altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1), proceeding with member
selection or code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness
limitations for tension members.
46 — STAAD.Pro
Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the

member is greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is
determined according to the compressive strength, which is a function of the
slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant
strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the considerable
influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behavior. Based on
data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as
tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less
sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the
flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use
of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use
for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in
STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Annex C of BS5950 where
compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson
constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting
slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength.
A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer
required to be checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be
included by specifying a MAIN parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still
applied on double angles checked as battened struts as per clause 4.7.9.
Axially Loaded Members With Moments
In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the
member must be calculated about both principal axes and all axial forces must be
taken into account. If the section is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities
will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The
purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For semi-
compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact
sections with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to
accommodate the shear loads. The STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates
the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate
moment capacities of the section.
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in
section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity.

For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction
formulae must be satisfied – Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the
Member Buckling Resistance check (4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the
member buckling resistance check have been outlined in BS5950:2000 - the
simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2) and Annex
I1 for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis
nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be
more conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that
this is not always the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing
the results in order that the more appropriate criteria can be used.
Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by
x y yx
the user or calculated by the program.
Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and
compressive axial forces are checked using the appropriate method described
above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for
compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this
is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the
presence of moments.
Shear Load
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the

section is greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated
in STAAD using the procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3
if appropriate, considering the appropriate shear area for the section specified.
Lateral Torsional Buckling
Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950,
members are likely to experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled
with lateral torsional buckling, may result in severe serviceability limit state.
Hence, lateral torsional buckling must be considered carefully.
The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has
been incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this
procedure, for a member subjected to moments about the major axis, the
'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must be less than the lateral torsional
buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance moment,
the procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been implemented for all sections with
the exception of angles. In Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a
function of the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent
48 — STAAD.Pro
slenderness, which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment
factor, m , which is determined as a function of the loading configuration and the
LT
nature of the load (stabilizing, destabilizing, etc).
R. H. S Sections - Additional Provisions
Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I.

recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the
following expressions are used to calculate the reduced plastic moduli:
Srx = (A*A/4(B-t))(1-n) [ 2D(B-t)/A + n-1 ]

for n>= 2t(D-2t)/A
Sry = (A*A/4(D-t))(1-n) [ 2B(D-t)/A + n-1 ]
for n>= 2t(B-2t)/A

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5950 are listed in
table 2B.1 along with their default values. The following items should be noted with
respect to their use.
1. (PY – Steel Design Strength )
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for
an entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will
be set according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength
is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR
parameter) and particular element considered. Generally speaking this option is not
required and the program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
2. (UNL, LY and LZ - Relevant Effective Length)
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in
current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ
(which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and
compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and
LY or KY values are required even though they are often the same values. The
former relates to compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling while
the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for compression checks.
3. (TRACK - Control of Output Formats )
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0 or 2.0, member capacities will be
printed in design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons
per square metre.

TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a
different load list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked
must have the parameters, DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 set.
An example of each TRACK setting follows:-
TRACK 0.0 OUTPUT STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI

)
---------------------------
******************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METR (UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
===================================-
==============================
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2
0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00 -
22.02 4.50
---------------------------------
TRACK 1.0 OUTPUT STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI
)
---------------------------
******************************
NOTED)
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
===================================-
==============================
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2
0.036 3
50 — STAAD.Pro
86.72 C 0.00 -
22.02 4.50
CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m
SECTION CLASS 4
MCZ= 1141.9 MCY= 120.4 PC= 3451.5 PT= 5739.9 MB=
1084.1 PV= 1597.5
BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS m AND n : m = 1.000
n = 1.000
PZ= 5739.90 FX/PZ = 0.02 MRZ= 1141.9
MRY= 120.4
TRACK 2.0 OUTPUT STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BSI )
---------------------------
***************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/
LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
====================================================
1 ST UB533X210X92 PASS BS-4.3.6
0.902 100
0.00 0.00 585.41 0.00
====================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = S 275
Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py) = 275 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length = 325.00
Gross Area = 117.00 Net Area = 117.00
Major axis Minor axis
Moment of inertia : 55229.996 2389.000
Plastic modulus : 2360.000 356.000
Elastic modulus : 2072.031 228.285

Shear Area : 58.771 53.843
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000
Section Class : PLASTIC
Major axis Minor axis
Moment Capacity : 649.0 94.2
Reduced Moment Capacity : 649.0 97.9
Shear Capacity : 969.7 888.4
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
(axis nomenclature as per design code)
LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m):
649.00, 0.001
LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm):
mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx =
1.00
Mlt = 585.41 : Mx = 585.41 : My = 0.00 : My =
0.00
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units-
kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ
MY
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.329 100 - 292.3 - -
-
BS-4.3.6 0.902 100 - 292.3 -
585.4 -
BS-4.8.3.2 0.814 100 0.0 68.0 0.0
585.4 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1 1.027 100 0.0 - -
585.4 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.902 100 0.0 - -
585.4 0.0
Annex I.1 0.902 100 0.0 - -
585.4 0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the
design.
_________________________
4. (MX, MY, MYX and MLT – Equivalent Moment Factors)
52 — STAAD.Pro
The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be specified directly by the
user as a positive value between 0.4 and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and 0.44 and 1.0
for MLT.
The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment factors
by defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the Technical
Reference Manual section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by Specification
of GROUPS). The nodes along the beam can then be defined as the location of
restraint points with J settings.
Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper
flange restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange
restrained (negative local Y) with a L setting.
For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous member
as shown below:
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called
MainBeam:
START GROUP DEFINITION

MEMBER
_MainBeam 11 2 38 12 3
END GROUP DEFINITION
Note that this can be done in the GUI by selecting the beams and clicking on the
menu option:
‘Tools | Create New Group…’
Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:-

Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2
a. Consider MX, MY and MYX

Say that this member has been restrained in its’ major axis (local Y) only at
the ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and
also at node number 33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only
been restrained at its ends. Hence:-
For the major axis, local Y axis:-
MX _MainBeam J1 J6
For the minor axis, local Z axis:-
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6
For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:-
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6
b. Consider MLT
Say that this member has been restrained at its’ ends against lateral torsional
buckling and the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and
only the lower flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:-
MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6
To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:-
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6
5. (LEG - Table 25 BS5950 for Fastener Control)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified
in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the
member. To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be
assigned to the member.
The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the
BS5950 connection definition:
Clause 4.7.10.2 Single Angle:
54 — STAAD.Pro
a. 2 Bolts: Short leg = 1.0, Long Leg = 3.0

b. 1 Bolt: Short Leg = 0.0, Long Leg = 2.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b
as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are
defined as:-
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the
compression strength p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for
c
RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to
calculate the compression strength p for the stronger principal axis.
c
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the
two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25.
In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual
section 5.19) an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at the end of the ten
vv
existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making
up the pair.
6. (SWAY – Sway Loadcase)
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load
case in the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent
the “k M ” mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the
amp s
forces from this load case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for.
Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a
separate load case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:-
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
SWAY (load case ALL
number) MEMBER (member list)
_(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 to 10

SWAY 6 _MainBeams
Table 2B.1 - British Steel Design BS5950:2000 Parameters

Parameter
Name
CODE BS5950 Design Code to follow.
See section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade S 275
1.0 = Grade S 355

2.0 = Grade S 460
3.0 = As per GB
1591 – 16 Mn
AD Depth at end/2 Distance between the reference
axis and the axis of restraint. See
G.2.3
PY * Set according to Design strength of steel
steel grade (SGR)
KY 1.0 K factor value in local y - axis.
Usually, this is the minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor value in local z - axis.
Usually, this is the major axis.
LY * Member Length Length in local y - axis (current
units) to calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy
slenderness ratio.
LZ * Member Length Length in local z - axis (current
units) to calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz
slenderness ratio.
UNF 1.0 Factor applied to unsupported
length for Lateral Torsional
Buckling effective length per
56 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
UNL * Member Length Unsupported Length for
calculating Lateral Torsional
Buckling resistance moment
section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension
members.
SBLT 0.0 Identify Section type for section
classification
0.0 = Rolled Section

1.0 = Built up
Section
2.0 = Cold formed
section
MAIN 0.0 Slenderness limit for members
with compression forces,
effective length/ radius of
gyration, for a given axis:-
0.0 = Slenderness
not performed.
1.0 = Main
structural member
(180)
2.0 = Secondary
member. (250)
3.0 = Bracing etc
(350)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress all member
capacity info.

Parameter
Name
1.0 = Print all member
capacities.
2.0 = Print detailed design
sheet.
4.0 = Deflection Check
(separate check to main select /
check code)
BEAM 3.0 0.0 = Design only for end
moments or those locations
specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = Calculate forces and
moments at 12th points along
the member. Establish the
location where Mz is the
maximum. Use the forces and
moments at that location. Clause
checks at one location.
2.0 = Same as BEAM = 1.0 but
additional checks are carried out
for each end.
3.0 = Calculate moments at
12th points along the member.
Clause checks at each location
including the ends of the
member.
LEG 0.0 Valid range from 0 – 7 and 10.
See section 2B.6.5 for details.
The values correspond to table
25 of BS5950 for fastener
58 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
conditions.
LVV * Maximum of Lyy Used in conjunction with LEG for
and Lzz Lvv as per BS5950 table 25 for
(Lyy is a term double angles, note 5.
used
by BS5950)
CB 1.0 1.0 = BS5950 per clause B.2.5
(continuous) to calculate Mb.
2.0 = To calculate Mbs (simple)
as per Clause 4.7.7 as opposed
to Mb.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm.
(Mandatory for allowable local deflection
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point
of member for calculation of "Deflection
Length" (See Note 1)
member calculation of "Deflection
Length" (See Note 1)
CAN 0 0 = deflection check based on
the principle that maximum
deflection occurs within the span
between DJ1 and DJ2.
1 = deflection check based on
the principle that maximum
deflection is of the cantilever
type (see note below)

Parameter
Name
ESTIFF 0.0 Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2
0.0 = Fail ratio uses MIN of
4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and Annex
I1 checks.
1.0 = Fail ratio uses MAX of
4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and Annex
I1 checks.
WELD 1.0 closed Weld Type, see AISC steel
2.0 open design
1.0 = Closed
sections. Welding on
one side only (except
for webs of wide
flange and tee
sections)
2.0 = Open
sections. Welding on
both sides (except
pipes and tubes)
TB 0.0 0.0 = Elastic stress analysis
1.0 = Plastic stress analysis
PNL * 0.0 Transverse stiffener spacing (‘a’
in Annex H1)
0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the
calculations.
60 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SAME** 0.0 Controls the sections to try
during a SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section of the
same type as original
1.0 = Try only those sections
with a similar name as original,
e.g. if the original is an HEA
100, then only HEA sections will
be selected, even if there are
HEM’s in the same table.
MX 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for
major axis flexural buckling as
defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4
MY 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for
minor axis flexural buckling as
MYX 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for
minor axis lateral flexural
buckling as defined in clause
4.8.3.3.4
MLT 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for
lateral torsional buckling as
SWAY none Specifies a load case number to
provide the sway loading forces
in clause 4.8.3.3.4 (See
additional notes)
DMAX * 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN * 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual
capacities.

* current units must be considered.

**For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will
be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
Note: There was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is

now automatically calculated during the design as it is load case dependant.
NOTES:
1. When performing the deflection check, the user can choose between two
methods. The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is
based on the local displacement. Local displacement is described in section
5.43 of this manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style
deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global
axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of
the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at
DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2-DX1)**2 + (DY2-DY1)**2 + (DZ2-DZ1)**2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and
end node, as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
2. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for
calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for
most cases the “Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the member.
However, in some situations, the “Deflection Length” may be different. For
example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three
members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The
parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Also the
straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which
local deflections are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should
be "1" and DJ2 should be "4".
62 — STAAD.Pro
3. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
4. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF (see Table 2.1).
5. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available
parameters for steel design.
2B.7 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as
individual components of an analysed structure. The member design facilities
provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design
operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the
requirements of the design problem.
The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load
cases.
l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with
the list of members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending
upon the design requirements.
2B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section
properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950.
Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the
members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for
code checking.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code

(like any of the BS5950 specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the
value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or
any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location
(distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical
condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 of
the STAAD Technical Reference Manual or any of the user defined sections in
section 5.19 with two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will
only be considered for design as I-shape sections.
Note: PRISMATIC sections are also not acceptable steel sections for design
per BS5950 in STAAD.Pro.

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an
analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section,
i.e. the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified
member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally
designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and
minimum depth of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the
same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 - CODE CHECKING.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created
table, will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are
input as prismatic or as above limitations for code checking.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a
tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
a. MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is per-
formed.
b. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against
the steel code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the
RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
64 — STAAD.Pro
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the
design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses
for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the
member has passed.
f. LOADING provides the load case number, which governed the design.
g. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the
moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the
member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY
and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
h. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to
the section where design forces govern.
i. TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block
out part of the table and will print the allowable bending capacities in com-
pression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allow-
able axial capacity in compression (PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity
(PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as shown in section 2B.9.
2B.11 Plate Girders

Sections will be considered for the Plate Girder checks (BS 5950 Section 4.4) if d/t
> 70 e for ‘rolled sections’ or d/t >62 e for ‘welded sections’. The parameter SBLT
should be used to identify sections as rolled or welded; see the parameter list for
more information.
If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set with the PNL
parameter. These are then used to check against the code clauses ‘4.4.3.2 -
Minimum web thickness for serviceability’ and ‘4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to
avoid compression flange buckling’. The following printout is then included if a
TRACK 2.0 output is selected:-
Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw = 118 N/mm2
d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2
BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS : BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause ‘4.4.5.2 -
Simplified method’ and the result is included in the ratio checks.
2B.12 Composite Sections

Sections that have been defined as acting compositely with a concrete flange either
from a standard database section using the CM option, or from a modified user

WIDE FLANGE database with the additional composite parameters, cannot be
designed with BS5950:2000.
2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams
Design Procedure
Sections will be checked as tapered members provided that are defined either as a
Tapered I section, e.g.
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 TO 5 TAPERED 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4
or from a USER table, e.g.
START USER TABLE

TABLE 1
UNIT CM
ISECTION
1000mm_TAPER
100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4 0 0 0
750mm_TAPER
75 2.5 50 25 4 25 4 0 0 0
END
The user must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange
using the parameter UNL.
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in
accordance with BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations
specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The
results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect
to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail
in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional
Buckling check which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
Design Equations
66 — STAAD.Pro
A beam defined with tapered properties as defined above will be checked as a

regular wide flange (e.g. UB or UC), except that the following is used in place of
clause 4.3.6, the lateral torsional buckling check.
Check Moment for Taper Members as per clause G.2.2
The following criterion is checked at each defined check position in the length of
the member defined by the BEAM parameter.
Where
F is the longitudinal compression at the check location;
c
M is the buckling resistance moment M from 4.3.6 for an equivalent
bi b
slenderness l , see G.2.4.2, based on the appropriate modulus S, S , Z or Z of
TB eff eff
the cross-section at the point i considered;
M is the moment about the major axis acting at the point i considered;
xi
P is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness lTC . , see
c y
G.2.3, based on the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section
within the segment length L
G.2.3 Slenderness lTC
l = yl
TC
In which:
l = L /r
y y
Where
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint,
h is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges;
s
L is the length of the segment;
y
r is the radius of gyration for buckling about the minor axis;
y
x torsional index
G.2.4.2 Equivalent slenderness lTB for Taper members

2B1. British Codes - Steel Design Per BS5950:1990
l = cn n l
TB t t
In which for a two-flange haunch:
Where
C is the taper factor, see G.2.5;
G.2.5 Taper factor
For an I-section with D ≥ 1.2B and x ≥ 20 the taper factor c should be obtained as
follows:
D is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3;
max
D is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see

min
Figure G.3;
x is the torsional index of the minimum depth cross-section, see 4.3.6.8
Otherwise c is taken as 1.0

2B1.1 General
This code has been withdrawn by the British Standards, but has been retained in
STAAD.Pro for comparative purposes only.
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950 is built around the concept of limit
state design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are
designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit state are
recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate
limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is
deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being
surpassed are acceptably remote.
68 — STAAD.Pro
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950, members are proportioned to resist the

design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability.
criteria. This procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of allowable
member depths, desired section type or other such parameters. The code checking
portion of the program checks that code requirements for each selected section are
met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built
into the program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual
design process. See section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these
sections. In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees,
composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes and angles, there is a
provision for user provided tables.
2B1.2 Analysis Methodology

the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications
and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta
analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results
combined with static analysis results.
2B1.3 Member Property Specifications

properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified
2B1.4 Built-In Steel Section Library

Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the

Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available:
Universal Beams, Columns And Piles
All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following
examples illustrate the designation scheme.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186
Rolled Steel Joists
Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight
omitted. In those cases where two joists have the same specifications but different
weights, the lighter section should be specified with an "A" at the end.
10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A
Channel Sections
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in
STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation
scheme as in BSI tables may be used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76
Double Channels
available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify a double channel,
e.g. D CH102X51, D CH203X89 etc.
51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)
70 — STAAD.Pro
Tee Sections
the universal beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22 (tee cut from

UB254X102X22)
Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for input. Two types of specifications
may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as
follows:
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V
axis specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V
axis in the tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18
Double Angles
equal angle, either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections.
To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the
decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will
illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP213.2 (specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with

3.2 mm wall thickness)
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 (specifies a pipe with

outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length
units)
Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:
Figure: BSI tube nomenclature

Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0

(specifies a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units.
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE
2B1.5 Member Capacities

The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the
section. This is a significant departure from the standard practice followed in
72 — STAAD.Pro
BS449, in which the limiting condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme
fibres of a given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the basic
measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to the influence of local
buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as either plastic,
compact, semi-compact or slender, which governs the decision whether to use the
plastic or the elastic moment capacity. The section classification is a function of the
geometric properties of the section. STAAD is capable of determining the section
classification for both hot rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender
sections, BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce the
design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry of the section and is
automatically determined by STAAD for use in the design process.
Axial Tension
basis of the effective area as outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates
the tension capacity of a given member per this procedure, based on a user
supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered
by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1 ), proceeding with member selection
or code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for
tension members.
Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the

member is greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is
determined according to the compressive strength which is a function of the
slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant
strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the considerable
influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behavior. Based on
data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as
tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less
sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the
flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use
of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use
for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in
STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Appendix C of BS5950 where
compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson

constant (representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting

slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength.
In addition to the compression resistance criteria, compression members are
required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of the
use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member etc). In both
the member selection and the code checking process, STAAD immediately does a
slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with the other
procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
Axially Loaded Members With Moments
In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the
member must be calculated about both axes and all axial forces must be taken into
account. If the section is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will
constitute the basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The purpose
of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For semi-compact
or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact sections
with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the
shear loads. The STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure
outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate moment capacities
of the section.
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in
section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity.
For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction
formulae must be satisfied - local capacity check (4.8.3.2) and overall buckling
check (section 4.8.3.3). Two types of approach for the overall buckling check have
been outlined in BS5950 - the simplified approach and the more exact approach.
As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis
moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more conservative
than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always
the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in
order that the more appropriate criteria be used. Members subject to biaxial
moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces are checked
using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to zero.
STAAD also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for
compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION
will be the critical condition reported despite the presence of moments.
74 — STAAD.Pro
Shear Load
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the

section is greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in
STAAD using the procedure outlined in section 4.2.3 and considering the
appropriate shear area for the section specified.
Lateral Torsional Buckling
Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950,
members are likely to experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled
with lateral torsional buckling, may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence,
lateral torsional buckling must be considered carefully.
The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has
been incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this
procedure, for a member subjected to moments about the major axis, the
'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must be less than the lateral torsional
buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance moment, the
procedure outlined in Appendix B.2 has been implemented for all sections with the
exception of angles. In Appendix B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function
of the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness,
which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m, and
slenderness correction factor, n, which are determined as a function of the loading
configuration and the nature of the load ( stabilizing, destabilizing, etc ).
The user is allowed to control these values through the parameters CMM & CMN. If
CMM is set to -1, the program automatically calculates the coefficient 'm'. Similarly
parameter CMN may be used for the calculation of coefficient 'n'. BS5950
recommends the use of tables 15 & 16 for the calculation of coefficient 'n'. The
parameter CMN may be set to -1 or -2 to instruct the program to obtain coefficient
'n' from table 15 or 16 respectively. If a positive value is provided for either CMN or
CMM, the program will use this value directly in calculations. The default value for
each of these parameters is 1.0 as shown in table 2B.1 of this document. It may be
noted that BS5950 recommends the use of either 'm' or 'n' in lateral torsional
buckling calculations. If both 'm' and 'n' are set to values less than 1 in error, the
program will always reset CMN to 1 and over-ride the provided value. The
following table illustrates the use of parameters 'm' and 'n'.
Table 2B.1 Use of CM parameters in BS 5950 1990 design
Parameter Value STAAD Action
-2 Program calculates 'n' per
BS5950 - Table 16
Parameter Value STAAD Action

-1 Program calculates 'm' per
BS5950
-2 Calculate ‘m’ for both axes
CMN any positive value Direct use of this value in
calculations
BS5950, Table 15
BS5950 - Table 16
If negative value options are chosen, lateral restraints should be modeled by

nodes and the section command incorporated to find Mo. Failure to use the
SECTION 0.5 command will cause the program to reset CMN to 1.0 and over-ride
any value that may have been provided. In requesting 'n' to be calculated by the
program by using a negative CMN value, the member properties must be British (
or British combined with user table sections). If other profiles such as European
are being used then 'n' values are reset conservatively to 1.0 by the program. In
the case of angles, section 4.3.8 of the code is followed.
R. H. S Sections - Additional Provisions
Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I.

recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the
following expressions are used to calculate the reduced plastic moduli:
Srx = (A*A/4(B-t))(1-n) [ 2D(B-t)/A + n-1 ]

for n>= 2t(D-2t)/A
Sry = (A*A/4(D-t))(1-n) [ 2B(D-t)/A + n-1 ]
for n>= 2t(B-2t)/A
2B1.6 Design Parameters

table 2B.1 along with their default values. The following items should be noted
with respect to their use.
76 — STAAD.Pro
1. (PY - STEEL DESIGN STRENGTH )

The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design
strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the
value of PY will be set according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 7 in
which the design strength is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for
a particular steel grade and particular element considered. Generally speaking
this option is not required and the program should be allowed to ascertain
the appropriate value.
2. (UNL, LY and LZ - relevant EFFECTIVE LENGTHS)
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than
zero in current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of
UNF, KY KZ ( which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional
buckling and compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that
both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even though they are often
the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for lateral
torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for
compression checks.
3. (CMN and CMM - Lateral torsional buckling coefficients)
As per section 2B.7 of this manual CMM and CMN should not both be used in
a given design. In such a case the program will reset CMN to 1.0
4. (TRACK - control of output formats )
When the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 or 2.0, member capacities will be
printed in design related output ( code check or member selection ) in
kilonewtons per square meter. An example of each follows.
TRACK 0.0 OUTPUT STAAD CODE CHECKING -

(BSI )
---------------------------
******************************
NOTED)
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY
MZ LOCATION

================================-
================================-
=
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2
0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00
-22.02 4.50
---------------------------------

(BSI )
---------------------------
******************************
NOTED)
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY
MZ LOCATION
================================-
================================-
=
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2
0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00
-22.02 4.50
CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m
SECTION CLASS 4
MCZ= 1141.9 MCY= 120.4 PC= 3451.5 PT= 5739.9
MB= 1084.1 PV= 1597.5
BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS m AND n : m = 1.000
n = 1.000
PZ= 5739.90 FX/PZ = 0.02 MRZ=
1141.9 MRY= 120.4
(BSI )
78 — STAAD.Pro
---------------------------
******************************
NOTED)
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY
MZ LOCATION
=================================-
================================
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2
0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00
-22.02 4.50
=================================-
================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = 43
Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py) = 265 N/mm2
Reduced = 232N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length = 450.00
Gross Area = 216.60
Net Area = 216.60
z-axis
y-axis
Moment of inertia : 170147.000
6621.000
Plastic modulus : 5624.000
810.000
Elastic modulus : 4911.156
517.670
Shear Area : 109.122
100.470

Radius of gyration : 28.027

5.529
Effective Length : 450.000
450.000
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950/1990
Section Class : SLENDER
Squash Load : 5739.90
Axial force/Squash load : 0.015
z-axis
y-axis
Slenderness ratio (KL/r) : 16.1
81.4
Compression Capacity : 5036.2
3451.5
Tension Capacity : 5739.9
5739.9
Moment Capacity : 1141.9
120.4
Reduced Moment Capacity : 1141.9
120.4
Shear Capacity : 1561.5
1597.5
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
Lateral Torsional Buckling Moment (MB = 1084.1)
co-efficients m & n : m =1.00 n =1.00,
Effective Length =4.500
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units-
kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY
VZ MZ MY
BS-4.7 (C) 0.025 3 86.7 3.2
0.0 -22.0 0.0
BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3 86.7 3.2
0.0 -22.0 0.0
80 — STAAD.Pro
BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.047 1 83.3 7.4

0.0 -27.6 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.026 1 83.3 7.4
0.0 -27.6 0.0
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.005 1 83.3 7.4
0.0 -27.6 0.0
BS-4.3 (LTB) 0.020 4 -86.7 3.2
0.0 22.0 0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design

5. ( LEG - table 24/28 BS5950 for fastner control )
The LEG parameter follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table
concerns the fastner restraint conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and
channels for slenderness. The following values are available:
Clause 4.7.10.2
a. Single Angle, short leg 1.0

b. Single Angle, short leg 0.0
c. Single Angle, long leg 3.0
d. Single Angle, long leg 2.0
Clause 4.7.10.3
a. Double angle, short leg 3.0

b. Double angle, short leg 2.0
c. Double angle, long leg 1.0
d. Double angle, long leg 0.0
e. Double angle, long leg 7.0
f. Double angle, long leg 6.0
g. Double angle, short leg 5.0
h. Double angle, short leg 4.0
Clause 4.7.10.4
a. Channels, 2 or more rows 1.0

b. Channels, 1 row 0.0
Clause 4.7.10.5
a. Tee sections, 2 or more rows 1.0

b. Tee sections, 1 row 0.0

When defining member properties for single angles, the spec (manual ref: 5.20.1)
should be provided as RA and not ST. See fig 1.6 of the Technical Reference
Manual.
Table 28 may be by-passed in favor of table 24 by using:
l 10 = Table 24 for equal angles or long legs of unequal angles

l 11 = Table 24 for short legs of unequal angles
For single angles, LY and KY parameters should be provided relative to the raa axis
while LZ and KZ are related to rbb. Lvv will be considered as the minimum of the
KY*LY and KZ*LZ values.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 table 28.
In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual
section 5.19) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten
existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making
up the pair.
Table 2B1.1 British Steel Design BS5950:1990 Parameters
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE BS5950 Design Code to follow. See section 5.47.1
of the Technical Reference Manual.
KY 1.0 K factor value in local y - axis. Usually,
this is the minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor value in local z - axis. Usually,
this is the major axis.
LY * Member Length in local y - axis (current units) to
Length calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio.
LZ * Member Length in local z - axis (current units) to
Length calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio.
UNF 1.0 Factor applied to unsupported length for
Lateral Torsional Buckling effective length
per section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950.
UNL * Member Unsupported Length for calculating
Length Lateral Torsional Buckling resistance
moment section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950.
PY * Set Design Strength of steel
according
to steel
grade
(SGR)
82 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade 43
1.0 = Grade 50
2.0 = Grade 55
3.0 = As per GB 1591 – 16 Mn
SBLT 0.0 0.0 = Rolled Section
1.0 = Built up Section
MAIN 1.0 As per BS5950 4.7.3
1.0 = Main structural member (180)
2.0 = Secondary member. (250)
3.0 = Bracing etc (350)
CMM ! 1.0 Coefficient m for lateral torsional
buckling. (see section 2B.5)
CMN ! 1.0 Coefficient n for lateral torsional buckling.
(see section 2B.5)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress all member capacity info.
1.0 = Print all member capacities.
2.0 = Print detailed design sheet.
4.0 = Deflection Check (separate check
to main select / check code)
DMAX * 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN * 0.0cm Minimum allowable depth
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual capacities.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = Design only for end moments or
those locations specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = Calculate moments at 12th points
along the member and use the maximum
Mz value for design. Clause checks at one
location
2.0 = Same as BEAM = 1.0 but additional
checks are carried out for each end.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
3.0 = Calculate moments at 12th points
along the member. Clause checks at each
location including the ends of the
member.
LEG 0.0 Values range from 0 - 12. See section
2B.6.5 for details. The values correspond
to table 24/28 of BS5950 for fastner
conditions.
LVV * Maximum Used in conjunction with LEG for Lvv as
of Lyy and per BS5950 table 28 for double angles,
Lzz note 5.
(Lyy is a
term used
by
BS5950)
CB 1.0 1.0 = BS5950 per clause B.2.5
(continuous) to calculate Mb.
2.0 = To calculate Mbs (simple) as per
Clause 4.7.7 as opposed to Mb.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable
(Mandatory local deflection
for
deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point for
of member calculation of "Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for
Note 1)
ESTIFF 0.0 Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2
0.0 = Pass if member passes EITHER
clause.
1.0 = Pass if member passes BOTH
clauses.
84 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
WELD 1.0 closed Weld Type, see AISC steel design
2.0 open 1.0 = Welding on one side only (except
for webs of wide flange and tee sections)
2.0 = Welding on both sides (except
pipes and tubes)
TB 0.0 0.0 = Elastic stress analysis
1.0 = Plastic stress analysis
PNL * 0.0 Transverse stiffener spacing (‘a’ in
Appendix H1)
0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the calculations.
SAME ** 0.0 Controls the sections to try during a
SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section of the same type
as original
1.0 = Try only those sections with a
similar name as original, e.g. if the
original is an HEA 100, then only HEA
sections will be selected, even if there are
HEM’s in the same table.
! CMN & CMM cannot both be provided.

* current units must be considered.
** For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will
Notes:
1. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local
deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
"Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in
some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer
to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and

three members. Note that the "Deflection Length" for all three members will
be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and
DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1
and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are
measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be "1" and DJ2
should be "4".
2B1.7 Design Operations

individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities
requirements of the design problem.
The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the load cases to be considered in the design.

l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with
the list of members.
2B1.8 Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950.
Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the
members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces
for code checking.
86 — STAAD.Pro
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code
(like any of the BS5950 specifications for compression, tension , shear, etc.); the
value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or
any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location
(distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical
condition occurs).
section 5.19 with two exceptions ; GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will
not be considered for design along with PRISMATIC sections which are also not
acceptable.
2B1.9 Member Selection

constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and
Member selection can not be performed on members whose section properties are
input as prismatic or as above limitations for code checking.
2B1.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Table 2B.2 Results Legend
Item Description
a) refers to the member number for which the
MEMBER design is performed.
b) TABLE refers to steel section name which has been
checked against the steel code or has been
selected.

Item Description
c) prints whether the member has PASSED or
RESULTS FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an
asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
d) refers to the section of the BS5950 code which
CRITICAL governs the design.
COND
e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable
stresses for the critical condition. Normally a
value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has
passed.
f) provides the load case number which governed
LOADING the design.
g) FX, MY, provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis
and MZ and the moment in local z-axis respectively.
Although STAAD does consider all the member
forces and moments (except torsion) to perform
design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since
they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
h) specifies the actual distance from the start of the
LOCATION member to the section where design forces
govern.
i) TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program
will block out part of the table and will print the
allowable bending capacities in compression
(MCY & MCZ) and reduced moment capacities
(MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in
compression (PC) and tension (PT) and shear
capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design
results as shown in section 2B.9.
2B1.11 Plate Girders

Plate girders may be considered for design in BS5950. The "py" used in the
calculation of compressive strength is reduced by 20N/mm2 as per the code if
parameter SBLT is set to 1.0. The code requires that for d/t >63E, the interaction
checks be modified in order to check for shear buckling of the web. This is
considered in STAAD (versions 15.0 and over) following clause 4.4.4.2a and
88 — STAAD.Pro
4.4.4.3 of the code. The shear capacity is found from table 21 of the code and used
in clause 4.4.5.3. For plate girders, clauses 4.4.2.2a and 4.4.2.3a are also
considered. In order to account for these checks, the output has been modified to
show these variations from the more common critical checks. An example is as
follows, using TRACK 2.0, showing the bottom part of the output having been
modified as follows:
BS5950 Table 7<note 2>: d/t > 63E Web Is Checked For Shear
Buckling
d/t =101.7 qcr=191.9 N/mm2 d*t=14639 mm2 (4.4.5.3)Vcr=
2809.4 kN
Flange =COMPACT Pyf=344 N/mm2 4.4.2.2 a=PASS 4.4.2.3
a=PASS
Flange Ratio 4.4.4.2 (a) =0.20 L= 1 Web Ratio =0.05 L= 1
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.177 1 0.0 -150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.049 1 0.0 150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.3 (LTB) 0.151 1 0.0 -150.0 0.0 -
1125.0 0.0
BS-4.4.5.3 0.053 1 0.0 150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.4.4.2 a 0.203 1 0.0 -150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
2B1.12 Composite Sections

The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard sections
definition - section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. This is purely for
analysis and for obtaining the right section properties. It uses the American
requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with
British sections two new options are available in user provided tables.
Wide Flange Composite
Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values can
now be provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of centre of the steel
web (b1). The second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the
concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular ratio. The above
values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first position on the first

line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described
above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2
breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate.
ISection
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9
1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange
and are available on request to any existing user. Please note however that
composite design IS NOT available in this portion of STAAD.
2C. British Codes - Design Per BS5400

2C.1 General Comments
BS5400 is an additional code available from Bentley Systems. It does not come as
standard with British versions.
The British Standard, BS5400 adopts the limit state design philosophy and is
applicable to steel, concrete and composite construction. The code is in 10 parts
covering various aspects of bridge design. The implementation of part 3, Code of
practice for design of steel bridges, in STAAD is restricted in its scope to simply
supported spans. It is assumed that the depth remains constant and both
construction and composite stages of steel I-Sections can be checked. The
following sections describe in more detail features of the design process currently
available in STAAD.
90 — STAAD.Pro
2C.2 Shape Limitations

The capacity of sections could be limited by local buckling if the ratio of flange
outstand to thickness is large. In order to prevent this, the code sets limits to the
ratio as per clause 9.3.2. In the event of exceeding these limits, the design process
will terminate with reference to the clause.
2C.3 Section Class

Sections are further defined as compact or non-compact. In the case of compact
sections, the full plastic moment capacity can be attained. In the case of non
compact sections, local buckling of elements may occur prior to reaching the full
moment capacity and for this reason the extreme fibre stresses are limited to first
yield. In STAAD, section types are determined as per clause 9.3.7 and the checks
that follow will relate to the type of section considered.
2C.4 Moment Capacity

Lateral torsional buckling may occur if a member has unrestrained elements in
compression. The code deals with this effect by limiting the compressive stress to a
value depending on the slenderness parameter which is a modified form of the ratio
Le/Ry. Le is the effective length governed by the provision of lateral restraints
satisfying the requirements of clause 9.12.1. Once the allowable compressive stress
is determined then the moment capacity appropriate to the section type can be
calculated. STAAD takes the effective length as that provided by the user,
defaulting to the length of the member during construction stage and as zero,
assuming full restraint throughout, for the composite stage. The program then
proceeds to calculate the allowable compressive stress based on appendix G7 from
which the moment capacity is then determined.
2C.5 Shear Capacity

The shear capacity, as outlined in clause is a function of the limiting shear strength,
l, which is dependant on the slenderness ratio. STAAD follows the iterative
procedure of appendix G8 to determine the limiting shear strength of the web
panel. The shear capacity is then calculated based on the formula given under
clause 9.9.2.2.
2C.6 Design Parameters

table 2C.1. Depending on the value assigned to the 'WET' parameter, the users can
determine the stage under consideration. For a composite design check, taking into

consideration the construction stage, two separate analyses are required. In the
first, member properties are non-composite and the WET parameter is set to 1.0 .
In the second, member properties should be changed to composite and the WET
parameter set to 2.0. Member properties for composite or non-composite sections
should be specified from user provided tables (refer to section 5.19 of the manual
for specification of user tables). Rolled sections, composite or non-composite,
come under WIDE FLANGE section-type and built-up sections under ISECTION.
When specifying composite properties the first parameter is assigned a negative
value and four additional parameters provided giving details of the concrete
section. See user table examples provided. Note: Once a parameter is specified,
its value stays at that specified number till it is specified again. This is the way
STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2C.1 BS5400 Design Parameters
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
UNL* Member Unsupported Length for calculating
Length allowable compressive bending stress.
PY* Set according to Design Strength of steel
SGR
SGR* 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade 43
1.0 = Grade 50
2.0 = Grade 55
SBLT 0.0 0.0 = Rolled Section
1.0 = Built up Section
MAIN 1.0 1.0 = Grade of concrete 30 N/mm2
2.0 = Grade of concrete 40 N/mm2
3.0 = Grade of concrete 50 N/mm2
WET 0.0 0.0 = Wet stage with no data saved for
composite stage.
1.0 = Wet stage with data saved for
composite stage.
2.0 = Composite and wet stage combined.
3.0 = Composite stage only.
TRACK 1.0 1.0 = Print all member capacities.
92 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
0.0 = suppress all member capacities.
BEAM 0.0 MUST BE CHANGED TO 1.0 FOR ALL RUNS
LY* Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for
Length bending about Y-axis.
LZ* Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for
Length bending about Z-axis.
KY 1.0 K value for bending about Y-axis. Usually
this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for bending about Z-axis. Usually
this is major axis.
STIFF 1.0 Factor of length for panel length in the
shear calculation.
* Provided in current unit systems.
2C.7 Composite Sections

The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard sections
definition - section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. This is purely for
analysis and for obtaining the right section properties. It uses the American
requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with
British sections two new options are available in user provided tables.
Wide Flange Composite
Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values can
now be provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of centre of the steel
web (b1). The second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the
concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular ratio. The above
values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first position on the first
line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described
above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2
breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate.
ISection
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.

Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9
1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange
and are available on request to any existing user. Please note however that
composite design IS NOT available in this portion of STAAD.
2D. British Codes - Design Per BS8007

2D.1 General Comments
BS8007 is an additional code available from Bentley Systems. It does not come as
standard with British versions.
STAAD has the capability of performing concrete slab design according to BS8007.
BS8007 provides recommendations for the design of reinforced concrete
structures containing aqueous liquids. It is recommended that the design of the
structure is carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the
recommendations given in BS8007.
Please use the following in conjunction with Section 2A of this Manual - BS8110.
British Codes - Design Per BS8007

2D.2 Design Process
The design process is carried out in three stages.
94 — STAAD.Pro
1. Ultimate Limit States

The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried out in
accordance with recommendations given in BS8110. All active design load
cases are considered in turn and a tabulated output is printed showing
possible reinforcement arrangements. 12, 16 and 20 mm bars are considered
with possible spacings from 100,125,150,175 and 200 mm. Within these
spacings, the layout providing the closest area of steel is printed under each
bar size. Longitudinal and transverse moments together with critical load
cases for both hogging and sagging moments are also printed. Minimum
reinforcement is in any case checked and provided in each direction. WOOD &
ARMER moments may also be included in the design.
2. Serviceability Limit States
In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load cases are
calculated. The FIRST and EVERY OTHER OCCURING design load case is
considered as a serviceability load case and crack widths are calculated based
on bar sizes and spacings proposed at the ultimate limit state check.
Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are calculated
directly under bars, midway between and at corners. A tabulated output
indicating critical serviceability load cases and moments for top and bottom of
the slab is then produced.
3. Thermal crack widths
Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through available
parameters, the user is able to provide information on the type of slab, temperature
range and crack width limits.
Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and critical areas of
reinforcements are calculated and printed in a tabulated form.
Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing, Smax and crack
widths are calculated for the critical reinforcements and printed under each bar
size.
Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under
each bar size.
2D.3 Design Parameters

control the design to BS8007.

These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default
values of commonly used values for conventional design practice have been
chosen as the basis. Table 2D.1 contains a complete list of available parameters
with their default values.
Table 2D.1 - BS8007 Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FC * 30 Concrete grade.
N/mm2
CLEAR * 20 mm Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both surfaces.
SRA 0.0 Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment
Mxy - slabs on -500.
orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate WOOD
&ARMER moments for design.
A* Skew angle considered in WOOD & ARMER EQUATIONS. A* is any
angle in degrees.
SCON 1 Parameter which indicates the type of slab ee. ground or suspended as
defined in BS8007
1 = Suspended Slab
2 = Ground Slab
TEMP 30°C Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack width calculations
CRACK * 0.2 mm Limiting thermal crack width
* Provided in current unit systems
2D.4 Structural Model

Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be modeled using finite
elements. The manual provides information on the sign convention used in the
program for defining elements, (See main manual section 2-6).
It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the positive local z axis
points outwards away, from the center of the container. In this manner the "Top"
of elements will consistently fall on the outer surface and internal pressure loads
will act in the positive direction of the local z axis.
An example of a rectangular tank is provided to demonstrate the above procedure.
96 — STAAD.Pro
Element properties are based on the thickness given under ELEMENT PROPERTIES
command. The following example demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm
slab modeled with 10 elements.
UNIT MM
ELEMENT PROPERTIES
1 TO 10 THI 300.0
2D.5 Wood & Armer Moments

This is controlled by the SRA parameter. If the default value of zero is used, the
design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of
STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated
to introduce WOOD & ARMER moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My
moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered
when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered.
SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be
considered, an angle is given in degrees, measured between the local element x
axis anti-clockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated
and shown in the design format.
2E. British Codes - Design Per British Cold Formed

Steel Code
2E.1 General
Provisions of BS 5950-5:1998, have been implemented. The program allows
design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending,
shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening effects
have been included as an option.
2E.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section
shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the “The
Steel Construction Institute”, (Design of Structures using Cold Formed Steel
Sections).
The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:
l Channel with Lips

l Channel without Lips

l Z with Lips
l Pipe
l Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the member property pages of the graphical
user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input
file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses
unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and
effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
2E.3 Design Procedure

The following two design modes are available:
1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load
effects, in accordance with BS 5950-5:1998. Code checking is carried out for
locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM
parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and
a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may
choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK
parameter.
2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes
database (BS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code
check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or
maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program
will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e.,
channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design
results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or
lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member
unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Section 4 of
the subject code. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members
are checked for compliance with
l Clause 6.2.2, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in

Compression
98 — STAAD.Pro
l Clause 4.2, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
2E.4 Design Equations
Tensile Strength
The allowable tensile strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 7

is described below.
The tensile strength, P of the member should be determined from clause 7.2.1
t
Where
A is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4
e
p is the design strength
y
Combined bending and tension
As per clause 7.3 of BS 5950-5:1998 members subjected to both axial tension and
bending should be proportioned such that the following relationships are satisfied
at the ultimate limit state
Where
F is the applies tensile strength

t

P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause
t
7.2.1 of the subject code
M ,M ,M ,M are as defined in clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
z y cz cy
Compressive Strength
The allowable Compressive strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5,

section 6 is described below
For sections symmetrical about both principal axes or closed cross-sections which
are not subjected to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial
load, Pc, may be obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.3 of the
subject code
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional
flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained
from the following equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
Torsional flexural buckling
Design of the members which have at least one axis of symmetry, and which are
subject to torsional flexural buckling should be done according to the stipulations
of the clause 6.3.2 using factored slenderness ratio aL /r in place of actual
E
slenderness ratio while reading Table 10 for the value of Compressive
strength(p ).
c
Where
100 — STAAD.Pro
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
Combined bending and compression
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending should be checked for
local capacity and overall buckling
Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
Overall buckling check as per clause 6.4.3 of the subject code
For Beams not subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be
satisfied
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be

satisfied
F is the applied axial load

c

P is the short strut capacity as per clause 6.2.3
cs
M is the applied bending moment about z axis
z
M is the applied bending moment about y axis
y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the
cz
absence of F and M , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the
cy
absence of F and M ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c z
M- is the lateral buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2
b
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about
Ez
the local Z axis
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about
Ey
the local Y axis
C ,C are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
bz by
The M M and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in
cz, cy b
the manner described herein below.
Calculation of moment capacities
For restrained beams, the applied moment based on factored loads should not be
greater then the bending moment resistance of the section, M
c
M =S ´p
cz zz o
M = S ´ p
cy yy o
Where
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis

cz
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis
cz
p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient
o
and should not greater then design strength p
y
102 — STAAD.Pro
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be
greater than the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M , and
c
the buckling resistance moment of the beam, M
b
Then buckling resistance moment, M may be calculated as follows
b,
M is the yield moment of the section , product of design strength p

Y y
and elastic modules of the gross section with respect to the
compression flange Zc
M is the elastic lateral buckling resistance as per clause 5.6.2.2
E
is the Perry coefficient
Please refer clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 of the subject code for a detailed
discussion regarding the parameters used in the abovementioned equations.
Shear Strength
The maximum shear stress should not be greater then 0.7 ´ p as per clause 5.4.2
y
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength,
p or the shear buckling strength, q as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject
v cr
code.
The parameters are calculated as follows :-
pv = 0.6 ´ p
y

P = A*Min(p ,q )
v v cr
Where
P is the shear capacity in N/mm^2

v
p is the design strength in N/mm^2
y
t is the web thickness in mm
D is the web depth in mm
Combined bending and Shear
For beam webs subjected to both bending and shear stresses the member should
be designed to satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause
5.5.2 of the subject code
Where
F is the shear force

v
M is the bending moment acting at the same section as F
v
M is the moment capacity determined in accordance with 5.2.2
c
The next table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design
variables and selection of design options.
104 — STAAD.Pro
Table 2E.1 - British Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to 1.0
(default), the adequacy of the member is
determined by checking a total of 13
equally spaced locations along the length
of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0,
the 13 location check is not conducted,
and instead, checking is done only at the
locations specified by the SECTION
command (See STAAD manual for details.
For TRUSS members only start and end
locations are designed.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending
C . See BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for
b
Combined axial load and bending design.
CMY 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending
C . See BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for
b
Combined axial load and bending design.
CWY 1.0 Specifies whether the cold work of
forming strengthening effect should be
included in resistance computation. See
BS:5950-5:1998,3.4
Values: 0 – effect should not be included
1 – effect should be included
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural
buckling restraint is provided or is not
necessary for the member. See BS:5950-
5:1998, 5.6
Values:
0 – Section not subject to torsional
flexural buckling
1 – Section subject to torsional flexural
buckling
FU 430 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current
units.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYLD 250 MPa Yield strength of steel in current units.
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional

buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling) to
any user specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for
determining the capacity in axial
compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall buckling
about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and
is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01
(for a column completely prevented from
buckling) to any user specified large
value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio
for determining the capacity in axial
compression.
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall buckling
in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is
unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for
a member completely prevented from
compression.
LX Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in
length the current units of length. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a member
completely prevented from torsional
for twisting for determining the capacity
in axial compression.
106 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
LY Member Effective length for overall buckling in the
length local Y-axis. It is input in the current units
of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for
compression.
LZ Member Effective length for overall buckling in the
length local Z-axis. It is input in the current units
of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for
compression.
MAIN 0 0 – Check slenderness ratio
0 – Do not check slenderness ratio
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members
DMAX 2540.0 Maximum allowable depth. It is input in

cm. the current units of length.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable
stresses
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control the level
of detail in which the design output is
reported in the output file. The allowable
values are:
0 - Prints only the member number,
section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL
status.
1 - Prints the design summary in addition
to that printed by TRACK 1
2 - Prints member and material properties
in addition to that printed by TRACK 2.

2E.5 Verification Problem - 1
Shown below is a verification example for reference purposes.

In this problem, we have assigned Channel sections with lips to different
members. Member numbers 28 to 31 have been assigned section
230CLHS66X16,member numbers 3 TO 6 and 15 TO 19 have been assigned the
section 230CLMIL70X30 and member numbers 1, 2, 7 TO 14 have been assigned
the section 170CLHS56X18. These members have been designed as per BS 5950
Part 5. Other sections have been assigned from the AISI shapes database
(American cold-formed steel) and designed in accordance with that code.
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are given herein
below.
1. Bending Check
As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 –Part 5 the limiting compressive
stress(p ) for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of
o
108 — STAAD.Pro
The limiting compressive moments in local Y and Z axes will be given by
Maximum bending moment about local Z = 2159 N-m at node 7

Maximum bending moment about local Y = 19.755 N-m at node 7
Bending Ratio Z = 2.15 X106 / 9.19 X106 = 0.235 ……hence verified
Bending Ratio Y = 19755.3 / 3.46 X106 = 0.0057 ……hence verified
Buckling resistance moment M
b
As per section 5.6.2,
The buckling resistance moment
Where,
The Yield moment(M ) of section is given by M = S ´ p = 9.19 X 106 N-
Y Y zz o
mm

The elastic buckling resistance moment(M ) as per clause 5.6.2.2 is
E
calculated to be
4.649 X106 N-mm
2. Compression Check
The Axial force induced in member# 1 is 3436.75 N
The elastic flexural buckling load P = 1.185 X 106 N
E
The short strut capacity (Pcs ) is given by A X py = 457.698 * 344 =
eff
157448 N
Perry Coefficient (h) = 0.02074
For Channel section(being singly symmetric) as per clause 6.2.4
Where
110 — STAAD.Pro
The limiting compressive moment(M ) in the relevant direction = 9.19 X 106

c
N-mm,as calculated above
And the distance(e ) of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section
s
and that of the effective cross section = 38.24 m
So that,
Compression ratio = ……hence verified
3. Axial Compression and Bending

Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2

4. Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3
pv = 0.6 ´ p = 0.6 ´ 379.212 = 227.52 N/mm2
y
5. Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2
112 — STAAD.Pro
Input File:
STAAD SPACE
SET ECHO OFF
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 5 0; 2 0 5 10; 3 10 5 0; 4 10 5 10; 5 5 5 0; 6 5 5 10; 7 0
5 2; 8 0 5 4;
9 0 5 6; 10 0 5 8; 11 10 5 2; 12 10 5 4; 13 10 5 6; 14 10 5 8;
15 5 5 2;
16 5 5 4; 17 5 5 6; 18 5 5 8; 19 10 0 0; 20 10 0 10; 21 0 0
10; 22 0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES

1 1 7; 2 3 11; 3 1 5; 4 2 6; 5 5 3; 6 6 4; 7 7 8; 8 8 9; 9 9 10;
10 10 2;
11 11 12; 12 12 13; 13 13 14; 14 14 4; 15 5 15; 16 15 16;
17 16 17; 18 17 18;
19 18 6; 20 7 15; 21 15 11; 22 8 16; 23 16 12; 24 9 17; 25
17 13; 26 10 18;
27 18 14; 28 1 22; 29 2 21; 30 3 19; 31 4 20; 32 1 21; 33
21 4; 34 4 19;
35 19 1; 36 2 20; 37 20 3; 38 3 22; 39 22 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN
32 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060
20 TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH
28 TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16
3 TO 6 15 TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30
1 2 7 TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18
UNIT MMS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28 3 1
SUPPORTS
19 TO 22 PINNED
UNIT FEET
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176e+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 6.5e-006
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 39
MEMBER TENSION
32 TO 39
114 — STAAD.Pro
UNIT FEET KIP

LOAD 1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
MEMBER LOAD
3 TO 6 20 TO 27 UNI GY -0.3 0 5
JOINT LOAD
1 2 FX 0.6
2 4 FZ -0.6
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
UNIT KGS CM
PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16
PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28
UNIT KIP INCH

PARAMETER 1
CODE AISI
FYLD 55 ALL
CWY 1 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21
PARAMETER 2
CODE BS5950 COLD
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2
FINISH
Output File:
****************************************************
* *

* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Proprietary Program of *
* *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE
2. SET ECHO OFF
MEMBER PROPERTIES. UNIT - CM

-----------------
MEMB PROFILE AX/ IZ/ IY/ IX/
AY AZ SZ SY
32 ST 3LU3X060 2.26 21.81 5.17

0.02
1.51 1.51 4.05 1.93
20 ST 3HU3X075 4.91 63.15 40.66
0.06
1.24 2.40 10.63 9.59
28 ST 230CLHS66X16 8.78 663.30 42.82
0.18
5.40 2.94 60.93 9.29
3 ST 230CLMIL70X30
11.40 868.90 66.93 0.36
6.72 3.84 80.13 14.15
1 ST 170CLHS56X18 5.23 224.50 20.49
0.06
116 — STAAD.Pro
3.00 1.89 27.96 5.43
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE

************
**START ITERATION NO. 2
**NOTE-Tension/Compression converged after 2

iterations, Case= 1
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY

FOR CASE NO. 1
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY

(LOADING 1 )
SUMMATION FORCE-X = 1.20
SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -18.00
SUMMATION FORCE-Z = -1.20
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-

MX= 84.00 MY= 12.00 MZ= -96.00
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY

(LOADING 1 )
SUMMATION FORCE-X = -1.20
SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 18.00
SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 1.20
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-

MX= -84.00 MY= -12.00 MZ= 96.00

MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS)
(LOADING 1)
MAXIMUMS AT NODE
X = 1.56266E-02 1
Y = -4.80071E-01 16
Z = -1.74873E-02 4
RX= -8.28375E-03 6
RY= -2.10910E-05 14
RZ= -8.31623E-03 7

************
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM RADIANS) STRUCTURE

TYPE = SPACE
------------------
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN

Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN
1 1 0.0397 -0.0184 -0.0339 0.0074 0.0000 -

0.0027
4 1 0.0305 -0.0185 -0.0444 -0.0074 0.0000
0.0025
16 1 0.0352 -1.2194 -0.0392 0.0025 0.0000
0.0000
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT

**************
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KGS CM STRUCTURE
TYPE = SPACE
-----------------
118 — STAAD.Pro
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z MOM-X

MOM-Y MOM Z
19 1 -447.32 2312.64 85.08 0.00 0.00

0.00
20 1 -447.10 2041.85 186.39 0.00 0.00
0.00
21 1 174.26 1768.33 187.79 0.00 0.00
0.00
22 1 175.85 2041.85 85.05 0.00 0.00
0.00

**************
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE

-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS CM (LOCAL )
MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z

TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
3 1 1 669.42 1448.06 2.70 -1.68 -215.75

61582.12
5 -669.42 -767.67 -2.70 1.68 -196.10
107256.50
24 1 9 -0.63 -0.06 -285.30 -0.04 -0.08

1.04
17 0.63 0.06 -395.09 0.04 -8366.18 -
9.62
28 1 1 2155.98 -404.11 -85.05 0.00 12961.01

-61586.40

22 -2155.98 404.11 85.05 0.00 0.00
0.00

**************
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (AISI)

***********************
UNITS ARE: IN, KIP, KIP-IN, KSI
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
| MEMBER# 20 SECTION: 3HU3X075 LEN: 60.00
GOV.LOC: 60.00 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.285 GOV.MODE: Bend +
Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 |
| |
| RESISTANCES: AX.TENS: 0.00 ECC.TENS: 0.00
COMPRESS: 7.51 |
| BEND. Z: 28.21 BEND. Y: 30.98 SHEAR Z: 11.76
SHEAR Y: 5.88 |
| |
| FYLD: 55.00 COLD WORK FYLD: 55.71 FU: 58.00 A:
0.76 AE: 0.76 |
| IZ: 1.5173E+00 IZE: 1.5173E+00 IY: 9.7684E-01
IYE: 9.7684E-01 |
| SZE_T: 6.4841E-01 SZE_C: 6.4841E-01 SYE_T:
5.8539E-01 SYE_C: 7.3374E-01 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
120 — STAAD.Pro
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
| MEMBER# 21 SECTION: 3HU3X075 LEN: 60.00
GOV.LOC: 0.00 |
| |
| RESISTANCES: AX.TENS: 0.00 ECC.TENS: 0.00
COMPRESS: 7.51 |
| BEND. Z: 28.21 BEND. Y: 30.98 SHEAR Z: 11.76
SHEAR Y: 5.88 |
| |
| FYLD: 55.00 COLD WORK FYLD: 55.71 FU: 58.00 A:
0.76 AE: 0.76 |
| IZ: 1.5173E+00 IZE: 1.5173E+00 IY: 9.7684E-01
IYE: 9.7684E-01 |
| SZE_T: 1.0115E+00 SZE_C: 1.0115E+00 SYE_T:
7.3374E-01 SYE_C: 5.8539E-01 |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
STAAD/Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-

v1.0)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA

----------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
| MEMBER# 1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN:
609.60 LOCATION: 609.60 |

|------------------------------------------------ ------------------
--------|
MATERIAL DATA:
Yield strength of steel: 379.21 N/mm2
Ultimate tensile strength: 430.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm)

Section Name: 170CLHS56X18
Member Length: 60.96
Gross Area(Ag): 5.46 Net Area (Ae): 4.58
z-z axis y-y axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 237.68 21.99
Moment of inertia (Ie): 236.04 19.44
Elastic modulus (Zet): 27.91 5.21
Elastic modulus (Zec): 27.63 10.41
DESIGN DATA:
z-z axis y-y axis
Tension Capacity (Pt): 0.00
Compression Capacity (Pc): 93.79
Moment Capacity (Mc): 9.19 3.46
Shear Capacity (Pc): 21.15 33.58
122 — STAAD.Pro
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD :
CLAUSE COMBINATION RATIO

BS-6.3 Compression ratio - Axial 0.037
BS-6.4 Bend-Compression ratio 0.277
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Z 0.235
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Y 0.006
BS-5.1 Biaxial Bending Ratio 0.241
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Z 0.168
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Y 0.003
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio 0.083
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio 0.000
----------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
| MEMBER# 2 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN:
609.60 LOCATION: 609.60 |
|------------------------------------------------ -------------------
-------|
MATERIAL DATA:

Yield strength of steel: 379.21 N/mm2
Ultimate tensile strength: 430.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm)

Section Name: 170CLHS56X18
Member Length: 60.96
Gross Area(Ag): 5.46 Net Area (Ae): 4.58
z-z axis y-y axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 237.68 21.99
Moment of inertia (Ie): 236.04 21.99
Elastic modulus (Zet): 27.91 14.20
Elastic modulus (Zec): 27.63 5.43
DESIGN DATA:
z-z axis y-y axis
Tension Capacity (Pt): 0.00
Compression Capacity (Pc): 93.79
Moment Capacity (Mc): 9.19 1.81
Shear Capacity (Pc): 21.15 33.58
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD :
CLAUSE COMBINATION RATIO

BS-6.3 Compression ratio - Axial 0.037
BS-6.4 Bend-Compression ratio 0.282
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Z 0.235
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Y 0.010
124 — STAAD.Pro
BS-5.1 Biaxial Bending Ratio 0.245
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Z 0.168
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Y 0.003
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio 0.083
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio 0.000
*********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN

***********

126 — STAAD.Pro
Section 3
Canadian Codes
3A. Canadian Codes - Concrete Design Per CSA

Standard A23.3-94
STAAD can perform design of concrete beams, columns and slabs according to CSA
STANDARD A23.3-94. Given the dimensions of a section, STAAD will calculate the
required reinforcement necessary to resist the various input loads.

l For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular, Square & Tee)

l For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
l For Slabs 4-noded Plate Elements

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.

11 14 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and
provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300mm diameter

effect in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is
equivalent to the procedure presented in CSA STANDARD A23.3-94 Clause 10.13.
STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections,
when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. After solving for the joint
displacements of the structure, the program calculates the additional moments
induced in the structure due to the P-Delta effect. Therefore, by performing a
PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will require no user
modification before beginning member design.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the
slenderness effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors (see the
parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1). Here the user approximates the additional
moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before
beginning member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be
considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
It should be noted that STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete
design. All the proper factored loads must be provided by the user before the
ANALYSIS specification.
While performing a PDELTA ANALYSIS, all load cases must be defined as primary
load cases. If the effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be
done either by using the REPEAT LOAD command or by specifying the load
128 — STAAD.Pro
information of these individual loading cases under one single load case. Usage of
the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for PDELTA
ANALYSIS.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design
per CSA STANDARD A23.3-94. These parameters not only act as a method to input
required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual
design process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers in conventional
design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 3A.1 contains a list of
available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and
force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Table 3A.1 - Canadian Concrete Design CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 400N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC 400 N/mm2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing
steel.
FC 30 N/mm2 Specified compressive strength of
concrete.
CLT 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of
cross section.
CLB 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom of
cross section.
CLS 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the
side of the cross section.
MINMAIN Number 10 Minimum main reinforcement bar size
bar
MINSEC Number 10 Minimum secondary (stirrup)
bar reinforcement bar size.
MAXMAIN Number 55 Maximum main reinforcement bar size.
bar

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from start node
of beam. Used for shear and torsion
calculation.
EFACE 0.0 Face of Distance of face of support from end node
Support of beam. Used for shear and torsion
calculation. (Note: Both SFACE and EFACE
are input as positive numbers).
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean
spiral.
TRACK 0.0 For TRACK = 0.0, Critical Moment will not
be printed out with beam design report.
For TRACK=1.0, moments will be printed.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the column design
moments will be magnified.
considered in finding critical moments for
beam design.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value
defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of the concrete member. This value
defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
3A.6 Beam Design

beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate
critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen (start, end and
11 intermediate), unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter.
130 — STAAD.Pro
Design for Flexure
Design for flexure is performed per the rules of Chapter 10 of CSA Standard A23.3-
94. Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and
active load cases at each of the thirteen sections. Each of these sections are
designed to resist the critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of
singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the
basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per CSA Standard A23.3-94.
Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design
output (which finally will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account
other practical considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements
provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed
drawing can be prepared.
The following annotations apply to the output for Beam Design.
1. LEVEL - Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more
bar group.
2. HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the bottom of beam.
3. BAR INFOrmation - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars
and size.
4. FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the
rebar.
5. TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the
rebar.
6. ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook
(STA,END) or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end
(END) of the bar.

Design for Shear and Torsion
Design for shear and torsion is performed per the rules of Chapter 11 of CSA
Standard A23.3-94. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces
and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at the start and end sections.
The location along the member span for design is chosen as the effective depth +
SFACE at the start, and effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case which
gives rise to the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical
one. The calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will be provided.
The additional longitudinal steel area required for torsion is reported.
The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed
hoops for beams subjected to torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
3A.7 Column Design

Column design is performed per the rules of Chapters 7 & 8 of the CSA Standard
A23.3-94. Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends.
All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which
produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done
for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections,
the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may
cause slightly conservative results in some cases.
132 — STAAD.Pro
Example of Input Data for Column Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE CANADIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The commands
for specifying elements are in accordance with the relevant sections of the Technical
Reference Manual.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as
those for beams in flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this
purpose. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see the
relevant sections of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required
to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse
reinforcement. The effective depth is calculated assuming #10 bars are provided.
The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT and CLB listed in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab
design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not applicable to slab
design. The output consists only of area of steel required. Actual bar arrangement
is not calculated because an element most likely represents just a fraction of the
total slab area.

Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLB 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design Per CSA Stand-

ard CAN/CSA-S16-01
3B.1 General Comments

The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification
CAN/CSA S16-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures is now implemented. This
code supercedes the previous edition of the code CAN/CSA – S16.1-94.
134 — STAAD.Pro
strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability.
of CAN/CSA-S16-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its
underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.




Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the
Following is the description of the different types of sections available:
Welded Wide Flanges (WW shapes)
Welded wide flange shapes listed in the CSA steel tables can be designated using
the same scheme used by CSA. The following example illustrates the specification
of welded wide flange shapes.
100 TO 150 TA ST WW400X444

34 35 TA ST WW900X347
Wide Flanges (W shapes)
Designation of wide flanges in STAAD is the same as that in CSA tables. For
example,
10 TO 75 95 TO 105 TA ST W460X106
100 TO 200 TA ST W610X101
S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped
sections like S, M and HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is
identical to that listed in the CSA tables. While specifying the sections, it should be
remembered that the portion after the decimal point should be omitted. Thus,
M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8 should be specified
as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes are provided
below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79
Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)
C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example. As in S, M

and HP sections, the portion after the decimal point must be omitted in section
136 — STAAD.Pro
designations. Thus, MC250X42.4 should be designated as MC250X42.
55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30
30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified
by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back to back
double channel section C200X28 without any spacing in between should be
specified as:
100 TO 120 TA D C200X28
If a spacing of 2.5 length units is used, the specification should be as follows:
100 TO 120 TA D C200X28 SP 2.5
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the
spacing. The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200
angle with a 25mm thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following
examples illustrate angle specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the
local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-
Y’ axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles
assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y’-Y’ axis. To specify angles in
accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been
provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the
word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of
the STAAD Technical Reference manual.

Double Angles
To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for

long leg back to back) or SD (short leg back to back). For equal angles, either SD
or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using
the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section
designation.
25 35 45 TA LD L150X100X16
80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of

125X75X6 angles with a spacing of 2.5 length units.
Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T

specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 120 TA T W200X42
will describe a T section cut from a W200X42 section.
Rectangular Hollow Sections
These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the
CSA tables may be specified as follows.
55 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for
width), and TH(for thickness) specifications.
For example:
138 — STAAD.Pro
100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5
inches. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in
current length unit.
Circular Hollow Sections
Sections listed in the CSA tables may be provided as follows:
15 TO 25 TA ST PIP33X2.5
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be
specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter)
specifications. For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter
of 9.0 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be
provided in terms of current length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN

* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES
* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
140 — STAAD.Pro
FINISH

The CSA specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local
buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic
(Class 1), compact (Class 2), non compact (Class 3) or slender element (Class 4)
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and
Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). This classification is a function of the geometric
properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the
section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes
and user specified shapes. Design is performed for sections that fall into the
category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only. Class 4 sections are not designed by
STAAD.

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures
outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as
members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors,
unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program
automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate
member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for
calculating the member resistances.
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive
with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the
user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the
tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of
CAN/CSA-S16-01. Parameters FYLD, FU and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the
code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the
compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross
section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness

factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY
and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity
calculations are :
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members,
the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is
calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and
Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or
truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural
buckling and local buckling of thin legs is calculated using the rules of the
AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed., 1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian
code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The
parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional
buckling into account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-
S16-01are used for this purpose. Parameters KX and LX may be used to
provide the effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-
torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for
single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. The variable “n” in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34
for all other shapes.
5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections
with axial compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a),
13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for
13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of
computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of
the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member
length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as
being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is
computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one
tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The
equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of
resistance of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending
capacity calculations are :
142 — STAAD.Pro
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is
calculated as
For Class 1 & 2 sections, Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections, Phi*Sy*Fy
where Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Fy = Yield stress of steel
2. For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes.
The specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are
used for this purpose because the Canadian code doesn’t provide any clear
guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric
shapes such as Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in
Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31, that a rational method, such as that given in
SSRC’s Guide to Stability Design Criteria of Metal Structures, be used.
Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD 1994,
2nd ed.
Axial compression and bending
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these
equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is
accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these
equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter
(see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading
condition.
Axial tension and bending
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using
interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The
actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical
equation.
Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of
Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on

the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the
ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using
the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have failed
under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within
a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). Checks for safety
in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may
by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

Table 3B.1 - Canadian Steel Design CSA-S16-01 Parameters

Parameter
Name
KT 1.0 K value for flexural torsional
buckling.
KY 1.0 K value for general column flexural
buckling about the local Y-axis. Used
to calculate slenderness ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for general column flexural
buckling about the local Z-axis. Used
LT Member Length Length for flexural torsional
buckling.
LY Member Length Length for general column flexural
buckling about the local Y-axis. Used
LZ Member Length Length for general column flexural
buckling about the local Z-axis. Used
144 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
FU 345.0 MPa Ultimate strength of steel.
members.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length in bending
compression of the top flange for
UNB Member Length Unsupported length in bending
compression of the bottom flange
for calculating moment resistance.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check slenderness ratio
against the limits.
1.0= Suppress the slenderness ratio
check.
2.0 = Check slenderness ratio only
for column buckling, not for web
(See Section 3B.6, Shear)
CB 1.0 Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5 :
Value of Omega_2 (Cl.13.6) to be
used for calculation.
Equal to 0.0 : Calculate Omega_2
CMY 1.0 1.0 = Do not calculate Omega-1 for
local Y axis.
2.0 = Calculate Omega-1 for local Y
axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of code
CMZ 1.0 1.0 = Do not calculate Omega-1 for
local Z axis.
2.0 = Calculate Omega-1 for local Z
axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of code
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only minimum design
results.
1.0 = Report design strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full details of design.

Parameter
Name
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth
(Applicable for member selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum required depth (Applicable
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect
to the design strength.
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design for moments
at twelfth points along the beam.
DFF None(Mandatory “Deflection Length”/Maxm.
for deflection Allowable local deflection.
check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting start point for
3B.8 Code Checking

of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CAN/CSA-S16-
01 requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the
members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated
at every twelfth point along the beam. When no sections are specified and the
BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and
end forces only. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or
FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance
from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also
printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK
parameter.
Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
146 — STAAD.Pro
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4

as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will
have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally
provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member
selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.
Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4

The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CAN/CSA-S16-01
specification which governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances will be printed.
Following is a description of some of the items printed.
CR = Factored compressive resistance

TR = Factored tensile resistance
VR = Factored shear resistance
MRZ = Factored moment resistance (about z-axis)
MRY = Factored moment resistance (about y-axis)
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0.
CR1 = CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(a)
r
CR2 = CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)
r
CRZ = SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C in that Clause)
RX
CTORFLX = Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)
3B.11 Verification Problems

In the next few pages are included 3 verification examples for reference purposes.
Since the S16-01 code is similar in many respects to the previous edition of the
code (CAN/CSA S16.1-94), the solved examples of the 1994 edition of the CISC
Handbook have been used as reference material for these examples.
Verification Problem No. 1
TITLE Steel beam with uniform load, wide flange section.

TYPE Static analysis, 3D beam element.
REFERENCE: CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States
Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC
(Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5_91.
PROBLEM: Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
GIVEN: E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).

F = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M
y
Beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length 1.0 m
Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm
Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE.
Steel section is W410X54.
SOLUTION COMPARISON:
148 — STAAD.Pro
CAN/CSA-S16
Interaction Beam Beam

Ratio Resistance Deflection
(kN*m) (mm)
REFERENCE 0.88 284 21
STAAD.Pro 0.883 283.20 20.81
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Research Engineers, Intl. *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK

EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
3. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN,
CSA-S16.1-94
4. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
5. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
7. UNIT MMS KN
8. JOINT COORDINATES
9. 1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0
10. MEMBER INCIDENCES
11. 1 1 2
13. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN

14. 1 TABLE ST W410X54
16. CONSTANTS
17. E STEEL ALL
18. POISSON 0.3 ALL
20. SUPPORTS
21. 1 PINNED
22. 2 FIXED BUT MY MZ
24. UNIT METER KN
25. LOAD 1 DEAD
26. MEMBER LOAD
27. 1 UNI GY -7
29. LOAD 2 LIVE
30. MEMBER LOAD
31. 1 UNI GY -15
33. LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL
34. 1 1.25 2 1.5
36. PERFORM ANALYSIS
PROBLEM STATISTICS
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =
2/ 1/ 2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES
OF FREEDOM = 5
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-
WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.6 MB
37. LOAD LIST 2
38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS

MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
----------------------------
150 — STAAD.Pro
UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI
SYSTEM
MEMB LOAD GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO
END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS
1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471
0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824
0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120
0.0000
0.0000 -2.0812 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120
0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471
0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP = 2.08115 AT 400.00 LOAD 2
L/DISP= 384
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS
***********
40. LOAD LIST 3
41. PARAMETER
42. CODE CANADIAN
43. TRACK 2 ALL
44. UNL 1 ALL
45. FYLD 300000 ALL
46. BEAM 1 ALL
47. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-
S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION

====================================================
1 ST W410X54 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2+ 0.883 3
0.00 C 0.00 -250.00 4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01 MEMBER LENGTH
= 8.00E+02
IZ = 1.86E+04 SZ = 9.26E+02 PZ = 1.05E+03
IY = 1.02E+03 SY = 1.15E+02 PY = 1.77E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CR1 = 1.846E+03 CR2 = 2.732E+02
CRZ = 1.570E+03 CTORFLX = 2.732E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.805E+03 COMPRESSIVE
CAPACITY = 2.732E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01
MRZ = 2.832E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02
VRZ = 4.604E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 207.170 KL/RZ = 48.447 ALLOWABLE KL/R
= 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE
(M) = 1.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
152 — STAAD.Pro
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS =
0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01
48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for
members with no density.
ST W410X54 8.00 4.203
PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000
----------------
TOTAL = 4.203
************
49. FINISH
TITLE: Steel beam/column, wide flange section.

TYPE: Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
(Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example,
Page 4_106.
PROBLEM: Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.

F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Beam/Column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0
factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m
Steel section is W310X129
Beam Column
CAN/CSA- Interaction
Resistance Resistance
S16 Ratio
(kN*m) (kN)
REFERENCE 0.96 583 3800
STAAD.Pro 0.98 584 3820
****************************************************
154 — STAAD.Pro
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************

EXAMPLE PAGE 4-106
2. *
3. * COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
10. 1 1 2
11. *
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X129
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ

21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 1 MZ 300
28. *
29. PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS
PROBLEM STATISTICS
-----------------------------------
2/ 1/ 2
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES
OF FREEDOM = 5
WORDS
++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35
31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES

MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE
MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z
TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 1 1 2000.00 135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00
300.00
2 -2000.00 -135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00
200.00
156 — STAAD.Pro
**************
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. TRACK 2 ALL
36. FYLD 300000 ALL
37. LY 3.7 ALL
38. LZ 3.7 ALL
39. CHECK CODE ALL
S16-01)
******************************************
LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
====================================================
1 ST W310X129 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2C 0.980 1
2000.00 C 0.00 300.00 0.00
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.65E+02 MEMBER LENGTH =
3.70E+02
IZ = 3.08E+04 SZ = 1.94E+03 PZ = 2.16E+03
IY = 1.00E+04 SY = 6.51E+02 PY = 9.90E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.459E+03 CR2 = 3.820E+03
CRZ = 4.296E+03 CTORFLX = 3.820E+03

MRZ = 5.840E+02
VRZ = 1.505E+03
--------------------------
KL/RY = 47.477 KL/RZ = 27.094 ALLOWABLE KL/R =
200.000
(M) = 3.700
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
0.000E+00
40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
----------------
TOTAL = 4.694
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
************
42. FINISH
158 — STAAD.Pro
TITLE: Steel beam/column, wide flange section.

TYPE: Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
(Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example,
Page 4_108.
PROBLEM: Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.

F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Beam/Column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, Lu = 3.7 m
factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m in the strong axis and 100 kN*m at each end in the weak
axis.
Steel section is W310X143.

Beam Resistance
Interaction Column Resistance
(kN*m)
CAN/CSA-S16 Ratio (kN)
weak strong
REFERENCE 0.998 300 653 4200

STAAD.Pro 1.00 299 650 4222
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************

EXAMPLE PAGE 4-108
2. *
3. * ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING )
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
10. 1 1 2
11. *
160 — STAAD.Pro
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X143
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 2 MX 100
28. 1 MZ 300
29. 1 MX 100
30. *
PROBLEM STATISTICS
-----------------------------------
2/ 1/ 2
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF
FREEDOM = 6
WORDS
33. PARAMETER

34. CODE CANADIAN
35. CMY 2 ALL
36. CMZ 2 ALL
37. CB 1 ALL
38. TRACK 2 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL
40. CHECK CODE ALL
S16-01)
******************************************
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
====================================================
* 1 ST W310X143 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
FAIL CSA-13.8.2A 1.000 1
2000.00 C -100.00 300.00 0.00
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.82E+02 MEMBER LENGTH
= 3.70E+02
IZ = 3.47E+04 SZ = 2.15E+03 PZ = 2.41E+03
IY = 1.12E+04 SY = 7.28E+02 PY = 1.11E+03
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.912E+03 CR2 = 4.222E+03
CRZ = 4.737E+03 CTORFLX = 4.222E+03
162 — STAAD.Pro
MRZ = 6.504E+02
VRZ = 1.678E+03
--------------------------
KL/RY = 47.077 KL/RZ = 26.802 ALLOWABLE KL/R =
200.000
(M) = 3.700
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
5.405E+01
41. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL

STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
ST W310X143 3.70 5.171
----------------
TOTAL = 5.171
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X143 3.70 5.171
************
42. FINISH

3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold
Formed Steel Code
3C.1 General
Provisions of CSA S136-94, including revisions dated May, 1995, have been
implemented. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in
tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. For laterally
supported members in bending, the Initiation of Yielding method has been used.
Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option.
3C.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the
"Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition.
l Channel with Lips

l Angle with Lips
l Angle without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Z without Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical
file.
3C.3 Design Procedure

164 — STAAD.Pro
1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load
effects, in accordance with CSA 136. Code checking is carried out for
locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM
parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a
RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may
choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK
parameter.
2. Member Selection
database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check
and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum
acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate
all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if
a suitable replacement is found, present design results for that section. If no
section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found,
the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the
code check or not.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clauses
5.6.2.1 through 3 and 5.6.2.6 through 8. Cross-sectional properties and overall
slenderness of members are checked for compliance with
l Clause 5.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in

Compression
l Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
l Clause 5.5, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the
Standard as follows:
a. Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as
applicable.
b. Members in tension - Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses
6.3.1 and 6.3.2.
c. Members in bending and shear
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:
a. 6.4.1 General,

b. 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress
based on Initiation of Yielding,
c. 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
d. 6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional
limitations,
e. 6.4.5 Shear in Webs,
f. 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
a. Members in compression
a. 6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2 (a) and (d), and 6.6.1.3 General,
b. 6.6.2 Sections Not Subject to Torsional-Flexural Buckling,
c. 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections,
d. 6.6.4 Point-Symmetric Sections,
e. 6.6.5 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
b. Members in compression and bending
Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and Doubly Symmetric
Sections. Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided by the
user.
The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design
variables and selection of design options.
166 — STAAD.Pro
Table 3C.3-1 Canadian Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to 1.0
(default), the adequacy of the member
is determined by checking a total of 13
equally spaced locations along the
length of the member. If the BEAM
value is 0.0, the 13 location check is
not conducted, and instead, checking
is done only at the locations specified
by the SECTION command (See
STAAD manual for details). If neither
the BEAM parameter nor any SECTION
command is specified, STAAD will
terminate the run and ask the user to
provide one of those 2 commands.
This rule is not enforced for TRUSS
members.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform
bending Wz. See CSA 136, 6.7.2.
Used for Combined axial load and
bending design. Values range from
0.4 to 1.0.
CMY 0.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform
bending Wy. See CSA 136, 6.7.2.
Used for Combined axial load and
bending design. Values range from
0.4 to 1.0.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CWY 0 Specifies whether the cold work of
forming strengthening effect should
be included in resistance computation.
See CSA 136, 5.2.
Values: 0 – effect should not be
included
1 – effect should be included
DMAX 1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the
section during member selection. This
value must be provided in the current
units.
DMIN 0.0 Minimum depth required for the
units.
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural
buckling restraint is provided or is not
necessary for the member. See CSA
136, 6.6.2
Values:
0 – Section subject to torsional
flexural buckling and restraint not
provided
1 – restraint provided or unnecessary
FU 450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in
current units.
FYLD 350 MPa Yield strength of steel in current units.
168 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional
buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-
less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a
column completely prevented from
torsional buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to
compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for
compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall
column buckling about the local Y-
axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a
value. It is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the capacity in
axial compression.
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall
column buckling in the local Z-axis. It
is a fraction and is unit-less. Values
can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling)
to any user specified large value. It is
used to compute the KL/R ratio for
compression.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
LT Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is
length input in the current units of length.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a
torsional buckling) to any user
compression.
LY Member Effective length for overall column
length buckling in the local Y-axis. It is input
in the current units of length. Values
compression.
LZ Member Effective length for overall column
length buckling in the local Z-axis. It is input
in the current units of length. Values
compression.
members, See CSA 136, 6.3.1.
170 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
STIFF Member Spacing in the longitudinal direction of
length shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs.
It is input in the current units of
length. See section CSA 136, 6.4.5
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control the
level of detail in which the design
output is reported in the output file.
The allowable values are:
status.
1 - Prints the design summary in
addition to that printed by TRACK 1
2 - Prints member and material
properties in addition to that printed
by TRACK 2.
TSA 1 Specifies whether bearing and
intermediate transverse stiffeners
satisfy the requirements of CSA 136,
6.5. If true, the program uses the
more liberal set of interaction
equations in 6.4.6.
Values:
0 – stiffeners do not comply with 6.5
1 – stiffeners comply with 6.5

3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Stand-
ard CAN/CSA-086-01
3D.1 General Comments
The Canadian Wood Design facility in STAAD is based on CSA086-01. A timber
section library consisting of Sawn and Glulam timber is available for member
property specification.
The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the
limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in
serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that
a uniform reliability is achieved for the entire structure under various loading
conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, the code checking portion of the program checks
whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the
governing criteria.
of CSA086-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its
Analysis Methodology
Member Property Specifications
Built-in Steel Section Library
Member Resistances
Design Parameters
Code Checking
Member Selection
Tabulated Results of Timber Design
Verification Problems
172 — STAAD.Pro
3D.2 Analysis Methodology
3D.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, for Sawn timber the timber section library
available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of
commands used to assign properties from the built-in timber table.
For Glulam timber, member properties can be specified using the YD(depth) and
ZD(width) specifications and selecting Combination and Species specifications from
the built-in table. The assignment is done with the help of the PRISMATIC option
which is explained in STAAD’s Technical Reference Manual.
3D.4 Built-in Timber Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in timber tables are to
database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design.
Following are the description of the different types of species combination
available:
Douglas Fir-Larch
The following example illustrates the specification of Douglas Fir-Larch species

combination.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST DFL_SelStr_2X2_BM
Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.

100 TO 150 TABLE ST Hem-Fir_SelStr_2X10_BM
Northern Species
Designation of Northern species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST Northern_SelStr_3X12_BM
Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_3X8_BM
Glu Laminated timber
Designation of Glu-lam timber in STAAD involves defining the material, specifying

the dimensions, and associating the material with the member through the
CONSTANTS command.
UNIT CM KN
ISOTROPIC GLT_D.Fir-L-24f-EX
E 51611.7
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 2.5e-005
ALPHA 1.2e-011
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN
1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.Fir-L-24f-EX MEMB 1
174 — STAAD.Pro
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER

UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0;
5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5;
9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8;
UNIT FEET POUND
ISOTROPIC SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
E 1224
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY tim can
1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 1 TO 4 9 TO 11
MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 5 TO 8 12 13
FINISH

3D.5 Member Resistance
outlined in section 5 (for sawn lumber) and 6 (for Glulam) of CSA086-01.
These depend on several adjustment factors as follows:
1. KD = Load duration factor (Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086-01, Table 4.3.2.2)

2. KH = System factor (Clause 5.4.4 and 6.4.3 and Table 5.4.4 -CSA086-01)
3. K_T = Treatment factor (Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01)
4. KSB = Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table
5.4.2 and 6.4.2 -CSA086-01)
5. KSV = Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2
and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
6. KSC = Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the
grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
7. K_SCP = Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular
to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
8. KSE = Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table
5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
9. KST = Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain
(Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
10. KZB = Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -
CSA086-01)
11. KZV = size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-
01)
12. KZT = size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and
Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
13. KZCP = size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause
5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
14. K_ZC = size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5
and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
15. CHIX = Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01)
16. CV = shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01)
17. KN = Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01)
176 — STAAD.Pro
The user has to give all these factors as input according to the classification of
timber and stress grade.
Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member
resistances.
Axial Tension
i. For Sawn timber

The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on one limit
state. The limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum
effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through
the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension
capacity of a member based on this limit state per Clause 5.5.9 of CSA086-
01.
ii. For Glulam timber
The design of glulam tension members differs from sawn timber since CSA 086-01
assigns different specified strength for gross and net section. The specified strength
at net section is slightly higher than the strength of the gross section. Therefore,
Glulam tension members are designed based on two limit states. The first one is the
limit state of yielding in the gross section. The second limit state involves fracture at
the section with the minimum effective net area. The net-section area may be
specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1).
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states
per Clause.6.5.11 of CSA086-01.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause.5.5.6 and

Clause.6.5.8.4 of CSA086-01. The equations presented in this section of the code
assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of
the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the
slenderness factor (Kc). The effective length for the calculation of compression
and LZ (see Table 3B.1).
Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of
CSA086-01 and for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of
CSA086-01. The allowable stress in bending is multiplied by Lateral stability factor,

KL to take in account whether lateral support is provided at points of bearing to
prevent lateral displacement and rotation
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uni-axial or
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause
5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the
summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable
value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is
considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial tension and uniaxial or biaxial
bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and
6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of
the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have
FAILed under the loading condition.
Shear
Clause 5.5.5 and 6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear
force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated.
If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value
provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to
have failed under shear.
3D.6 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table below may be used to control the design
the program and thus allows the engineer to control the design process to suit an
178 — STAAD.Pro
Table 3D.1 - Canadian Timber Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Nsf 1.0 Net section factor for tension
members
KX 1.0 K value for flexural torsional buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis, usually minor
axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis, usually major
axis
LX Member Length for flexural torsional buckling
length
LY Member Length in local Y axis for slenderness
length value KL/r
LZ Member Length in local Z axis for slenderness
length value KL/r
KD 1.0 Load Duration Factor [Clause.4.3.2,
Table 4.3.2]
KH 1.0 System Factor [Clause 5.4.4/6.4.3,
Table 5.4.4]
K_T 1.0 Treatment Factor [Clause
5.4.3/6.4.4]
KSB 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Bending
at Extreme Fibre
Applicable for bending at extreme
fibre [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSV 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Shear,
Applicable for longitudinal shear
[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSC 1.0 Service Condition Factor for
Compression,
Applicable for compression parallel
to grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KSE 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Modulus
of Elasticity,
Applicable for modulus of elasticity
[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KST 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to
grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KZB 1.0 Size Factor for Bending,
Applicable for bending [Clause.5.4.5
and Table 5.4.5]
KZV 1.0 Size Factor for Shear [Clause 5.4.5
and Table 5.4.5]
KZT 1.0 Size Factor for Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to
grain
[Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZCP 1.0 Size Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression
perpendicular to grain [Clause .5.4.5
and Table 5.4.5]
K_ZC 1.0 Size Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression parallel
to grain [Clause 5.4.5 and Table
5.4.5]
CV 1.0 Shear Load Coefficient [Table
6.5.7.4A]
KN 1.0 Notch Factor [Clause 5.4.7.2.2]
K_SCP 1.0 Service Condition Factor for
Compression,
Applicable for compression
perpendicular to grain [Clause 5.4.2
and Table 6.4.2]
CHIX 1.0 Curvature Factor for Compression
[Clause 6.5.6.5.2]
180 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
RATIO 1.0 Permissible Ratio of Actual to
Allowable Value
3D.7 Code Checking

of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CSA086-01
requirements.
members. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the
start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.

PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CAN
KD 0.99 ALL
KH 0.99 ALL
K_T 0.99 ALL
KSB 0.99 ALL
KSV 0.99 ALL
KSC 0.99 ALL
KSE 0.99 ALL
KST 0.99 ALL
KZB 0.99 ALL
KZV 0.99 ALL
KZT 0.99 ALL
KZCP 0.99 ALL
K_ZC 0.99 ALL
CV 0.99 ALL
KN 0.99 ALL
K_SCP 0.99 ALL
CHIX 0.99 ALL
RATIO 0.99 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
3D.8 Member Selection

Member selection based CSA086-2001 is not available.
3D.9 Tabulated Results of Timber Design

The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CSA086-01 specification,
which governed the design.
Pu = Actual Load in Compression

Tu = Actual Load in Tension
182 — STAAD.Pro
Muy = Ultimate moment in y direction
Muz = Ultimate moment in z direction
V = Ultimate shear force
SLENDERNESS_Y = Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction
SLENDERNESS_Z = Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction
PY = Factored Compressive capacity in y direction
PZ = Factored Compressive capacity in z direction
T = Factored tensile capacity
MY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction
V = Factored shear resistance
SLENDERNESS = Allowable slenderness ratio
3D.10 Verification Problems

Verification Problem: 1
Objective: - To determine the Canadian Glulam section column in axial

compression. Column is effectively pinned at both ends and braced at mid-height in
all direction..
Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01)
Reference: - Example 4, page 116, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given: - Length = 9000mm
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength
(kN)
Theory 295
STAAD 293.739
Difference -0.427 %
Input: -
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR GLULAM DESIGN INPUT FILE:

GLULAMCOLUMN.STD
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 10-JUN-05
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 9 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
UNIT INCHES KIP
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
E 9.7
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 1.44676e-005
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT FEET POUND
1 PRIS YD 0.748031 ZD 0.574147
UNIT INCHES KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E MEMB 1
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -214
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CANADIAN
184 — STAAD.Pro
KY 0.5 ALL
KZ 0.5 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Relevant portion of Output:-

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)
***********************
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================-
======================
1 175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.728 1
214.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm |
||
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
||
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) |
| Pu = 214.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 19.737 |
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 25.714 |

| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) |
| PY = 413.943 |
| PZ = 293.793 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
37. FINISH
Objective: - To determine the bending capacity of a Canadian Glulam section

single span floor beam. The compression edge assumed fully supported.
Given: - Length =7500mm, Beam Spacing = 5000mm, Standard load condition,
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength Design
in bending (kN- Strength in
m) shear (kN)
Theory 208 101
STAAD 208.323 100.776
Difference 0.155% -0.221 %
Input: -

glulamBEAM.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
186 — STAAD.Pro
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 7.5 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
UNIT INCHES KIP
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
E 9.7
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 1.44676E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
ISOTROPIC GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E
E 12.4
POISSON 0.15
ALPHA 5.5E-006
ISOTROPIC CONCRETE
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
DAMP 0.05
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT FEET POUND
1 PRIS YD 2.11942 ZD 0.426508
UNIT INCHES KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E MEMB 1
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1

MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -27.1
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
================================================-
=======================
1 130.00X646.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5. 1.008 1
0.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 7500.000 LEY = 7500.000 LUZ = 7500.000 LUY = 7500.000mm |
||
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
||
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
188 — STAAD.Pro
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 101.625 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 41.923 |
| MZ = 208.323 |
| V = 100.776 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
46. FINISH
Objective: - To determine the capacity of a Canadian Glulam section in axial

tension.
Given: - Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength
in Tension
(kN)
Theory 257
STAAD 256.636
Difference -0.141 %
Input: -

glulamTENSION.STD

END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 9 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
UNIT INCHES KIP
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E
E 10.7
POISSON 0.15
ALPHA 5.5E-006
ISOTROPIC CONCRETE
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
DAMP 0.05
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT FEET POUND
1 PRIS YD 0.872702 ZD 0.262467
UNIT INCHES KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E MEMB 1
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
190 — STAAD.Pro
JOINT LOAD
2 FY 250
PARAMETER
KY 0.5 ALL
KZ 0.5 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================-
======================
1 80.00X266.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.974 1
250.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm |
||
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
||
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = -250.000 |

| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 256.636 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Objective: - To determine the Canadian Sawn section column in axial

compression. Column is effectively pinned at both ends.
Given: - Unbraced Length = 5000mm
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength
(kN)
Theory 130
STAAD 129.223
Difference -0.597 %
Input: -

INPUT FILE: sawn_ lumber_ COLUMN.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT FEET POUND
192 — STAAD.Pro
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 16.4042 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
E 1.368E+006
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT METER KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL DFL_NO2_8X8_POST MEMB 1
UNIT FEET POUND
1 TABLE ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 DEAD+LIVE LOAD
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -114
PARAMETER
KSC 0.91 ALL
K_ZC 1.05 ALL
CHECK CODE
FINISH


***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
================================================-
=======================
1 ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.882 1
114.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm |
||
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
||
| Pu = 114.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 129.223 |
| PZ = 129.223 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
194 — STAAD.Pro
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Objective: - To determine the bending capacity of a Canadian sawn section single

span floor beam.
Given: - Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition,
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength Design
in bending (kN- Strength in
m) shear (kN)
Theory 79.8 46.1
STAAD 79.732 46.170
Difference -0.085% No
Input: -
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER:

SAWN_LUMBER_BEAM.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 3 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 2;
UNIT FEET POUND
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
E 1.728e+006

POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT METER KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL DFL_NO1_10X16_BM MEMB 1 2
UNIT FEET POUND
1 2 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
SUPPORTS
1 2 FIXED
UNIT METER KN
MEMBER LOAD
1 2 UNI GY -16.4
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
KD 1.0 ALL
K_T 1.0 ALL
KSB 1.0 ALL
KZB 0.90 ALL
KZV 0.90 ALL
K_ZC 1.05 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

FX MY MZ LOCATION
196 — STAAD.Pro
=================================================-
======================
2 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5.6 1.066 1
0.00 T 0.00 49.20 3.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 3000.000 LEY = 3000.000 LUZ = 3000.000 LUY = 3000.000mm |
||
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
||
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 49.200 |
| V = -49.200 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 79.800 |
| MZ = 79.732 |
| V = 46.170 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Objective: - To determine the capacity of a Canadian Sawn section in axial

tension.
Given: - Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength
in Tension
(kN)
Theory 185
STAAD 184.338
Difference -0.357 %
Input: -

SAWN_LUMBER_TENSION.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 16.4042 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
E 1.728e+006
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
198 — STAAD.Pro
UNIT METER KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL DFL_NO1_6X8_BM MEMB 1
UNIT FEET POUND
1 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FY 144
PARAMETER
KH 1.1 ALL
KSC 0.91 ALL
K_ZC 1.05 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================-
======================
1 ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.781 1
144.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm |
||
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.100 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
||
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = -144.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 184.338 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
200 — STAAD.Pro
Section 4
Chinese Codes
4A. Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-

2002
STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design per GB50010-2002. It
can calculate the reinforcement needed for sections assigned through the
PRISMATIC attribute. The concrete design calculations are based on the limit state
method of GB50010-2002.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, Tee and Trapezoidal)
For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are
rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members,
with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350
mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape
with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange
depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform
design as per GB50010-2002. Default parameter values have been selected such
that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements.
These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table
9A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their
default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and
Newton before performing the concrete design. Please note as per GB50010-
2002, STAAD supports Characteristic Values of Concrete Strength and Design
Value of Strength of Steel Bar only as per Table 4.1.4 and Table 4.2.3-1
respectively.
202 — STAAD.Pro
Section 4 Chinese Codes
Table 4A.1 - Chinese Concrete Design GB50010-2002 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 210 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
N/mm2
FYSEC 210 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing
N/mm2 steel.
FC 15 Concrete Yield Stress.
N/mm2
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size.
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size.
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar
size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar
size.
BRACING 0.0 BEAM DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial
force will be taken into account for
beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the column is
unbraced about major axis.
unbraced about minor axis.
unbraced about both axis.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
RFACE 4.0 A value of 4.0 means longitudinal
reinforcement in column is arranged
equally along 4 faces.
A value of 2.0 invokes 2 faced
distribution about major axis.
distribution about minor axis.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value
defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design. This
value defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
204 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
MIDDLE and END.
For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments are
printed in addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
TRACK 1.0 output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
With TRACK = 1.0, column interaction

analysis results are printed in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output.
With TRACK = 2.0, a schematic
interaction diagram and intermediate
interaction values are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0 output.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean
spiral reinforcement.
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual
length of column about major axis.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual
length of column about minor axis.

4A.5 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial
force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam
loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of
the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g.
Design for Flexure
active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections
are designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where
ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly
reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only
as singly reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all
flanged sections are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging
moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural
design of beams are performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of
the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed
reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the
pass taking into account of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on
the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provision of
flexural reinforcements is made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the reinforcement detailing as per GB50010-2002 Although exact
consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD
at 11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can be prepared.
Design for Shear
moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for
the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated
torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the
shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by
STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance
shear forces acting on these sections.
206 — STAAD.Pro
Beam Design Output

The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement
provided at 5 equally spaced (0,.25,.5,.75 and 1.) sections along the length of the
beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are
given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the default
output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:
=================================================-
===========================
B E A M N O. 12 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
C20 HRB400 (Main) HRB400 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 4000.0 mm SIZE: 250.0 mm X 350.0 mm COVER: 30.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION |FLEXTURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 29.64 1.23 4
| 0.00 -25.68 1.23 4 |
400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 27.97 1.23 4
| 0.00 -16.05 1.23 4 |
800.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 25.12 1.23 4
| 0.00 -7.17 1.23 4 |
1200.0 | 0.00 0.97 0.49 5 | 21.11 1.23 4
| 0.00 -0.14 1.32 6 |
1600.0 | 0.00 6.77 1.23 4 | 15.93 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2000.0 | 0.00 11.06 1.23 4 | 9.59 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2400.0 | 0.00 13.04 1.23 4 | 2.08 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2800.0 | 0.00 12.45 1.23 4 | -5.43 1.23 4

| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3200.0 | 0.00 9.55 1.23 4 | -11.77 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3600.0 | 0.00 4.73 1.23 4 | -16.95 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.48 1.23 4
| 0.00 -17.36 1.23 4 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION 0.0 mm 1000.0 mm 2000.0 mm 3000.0 mm 4000.0 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 259.04 161.29 0.00 0.00 176.31
REINF. (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm)
BOTTOM 0.00 160.78 160.78 160.78 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF PROVIDED REINF. AREA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 4-10Ø 3-10Ø 2-10Ø 2-10Ø 3-10Ø
REINF. 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s)
BOTTOM 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø
SHEAR 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø
REINF. @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100
mm c/c
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
========================================================
208 — STAAD.Pro
4A.6 Column Design

load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum
reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square,
rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections under
biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for
sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the
reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 4A.1). Depending
upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients
specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of
the column design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by GB50010-2002 have been taken care of in the
column design of STAAD.
Column Design Output
Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by
STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output
contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients,
additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to obtain the
details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI units. An
example of a long column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
=================================================-
===========================
C O L U M N No. 1 DESIGN RESULTS
C20 HRB400 (Main) HRB400 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 250.0 mm dia. COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 BRACED LONG COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)
-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : 62.0
About Z About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS : 2.21 32.29
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 1.24 1.24
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 12.00 12.00

MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : 1.12 1.12
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : 1.00 1.00
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : 1.12 1.12
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 3.32 33.40
REQD. STEEL AREA : 1822.71 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 17 - 12 dia. (3.92%, 1922.65 Sq.mm.)
(Equally distributed)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 190 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET)
--------------------------
Puz : 992.70 Muz1 : 36.87 Muy1 : 36.87
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00
========================================================
4B. Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 50017-

2003
4B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation in
STAAD of the National Standard of the People’s Republic of China specifications
for Design of Steel Structures (GB50017-2003). The design philosophy and
procedural logistics are based on the principles of limit state design method.
Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. The
following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the
capacities. The most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will
take care of the detailing requirements like flange buckling, web crippling etc.
Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel
design:
1. Specify the geometry and factored loads. Perform the analysis.

2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
210 — STAAD.Pro
3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.

Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis, P-Delta
analysis or Non-linear analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be
performed and the results combined with static analysis results.

STAAD Program Technical Reference manual.
4B.4 Built-in Chinese Steel Section Library

for these members. An example of the member property specification in an input
file is provided at the end of this section.
I Shapes
I shaped sections are designated in the following way.
1 TO 5 15 16 TABLE ST I22B
H Shapes
H shaped sections are designated in the following way.

6 TO 8 TABLE ST HW250X250
T Shapes
T shaped sections are designated in the following way.
24 25 33 to 36 TABLE ST TM244X300
Channels
Channels are specified in the following way.
29 30 TABLE ST CH25A
Double Channels
11 TABLE D CH22B
17 TABLE D CH40C SP 0.15

CH22B with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel CH40C with a
spacing of 0.15 length units between the channels.
Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle
19 TABLE ST L100X100X7
27 TABLE RA L40X25X3
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 40mm and 25mm and a
leg thickness of 3 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis
212 — STAAD.Pro
corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to
the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
Double Angles
22 TABLE LD L56X36X3
32 TABLE SD L45X28X4
20 TABLE LD L56X36X3 SP 0.15
28 TABLE SD L56X36X4 SP 0.15
Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube
is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is
available in the steel table. In these examples, member 12 consist of a 10X6X0.3 cm
size tube section,
12 TABLE ST TUB100603.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
13 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.15 WT 0.8 DT 0.6
is a tube that has a height of 0.6 length units, width of 0.6 length units, and a wall
thickness of 0.15 length units.
Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe is
as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is available
in the steel table.
21 31 TABLE ST PIP203X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE
followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
9 10 14 18 23 26 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.6 ID 0.55

specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 0.6 length units and inside diameter of
.55 length units.
Sample File Containing Chinese Shapes
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 04-Aug-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0; 3 9 0 0; 4 0 0 4; 5 4 0 4; 6 0 0 8; 7 4 0 8; 8 9
0 8;
9 0 3.5 0; 10 4 3.5 0; 11 9 3.5 0; 12 0 3.5 4; 13 4 3.5 4; 14 0
3.5 8;
15 4 3.5 8; 16 9 3.5 8; 17 0 7 0; 18 4 7 0; 19 9 7 0; 20 0 7 4;
21 4 7 4; 22 0 7 8; 23 4 7 8; 24 9 7 8;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 9; 2 2 10; 3 3 11; 4 4 12; 5 5 13; 6 6 14; 7 7 15; 8 8 16;
9 9 17;
10 10 18; 11 11 19; 12 12 20; 13 13 21; 14 14 22; 15 15 23;
16 16 24;
17 9 10; 18 10 11; 19 12 13; 20 14 15; 21 15 16; 22 17 18;
23 18 19;
24 20 21; 25 22 23; 26 23 24; 27 9 12; 28 12 14; 29 10 13;
30 13 15;
31 11 16; 32 17 20; 33 20 22; 34 18 21; 35 21 23; 36 19 24;
MEMBER PROPERTY CHINESE
*I SHAPES
1 TO 5 15 16 TABLE ST I22B
*H SHAPES
6 TO 8 TABLE ST HW250X250
*T SHAPES
24 25 33 to 36 TABLE ST TM244X300
*CHANNELS
214 — STAAD.Pro
29 30 TABLE ST CH25A
*DOUBLE CHANNELS
11 TABLE D CH22B
17 TABLE D CH40C SP 0.15
*ANGLES
19 TABLE ST L100X100X7
*DOUBLE ANGLES
27 TABLE RA L40X25X3
22 TABLE LD L56X36X3
32 TABLE SD L45X28X4
20 TABLE LD L56X36X3 SP 0.15
28 TABLE SD L56X36X4 SP 0.15
*TUBES
12 TABLE ST TUB100603.0
13 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.15 WT 0.8 DT 0.6
*PIPES
21 31 TABLE ST PIP203X6.5
9 10 14 18 23 26 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.6 ID 0.55
FINISH

The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member
under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress,
allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross
sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and
so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such
capacities.
Allowable stress for Axial Tension
basis of allowable tensile stresses provided in Table 3.4.1-1 of the code. STAAD
calculates the tension capacity of a given member per this allowable stress value

and a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but
may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 1) and proceeds with
member selection or code checking.
Allowable stress for Axial Compression
The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to Table
3.4.1-1. Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-
section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying
parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. The provisions of Section 5 are used to
check the adequacy of sections in compression.
Allowable stress for Bending and Shear
Sections subjected to bending moments and shear forces are to be designed
according to the provisions of section 4. The permissible bending compressive and
tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as outstanding legs and thickness
of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to
member length) etc. Shear capacities are calculated according to Table 3.4.1-1 and
Section 4 and are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a
value of 1.0 or 2.0 for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and
shear capacities.
Allowable stress for Combined Loading
For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear),
applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member
for all modeled loading situations. The procedure of Section 5 is implemented for
combined axial load and bending.
4B.6 Combined Loading

for all modeled loading situations. The procedure of Section 5 is implemented for
combined axial load and bending.

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of
parameters mentioned in Table 4B.1 of this chapter. These parameters
communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program.
216 — STAAD.Pro
requirements of an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be

changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Table 4B.1 - Chinese Steel Design GBJ 50017-2003 Parameters

Parameter Default Code Ref-
Definition Remarks
Name Value erence
Length in local Y
Default is
axis for
Ly 0 - selected
slenderness value
beam's length
KL/r
Length in local Z
Default is
axis for
Lz 0 - selected
slenderness value
beam's length
KL/r
Maximum
Dmax 100 cm - -
allowable depth
Minimum required
Dmin 0 cm - -
depth
K value in local Y-
Ky 1 axis, usually - -
minor axis
K value in local Z-
Kz 1 axis, usually - -
major axis
Net section factor
Nsf 1 for tension - -
members
0 = Check for
Flag for slenderness.
Main - controlling - 1 = Do not
slenderness check check for
slenderness

Definition Remarks
Name Value erence
0 = Suppress
critical
member
stress.
1 = Print all
Track 0 Track parameter - critical
member
stress.
2 = Print
expanded
output.
Permissible ratio
Ratio 1 of actual to - -
allowable stress
0 = Perform
design at
ends and
those
locations
specified in
the section
command.
Beam 1 Beam parameter - 1 = Perform
design at
ends and
1/12th
section
locations
along
member
length.
218 — STAAD.Pro

Definition Remarks
Name Value erence
The
Following
values
represent the
various
Clause grades of
Grade 1 Grade of steel steel.
3.4.1
Q235 - 1
Q345 - 2
Q390 - 3
Q420 - 4
Allowable KL/r
Compression 150 value in - -
compression
Allowable KL/r
Tension 300 - -
value in tension
Plasticity
Table -
Pfy 1.2 adaptation factor -
5.2.1
Y direction
Plasticity
Table -
Pfz 1.05 adaptation factor -
5.2.1
Z direction

Definition Remarks
Name Value erence
Stability
factor for
axial
compression
members
shall be
selected from
appendix –C
Stability factor for
Sfy 1 Appendix-C based on its
Y direction
slenderness
ratio, yield
strength,
classification
of the section
in Table
5.1.2-1 and
Table 5.1.2-2
Stability
factor for
axial
compression
members
shall be
selected from
appendix –C
Stability factor for
Sfz 1 Appendix-C based on its
Z direction
slenderness
ratio, yield
strength,
classification
of the section
in Table
5.1.2-1 and
Table 5.1.2-2
Overall Stability
SBY 1 factor for Y Appendix-B -
direction
220 — STAAD.Pro

Definition Remarks
Name Value erence
Overall Stability
SBZ 0 factor for Z Appendix-B -
direction
4B.8 Code Checking

of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked per the GB50017-2003
requirements.
at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major
axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero
(default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking
output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.

provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Sample Input data for Steel Design

UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE CHINESE
NSF 0.85 ALL
GRADE 3.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE AL

222 — STAAD.Pro
Section 5
European Codes
5A. European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode

EC2
STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of concrete
structures. In general, all the available codes, including EC2, follow the same
procedure for the design of the concrete members.
The main steps in performing a design operation are:
1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process.

2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Perform the design for the member as appropriate.
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on
the design requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with

the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members considered
in the design operation.
5A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2)

Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, Part 1, General rules and rules for
buildings, provides design rules applicable to plain, reinforced or prestressed
concrete used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the limit
state philosophy common to modern standards.
The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is

reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of factors to
both the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides
guidelines on the global method of analysis to be used for calculating internal
member forces and moments. STAAD provides a number of methods for analysis,
allowing Geometric Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be considered.
5A.3 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National
Application Documents to be used with EC2. These documents provide alternative
factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC2.
The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in EC2 and has not been modified by any National Application
Documents.
5A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors

Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strengths, as
given in table 2.3 of EC2, by the material partial safety factors g for concrete and
c
g for reinforcements. The magnitude in STAAD is 1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for
s
reinforcements.
Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by
user's numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity E = 21.71 KN/mm2

Shear Modulus G = E / 2 (1 + v)
Poisson's Ratio v = 0.25
Unit weight r = 23.56 KN/m3
224 — STAAD.Pro
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on g , the partial safety factor for the
F
action under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing
applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
5A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the
ends of the member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being
designed that load case is ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message
given to that affect.
All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are
assumed symmetrically arranged in the cross section.
The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been
considered is then reported as the critical required area of reinforcement.
Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due
allowance for the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
Please note that sway type structures are not directly covered in the current
implementation of EC2. This effect, however, can be catered for by the P-DELTA
analysis option.
5A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load
cases are scanned to create appropriate envelopes for the design process.
Maximum torsional moment is also identified and incorporated in the design.
Design for flexure
Reinforcement for both positive and negative moments is calculated on the basis of
the section properties provided by the user. If the required reinforcement exceeds
the maximum allowable then the section size is inadequate and a massage to that
effect is given in the output. Parabolic-rectangular stress distribution for the
concrete section is adopted and as moment redistribution is not available in STAAD
analysis, the limit for N.A to depth ratio is set according to clause 2.5.3.4.2 (5) of
the code.
If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the
above limits. It is important to know that beams are designed for the flexural
moment MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the design at all.
Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method mentioned in clause
4.3.2.4.3 where it is assumed the notional strut inclination is constant. Depending

on the shear distribution within the member it may be possible that nominal shear
reinforcement will be sufficient to cater for the design shear forces. If this is not
the case an attempt is made to identify regions where nominal reinforcement is
insufficient and appropriate reinforcement is then calculated to cover the excess
design shear force.
The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the concrete is also
checked and if exceeded, a message to revise the section size is given in the output
file.
Design for Torsion
Torsional moments arising as a result of equilibrium requirements need to be
designed for at the ultimate limit state. Reinforcement for torsional moments
consists of stirrups combined with longitudinal bars. The combined magnitude of
shear stress arising from shear forces and torsional moments are checked in order
to establish whether the section size is adequate. If section size is inadequate a
massage is given in the output file, otherwise, full design is carried out and both
shear links and longitudinal bars required are calculated and, where necessary,
links are combined with the shear force links and printed in a tabulated manner in
the output file.
5A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the
model of the structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for
flexure except that shear forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision
of shear reinforcements. In cases where this may not be the case users must
ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the slab design refers
to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the local x direction of the
element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction
of the element. Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which
relates to the element's 'TOP' and 'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of
the element. This may not coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if
desired, users must ensure this through the numbering scheme of the elements
(see figure 1.13 in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual). The design of the slab
considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar
being the layer closest to the slab exterior faces.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They
are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular
structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change
226 — STAAD.Pro
some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent
and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active "unit"
specification. Table 5A.1 lists all the relevant EC2 parameters together with
description and default values.
Table 5A.1 - Concrete Design EC2 Parameters

Parameter
Name
FYMAIN *460 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main
reinforcement (For slabs, it is for
reinforcement in both directions)
FYSEC *460N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary
reinforcement. Applicable to
shear bars in beams
FC * 30N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube
strength
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar
size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10
12 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a.
Applicable to shear reinforcement
in beams
CLEAR * 20mm Clearance of reinforcement
measured from concrete surface
to closest bar perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement
bar size Acceptable bars are per
MINMAIN above.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of
beam. (Only applicable for shear -
use MEMBER OFFSET for bending
)
EFACE *0.0 Face of support location at end of
beam. (NOTE: Both SFACE &
EFACE must be positive
numbers.)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be

Parameter
Name
printed with beam design report.
Column design gives no detailed
results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max
steel % and spacing. For columns
gives a detailed table of output
with additional moments
calculated.
List of design sag/hog moments
and corresponding required steel
area at each section of member
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design
moments are magnified
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced
sections to be considered in
finding critical moment for beam
design. The upper limit is 20.
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This
value default is as provided as ZD
in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This
value default is as provided as YD
in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both
directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about
local Z direction only
2.0 = Column unbraced about
local Y direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y
and Z directions
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local
Y direction for column design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local
Z direction for column design.
228 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal rein-
forcement layout without con-
sidering torsional moment Mxy -
slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal
reinforcement layout with Mxy
used to calculate WOOD & ARMER
moments for design.
A= Skew angle considered
in WOOD & ARMER equations
where A is the angle in degrees.
SERV 0.0 0.0 = No serviceability check per-
formed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability
check for beams as if they were
continuous.
simply supported.
cantilever beams.
5B. European Codes - Steel Design Per Eurocode 3

The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification
Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - part 1-1: General Rules and rules for
buildings has been implemented.
Two versions of the code are currently implemented, the EC3_94/1 and BS EN
1993-1-1:2005. Additionally, STAAD.Pro has implemented several countries'
National Annex documents.
To access the EC3_94/1 edition, specify the commands.
Parameters
Code
EC3

Or
Parameters
Code
Euro
To access the BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 edition, specify the commads:
Parameters
Code
EC3 BS
5B.(A) European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3

[DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992]
5B.1 (A) General Description
Introduction
STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of steel
procedure to either code-check or select suitable members of an analyzed
structure.

2. Providing appropriate ‘Parameter’ values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection.
the design requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with
the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members or member
groups considered in the design operation.
Eurocode 3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 (EC3 DD)
The DD ENV version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General
rules and rules for buildings (EC3 DD) provides design rules applicable to
structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the
ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern standards. The
objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced
230 — STAAD.Pro
to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both
the applied loads and the material properties.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for
calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of
analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing
referred to in EC3. These are “Simple”, “Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous” which
reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments under a specific loading
condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and “Continuous” joint types can be assumed
when carrying out global analysis.
National Application Documents
Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National

Application Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative
factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3.
The current version of EC3 DD implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and
rules provided in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 and has not been modified by any
National Application Document.
Axes convention in STAAD and EC3
By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor
axis as Y-Y. A special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is
available if the “SET Z UP” command is used and is discussed in the Technical
Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X and joins the
start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction.
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD,
but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions
follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below.
Users must bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output
from STAAD.

5B.2(A) Analysis Methodology
situations.
5B.3(A) Material Properties and Load Factors
The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 DD design is based on table
3.1 of the code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic
yield strength by the material partial safety factor Γm. The magnitude of Γm in
STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to all section types. A separate safety factor
parameter named GB1 is used to check the resistance of a member to buckling and
also has a default value of 1.1.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless
replaced by user’s numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity E = 205000 N/mm2

Shear Modulus G = E/2(1+ ν)
Poisson’s Ratio ν = 0.3
Unit weight Γ = 76.8 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on Γ , the partial safety factor for the
f
232 — STAAD.Pro
5B.4(A) Section Classification
The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section

prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to
establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections
are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern
on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design process,
STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities accordingly.
The EC3 DD design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles
that are of Class 1 2 or 3 as defined in section 5.3.2 of the code. However, the
design of members that have a ‘Class 4’ section profile are limited to WIDE FLANGE,
TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE AND RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS.
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current
version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro.
Laced and battened members are not considered in the current version of EC3 DD
design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.5(A) Member Design
5B.5(A).1 Design of Beams as per DD ENV 1993-1-

1:1992
EC3 DD design in STAAD.Pro considers members that are primarily in bending
and/or shear as beams and performs cross section and member capacity checks in
accordance with the code. The main requirement for a beam is to have sufficient
cross-section resistance to the applied bending moment and shear force. The
possibility of lateral-torsional buckling is also taken into consideration when the full
length of the member has not been laterally restrained.
The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material
yield strength and is determined according to Cl. 5.4.5 of the code. The shear
capacity and the corresponding shear checks are done as per section 5.4.6 of the
code.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can
both attain full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain
sufficient rotation required for plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic
section modulus is used in the design calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local
buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to
the extreme compression fibre of the section. The elastic section modulus is used to
determine the moment capacity for class 3 sections. Class 4 sections do suffer from

local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in section
properties before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of
interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment resistance of
the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur unless the value
of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In
such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as
contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned earlier the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE,
TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE AND RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl.
5.3.5 of the code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of
the code. The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the
unrestrained length, restraint conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral
torsional buckling checks involves the calculation of the ‘Elastic critical moment’,
Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as per the method given in Annex F of the code.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section
5.4.6 of the code. In cases where the members are subject to combined bending
and shear, the combined bending and shear checks are done in STAAD as per
clause 5.4.7 of the code.
5B.5(A).2 Design of Axially Loaded Members

The design of members subject to tension loads alone are performed as per Cl
5.4.3 of the code. The tension capacity is calculated based on yield strength,
material factor Γm and cross-sectional area of the member with possible reduction
due to bolt holes. When bolt holes need to be considered in the capacity
calculations the value used for Γm is 1.2 and the yield strength is replaced with the
ultimate tensile strength of the material. The tension capacity is then taken as the
smaller of the full section capacity and the reduced section capacity as stated
above.
The design of members subject to axial compression loads alone are performed as
per Cl 5.4.4 of the code. For members with class 1 2 or 3 section profiles, the full
section area is considered in calculating the section capacity. However in case of
class 4 sections, the ‘effective cross-section’ is considered to calculate the
compressive strength. Also any additional moments induced in the section due to
the shift of the centroidal axis of the effective section will also be taken into
account as per clause 5.4.8.3 of the code. The effective section properties for class
4 sections will be worked out as given in Cl.5.3.5 of the code.
234 — STAAD.Pro
In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for
such members. This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the member
is influenced by a number of factors including the section type and the unbraced
length of the member. The buckling capacity is calculated as per Cl. 5.5 of the code.
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles,
double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the
slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of
STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the
slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are used
in the current version of the EC3 DD design module
Note:
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 we must
consider four axes; two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The
effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY * KY, if
not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle is
fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see
section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in
the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ * KZ.

5B.5(A).3 Design of members with combined axial load
and bending
The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-
existent axial load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling
resistance of the section. The EC3 DD design module in STAAD takes such a
scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as per Cl. 5.4.8 of the
code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl. 5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and
Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3 respectively. The
effective section properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl. 5.3.5
of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and
also checking the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members
subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect
of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme
compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the
section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of the code. In case of a combined
axial compressive load and bending moment, the member will be checked as per
the rules in section 5.5.4 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the
section under consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction
in bending resistance, then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account
before calculating the effect of the axial load on the bending resistance of the
section. If the member is subject to a combined shear, axial load and bending
moment then the section capacity checks will be done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically
deal with single angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does
give a method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the
EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-
1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-
1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module. Please refer to
the note in section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the
current version of EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.6 (A)Design Parameters
Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They

are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular
236 — STAAD.Pro
structure.
Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all
of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when
altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 5B.1(A) lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and
default values.
Table 5B.1(A) Steel Design Parameters EC3 DD
Parameter
Name
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis.
LY Member Length Compression length in local y
axis, Slenderness ratio =
(KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Length Compression length in local z
axis, Slenderness ratio =
(KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
UNL Member Length Unrestraint length of member
used in calculating the lateral-
torsional resistance moment of
the member.
PY Yield Strength The yield strength default value
is set based on the default value
of the "SGR" parameter.
NSF 1.0 Net tension factor for tension
capacity calculation.
SGR 0.0 Steel grade as per table 3.1 in
EC3.
0.0 = Fe 360 1.0 = Fe 430 2.0 =
Fe 510
SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled
or built-up.
0.0 = Rolled 1.0 = Built-up

Parameter
Name
CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading on
member.
Can take a value from 1 to 6.
Refer to Table 5B.2 for more
information on its use.
CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-
Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity 0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and other
end fixed
DMAX 100.0 cm Maximum allowable depth for
the member.
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth for the
member.
RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of loading to
capacity.
BEAM 0 Indicates the number of sections
to be checked for during the
design.
Check the end sections only or
the locations specified by the
SECTION command.
Consider 13 sections along the
member and select the maximum
Mz location for the design check.
Same as BEAM = 1.0 but checks
the end sections of the member
as well.
Consider 13 sections along the
238 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
member and design check every
section.
CODE Undefined User must specify EC3.
TRACK 0 Controls the level of descriptivity
of output.
0 = minimum
1 = intermediate
2 = maximum
4 = option 4 for performing a
deflection check
UNF 1.0 Unsupported buckling length as
a factor of the beam length
LEG 0.0 Connection type
LVV Maximum of Lyy Buckling length for angle about
and Lzz (Lyy is a its principle axis
term used by
BS5950)
FU Ultimate tensile strength of steel
DFF None Deflection limit
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting starting point
member for calculation of "Deflection
Length".
member calculation of "Deflection
Length".
CAN 0 Member will be considered as a
cantilever type member for
deflection checks.

Parameter
Name
0 indicates that member will not
be treated as a cantilever
member
1 indicates that the member will
be treated as a cantilever
member
GB1 1.1 Partial safety factor used in
buckling checks for compression
members
GM0 1.1 Corresponds to the Γ factor in
m0
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992
m1
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992
m2
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992
ZIV 0.8 Specifies a reduction factor for
vectoral effects to be used in
axial tension checks [Cl 5.5.3(2)]
Notes:
1. LEG – (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)

The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are
specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the
end of the member (See section 5B.5(A).2 above). To define the appropriate
connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to
match the BS5950 connection definition:-
240 — STAAD.Pro
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a
and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric
axes are defined as:-
La = KY * KY and Lb = KZ * LZ
compression strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-
y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes
is used to calculate the compression strength pc for the stronger principal
axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25
is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is
calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is
not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in
table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical
Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at
the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of
the single angle making up the pair.
2. BEAM

Ensure that the “BEAM” parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing
code checking for members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.
3. CHECKING BEAM DEFLECTION

With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a CHECK
CODE command will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for
the stress capacity using the current LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter
blocks with code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one
with a TRACK 0, 1 or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
242 — STAAD.Pro
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CODE MEMB 1
However, note that whilst both sets of code checks will be reported in the
output file, only the last code check results are reported in the GUI.
5B.7(A) Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members.
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the
ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other
specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from
the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition
occurs).
section 5.19 with two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD design
module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design
process.
5B.8(A) Member Selection


input as prismatic or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7
5B.9(A) Tabulated Results of Steel Design
formed.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code
which governs the design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for
the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member
has passed.
member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,
MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause
checks that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the
load case that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that
were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the
various design data used for the calculations such as the section modulii,
section class, section capacity etc.
244 — STAAD.Pro
5B.(B) European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3
[EN 1993-1-1:2005]
5B.1(B) General Description
STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of steel
procedure to either code-check or select suitable members of an analyzed structure.

2. Providing appropriate ‘Parameter’ values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection.
the design requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with
the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members or member
groups considered in the design operation.
Eurocode 3 - EN 1993-1-1:2005 (EN 1993)
The EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General
rules and rules for buildings (EN 1993) provides design rules applicable to
structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the
ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern standards. The objective
of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a
negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both the
applied loads and the material properties.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for
calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of
analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing
referred to in EC3. These are “Simple”, “Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous” which
reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments under a specific loading
condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and “Continuous” joint types can be assumed
when carrying out global analysis.
National Annex Documents
Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Annex
Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for
loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3.

The current version of EC3 (EN 1993) implemented in STAAD adheres to the
factors and rules provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of
STAAD.Pro includes two National Annexes viz.
a. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] and

b. Norwegian National Annex [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/NA2008]
c. British National Annex [NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
d. French National Annex [Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005]
The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new ‘NA’
parameter that is set by the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode
3. Please refer to section 5B.6 (B) for a description of the NA parameter.
By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor
axis as Y-Y. A special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is
available if the “SET Z UP” command is used and is discussed in the Technical
Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X and joins
the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction.
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of
STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes
definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below.
Users must bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output
from STAAD.
246 — STAAD.Pro
5B.2 (B) Analysis Methodology
5B.3 (B) Material Properties and Load Factors
The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 (EN 1993) design is based on
table 3.1 of the code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic
yield strength by the material partial safety factor Γm. The magnitude of Γm in
STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to all section types. A separate safety factor
parameter named GB1 is used to check the resistance of a member to buckling and
also has a default value of 1.1.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless
replaced by user’s numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity E = 205000 N/mm2

Shear Modulus G = E/2(1+ ν)
Poisson’s Ratio ν = 0.3
Unit weight Γ = 76.8 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on Γ , the partial safety factor for the
f
5B.4 (B) Section Classification
The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section

prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to
establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections
are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern
on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design process,
STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities accordingly.
The EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD can design members with all section
profiles that are of Class 1 2 or 3 as defined in section 5.5 of the code. However,
the design of members that have a ‘Class 4’ section profile are limited to WIDE
FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE AND RECTANGULAR HOLLOW

SECTIONS. Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with
in the current version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro.
The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version
of EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.5 (B) Member Design
5B.5(B).1 Design of Beams as per EN 1993-1-1:2005
EC3 (EN 1993) design in STAAD.Pro considers members that are primarily in
bending and/or shear as beams and performs cross section and member capacity
checks in accordance with the code. The main requirement for a beam is to have
sufficient cross-section resistance to the applied bending moment and shear force.
The possibility of lateral-torsional buckling is also taken into consideration when
the full length of the member has not been laterally restrained.
The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material
yield strength and is determined according to Cl. 6.2.5 of the code. The shear
capacity and the corresponding shear checks are done as per section 6.2.6 of the
code.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can
both attain full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain
sufficient rotation required for plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic
section modulus is used in the design calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local
buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to
the extreme compression fibre of the section. The elastic section modulus is used
to determine the moment capacity for class 3 sections. Class 4 sections do suffer
from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in
section properties before the moment capacity can be determined. Further,
because of interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment
resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur
unless the value of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity
of the section. In such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force
as well as contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned earlier the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE,
TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE AND RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl.
6.2.2.5 of the code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 6.3.2 of
the code. The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the
248 — STAAD.Pro
unrestrained length, restraint conditions and type of applied loading. EN 1993-1-
1:2005 however does not specify a method to calculate the “Elastic critical moment”
Mcr to be used in the LTB calculations. STAAD.Pro uses the method given in Annex
F of the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 to calculate Mcr, which is then used in the further
LTB checks specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section
6.2.6 of the code. In cases where the members are subject to combined bending
and shear, the combined bending and shear checks are done in STAAD as per
clause 6.2.8 of the code.
5B.5(B).2 Design of Axially Loaded Members
The design of members subject to tension loads alone are performed as per Clauses
6.2.3 and 6.2.4 of the code. The tension capacity is calculated based on yield
strength, material factor Γm and cross-sectional area of the member with possible
reduction due to bolt holes (clause 6.2.3). When bolt holes need to be considered
in the capacity calculations the value used for Γm is 1.25 and the yield strength is
replaced with the ultimate tensile strength of the material. The tension capacity is
then taken as the smaller of the full section capacity and the reduced section
capacity as stated above.
The design of members subject to axial compression loads alone are performed as
per Cl 6.2.4 of the code. For members with class 1 2 or 3 section profiles, the full
section area is considered in calculating the section capacity. However in case of
class 4 sections, the ‘effective cross-section’ is considered to calculate the
compressive strength. Also any additional moments induced in the section due to
the shift of the centroidal axis of the effective section will also be taken into account
as per clause 6.2.2.5 of the code. The effective section properties for class 4
sections will be worked out as given in Cl.6.2.2.4 of the code. The effective widths
of the compression elements are worked out according to Clause 4.3 of EN 1993-1-
5:2005.
In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for
such members. This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the member
is influenced by a number of factors including the section type and the unbraced
length of the member. The buckling capacity is calculated as per Cl. 6.3 of the code.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles,
double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the
slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of
STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the

slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are
used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module.
Note:
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 we
must consider four axes; two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-
b. The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY *
KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle
is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see
section 5B.6 (B) for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length
in the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ *
KZ.
5B.5(B).3 Design of members with combined axial load and bending
The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-

existent axial load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling
resistance of the section. The EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD takes such
250 — STAAD.Pro
a scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as per Cl. 6.3.3 of the
code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and
also checking the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members
subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect
of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme
compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the
section. The checks are done as per Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. In case of a combined
axial compressive load and bending moment, the member will be checked as per
the rules in section 6.3.3 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the
section under consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction
in bending resistance, then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account
before calculating the effect of the axial load on the bending resistance of the
section. If the member is subject to a combined shear, axial load and bending
moment then the section capacity checks will be done as per Cl. 6.2.10 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with
single angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a
method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 (EN
1993) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000
to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is
used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module. Please refer to the note
in section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the
current version of EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.6 (B) Design Parameters
Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are
set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular
structure.
altered, the n setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 5B.1 (B) lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and
default values.

Table 5B.1(B) Steel Design Parameters EC3 EN
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis.
LY Member Compression length in local y axis,
Length Slenderness ratio = (KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Compression length in local z axis,
Length Slenderness ratio = (KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
UNL Member Unrestraint length of member used in
Length calculating the lateral-torsional
resistance moment of the member.
PY Yield The yield strength default value is set
Strength based on the default value of the "SGR"
parameter.
NSF 1.0 Net tension factor for tension capacity
calculation.
SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled or built-
up.
0.0 = Rolled 1.0 = Built-up
CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading on member.
Can take a value from 1 to 8.
Refer to Table 5B.2 for more information
on its use.
CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity
0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and other end fixed
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth for the
cm member.
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth for the
252 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
member.
RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of loading to capacity.
NA 0 Choice of National Annex to be used for
EC3 design.
(see below for more information)
CODE None User must specify EN 1993.
CAN 0 Member will be considered as a
cantilever type member for deflection
checks.
0 indicates that member will not be
treated as a cantilever member
1 indicates that the member will be
treated as a cantilever member
GM0 1.1 Corresponds to the Γ factor in EN
m0
1993-1-1:2005
m1
1993-1-1:2005
m2
1993-1-1:2005
SGR 0 Steel grade as in table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-
1:2005
0.0 - indicates S 235 grade steel
ZIV 0.8 Specifies a reduction factor for vectoral
effects to be used in axial tension checks
[Cl 5.5.3(2) of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992]

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
C1 0 Corresponds to the C1 factor to be used
to calculate Elastic critical moment Mcr as
per Clause 6.3.2.2
per Clause 6.3.2.2
per Clause 6.3.2.2
MU 0 To be used with CMM values of 7 and 8.
See Table 5B.2.
Currently valid only with the French NA.
ZG +Section Distance of transverse load from shear
Depth/2 Centre. Used to calculate Mcr.
KC 1.0 Corresponds to the correction factor as
per Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Pro-
gram will calculate ‘kc’ automatically if
this parameter is set to 0.
Notes:
1. NA Parameter
The values for NA parameter are as follows:
Table 10B1.1 - Numerical Code for Eurocode National Annex
NA
Country
Value
0 Uses the base EN 1993-1-1:2005 code. The default
values specified in En 1993-1-1:2005 will be used
for the partial safety factors and various parameter
values where applicable (default).
1 United Kingdom (British NA) — Uses the BS EN
1993-1-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with
the UK National Annex.
2 Netherlands (Dutch NA) — Uses the NEN EN 1993-
254 — STAAD.Pro
NA
Country
Value
1-1:2005 version of the code.
The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB]
has been added in this module. Please note that the
Dutch National requires additional checks as per
NEN 6770 and NEN 6771 which will also be
performed during design checks with this parameter
value
3 Norway (Norwegian NA) — Uses the NS-EN 1993-1-
1:2005 version of the code. The Norwegian National
Annexe [ NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/Na 2008] has been
added to this implementation.
4 France (French NA) — Uses the Annexe Nationale a
la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of the code along
with the French National Annex..
2. LEG – (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are
specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the
end of the member
(See section 5B.5.2 above). To define the appropriate connection, a LEG
parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to
match the BS5950 connection definition:-

For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a
and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric
axes are defined as:-
La = KY * KY and Lb = KZ * LZ
compression strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-
y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b
axes is used to calculate the compression strength pc for the stronger
principal axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table
25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is
calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is
not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in
table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical
Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at
the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of
the single angle making up the pair.
256 — STAAD.Pro
3. CMM Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given
below:
Table 5B.2 - Values of CMM Parameter
4. SGR
Please note that as EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide a buckling curve in
table 6.2 for grade S 450 steel (in Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005), the
program will use the same buckling curves as for grade S 460 when
calculating the buckling resistance as per clause 6.3
5. Checking beam deflection

With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a BEAM CHECK
command will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the
stress capacity using the current LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter
blocks with code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one
with a TRACK 0, 1 or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CODE CHECK MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
However, note that whilst both sets of code checks will be reported in the
output file, only the last code check results are reported in the GUI.
5B.7 (B) Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN
1993-1-1:2005 and a corresponding National Annex (if specified). Code checking
is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the
specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from
the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition
occurs).
258 — STAAD.Pro
section 5.19 with two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 (EN 1993)
design module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its
design process.
5B.8 (B) Member Selection

same limitations as defined in section 5B.7(B) - CODE CHECKING.
input as prismatic or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(B)
European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-

1:2005]
5B.9 (B) Tabulated Results of Steel Design
formed.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the clause in EN 1993-1-1:2005 code which gov-
erns the design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for
the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member
has passed.

cases.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause
checks that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the
load case that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that
were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the
various design data used for the calculations such as the section modulii,
section class, section capacity etc.
If an NA parameter has been specified and if the particular National Annex

requires additional checks outside those specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (e.g. The
Dutch National Annex), the respective NA clauses and any associated code clauses
will be listed along with the critical ratios and the forces that were used for these
clause checks.
5B.(C) European Codes - National Annexes to Euro-

code 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]
Purpose
A number of countries that have signed up to the replace their current steel design
standards with the Eurocode, EN 1993-1-1:2005, known commonly as Eurocode
3, have published their National Annex documents. These documents make small
changes to the base document and STAAD.Pro has been updated to incorporate
some of these National Annex documents.
Description
The parameter NA sets the default material gamma factors and any additional
changes outlined in the country specific National Annex such as specific equations
or methods.
The output file printout has been updated to indicate which National Annex (if
any) has been used in a code check / select process. (For all TRACK settings)
260 — STAAD.Pro
Note: This Eurocode 3 design code is secured using the 'Eurocode Design'
code pack.
General Format
The format of the EN 1993-1-1:2005 National Annex is as follows:

CODE EN 1993
NA f1
{Code parameters: See Eurocode 3 parameters}
Where: f1 represents the number designation for a specific country's National

Annex:
Table 10B1.1 - Numerical Code for Eurocode National Annex
NA
Country
Value
0 None. This value represents using the base code only,
with no national annex changes or additions (default).
1 United Kingdom (British NA)
2 Netherlands (Dutch NA)
3 Norway (Norwegian NA)
4 France (French NA)
> Specify the design engine to use a National Annex with EC 3
Use the following procedure to include additional check specified by a National

Annex:
1. From the Modeling > Design > Steel tab, select EN 1993-1-1:2005 from the
current code list.
2. Click the Define Parameters… button to launch the Design Parameters dialog.
3. Select the parameter NA from the list.

4. Select the radio button for the National Annex you wish to use; or leave as
Basic in order to use EC3 without additional checks.
5. Click the Add button to add the NA parameter to the code check.
6. Click Close to dismiss the dialog once parameter definitions are complete.
Refer to EC3 steel design for additional information on steel design per EC3.
A design performed to the new Eurocode 3 National Annex is displayed in the
output file (*.ANL) with the following header, in addition to the base EC3 output.
5B.1(C) EC3 NA Dutch National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the Dutch National Annex - titled NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB - for use
with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes
to the base document.
Description
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that

require additional clauses from the Dutch National Annex (hereafter referred to as
D-NA) are:
l 6.1 General
l 6.2.8 Bending and shear
262 — STAAD.Pro
l 6.2.10 Bending shear and axial force
l 6.3 Buckling resistance of members
l 6.3.1.3 Slenderness for flexural buckling
l 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling
l 6.3.2.2 Lateral torsional buckling curves – General case
l 6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections or equivalent
welded sections
l 6.3.2.4 Simplified assessment methods for beams
l 6.3.3 Members in bending and axial compression
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
Note: The local axis convention in the Dutch codes is: Y – major axis & Z –
minor axis (as opposed to the convention followed in STAAD.Pro).
Clause 6.1 – General
The partial safety factors will use the following values:
Resistance of cross-sections- ΓM0 = 1.0

Resistance of members to instability- ΓM1 = 1.0
Resistance of cross sections to tension- ΓM2 = 1.25

The design function in STAAD.Pro will set these values as the default values for the
D-NA. The user is still however allowed to modify these factors using the Γ
parameters in the design input.
Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear
The D-NA requires the implementation of causes 11.3.1.1 and 11.3.1.3 of NEN
6770.
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and Class 2 I-section

profiles
Class 1 and class 2 I section profiles will need to satisfy the interaction formulae
given in tables 10 & 11 of NEN 6770.
Table 10: Provides interaction checks for bending about the major axis (All
necessary terms and formulae are described below):
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.1
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.2
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d check equa-
tion 11.3-3
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d check equa-
tion 11.3-4
Where,
Vz;s;d= Actual Shear force in the section along Z- axis

Vz;pl;d= Shear capacity of section along Z - axis
= Aw x fy;d / √3 - See fig below for Aw ; fy;d = yield stress
264 — STAAD.Pro
Ns;d= Axial force in the section
Npl;d= Axial capacity of section = A x fy;d
My;s;d= Bending moment about major axis
My;pl;d= Plastic moment capacity of section = fy;d x Wy;pl
Wy;pl = Plastic section modulus
a1 = = min( A-2bfx tf)/A , 0.5)- used in tables 10 & 11
a2 = = see eqn 11.3-10- used in tables 10 & 11
Mv;y;ud= see eqn 11.3.12
N;v;u;d= see eqn 11.3-13
Table 11: Provides interaction formulae for bending about the minor axis
l Check #1 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3-5
l Check #2 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3-6
l Check #3 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-7
l Check #4 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-8
Where,
Vy;s;d= Actual Shear force in the section along Y- axis

Vy;pl;d= Shear capacity of section along Y - axis
= Aw x fy;d / √3 - See fig below for Aw ; fy;d = yield stress

Mv;z;u;d = q x Mz;pld = q x fy;d x Wpl;z;d (Wpl;z;d = plastic section
modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
Nv;u;d = N;pl;d – 2(1-q)bf x tf x fy;d
Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN 6770) : Class 1 and Class 2 Square

and rectangular hollow sections
This clause requires class 1 and class 2 square and rectangular tube profiles to
satisfy the interaction equations in Table 13.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.22
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.23
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-24
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-25
Where
Vz;s;d= Actual Shear force in the section along Z- axis

Vz;pl;d= Shear capacity of section along Z – axis
[ b – breadth and h = height of section ; A= area of section]
a3 = min( (A-2xbxt)/A , 0.5)

a4 = from equation 11.3.27
Clause 6.2.10 – Bending shear and axial force
Requires the implementation of clauses 11.3.1.1 to 11.3.1.3 and 11.3.2.1 to

11.3.2.3 of NEN 6770 and clause 11.3 of NEN 6771
266 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770) and Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN
6770)
See "5B.1(C) EC3 NA Dutch National Annex" on page 262 of this document
described above.
Clause 11.3.1.2 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and class 2 circular

hollow (CHS) profiles
Class 1 and class 2 sections with circular hollow profiles should satisfy the
interaction equations given in table 12.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.17

l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.18.
See "5B.1(C) EC3 NA Dutch National Annex" on page 262 of this document for
equations to derive Vz;s;d
Vz;pl;d = Shear capacity of CHS sections
See equations 11.3-19 and 11.3-20 to work out Mv;y;u;d and N;v;u;d.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above
equations with ‘y’ (should be the same of CHS sections).
Clause 11.3.2 ( NEN 6770) :

Section 11.3.2 in general deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear. The
general condition to be satisfied in this case is given by equation 11.3-31 of NEN
6770
Clause 11.3.2.1 : Class 1 and class2 I-sections with biaxial

bending + shear + axial force.
The formula to work out M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d are to be taken from tables
14 and 15 of NEN 6770 respectively.
Checks for table 14:

l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.32
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.33
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equa-
tion 11.3-34
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equa-
tion 11.3-35
equations to work out Vz;s;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and
Vz;pl;d.
Checks for table 15:
l Check #1 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.36
l Check #2 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.37
l Check #3 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-38
l Check #4 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-39
equations to work out Vy;s;d, Mz;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;z;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and
Vy;pl;d.
See table 16 for α1, α1, β0 and β1 use in tables 14 and 15.
Clause 11.3.2.2 : Class 1 and Class 2 Circular hollow tubes

The formula to work out M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-
3-31, see description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 17 of
NEN 6770.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.44

l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.45.
equations to work out Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, and Npl;d use in equations 11.3.44 &
11.3.45.
For values to be used for α1, α2, β1 and β2 in this case refer to table 18 of NEN
6770.
268 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 11.3.2.3 : Class 1 and class2 Rectangular and
square hollow tubes
The formula to work out M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-
3-31, see description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 19 of NEN
6770.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3-48
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.49
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d use equa-
tion 11.3-50
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-51
equations to work out Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a3, a4 and
Vz;pl;d to be used in the above equations. For values to be used for α1, α2, β1 and
β2 in this case refer to table 20 of NEN 6770.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above
equations with ‘y’.
Clause 11.3 ( NEN 6771) :

In general, this section deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear for
class 3 and class 4 sections.
Check for class 3 sections: For class 3 sections use the method in section 11.3 NEN
6770. For class 3 sections the methods and equations discussed above can be used
with the ‘plastic section modulus’ being substituted with the ‘elastic modulus’.
Check for class 4 sections: Class 4 sections can be treated as class 3 sections if the
effective section properties are used as given in clause 10.2.4.2.3 of NEN 6771.
Working out the effective section properties for slender sections has already been
done in STAAD.Pro.
For I- section profiles and tubular sections the following procedure should be
adopted:
1. Case 1: -If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d ≤ 1 check equation 11.2-7 ( given below)

Where
V;z;s;d is the shear for in the Z direction

V;z;u;d is the shear capacity in the Z direction for ultimate limit
state.
For an I section,
Where
Aw,ef = effective web area as given in section 10.2.4.2.3 .

MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the
effective section. = ( fy * W,eff)
2. Case 2:- If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d ≤1 check

equation 11.2-13 (given below):
Clause 6.3 – Buckling resistance of members
The D-NA introduces a new clause 6.3.0, which in turns requires the checks as per
clauses 12.1.2.2, 12.13.2 and 12.1.4.2 of NEN 6771 to be applied.
Clause 12.1.2.2 (NEN 6771) :

This clause in NEN 6771 determines the relative torsional slenderness and is given
as:
Where:
N;c;u;d = A * fy;d ( A = area of section and fy;d the yield stress)
is the Euler-torsion formula
270 — STAAD.Pro
This value of slenderness is to be used to calculate the modification factors used in
section 6.3 of EC-3.
Clause 12.1.3.2 (NEN 6771):

This clause works out the relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness for
compression members. The relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness is given
as:
Where
Nc;u;d = A * fy;d ( A = area of section and fy;d the yield stress)
is the Euler torsional buckling strength
Clause 12.1.4.2 (NEN 6771):

Buckling lengths of rotationally restrained bars with intermediate spring supports.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not allow for these end conditions, specifically. You can
set the effective length factors if the effective length values need to be altered.
Hence this clause will be ignored for the proposed implementation.
Clause 6.3.1.3 – Slenderness for flexural buckling
The Dutch NA requires the implementation of clause 12.1.1.3 and 12.1.5.3.2 of

NEN 6770 and clause 12.1.1.3 of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6770):

This clause gives the equations to work out the effective lengths for various support
conditions. STAAD.Pro uses the effective length factor ‘K’ which allows the user to
set/modify the effective lengths for a member.
Clause 12.1.5.3.2 (NEN 6770):

This clause gives methods to work out the buckling length of lattice sections. We do
not deal with latticed section in the current version of STAAD.Pro. In any case the
buckling length can be adjusted using the ‘K’ factor.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6771):

This clause again deals with working out the effective lengths of prismatic and non-
prismatic rods. Again, the ‘K’ factor in the current implementation of STAAD.Pro is
adequate to cater for adjusting the effective lengths as necessary.

Clause 6.3.1.4 – Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling
The D-NA requires the implementation of clauses 12.1.2 and 12.1.3 of NEN 6770
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6770): Torsional stability

IPE, HEA, HEB & HEM sections and pipe sections do not need to be checked for
torsional instability.
If torsional checks need to be performed they should be done according to 12.1.2
of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6771):

This clause gives the condition to check for torsion instability. The condition
being:
Where:
Nc;s;d is the applied axial load

NC;u;d is the axial capacity = A x fy.
ωθ is given by
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6770): Torsional flexural stability

Doubly symmetric sections need not be checked for torsional flexural instability.
However for I sections that have rigid supports that is not along the axis of the
section and any other sections will need to be checked as per clause 12.1.3 of NEN
6771.
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6771):

This clause gives the condition to check for torsional flexural instability. The
condition being:
Where
272 — STAAD.Pro
N;c;s;d and N;c;u;d as in clause 12.1.2 above.
Clause 6.3.2.2 – Lateral torsional buckling curves - general
The D-NA states that the values for the imperfection factor αLT to be used in
equation 6.56 of EC-3 are to be obtained from table 6.3 of EC-3. This is what
STAAD.Pro currently implements.
Clause 6.3.2.3 – Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections or equiv-
alent welded sections
The D-NA states that:
1. The values for the

#. Imperfection factor αLT0 = 0.4 (to be used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)
#. Β = 0.75(to be used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)
These are the default values used in the current implementation in
STAAD.Pro.
2. The buckling curves shall be selected as per table 6.5.
Again this is what is being used in the current implementation of EC3 (BS) in
STAAD.Pro.
3. The reduction factor f is given by
F = 1 – 0.5(1-kc)[1-2x (λLT -0.8)^2]. And Kc to be determined from table
6.6.
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro conservatively uses a value of f =
1.0. This implementation use a new parameter ‘KC’ to identify the moment
distribution as given in table 6.6, thus determining the value of the correction
factor ‘kc’.
Clause 6.3.2.4 – Simplified assessment method for restrained beams in build-

ings
The current implementation only uses the more accurate method (6.3.2.2 and
6.3.2.3 in EC-3). Hence STTAD will ignore this clause for this implementation.
Clause 6.33 – Uniform members in bending and axial compression
The D-NA recommends the use of the method in Annex B of EC-3 to determine the
values of kyy, kyz, kzy and kzz to be used in 6.3.3 ( EC-3) checks.
The current implementation in STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B.

The Dutch NA also requires additional checks as per clause 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN
6770
Clause 12.3.1.2.3 (NEN 6770): Rotation/bending capacity

The checks given in this clause deals with additional checks for columns that form
part of a buttressed or non-butressed framework. At present we do not
distinguish between the two types of frameworks. Hence we will need a new
parameter that the user can choose to identify the framework type. The proposed
implementation will use the ‘ESTIFF’ parameter with two different values:
l ESTIFF = 0 (default) – Column part of a buttressed framework – Selecting

this value will internally perform the checks as per section 1 of clause
12.3.1.2.3
l ESTIFF = 1 (default) – Column is not part of a buttressed framework – Select-
ing this value will internally perform the checks as per section 2 of clause
12.3.1.2.3
These checks are described below:
1. For columns in buttressed frameworks the buckling length is to be taken

based on either
l the system length or
l the distance between adjacent lateral supports
The following conditions should also be satisfied:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
Where
Nc;s;d is the axial load in the section

Λy = Slenderness of the section about the major axis ( Y-axis)
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then
Where
274 — STAAD.Pro
Nc;s;d is the axial load in the section
2. For columns that are not part of buttressed frameworks the following
additional checks need to be done:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
Where
Nc;s;d is the axial load in the section and

If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then
5B.2 (c) EC3 NA Norwegian National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the Norwegian National Annex - titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-

1:2005 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes
small changes to the base document.
Description

require additional clauses from the Norwegian National Annex are:
Section 6.1(1)

Resistance of cross-sections - ΓM0 = 1.05
Resistance of members to instability - ΓM1 = 1.05
Resistance of cross sections to tension - ΓM2 = 1.25
This implementation will set the default values of the GM0, GM1 and GM2
parameters in the design module to the values as:
GM0 = 1.05, GM1 = 1.05 and GM2 = 1.25. (Note: When NA 3 has been specified)
The user will be allowed to override these default values and set custom values to
these parameters. If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as
‘0’, this implementation will ignore the user specified value (i.e. 0) and use the
default values as given above.
The design functions in STAAD.Pro will set these values as the default values for
the French-NA. The user is still however allowed to modify these factors using the
Γ parameters in the design input. These values will also need to be reported in the
design output.
Note: The ‘GB1’ parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files
that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.
5B.3 (c) EC3 NA UK National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the UK National Annex - titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 - for

use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small
changes to the base document.
Description
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 that have been dealt with in the UK

National Annex (hereafter referred to as the UK-NA) are:
276 — STAAD.Pro
l 6.1(1) General
l 6.3.2.2 Lateral Torsional Buckling curves – General case
l 6.3.2.3(1) Lateral Torsional buckling curves for rolled or equivalent welded
sections
l 6.3.2.3(2) Modification factor calculations
l 6.3.2.4(1)B Slenderness limit λc0
l 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor ‘kfl’
l 6.3.3 Method for calculation interaction factors for members in combined
bending and compression
l Annex B Members in bending and axial compression
l 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buckling
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
Clause 6.1(1) – General: Partial Safety Factors for buildings
EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for
design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are ΓM0, ΓM1 & ΓM2. EN 1993
provides default values for these factors. However any National Annex is allowed to
override these default values.
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the UK National Annex:
Resistance of cross-sections- ΓM0 = 1.0

Resistance of members to instability- ΓM1 = 1.0
Resistance of cross sections to tension- ΓM2 = 1.1
This implementation will hence set the default values of the design parameters
GM0, GM1 and GM2 in the design module to the values as:
GM0 = 1.0, GM1 = 1.0 and GM2 = 1.10. (Note: When NA 1 has been specified)
The design function in STAAD.Pro will set these values as the default values for the
UK-NA. You may override these default values and set custom values to these
parameters. These values will also be reported in the design output.
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as ‘0’,
STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value (i.e. 0) and use the default
values as given above.

Warning: The ‘GB1’ parameter that is being used for compression checks in
builds preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as
this parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy
files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will
need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The UK-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor X , requires the calculation of the
LT
‘Elastic Critical Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The UK National Annex does not specify a
particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on
the following NCCI documents:
1. SN003a-EN-EU – Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling:

This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly
symmetric sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be
considered for this method in the proposed implementation.
The equation to work out Mcr is given in the NCCI as
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading
conditions of the member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the
different cases as given in the tables below:
278 — STAAD.Pro
This NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l Members with end moments
l Members with transverse loading
l Members with end moments and transverse loading.

The implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition
and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter. The first two
loading conditions mentioned above and its variants can be dealt with by
using the existing values of the CMM parameter (i.e. 1 to 6). Hence the
appropriate values from this NCCI will be used for ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ coefficients
depending on the value of CMM specified. The default value of CMM is 1,
which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its
span. The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C1 & C2
using the new ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ parameters in the design input mode.
However for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI
provides graphs to work out the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not
however, provide a set of equations for these graphs. However the “end
moments and transverse loading” condition cannot be currently specified in
the design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values
for the CMM parameter viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not
provide equations to work out C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will
have to use the new ‘C1’ & ‘C2’ parameters to input the required values for
C1 & C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values of 7 or 8 for the CMM
parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been
specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains
the values of C1 and C2 from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-
1:1992.
2. SN030a-EN-EU – Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending and

axial compression:
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment
(Mcr) for uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the
weak axis. Hence for this implementation the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-
Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-
up sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify
a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this
280 — STAAD.Pro
method only for Tee-Sections. In any case, the actual LTB capacity will still be
worked out as per BS 5950-1 as in the current EC3 implementation.
The equation to work out Mcr for mono symmetric sections is given as :
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading
criteria. This implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the
tables below:

The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will
determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which
considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This
NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse loading”
condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to
input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As
described in section (i) above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters
along with CMM values of 7 and 8.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping
restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). The current implementation of
EC3 in STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN
parameter. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the
design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members
which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints, i.e.
CMN = 1.0. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN
= 0.7), the proposed implementation will fall back on to the method and
coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI
documents) the proposed implementation will use the method as per the DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between
the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear
centre of the cross section. The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive if the load
acts towards the shear centre and is negative if it acts away from the shear
centre. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear centre at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear
centre. The user will be allowed to modify this value by using the new ‘ZG’
parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate
that the load acts exactly at the shear centre of the section so that the term
‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The UK-NA specifies different values for the λLT,0 and β factors to be used in
equation 6.57 of BS EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. The
current implementation in STAAD.pro does not differentiate between rolled and
welded sections and uses the default values in BS EN 1993-1-1 for λLT,0 and β.
282 — STAAD.Pro
The values specified in the UK-NA are:
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
λLT,0 = 0.4
β = 0.75
For welded sections:
λLT,0 = 0.2
β = 1.00
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table
6.5 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and buckling
curves to be used in this clause as given below:
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of
welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly
symmetric sections. Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the
method specified in the base code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 — Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, χ as per

LT
UK NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to work out
the LTB reduction factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the
imperfection factors to be used for calculating χ . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of
LT
buckling curves for “Rolled I Sections”, “Welded I Sections” and “Any other
sections”. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the
buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with
“Rolled I Sections” and “Welded I Sections”.

Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members
of constant cross section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in
LT
the implementation of EC3 (and the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the
program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to work out χ . For any case that is not
LT
dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to work out χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
should be replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this
document). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the UK NA, this
implementation will choose the buckling curves from the UK National Annex. For
any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA, the program will use the
method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA
for choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been
specified):
l Rolled doubly symmetric I & H Sections

l Rolled doubly symmetric hollow sections (SHS, RHS, CHS)
l Angle Sections
l Any other rolled section
l Welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b < 3.1
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-
1:2005 to work out χLT
l Welded I & H Sections with h/b ≥ 3.1.

For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or
Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to work out χLT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to work out the non
dimensional slenderness) will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this
document. Since the UK National Annex uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections
above, this implementation will only consider end restraint conditions
corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section 4.2 above). For all other
cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method
specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e. NA parameter in the
design input = 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or
welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of
BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up
284 — STAAD.Pro
sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e.
SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
Clause 6.3.2.3(2) – Modification factor, ‘f’ for LTB checks
The UK NA specifies the use of eqn. 6.58 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to work out the
modification factor ‘f’ for the LTB reduction factor χLT. To work out the modification
factor BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 uses a correction factor ‘kc’ given by Table 6.6 in the
code.
The UK-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as
below:
Kc = 1 / √C1, where C1 is to be obtained from the NCCI documents given in
section 4.2 of this document. The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the
values of C1 to be used in table 3.1 as shown below. This proposed
implementation will allow for the reduction factor based on the UK-NA.

These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all
other values of CMN (ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1
from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also
input a custom value of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired
value. The user can also get the program to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically
by setting the value of the ‘KC’ parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause
the program to work out a value of C1 corresponding to the end conditions and
the Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate ‘kc’ as given in the NA.
To work out C1, the program will use the NCCI documents mentioned in section
4.2 of this document.
Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B – Slenderness for flexural buckling
The UK NA specifies the value of λc0 for I, H channel or box section to be used in
equation 6.59 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not use this clause in the current implementation of
EC-3. Hence this clause will be ignored for the UK National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)BModification factor ‘kfl’
The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of BS EN 1993-
1-1 to be as follows:
= 1.0 for hot rolled I sections
= 1.0 for welded I section with h/b ≤ 2
= 0.9 for other sections
Note: STAAD.Pro does not use this clause in the current implementation of
EC-3. Hence this clause will be ignored for the UK National Annex.
Clause 6.3.3(5) – Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy and kzz
The UK-NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-

1:2005 can be used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the
case of doubly symmetric sections. The proposed implementation will hence use
equations in Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these interaction
factors for doubly symmetric sections. The current implementation of EC3 BS in
STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B.
286 — STAAD.Pro
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the UK NA gives the option of using
Annex B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the UK NA).
The UK NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum
allowable values of λ and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of BS EN 1993-
1-1:2005.
As per the UK NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the
weak axis (λy in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor χy should be taken
as the values from the highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural
buckling slenderness (λy), torsional slenderness (λ ) and torsional-flexural
T
slenderness (λ ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
TF
Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical
non-dimensional slenderness as:
λy = max
λ is calculated as λ = Ncr = min (N ,N ).

T T CrT crTF
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to work out NCrT or NcrTF.
Hence this implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document
“SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling
modes” to calculate these. See section 4.9 below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific
and hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3
implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections. In the current
implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950. This proposed
implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle sections
to work out the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the UK NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section
or a hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3
section for the purposes of this clause”. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross
sections that are NOT I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be
used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the

non-dimensional slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural
T
buckling checks. The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.pro does not allow
for this clause as BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the
elastic critical loads Ncr,T,F and Ncr,T (refer 6.3.14 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005).

The NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural
torsional buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the Ncr,TF and NcrT
factors and hence will to be included in the proposed implementation of the UK
NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is worked out as:
where, iy and iz are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z
(strong axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is worked out as:
For details on these equations refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.
5B.1 (c) EC3 NA French National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the French National Annex - titled Annexe Nationale a la NF EN
1993-1-1:2005 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA
document makes small changes to the base document.
Description

have been dealt with in the French National Annex (hereafter referred to as FR-
NA)and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:
l 3.2.1(1) Material properties

l 6.1(1) General
l 6.3.2.2 Lateral Torsional Buckling curves – General case
288 — STAAD.Pro
l 6.3.2.3(1) Lateral Torsional buckling curves for rolled or equivalent welded
sections
l 6.3.2.3(2) Modification factor calculations
l 6.3.2.4(1)B Slenderness limit λc0
l 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor ‘kfl’
l 6.3.3 Method for calculation interaction factors for members in combined
bending and compression
l Annex A Members in bending and axial compression
l 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buckling
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the French-NA.
Clause 3.2.1(1) - Material Properties
The material strengths (i.e. - steel grade strengths) to be used with NF EN 1993-1-
1 is given in Table 3.1 of the code. The French National Annex however, specifies a
separate table (Table 3.1 NF) for the yield and tensile strengths of steel grades.
This new table replaces Table 3.1 in NF EN 1993-1-1:2005. Table 3.1 NF excludes
steel grades from standards EN 10210-1 and EN 10219-1 that are given in EC-3.
STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades and values from the table given in the National
Annex (i.e. - Table 3.1 NF). Table 3.1 NF is similar to table 3.1 in EC3, apart from
the ‘fu’ values for S 355 and S355 W grade steel.

If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is
present in Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, this implementation will use the values
from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. The appropriate yield strength used (fy) will
be shown in the design output file.
Clause 6.1(1) – General
l Resistance of cross-sections - ΓM0 = 1.0

l Resistance of members to instability - ΓM1 = 1.0
l Resistance of cross sections to tension - ΓM2 = 1.25
290 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro sets the default values of the GM0, GM1 and GM2 parameters in the
design module to the values as:
GM0 = 1.0
GM1 = 1.0
GM2 = 1.25
Note: When NA 4 has been specified.
You may override these default values and set custom values to these parameters.
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as ‘0’,
STAAD.Pro will ignore the specified value and use the default values as given
above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter (which, in fact was common to the base EC-3
and was a reminiscent of the previous DD ENV implementation of EC-3) has
been removed. Hence any legacy STAAD files that have the GB1 Parameter
defined will need to be revised to take out this parameter as it is no longer valid
as per the latest EN1993.
Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks
The French NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005
to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χLT, requires the calculation of the
“Elastic Critical Buckling Moment”, Mcr. The French NA gives a method to work out
Mcr in its “Annex MCR”. This implementation will make use of this method to work
out Mcr. Annex MCR however deals with the calculation of Mcr for doubly
symmetric sections. Hence this implementation will use this method only for doubly
symmetric sections. For mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the
minor axis (i.e Tee sections) this implementation will use the method from the NCCI
document SN030a-EN-EU as given in the section below. For any other type of
section that is not dealt with by the Annex, this implementation will use the method
and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
1. Annex MCR

This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly
symmetric sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be
considered for this method in this implementation.
The equation to work out Mcr is given as :
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading
conditions. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases
as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex. Table 1 deals with the condition
of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of C1 is
determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2
of the National Annex however gives a formula to work out C1 as :
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA.
Hence this implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end
moment ration (ψ) is exactly equal to the values of ψ in the table. For all
other cases this implementation will calculate the value of C1 from equation
(6) in the Annex.
The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the
loading and end conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD).
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C1 & C2 using
the new ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ parameters in the design input mode.
The French NA considers three separate loading conditions:
l Members with end moments
l Members with transverse loading
l Members with end moments and transverse loading.
The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing
CMM parameter values in STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be
currently specified in the design input. Hence this implementation will
introduce two new values for CMM viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
292 — STAAD.Pro
The load to moment ratio (μ) will then be used in the calculations will then be
used to calculate C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex
MCR in the NA for details).
This implementation will also introduce a new parameter ‘MU’ to be specified
when using CMM = 7 or 8. The load to moment ratio (μ) to be used in the
calculations is to be input using the new ‘MU’ parameter. This implementation
will require that for the French National Annex if CMM = 7 or 8 has been
specified, the user should also either specify a value for ‘MU’ or input the
values for C1 and C2 using the ‘C1’ and/or ‘C2’ parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the

context of the French NA.
2. SN030a-EN-EU – Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending and

axial compression:
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment
(Mcr) for uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the
weak axis. Hence for this implementation the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-
Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric

built-up sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to
specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this
implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections.
The equation to work out Mcr for mono symmetric sections is given as :
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading
criteria. This implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables
below:

The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1,
C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin
ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the
“end moments and transverse loading” condition. The user however can use the
new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3
to be used in calculating Mcr.
294 — STAAD.Pro
Note: If ‘MU’ as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will
ignore MU and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. The current
implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD
ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member
under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping
restraints for the member( k = kw=1 .i.e. CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which
have no warping restraints. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5
or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients
in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents)
this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the
point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear centre of the
cross section. The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the
shear centre and is negative if it acts away from the shear centre. By default, the
program will assume that the load acts towards the shear centre at a distance equal
to (Depth of section/2) from the shear centre. The use will be allowed to modify
this value by using the new ‘ZG’ parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the
design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear centre of the
section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document “SN006a-EN-EU” to
calculate Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific
formulae to work out the coefficients. Hence, will wait for more information before
implementing this.
Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The FR-NA provides equations to work out the λ and α factors given in clause
LT0 LT
6.3.2.3
For rolled doubly symmetric sections use:
Since EN 1993-1-1:2005 limits the value of λLT0 to 0.4, this implementation will
only allow a maximum value of 0.4 for λ .
LT0
For welded doubly symmetric sections use:

For other sections
And for all sections use β = 1.0

These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NF EN 1993-1-1
to work out the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 — Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, χ as per

LT
UK NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to work out
the LTB reduction factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the
imperfection factors to be used for calculating χ . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of
LT
buckling curves for “Rolled I Sections”, “Welded I Sections” and “Any other
sections”. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the
buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with
“Rolled I Sections” and “Welded I Sections”.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members
of constant cross section the value of χLT should be determined from...”. Hence in
the implementation of EC3 (and the French Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the
program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to work out χ . For any case that is not
LT
dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to work out χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the French National Annex gives equations to work out the
imperfection factors to be used for various section types. (See section 4.3 of this
document). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the French NA, this
implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to work out χ .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or
Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to work out χLT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to work out the non
dimensional slenderness) will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this
document. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections
above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0
(See section 4.2 above) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN
parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
296 — STAAD.Pro
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e. NA parameter in the
design input = 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or
welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of
BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up
sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e.
SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
Clause 6.3.2.3(2) – Modification factor, ‘f’ for LTB checks
The French NA specifies that the modification factor is to be obtained as per the
default method given in EC-3. Hence this implementation will use the existing
functionality to work out the correction factor ‘kc’ to be used in the modification
factor f.
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also input a
custom value of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired value. The
user can also get the program to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically by setting
the value of the ‘KC’ parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program
to work out ‘kc’ from table 6.6 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005. This will correspond to the
end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e the value of CMM
parameter specified). For CMM = 7 the program will choose the value of ‘kc’ to be
either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the end moment ratio. For CMM = 8 the program will
choose the value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the end moment ratio.
An additional check will also be performed as given below:
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to
members that are free to rotate on plan (i.e. CMN =1.0). Hence for all other values
of CMN, this implementation will ignore ‘f’ and hence will use χ = χ .
LT,mod LT
Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B – Slenderness for flexural buckling
Note: STAAD does not use this clause in the current implementation of EC-3.
Hence this clause will be ignored for the French National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2) BModification factor ‘kfl’
Note: STAAD does not use this clause in the current implementation of EC-3.

Hence this clause will be ignored for the French National Annex.
Clause 6.3.3(5) – Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy and kzz
The French NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of NF EN 1993-1-

1:2005 to calculate these interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3
BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B. Hence the method in Annex A will
be added into this implementation.
The NA mentions that this method can be extended to singly symmetric I-Sections
(symmetric about the minor axis) if the elastic properties are used instead of the
plastic properties. However since STAAD does not have a provision to specify such
sections, this case will not be considered for this implementation.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into
account in case of mono symmetric sections. Torsional flexural buckling will need
to be taken into account based on the method given in the NCCI document
“SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling
modes”. See section below for details.
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term Cmi,0 in table
A.2 of Annex A:
Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the

non-dimensional slenderness λT, to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural
buckling checks. The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.pro does not allow
for this clause as NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate
the elastic critical loads Ncr,T,F and Ncr,T (refer 6.3.14 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005).
The NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural
torsional buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the Ncr,TF and NcrT
factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the French NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is worked out as:
298 — STAAD.Pro
where, iy and iz are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z
(strong axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is worked out as:
For details on these equations refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.
5C. European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part

1-1
The Timber Design facility as per EC5 in STAAD is based on the European Standard
Eurocode 5: Design of Timber Structures - Part 1-1 - General - Common rules and
rules for buildings. Principles of Limit States Design of Timber Structures are
adopted as specified in the code.
The application is limited to the PRISMATIC rectangular shapes only. There is no
Eurocode-specific timber section database / library consisting of pre-defined
shapes for analysis or for design. The feature of member selection is thus not
applicable to this code.
The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the
limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in
a uniform reliability is achieved for all timber structures under various loading
acceptably remote.

of EC 5. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as zz and the minor axis as yy.
The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as x and joins the start joint of the
member to the end with the same positive direction.
EC5, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of
STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes
definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure 1 below:
Figure 1 Axes convention in STAAD and EC5

Determination of Factors
(A) Kmod – Modification factor taking into account of Load-duration (LDC) and
Moisture-content (Service Class - SCL). Reference Table 3.1 of EC-5-2004.
For “Solid Timber”, the values are incorporated in the program.
(B) m – Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-
2004.
For “Solid Timber”, the value of m (= 1.3) is incorporated in the program.
300 — STAAD.Pro
(C) Kh – Size Factor.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the
reference width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be
increased by the factor Kh.
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in
bending, the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the
factor Kh.
As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic
timber density kg/m3 the reference depth in bending or the reference
width (maximum cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm.
The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is
incorporated in the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value
of Kh for Glued laminated timber and Laminated veener lumber respectively.
(D) KC90 – Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting
and degree of compressive deformation.
For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of grain
alignment, this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is used in
STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of EC-5-2004 in
this regard.
(E) Km – Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section.
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress
checking. For rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is
incorporated in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6
of EC-5-2004 in this regard.
(F) Kshape – Factor depending on shape of cross section.
For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less
than equal design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is
determined by STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-
2004.

5C.2 Analysis Methodology
Symbol Description
S Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain alignment.
t0d
S Design tensile stress perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to grain
t90d
alignment.
S Design compressive stress parallel to grain alignment.
c0d
S Design compressive stress perpendicular to grain alignment.
c90d
S Design bending stress about zz axis.
mzd
S Design bending stress about yy axis.
myd
S Design shear stress.
vd
S Design torsional stress.
tor_d
F Design tensile strength - parallel to the grain alignment.
t0d
F Design tensile strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment.
t90d
F Design compressive strength - parallel to the grain alignment.
c0d
F Design compressive strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment.
c90d
F Design bending strength - about zz-axis.
mzd
F Design bending strength - about yy-axis.
myd
F Design shear strength about yy axis.
vd
RATIO Permissible ratio of stresses as provided by the user.
The default value is 1.
l ,l Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about zz axis.
z rel,z
l ,l Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about yy axis.
y rel,y
E Fifth percentile value of modulus of elasticity parallel to grain.
0,05
G Fifth percentile value of shear modulus parallel to grain.
0,05
I Second moment of area about the strong z-axis.
z
I Second moment of area about the weak y-axis.
y
I Torsional moment of inertia.
tor
f Characteristic bending strength.
mk
b, h Width and depth of beam.
302 — STAAD.Pro
Equations for Characteristic Values of Timber Species as per Annex-A of EN
338:2003
The following equations were used to determine the characteristic values:
Basic Inputs: For a particular Timber Strength Class (TSC), the following
characteristic strength values are required to compute the other related
characteristic values.
1. Bending Strength – f
m,k
2. Mean Modulus of Elasticity in bending – E
0, mean
3. Density - r
k
Wood Type
SI
Property Symbol Softwood Hardwood
No.
(C) (D)
1. Tensile Strength parallel to f 0.6 * f
t,0,k m,k
grain
2. Tensile Strength f Minimum of {0.6 and
t,90,k
perpendicular to grain (0.0015*r )}
k
3. Compressive Strength f 5 * (f ) 0.45
c,0,k m,k
parallel to grain
4. Compressive Strength f 0.007*r 0.0015*r
c,90,k k k
perpendicular to grain
5. Shear Strength f Minimum of {3.8 and
v,k
(0.2*f 0.8)}
m,k
6. Modulus of Elasticity E 0.67* 0.84*
0,05
parallel to grain E E
0,mean 0,mean
7. Mean Modulus of Elasticity E E E /15
90,mean 0,mean 0,mean
perpendicular to grain /30
8. Mean Shear Modulus G E /16
mean 0,mean
9. Shear Modulus G E /16
0,05 0,05
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations,
may differ with the tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all
such cases, the values obtained from the provided equations are treated as actual
and is used by the program, as the values of Table-1 are based on these equations.
Finding the Design values of Characteristic Strength
As per clause 2.4.1, Design values of a strength property shall be calculated as:

Where X is design value of strength property, X characteristic value of strength
d k
property and g is partial factor for material properties.
m
The member resistance in timber structure is calculated in STAAD according to the
procedures outlined in EC5. This depends on several factors such as cross
sectional properties, different load and material factors, timber strength class, load
duration class, service class and so on. The methodology adopted in STAAD for
calculating the member resistance is explained here.
Check for Tension stresses
If the direction of applied axial tension is parallel to the direction of timber grain
alignment, the following formula should be checked:
If the direction of applied axial tension is perpendicular to the direction of timber

grain alignment, the following formula should be checked:
Check for Compression stresses

If the direction of applied axial compression is parallel to the direction of timber
grain alignment, the following formula should be checked:
If the direction of applied axial compression is perpendicular to the direction of

timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked:
Check for Bending stresses

If members are under bending stresses, the following conditions should be
satisfied. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
304 — STAAD.Pro
Check for Shear stresses
Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable values:
Check for Torsional stresses

Members subjected to torsional stress should satisfy the following equation:
Check for combined Bending and Axial tension

Members subjected to combined action of bending and axial tension stress should
satisfy the following conditions. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong
axis:
Check for combined Bending and axial Compression

If members are subjected to bending and axial compression stress, following
equations should be satisfied. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:

Stability check
A. Column Stability check

The relative slenderness ratios should be calculated as follows. Please note
that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
If both l and l are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions
rel,z rel,y
should be satisfied:
In other cases, the following conditions should be satisfied. Please note that in
STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
306 — STAAD.Pro
Where the symbols Kcz and Kcy are defined as follows.
Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
The value of b incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber ,i.e. 0.2.
c
B. Beam Stability check

If members are subjected to only a moment about the strong axis z, the stresses
should satisfy the following equation:
Where a combination of moment about the strong z-axis and compressive force
exists, the stresses should satisfy the following equation:

308 — STAAD.Pro
structure.
altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 5C.1 - Timber Design EC 5: Part 1-1 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SCL 3 Service Class (Ref. Cl.2.3.1.3)
¨ 1 = Class 1, Moisture content <=
12%
¨ 2 = Class 2, Moisture content <=
20%
¨ 3 = Class 3, Moisture content >
20%
LDC 1 Load Duration Class (Ref.
Cl.2.3.1.2), required to get the K-
MOD value from Table – 3.1.
¨ 1 - Permanent action
¨ 2 - Long term action
¨ 3 - Medium term action
¨ 4 - Short term action
¨ 5 - Instantaneous action

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
TSC 6 (C24) Timber Strength Class (Ref.
Reference EN338 – 2003)
Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 = C16, 3 =
C18, 4 = C20, 5 = C22, 6 = C24, 7
= C27, 8 = C30, 9 = C35, 10 = C40,
11 = C45, 12 = C50.
Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14 = D35,
15 = D40, 16 = D50, 17 = D60, 18
= D70.
This TSC definition will calculate
the corresponding characteristic
strength values using the
equations as given in BS-EN-338,
Annex - A.
ALPHA 0.0 Angle of inclination of load to the
grain alignment. (Ref. Cl.6.1.1,
Cl.6.1.2, Cl.6.1.3, Cl.6.1.4)
0.0 = Load parallel to grain,
90.0 = Load Perpendicular to grain
KC90 1.0 Factor taking into account the load
configuration, possibility of splitting
and degree of compressive
deformation. (Ref. Cl.6.1.5-(2))
¨ Range: 1.0 £ KC90 £ 4.0
¨ Other than the default value, user
may specify any value within the
range, depending on load-position,
load-dispersion, contact length at
support locations etc.
310 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
MTYP 0 Member Type: Beam/Column. (Ref.
Cl.6.3.2, Cl.6.3.3)
¨ 0 – Not defined by the user –
checks both clauses (Default).
¨ 1 – Beam Member
¨ 2 – Column Member
This information is required to find
which stability check will be
performed as per the Cl 6.3
according to the Member Type.
KLEF 1.0 Effective Length Factor to check
(Member Lateral Torsional Buckling. (Ref.
Length) Table 6.1)
Span of the beam depending on the
support conditions and load
configurations. The user will put the
appropriate value from the Table 6.1.
Required only for MTYP has a value
of 1 (Beam).
KLY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Local-y-
(Member axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the
Length) computation of the relative
slenderness ratios.
KLZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Local-z-
(Member axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the
Length) computation of the relative
slenderness ratios.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
TRACK 0 Degree/Level of Details of design
output results.
Available options: 0 / 1 / 2
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to
allowable value.
SERV No Default Defines the load case numbers –
Value those are to be considered for
serviceability (deflection) check.
¨ The list of this parameter must
contain only the valid load-case
numbers.
¨ Deflection checks will be performed
only on those load-case results.
¨ If this parameter is not provided,
then in-spite of the presence of the
parameter DFF – the deflection check
will NOT be performed.
DFF No Default “Deflection Length” / Max. Allowable
Value Net Final Local Deflection.
In this case, deflection check will be
performed, if both the parameters
SERV and DFF are present with
specific values. For appropriate range
of values, please refer Cl.7.2 (Table
7.2)
DJ1 Start node number for a physical
member under consideration for
Deflection Check.
312 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
DJ2 End node number for a physical
member under consideration for
Deflection Check.
5C.4 Verification Problems

Verification problem No. 1
Verification problem No. 2
A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is
subjected to an axial compressive force of 50.0 kN.
Design of the member - ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE
Material properties:
Timber class: C24
Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <= 20%
Load duration classes: Medium-term
Cross section properties:
Length of the member is 1 m.
Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm,
Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm²,
Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,
y
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm,
z
Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm³
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm³
y
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 …from table 3.1
Material factors g = 1.30 … from table 2.3
m
f = 21.00 N/mm²,
c0k

F = (Kmod.f )/g = (0.80x21.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm²[Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
c0d c0k m
Cross section loads:
F = 50.000 kN
x
Compression parallel to the grain:
S = (1000xF )/A = (1000x50.000)/14454
c0d x
= 3.46N/mm² < 12.92N/mm² (F )
c0d
The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength:
= 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 [Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P]
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios: l = (1000/57) = 17.54 and l = (1000/21) = 47.62
z y
E 1.1031 kN/m2
0,mean =
As timber grade is C24, i.e., Soft Wood, E = 0.67 * E
0,05 0,mean
… [Annex A,EN 338:2003]
Since, l is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:

rel,y
314 — STAAD.Pro
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to Compression
only, so actual bending stress is zero.
Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
The Input File:
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC WOOD

E 1.10316e+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -50
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
The member checking part of the output file:
316 — STAAD.Pro
A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is
subjected to an axial compressive force of 5.0 kN and moments of 2.0 kN.m and
1.0 kN.m about its major and minor axes respectively.
Design of the member - ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE
Material properties:
Timber Strength Class: C24

Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <=20%
Load duration: Medium-term
Cross section properties:

Length of the member is 1 m.
Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm,
Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm²,
Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,
y
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm,
z
Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm³
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm³
y
Characteristic material properties for timber:

Modification factor, Kmod = 0.80
Material factor g = 1.30
m
f = 21.00 N/mm², E = 7370 N/mm2,
c0k 0,05
F = Kmod.f /g = (0.80x21.00)/1.30 = 12.92N/mm²
c0d c0k m
f = 24.00 N/mm²,
myk
F = Kmod.f /g = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm²
myd myk m
f = 24.00 N/mm²,
mzk
F = Kmod.f /g = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm²
mzd mzk m
Cross section loads:
F = 5.000 kN, M = 2.000 kN.m, M = 1.000 kN.m
x z y
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios: l = (1000/57) = 17.54 and l = (1000/21) = 47.62
z y
Since, l is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:

rel,y
318 — STAAD.Pro
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70
S = (1000F /A) = (1000x5.000)/14454 = 0.35 N/mm²
c0d x
S = (10 xM )/W = (106x2.000)/(4.770x105) = 4.19 N/mm²
6
mzd z z
S = (10 xM )/W = (106x1.000)/(1.759x105) = 5.69 N/mm²
6
myd y y
Hence the critical ratio is 0.616 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
The Input File:
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 08-Jun-05
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;

ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316e+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -5.0 MX 1.0 MZ 2.0

PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
The member checking part of the output file:
320 — STAAD.Pro
322 — STAAD.Pro
Section 6
Egyptian Codes
6A. Egyptian Codes - Concrete Design Per Egyptian

Code - ECCS203
STAAD has the capability of performing design of concrete beams, columns and
slabs according to ECCS 203. The 2004 revision of the code is currently
implemented. Given the width and depth of a section, STAAD will calculate the
required reinforcement to resist the forces and moments.

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY

1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.

changed to suit the particular design being performed. The following Beam Design
Brief contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values.

effects in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is
equivalent to the procedure presented in ECCS203-2004 equation 4-11. In this
section, the code recognizes that additional moments induced by deflection are
present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by the design
324 — STAAD.Pro
formula in equation 6-38, 6-37 etc. This is the method used in the design for
concrete in STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects
of these second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the
design. In a PDELTA analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure,
the additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These can be
compared to those calculated using the formulation of ECCS203-2004.
6A.5 Beam Design

beam loadings are pre scanned to identify the critical load cases at different
sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g.
Design for Flexure
designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently,
design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per ECCS203-2004. Although
exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally
which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other
practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by
STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.

Design for Shear

moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the
maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional
moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear
reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD
program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear
forces acting on these sections.
The following represents a sample Beam Design Output:
6A.6 Column Design

requirements of ECCS203-2004 equation 6-37,6-38,6-41 etc are followed, with
the user having control on the effective length parameters. Bracing conditions are
326 — STAAD.Pro
controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or
not the column is short or slender and whether it requires additional moment
calculations.
The following represents a sample Column Design output:

The following represents a sampleShear Design Output:
328 — STAAD.Pro
6B. Egyptian Codes - Steel Design Per Egyptian
Code # 205
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of
Egyptian code of practice for structural steel construction and bridges Code No.
205(Min Dec #279/2001) design in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural
logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the principles of
allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by
overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing sections describe
the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability
criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is selected on the
basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability
and strength requirements and reports the critical loading condition and the
governing code criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the
detailing requirements like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects such as
flange buckling and web crippling.

6B.2 Allowable Stresses
The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable
stress design method as per Egyptian Code No. 205, It is a method for
proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable
stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service
conditions. It would not be possible to describe every aspect of Egyptian Code:
205 in this manual. This section, however, will discuss the salient features of the
allowable stresses specified by Egyptian Code: 205 and implemented in STAAD.
Appropriate sections of Egyptian Code: 205 will be referenced during the
discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
6B.2.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per Egyptian Code: 205 is
described below.
The estimated stress on the net effective sectional area in various members,
multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum
guaranteed yield stress of the material.
The permissible stress in axial tension, s in MPa on the net effective area of the
at
sections shall not exceed: Clause: 2.6.2
F = 0.58 f
t y
where,
f = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

y
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression

members shall not exceed the permissible stress calculated based on the following
formula: (Clause: 2.6.4)
For all grade of steel:

For l = kl/r ³ 100
330 — STAAD.Pro
F = 7500/l2
c
where,
F = Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa

c
f = Yield stress of steel, in Mpa
y
l=l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length
to appropriate radius of gyration
6B.2.2 Bending Stress
The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based

on the following formula: (Clause: 2.6.5)
The laterally unsupported length (Lu) of the compression flange is limited by
F or F = 0.64 f
bt bc y
Clause 2.6.5.5 Tension F
bt
F = 0.58 F
bt y
Clause 2.6.5.5 Compression F
bc
I. Compression flange is braced laterally at intervals exceeding L , the allowable
u
bending stress in compression F will be taken as follows.
bc
i.
for shallow thick flanged sections, where approximately the
lateral tensional buckling stress is governed by the torsion strength
given by:
ii.
For Deep flanged sections, where approximately the lateral
torsional buckling stress governed by the buckling strength given by:

where,
L = Effective laterally unsupported length of compression flange.

u
k = Effective length factor
r = radius of gyration about minor axis of a section compressing the
T
compression web area (in cms)
b = Compression flange width
f
d = Total depth
C = Coefficient depending on the type of load and support conditions as
b
given in table 2.2
II. Compression on extreme fibers of channels bent about their major axis
where,
332 — STAAD.Pro
F = Bending stress in tension
bt
F = Bending stress in compression
bc
f = Yield stress of steel, in MPa
y
6B.2.3 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 2.6.3 of Egyptian code
205. For shear on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consists of
the product of the total depth and the web thickness.
q = 0.35F
all y
where,
q = Allowable shear stress

all
6B.2.4 Combined Stress
Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned

accordingly to following
Axial Compression and Bending
All the members subjected to bending and axial compression are required to satisfy
the equation of section 2.6.7.1
f = Actual compression stress

ca
F = Allowable compressive stress, clause 2.6.4
c
f ,f = Actual Bending stress about x and y-axes respectively.
bcx bcy
F ,F = Allowable compressive bending stress, clause 2.6.5
bcx bcy

F ,F = Euler stress in t/cm2
Ex Ey
C = Moment modification factor
m
Axial Tension and Bending
All the members subject to bending and axial tension are required to satisfy the
equation of section 2.6.7.2
6B.3 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the
appropriate maximum values. Table 5.1 of Egyptian code #205: summarizes the
maximum slenderness ratios for different types of members. In STAAD
implementation of Egyptian code #205, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio
can be provided for each member. If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided,
compression members will be checked against a maximum value of 180 and
tension members will be checked against a maximum value of 300
6B.4 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable
of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on
the Egyptian code #205 requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections
of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections may be
specified using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION command. If no sections are
specified, the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends.
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition,
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and
magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed out.

that is, the lightest section, which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The
section selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as originally
specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types of steel
334 — STAAD.Pro
sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are
originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user
provided table. Member selection can not be performed on members whose cross
sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed
in Table 13B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used
to specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is
provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three
(3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from
each one.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a
tabulated fashion as well as step by step procedure.
Design of Member No. 1 As Per Egyptian Steel Code 205

Table 6B.1 - Egyptian Steel Design Code #205 Parameters

FYLD 250 MPA Yield strength of steel.
(36.25 KSI)
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis.
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis.
CMY 0.85 for sidesway and Cm value in local y & z axes
CMZ calculated for no sidesway
MAIN 180 (Comp. Memb.) Allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for
TMAIN 300 (Tension Memb) Allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable str
BEAM 3.0 0.0 = design only for end moments and thos
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate section forces at twelfth point
each intermediate location and report the crit
maximum.
PROFILE - Search for the lightest section for the profile m
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local d
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
336 — STAAD.Pro
Section 7
French Codes
7A. French Codes - Concrete Design Per B.A.E.L

STAAD has the capabilities for performing design of concrete beams, columns and
slabs according to B.A.E.L. - 1991. Given the width and depth (or diameter for
circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcing to
resist the various input loads.
Design per B.A.E.L. is invoked by using the CODE BAEL command.

per B.A.E.L. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for
code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process.
Default values, of commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have
been used for simplicity. Table 7A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters
and their default values.

Table 7A.1 - French Concrete Design B.A.E.L. Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN * 300 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
N/mm2
FYSEC * 300 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel.
N/mm2
FC * 30 N/ Concrete Yield Stress.
mm2
CLEAR * 20 Clearance of reinforcing bar. Value is
mm automatically set to 20 mm for C35 and
higher.
MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm
- 60mm).
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size.
(8mm - 60mm).
(8mm - 60mm).
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.
(Only considers shear - use MEMBER OFFSET
for bending).
EFACE *0.0 Face of Support Location at end of beam.
(Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as
positive numbers.).
TRACK 0.0 Critical Moment will not be printed out with
beam design report. A value of 1.0 will mean
a print out.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the design moments will
be magnified.
338 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
considered in finding critical moments for
beam design.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value
defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This value
defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
* These values must be provided in the units the user is currently using for input.

STAAD provides the user two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in
the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is a procedure
which takes into account second order effects. Here, STAAD accounts for the
secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA
ANALYSIS command is used. STAAD, after solving for the joint displacements of
the structure, calculates the additional moments induced in the structure.
Therefore, by using PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will
require no user modification before beginning member design.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness
effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors. Here the user
approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will
be multiplied before beginning member design.

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 to 7 9 PRISM YD 450 ZD 300.

11 13 PR YD 300.
300 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area
(AX) is not provided for these members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also
note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided, the program
will calculate values from YD and ZD.
7A.5 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all
active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and
locate critical sections. The total number of sections considered is twelve, unless
that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment
values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed, with cut-off
lengths calculated to include required development length.
Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these
values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The stirrups are assumed
to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to
torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
SFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
EFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
340 — STAAD.Pro
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
7A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for
square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the
reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause
slightly conservative results in some cases.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
MMAG 1.5 MEMB 4 5
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Slab and walls are designed per BAEL 1983 specifications. To design a slab or wall,
it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in
accordance with Chapter II, section 6.40.
from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual).
The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as
transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLEAR listed in Table

5A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 5A.1 are
not applicable to slab design.
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
7B. French Codes - Steel Design Per the French

Code
STAAD implementation of French Steel Design is based on Centre Technique
Industriel de la Construction Metallique publication entitled "Design Rules for
Structural Steelwork."
limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned according to the limit
states of which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-states are recognized: ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability; that in
342 — STAAD.Pro
uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability.
criteria, as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths,
desired section type, or other related parameters. The code checking portion of the
program verifies that code requirements for each selected section are met and also
The next few sections describe the salient features of STAAD implementation of
"Design Rules for Structural Steelwork." A detailed description of the design
process, along with its underlying concepts and assumptions, is available in the
specification document.
7B.2 Basis of Methodology

The "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork (Revision 80)" permits the usage of
elastic analysis. Thus, in STAAD, linear elastic analysis method is used to obtain the
forces and moments in the members. However, strength and stability
considerations are based on the principles of plastic behavior. Axial compression
buckling and lateral torsional buckling are taken into consideration for calculation
of axial compression resistance and flexural resistance of members. Slenderness
calculations are made and overall geometric stability is checked for all members.

The member strengths are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures
outlined in section 4 of this specification. Note that the program automatically
considers co-existence of axial force, shear and bending in calculating section
capacities.
For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed. For axial
compression capacity, formulas of section 5.3 are used.
Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections
4.5 and 4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting
moment per section 5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 6B.1)
must be used to specify the unsupported length of the compression flange for a
laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is also referred to as twisting
length.

7B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending
The procedures of sections 4.55 and 5.32 are implemented for interaction of axial
forces and bending. Appropriate interaction equations are used and the governing
criterion is determined.

the program, thus allowing the engineer to control the design process to suit an
The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used numbers for
conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or
all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical
structure.
Table 7B.1 French Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KY 1.0 K value for axial compression
buckling about local Y-axis. Usually,
this is the minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for axial compression
buckling about local Z-axis. Usually,
this is the major axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio
Length about Y-axis for axial compression.
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio
Length about Z-axis for axial compression.
members.
UNL Member Unsupported length of compression
Length flange for calculating moment
resistance.
344 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a
fraction of member length.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress printing of all
design strengths.
1.0 = Print all design strengths.
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth (used in
member selection).
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth (used in
member selection).
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect
and design strength.
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate moments at tenth
points long the beam, and use
maximum Mz for design.
DFF None "Deflection Length" divided by the
(Mandatory Maximum allowable local deflection
for
deflection
check)
of member calculation of "Deflection Length"
(See Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for cal-
member culation of "Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SAME* 0.0 Controls the sections to try during a
SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section

of the same type as
original
1.0 = Try only those
sections with a similar
name as original, e.g. if
the original is an HEA
100, then only HEA
sections will be selected,
even if there are HEM’s in
the same table.
C1 1.0 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in the
calculation of M(D), the critical twist-
ing moment and as shown in CM 66
Addendum 80, table 5, usual range
from 0.71 to 4.10
C2 1.0 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in the
calculation of M(D), the critical twist-
ing moment and as shown in CM 66
Addendum 80, table 5, usual range
from 0.0 to 1.56
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will
7B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the STAAD.Pro
implementation of CM 66 (Revn. 80). For general information on these options,
refer to the Technical Reference sections 2.5 and 2.6. For information on
specification of these commands, refer to the Technical reference manual sections
5.47.2 and 5.47.3.

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in the output file in a
tabular format.
346 — STAAD.Pro
Please note the following: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66
(Revn. 80) specification which governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed.
The following is a detailed description of printed items:
PC = Member Compression Capacity

TR = Member Tension Capacity
MUZ = Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis)
MUY = Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis)
VPZ = Member Shear Capacity (z-axis)
VPY = Member Shear Capacity (y-axis)
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as

requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle,
double angle, channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams
and code checking of prismatic properties.
Sample Input data for Steel Design:
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL

CHECK CODE ALL
7B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library

for these members.
An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the
end of this section.
IPE Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
10 15 TA ST IPE140
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180
HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100
IPN Shapes
The designation for the IPN shapes is similar to that for the IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST IPN200
23 56 TA ST IPN380
348 — STAAD.Pro
T Shapes
the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T IPE140
2 8 TA T HEM120
U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100
6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A
16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A
Double U Channels
11 TA D UAP150
17 TA D UAP250A SP 0.5

UAP150 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with
a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels.
Angles
16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
of 2.7mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the
z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) should be used instead of ST.

17 21 TA RA L25X25X4
22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4
appears in the section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.
Double Angles
33 35 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD L80X40X6
43 TO 47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75
Section names of tubes, just like angles, consist of the depth, width and wall
thickness as shown below.
64 78 TA ST TUB50252.7
66 73 TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall
thickness of 2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width
of 100mm and a wall thickness of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is
part of the section name.
Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations.
For example,
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be
performed for TUBE sections specified in this way.
350 — STAAD.Pro
To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the
diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal portion of the
value provided for the diameter. The following example illustrates the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP422.6
3 64 78 TA ST PIP21912.5
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm.

Members 3, 64 and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of
12.5mm.
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length
units. Only code checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of
SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES
3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES

4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
352 — STAAD.Pro
Section 8
German Codes
8A. German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the DIN 1045 -
November 1989. Slab design is also available but this follows the requirements of
Baumann, Munich, which is the basis for Eurocode 2. Design for a member involves
calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations
are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from
the analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on
the cross section are also reported in the output.

For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)
For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.

11 13 PR YD 350.
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350mm diameter. It is absolutely
imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.

There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated.
The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN 1045
17.4.3/17.4.4 which is used as the basis for commonly used design charts
considering e/d and sk/d for conditions where the slenderness moment exceeds
70. This method has been adopted in the column design in STAAD per the DIN
code.
The second option is to compute the secondary moments through an analysis.
Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the
relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements
are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments
are then evaluated. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA
ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note
that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be
provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and
moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based
on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load
etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically. The column is designed for the total moment which is the sum of
354 — STAAD.Pro
the primary and secondary forces. The secondary moments can be compared to
those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
8A.5 Beam Design

beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections
of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g. 0., .1, .2, .25, .3,
.4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the
design force envelopes.
Design for Flexure
designed to resist these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of
singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the
single or multiple layers. The entire flexural design is performed again in a second
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per the DIN code. Although exact
considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by
STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.
Design for Shear and Torsion
Shear design in STAAD conforms to the specifications of section 17.5 of DIN 1045.
moments. Shear and torsional design is performed at the start and end sections of
the member at a distance "d" away from the node of the member where "d" is the
effective depth calculated from flexural design. The maximum shear forces from
amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments are used in the
design. The capacity of the concrete in shear and torsion is determined at the
location of design and the balance, if any, is carried by reinforcement. It is assumed

that no bent-up bars are available from the flexural reinforcement to carry and
"balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance
shear forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for
beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
8A.6 Column Design

load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. The requirements of DIN 1045-
figure 13, for calculating the equilibrium equations for rectangular and circular
sections from first principles, is implemented in the design. The user has control of
the effective length (sk) in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as
described on Table 8A.1. This means that the slenderness will be evaluated along
with e/d to meet the requirements of DIN 1045 section 17.4.3 and 17.4.4.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. Square and
rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on all four sides
equally. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4).
This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. The TRACK parameter
may be used to obtain the design details in various levels of descriptivity.
356 — STAAD.Pro
Example of Input Data for Column Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
8A.7 Slab Design

To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analysed. The
command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the
Technical Reference Manual. Slabs are designed to specifications as described by
BAUMANN of MUNICH which is the basis for Eurocode 2.
The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters are those applicable to slab
design:
1. FYMAIN Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
2. FC Concrete grade
3. CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar.
This is considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4. SRA Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of the required
transverse reinforcement relative to the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement
for the calculation of BAUMANN design forces.
The other parameters shown in Table 7A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
BAUMANN equations

If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on Mx and My forces
which are obtained from the STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce resolved BAUMANN forces
into the design replacing the pure Mx and My moments. These new design
moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section,
resolved as an axial force. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered.
If SRA is set to -500, an orthogonal layout will be assumed. If however a skew is
to be considered, an angle is given in degrees measured from the local element X
axis anticlockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated
and shown in the design format.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10mm in the longitudinal
direction and 8mm in the transverse. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the
slab exterior face.

changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A.1 of this manual
contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is
necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before
performing the concrete design.
Table 8A.1 - German Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 420 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For
slabs, it is 500N/mm2 for both
directions)
FYSEC 420N/mm2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement
a. Applicable to shear and torsion
reinforcement in beams
FC 25N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 14 16
20 25 32 40 50
358 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar
size. Applicable to shear and torsion
reinforcement in beams.
CLEAR 25mm Clear cover for reinforcement measured
from concrete surface to closest bar
perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar
size. Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN
above.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of
beam, measured from the start joint.
(Only applicable for shear - use
MEMBER OFFSET for bending)
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam,
measured from the end joint. (NOTE:
Both SFACE & EFACE must be positive
numbers.)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be
printed with beam design report.
and spacing. For columns gives a
detailed table of output with additional
moments calculated.
2.0 = For beams gives area of steel
required at intermediate sections. (see
NSECT)
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design
moments are magnified for column
design
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to
be considered in finding critical moment
for beam design. The upper limit is 20.
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This value
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. Thedefault

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
value is provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.

SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout
without considering torsional moment
Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout
considering Mxy
A = Skew angle considered in
BAUMANN equations. A is the angle in
degrees.
8B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code
German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code

8B.1 General
the DIN code of practice for structural steel design (DIN 18800 and DIN 4114) in
STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the
principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for
member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The
allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the
basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also
checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are
recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
1) Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
2) Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
360 — STAAD.Pro
3) Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.

and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.

For specification of member properties of standard German steel sections, the steel
section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the
syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member
properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information
on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Program User's manual.

8B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library
database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since
for these members during the analysis. An example of member property
be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
IPE Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way:
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER140

HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160
I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example
illustrates the designation.
14 15 TA ST I200 (indicates an I-section with 200mm depth)
T Shapes
the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120
U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections.
The former (U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter
(U260) has a depth of 260mm.
11 TA D U70X40
27 TA D U260
Double Channels
available. The letter “D” in front of the section name will specify a double channel,
e.g. D U180. The spacing between the double channels is provided following the
expression “SP”.
11 TA D U180
27 TA D U280 SP 0.5 (Indicates 2 channels back to back spaced at 0.5 length units)
Angles
362 — STAAD.Pro
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5
of 2.5mm. The above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds
to the Z-Z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis,
type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5
Double Angles
using the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal
angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between the angles is
provided by using the word SP and the spacing value following the section name.
14 TO 20 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
21 TO 27 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the
diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the
value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP602.9 (60.3mm dia, 2.9mm wall thickness)

3 64 67 TA ST PIP40612.5 (406.4mm dia, 12.5mm wall thickness)
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units.
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,

15 TO 25 TA ST TUB100603.6
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mmX60mm and the wall thickness
of 3.6mm.
Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and
Thickness) instead of by their table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current
length units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for
TUBE sections specified this way.
SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEA220
* U CHANNELS
364 — STAAD.Pro
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
FINISH

The allowable stresses used in the implementation are based on DIN 18800 (Part 1)
- Section 7. The procedures of DIN 4114 are used for stability analysis. The basic

measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under
various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable
compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional
properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on.
Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.

basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given
member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is
present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 6B.1) and
proceeds with member selection or code checking.
The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the
procedure of DIN 4114 (Part 1) - Section 7. Compressive resistance is a function
of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the
slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ.
Allowable stress for Bending and Shear
The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such
factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of
the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. Shear capacities are
a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for
the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear capacities.

8B.6 Combined Loading
for all modeled loading situations. Members subjected to axial force and bending
are checked using the criteria of DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 6.1.6. In addition,
for members with compression and bending, the criteria of DIN 4114 (Part 1) -
Section 10 is used. Similarly, for members with axial tension and bending, the
criteria of DIN 4114 (Part 1) - Section 15 is used.
366 — STAAD.Pro
communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default
parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the
situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly
Table 8B.1 - German Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is the
minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is the
major axis.
LY Member Length in local y-axis to calculate
Length slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length in local z-axis to calculate
PY 240 Strength of steel.
N/sq.mm
UNL Member Unrestrained member length in lateral
Length torsional buckling checks.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a factor of
actual member length.
BEAM 0.0 Number of sections to be checked per
member:
0.0 = Design only for end sections.
1.0 = Check at location of maximum MZ
along member.
2.0 = Check ends plus location of beam
1.0 check.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
3.0 = Check at every 1/13th of the member
length and report the maximum.
TRACK 0.0 Level of detail in output file:
0.0 = Output summary of results
1.0 = Output summary of results plus
member capacities
2.0 = Output detailed results
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable
stresses
SGR 0.0 Grade of steel:
0.0 = St 37-2
1.0 = St 52-3
2.0 = StE 355
SBLT 0 Specify section as either rolled or built-up:
0 = Rolled
1 = Built-up
Cb 0 Beam coefficient n, defined in Table 9: If
Cb = 0, program will use n = 2.5 for rolled
sections and 2.0 for welded sections.
Cmm 1.0 Moment factor, Zeta, defined in Table 10:
1.0 = fixed ended member with constant
moment, Zeta = 1.0
2.0 = pin ended member with UDL, Zeta =
1.12
3.0 = pin ended member with central point
load, Zeta = 1.35
4.0 = fixed ended member, Zeta calculated
from end moments.
DMAX 1.0 m Maximum allowable depth during member
selection
DMIN 0.0 m Minimum required depth during member
selection
SAME 0.0 Control of sections to try during a SELECT
process:
368 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
0.0 = Try every section of the same type as
the original.
1.0 = Try only those with a similar name.

8B.8 Code Checking
of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on
the structure. The adequacy is checked per the DIN requirements.
(default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking
output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.

provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member
selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.

UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE GERMAN

NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
370 — STAAD.Pro
Section 9
Indian Codes
9A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS456

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on limit state
method of IS: 456 (2000).

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), T-Beams and L-shapes


UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are
rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members,
with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350
mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape
with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange
depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform
design as per IS:456(2000). Default parameter values have been selected such
that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements.
These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table
8A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their
default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and
Newton before performing the concrete design.
Table 9A.1 - Indian Concrete Design IS456 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 415 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
steel.
FC 2
30 N/mm Concrete Yield Stress.
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size.
372 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar
size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar
size.
A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial
force will be taken into account for
beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
correspond to the terms "Braced" and
"Unbraced" described in Notes 1, 2,
and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of IS456:2000.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value
defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design. This
value defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
MIDDLE and END.
For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments are
printed in addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
TRACK 1.0 output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
With TRACK = 1.0, column interaction
analysis results are printed in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output.
With TRACK = 9.0, the details of
section capacity calculations are
printed.
length of column about major axis. See
Note 2 below.
length of column about minor axis. See
Note 2 below.
ULY 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual
length of column about minor axis. See
Note 3 below.
374 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
ULZ 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual
length of column about major axis. See
Note 3 below.
TORSION 0.0 A value of 0.0 means torsion to be
considered in beam design.
A value of 1.0 means torsion to be
neglected in beam design.
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main
reinforcing bars in beam and column.
For column centre to centre distance
between main bars cannot exceed
300mm.
beam. It is used to check against shear
at the face of the support in beam
design. The parameter can also be
used to check against shear at any
point from the start of the member.
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of
beam. The parameter can also be used
to check against shear at any point
from the end of the member. (Note:
Both SFACE and EFACE are input as
positive numbers).

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against enhanced
shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of
IS456:2000.
ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear
check to be performed ( no
enhancement of shear strength at
sections close to support)
For ENSH = a positive value(say x ),
shear strength will be enhanced up to a
distance x from the start of the
member. This is used only when a span
of a beam is subdivided into two or
more parts. (Refer note )
For ENSH = a negative value(say –y),
shear strength will be enhanced up to a
distance y from the end of the member.
This is used only when a span of a
beam is subdivided into two or more
parts.(Refer note)
If default value (0.0) is used the
program will calculate Length to
Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio is
greater than 2.5, shear strength will be
enhanced at sections (<2d) close to
support otherwise ordinary shear
check will be performed.
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of the
member from its nearest support. This
parameter is used only when a span of
a beam is subdivided into two or more
parts. (Refer note)
Notes
1. Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 9A.8
for details.
2. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to
376 — STAAD.Pro
find whether it is a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of
IS456:2000.
In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two terms called lex and ley.
STAAD calculates
a. l as ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the 2
ex
nodes of the member)
b. l as ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the 2
ey
nodes of the member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension
of the column.
For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension
of the column.
3. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column
to find minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.4 of IS456:2000, you will find an expression "unsupported length of
column". This term is calculated as
ULZ multiplied by the member length for the Z axis
ULY multiplied by the member length for the Y axis
4. Value of ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the
span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition is
aroused RENSH parameter is also to be used.
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The
shear strength will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input
should be the following:
Steps:
i. ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout
the length of the member 1, positive sign indicates length measured
from start of the member

ii. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a
length (X-L) of the member 2, length measured from the start of the
member
iii. ENSH –L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout
the length of the member 4, negative sign indicates length measured
from end of the member
iv. ENSH –(X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a
length (X-L) of the member 3, length measured from the end of the
member
v. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from
both the members 2 and 3.
vi. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to
length X from both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and
gives spacing accordingly.
At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1
At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L
At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L
At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4
where tc, enhanced = 2dtc/av
At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become
infinity. However for any section shear stress cannot exceed tc, max. Hence
enhanced shear strength is limited to a maximum value of tc, max.

The IS:456 code specifies two options by which the slenderness effect can be
accommodated (Clause 39.7). One option is to perform an exact analysis which
will take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on
member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and
forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately
magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first options. To perform this type
of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS.
The PDELTA ANALYSIS will accommodate all requirements of the second- order
analysis described by IS:456, except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It
378 — STAAD.Pro
is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the effects
of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must
be realized that the approximate evaluation of slenderness effects is also an
approximate method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on
empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway (Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS:
456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
They will be check if the ELY and ELZ parameters are specified.
Considering all these information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS, as performed by STAAD
may be used for the design of concrete members. However the user must note, to
take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as
primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load
combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a
primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections.
Also note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be
provided by user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
9A.6 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial
force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings
are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams.
The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g.
Design for Flexure
designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where ever
the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly reinforced
section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only as singly
reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections
are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging moment as the
flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural design of beams
is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are
determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design,
reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers.

The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account
of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of
reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural
reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for
the curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000 (Clause 26.2.3). Although
exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally
which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other
practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided
by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can be
prepared.
Design for Shear

moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for
the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated
torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the
shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by
STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance
shear forces acting on these sections.
As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the
effective depth) close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum
value of t .
cmax
Beam Design Output
provided at 5 equally spaced (0,.25,.5,.75 and 1.) sections along the length of the
beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are
given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the default
output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:
================================================-
============================
M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe415 (Sec.)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
380 — STAAD.Pro
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 29.64 1.23 4
| 0.00 -25.68 1.23 4 |
400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 27.97 1.23 4
| 0.00 -16.05 1.23 4 |
800.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 25.12 1.23 4
| 0.00 -7.17 1.23 4 |
1200.0 | 0.00 0.97 0.49 5 | 21.11 1.23 4
| 0.00 -0.14 1.32 6 |
1600.0 | 0.00 6.77 1.23 4 | 15.93 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2000.0 | 0.00 11.06 1.23 4 | 9.59 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2400.0 | 0.00 13.04 1.23 4 | 2.08 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2800.0 | 0.00 12.45 1.23 4 | -5.43 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3200.0 | 0.00 9.55 1.23 4 | -11.77 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3600.0 | 0.00 4.73 1.23 4 | -16.95 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.48 1.23 4
| 0.00 -17.36 1.23 4 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 259.04 161.29 0.00 0.00 176.31

BOTTOM 0.00 160.78 160.78 160.78 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 4-10Ø 3-10Ø 2-10Ø 2-10Ø 3-10Ø
BOTTOM 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø
SHEAR 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø
REINF. @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100
mm c/c
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
========================================================
9A.7 Column Design
load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum
reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square,
rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections
under biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for
sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the
reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 8A.1). Depending
upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients
specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long)
of the column design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column
382 — STAAD.Pro
design of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main reinforcing bars is taken to
be 25 mm while arrangement of longitudinal bars.
example of a long column design (Ref.Example9 of SP:16, Design Aids For
Reinforced Concrete to IS:456-1978) output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given
below.
=================================================-
===========================
C O L U M N N O. 1 DESIGN RESULTS
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 250.0 mm dia. COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 BRACED LONG COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : 1.12 1.12
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : 1.00 1.00
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : 1.12 1.12

--------------------------
Puz : 992.70 Muz1 : 36.87 Muy1 : 36.87
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 38.6, IS456)
========================================================
9A.8 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required
and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. Now, two
bar diameters can be specified to calculate a combination of each bar to be
provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list>
END BAR COMBINATION
MD2 bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter. The typical output for
bar combination is shown below:
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
--------------------------------------------------------------
| MAIN REINFORCEMENT |
--------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | 0.0- 2166.7 | 2166.7- 6500.0 | 6500.0- 8666.7 |
| mm | mm | mm |
--------------------------------------------------------------
TOP | 6-20í + 1-25í| 2-20í + 1-25í | 2-20í |
| in 2 layer(s)| in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 2330.22 | 1029.90 | 582.55 |
Prov| 2376.79 | 1119.64 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
--------------------------------------------------------------
BOTTOM | 4-20í | 2-20í | 2-20í |
|in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) |
384 — STAAD.Pro
Ast Reqd| 1165.11 | 582.55 | 582.55 |
Prov| 1257.14 | 628.57 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
-------------------------------------------------------------
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld
gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
9A.9 Wall Design in accordance with IS 456-2000

Design of walls in accordance with IS 456-2000 is available in STAAD.Pro.
Design is performed for in-plane shear, in-plane and out-of-plane bending and out-
of-plane shear. The wall has to be modeled using STAAD’s Surface elements. The
use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one
entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis
and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather
than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required
information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for
user specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is
10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output
includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the
concentrated (in-plane bending) edge reinforcing and the link required for out-of-
plane shear.
General format:
CODE INDIAN
FYMAIN f1
FC f2
HMIN f3
HMAX f4
VMIN f5
VMAX f6
EMIN f7
EMAX f8
LMIN f9
LMAX f10

CLEAR f11
TWOLAYERED f12
KSLENDER f13
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END
The following table explains the parameters used in the shear wall design.
Table 9A.9-1 Shear Wall Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 415 Mpa Yield strength of steel, in current units.
FC 30 Mpa Compressive strength of concrete, in current units.
HMIN 8 Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range
6 mm – 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
HMAX 36 Maximum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range
6 mm – 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the
VMIN 8 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range
6mm – 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the
VMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range
6mm – 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the
EMIN 8 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in
edge zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
386 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
EMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in
edge zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
LMIN 6 Minimum size of links (range 6mm – 16mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the program will
assume 6 mm diameter bar.
LMAX 16 Maximum size of links (range 6mm – 16mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the program will
assume 6 mm diameter bar.
CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current units.
TWOLAYERED 0 Reinforcement placement mode:
0 - single layer, each direction
1 - two layers, each direction
KSLENDER 1.0 Slenderness factor for finding effective height.
The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and
design of the wall.
Example
.
.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY

1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 to 5 gen pin
6 to 10 gen pin
11 to 15 gen pin
19 to 16 gen pin
.
.
.
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 2.17185e+007
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 23.5616
ALPHA 1e-005
.
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE INDIAN
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 415
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Notes:
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-

node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element
388 — STAAD.Pro
mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For
instance, the line 2 TO 5 GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes
between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously
subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional
11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned
pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually
accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite
element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE
PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START
SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code
that will be the basis for the design. For Indian code the parameter is
INDIAN. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list
of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear
wall components.
Technical Overview
The program implements provisions of section 32 of IS 456-2000 and relevant

provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The following steps are
performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall.
Checking of slenderness limit
The slenderness checking is done as per clause no. 32.2.3. The default effective
height is the height of the wall. User can change the effective height. The limit for
slenderness is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending and vertical load (denoted by Mz & Fy in the shear wall
force output)
Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce
in-plane bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1,
in-plane bending may be neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is
always under compression due combined effect of horizontal and vertical loads.
Otherwise, the section is checked for combined vertical load and in-plane moment
as column with axial load and uni-axial bending. For this purpose, the depth is

taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is the thickness of the wall.
The reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall. The edge
reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal
length on each side. Minimum reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a).
Maximum 4% reinforcement is allowed.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the
horizontal sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at
critical section as per clause no. 32.4.1 can be performed.
The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear
stress is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum
allowable shear stress as per clause no. 32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of
concrete is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.3. Design of shear reinforcement is
done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements are as per clause no.
32.5.
Design for vertical load and out-of-plane vertical bending (denoted by Fy and My
respectively in the shear wall force output)
Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also
subjected to out-of-plane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The
part of the wall which is not having edge reinforcements (i.e. a zone of depth 0.6 x
Length of the wall), is designed again as column under axial load (i.e. vertical
load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum reinforcements and
maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force
output)
The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is
checked against out-of-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for
this purpose.
Design for out-of-plane shears (denoted by Qx and Qy in the shear wall force
output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear
stresses are calculated as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses
are as per table 20. For shear force in the vertical direction, shear strength of
concrete section is calculated as per section 4.1 of SP 16 : 1980 considering
vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Similarly, for shear force in the
horizontal direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated considering
390 — STAAD.Pro
horizontal reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the
form of links are computed as per the provisions of clause no. 40.4.
Shear Wall Design With Opening
The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with
rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to
allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are
available for user selected locations.
Description
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings.

Due to the presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall
panels.
1. Shear wall set-up

Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element
perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments,
opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the
opening(s).
SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1,

..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION
od1, ..., odk
where,
n1, ..., ni - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
s - surface ordinal number,
sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on
the surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, ..., odk - divisions along edges of the opening.
Note:
If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding
division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the
SET DIVISION command).

Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set
as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
where,
xd - number of divisions along X axis,
yd - number of divisions along Y axis.
Note:
xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the
surface where output is requested. The output is provided for sections
located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions
= 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of
the edge).
2. Stress/force output printing

Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of
the wall. The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG x) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1,

d2) LIST s1, ...,si
where,
x - local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a - distance along the x axis from start of the member to the
full cross-section of the wall,
d1, d2 - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to x ,
delineating a fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is
desired. **
s1, ...,si - list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is
directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
392 — STAAD.Pro
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If
command AT is omitted, output is provided for all sections along the
specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be determined from
the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. If
the BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full
cross-section width.
3. Definition of wall panels

Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:
START PANEL DEFINITION

SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4
END PANEL DEFINITION
where,
i - ordinal surface number,
j - ordinal panel number,
ptype - panel type, one of: WALL, COLUMN, BEAM
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the panel,
4. Shear wall design

The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS
8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows:

(...)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s
END SHEARWALL DESIGN
Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections
of the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or
SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.

Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a
distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then

reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and
vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective
interrupted bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Only wall panel design is supported in Indian code.
9A1. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS13920

Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS13920
9A1.1 Design Operations
Earthquake motion often induces force large enough to cause inelastic
deformations in the structure. If the structure is brittle, sudden failure could occur.
But if the structure is made to behave ductile, it will be able to sustain the
earthquake effects better with some deflection larger than the yield deflection by
absorption of energy. Therefore ductility is also required as an essential element
for safety from sudden collapse during severe shocks.
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design as per IS 13920. While
designing it satisfies all provisions of IS 456 – 2000 and IS 13920 for beams and
columns.
9A1.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) & T-shape
9A1.3 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters that are needed to perform design
as per IS 13920. It accepts all parameters that are needed to perform design as
per IS:456. Over and above it has some other parameters that are required only
when designed is performed as per IS:13920. Default parameter values have
been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design
requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being
performed. Table 8A1.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available
parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force
units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
394 — STAAD.Pro
Table 9A1.1 - Indian Concrete Design IS13920 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 415 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
steel.
FC 30 N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress.
size.
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar
size.
bar size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement
bar size.
A value of 1.0 means the effect of
axial force will be taken into account
for beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
correspond to the terms "Braced" and
"Unbraced" described in Notes 1, 2,
and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of
IS456:2000.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design.
This value defaults to YD as provided
ULY 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual
ULZ 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual
TORISION 0.0 A value of 0.0 means torsion to be
considered in beam design.
A value of 1.0 means torsion to be
neglected in beam design.
MIDDLE and END.
For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments
are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
396 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
TRACK 1.0 output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
With TRACK = 1.0, column
interaction analysis results are printed
in addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main
reinforcing bars in beam and column.
For column centre to centre distance
between main bars cannot exceed
300mm.
beam. It is used to check against
shear at the face of the support in
beam design. The parameter can also
be used to check against shear at any
point from the start of the member.*
beam. The parameter can also be
used to check against shear at any
point from the end of the member.
(Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are
input as positive numbers).*
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against
enhanced shear strength as per Cl.
40.5 of IS456:2000.
ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear
check to be performed ( no
enhancement of shear strength at

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
sections close to support)
For ENSH = a positive value(say x ),
shear strength will be enhanced up to
a distance x from the start of the
member. This is used only when a
span of a beam is subdivided into two
or more parts. (Refer note after Table
8A.1 )
For ENSH = a negative value(say –y),
shear strength will be enhanced up to
a distance y from the end of the
member. This is used only when a
or more parts.(Refer note after Table
8A.1)
If default value (0.0) is used the
program will calculate Length to
Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio is
greater than 2.5, shear strength will
be enhanced at sections (<2d) close
to support otherwise ordinary shear
check will be performed.
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of
the member from its nearest support.
This parameter is used only when a
or more parts. (Refer note after Table
8A.1)
EUDL None Equivalent u.d.l on span of the beam.
This load value must be the
unfactored load on span. During
design the load value is multiplied by
a factor 1.2. If no u.d.l is defined
factored shear force due to gravity
load on span will be taken as zero. No
elastic or plastic moment will be
calculated. Shear design will be
398 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
performed based on analysis
result.(Refer note)
GLD None Gravity load number to be considered
for calculating equivalent u.d.l on
span of the beam, in case no EUDL is
mentioned in the input. This loadcase
can be any static loadcase containing
MEMBER LOAD on the beam which
includes UNI, CON, LIN and TRAP
member loading. CMOM member
loading is considered only when it is
specified in local direction. FLOOR
LOAD is also considered.
The load can be primary or
combination load. For combination
load only load numbers included in
load combination is considered. The
load factors are ignored. Internally
the unfactored load is multiplied by a
factor 1.2 during design.
If both EUDL and GLD parameters are
mentioned in the input mentioned
EUDL will be considered in design
Note :
No dynamic (Response spectrum,
1893, Time History) and moving load
cases are considered.
CMOM member loading in global
direction is not considered.
UMOM member loading is not
considered.
PLASTIC 0.0 Default value calculates elastic
hogging and sagging moments of
resistance of beam at its ends.
A value of 1.0 means plastic hogging
and sagging moments of resistance of

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
beam to be calculated at its ends.
IPLM 0.0 Default value calculates elastic/plastic

A value of 1.0 means calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging and sagging
moments of resistance of beam to be
ignored at start node of beam. This
implies no support exists at start
node.
A value of -1.0 means calculation of
considered at start node of beam. .
This implies support exists at start
node.
ignored at end node of beam. This
implies no support exists at end node.
considered at end node of beam. .
This implies support exists at end
node. **
IMB 0.0 Default value calculates elastic/plastic
ignored at both ends of beam. This
400 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
implies no support exist at either end
of the member.
considered at both ends of beam.
This implies support exist at both
ends of the member.**
COMBINE 0.0 Default value means there will be no
member combination.
A value of 1.0 means there will be no
printout of sectional force and critical
load for combined member in the
output.
A value of 2.0 means there will be
printout of sectional force for
combined member in the output.
A value of 3.0 means there will be
printout of both sectional force and
critical load for combined member in
the output. ***
HLINK Spacing of Longer dimension of the rectangular

longitudinal confining hoop measured to its outer
bars face. It shall not exceed 300 mm as
measured to per Cl. 7.4.8. If hlink value as
the outer face provided in the input file does not
satisfy the clause the value will be
internally assumed as the default one.
This parameter is valid for rectangular
column.
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 9A1.6 for
details.
* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These
commands are ignored for members forming physical member.

*** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following:
1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-

beams this parameter will combine them into one member. It can also be
used to combine members to form one continuous beam spanning over
more than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic
moments will be calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate
nodes (if any) this calculation will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right
angle to the beam. Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the

combined member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all
active load cases during design.
Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued.

The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members:
1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single

span between two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into
several members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha,
density and beta angle)
3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line.
4. Members to be combined should be continuous.
5. Vertical members (i.e. columns) cannot be combined.
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different
combined members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is
299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only
be available when all the members combined are successfully designed in both
flexure and shear.
402 — STAAD.Pro
ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary)
even if physical member has been formed.
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS
13920.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
…………………………………..
MEMBER INCIDENCES
…………………………………..
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
…………………………………..
CONSTANTS
…………………….
SUPPORTS
…………………….
DEFINE 1893 LOAD
ZONE 0.05 I 1 K 1 B 1
SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT
……………………….
LOAD 1 SEISMIC LOAD IN X DIR
1893 LOAD X 1
LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOAD IN Z DIR
1893 LOAD Z 1
LOAD 3 DL
MEMBER LOAD
…… UNI GY -5
LOAD 4 LL
MEMBER LOAD
……. UNI GY -3
LOAD COMB 5 1.5(DL+LL)
3 1.5 4 1.5

LOAD COMB 6 1.2(DL+LL+SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 7 1.2(DL+LL-SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
LOAD COMB 8 1.2(DL+LL+SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 9 1.2(DL+LL-SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
PDELTA ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 5 TO 9
CODE IS13920
UNIT MMS NEWTON
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 20 ALL
MINMAIN 12 ALL
MAXMAIN 25 ALL
TRACK 2.0 ALL
*** Unfactored gravity load on members 110 to 112 is 8 t/m
(DL+LL) i.e. 78.46 New/mm
EUDL 78.46 MEMB 110 TO 112
** Members to be combined into one physical member
COMBINE 3.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
*** Plastic moment considered
PLASTIC 1.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
DESIGN BEAM 110 TO 112
DESIGN COLUMN ………
END CONCRETE DESIGN
FINISH
9A1.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect of the
axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam
404 — STAAD.Pro
loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the
beams. The total number of sections considered is 13. All of these sections are
scanned to determine the design force envelopes.
For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the member shall not be
less than 200mm(Clause 6.1.3). Also the member shall preferably have a width-to
depth ratio of more than 0.3 (Clause 6.1.2).
The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1)
for all active load cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be
performed.
Design for Flexure
Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while designing following
criteria are satisfied as per IS-13920:
1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)

2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by
r = 0.24Öfck/fy (Clause 6.2.1b)
min
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by
r = 0.025 (Clause 6.2.2)
max
4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the
negative steel at that face. (Clause 6.2.3)
5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at
least be equal to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided
at the face of either joint. (Clause 6.2.4)
Design for Shear
The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the Clause 6.3.3 of IS
13920:1993 revision. Elastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance of the
beam section at ends are considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging
and hogging moments of resistance can also be considered for shear design if
PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer Table 8A1.1)
moments. Procedure is same as that of IS 456.
The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl.
6.3.5 of IS-13920:

The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall
not exceed
a. d/4
b. 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars
In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm.
The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456
consideration is provided.
Beam Design Output
provided at 5 equally spaced sections along the length of the beam. User has
option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units.
An example of rectangular beam design output with the default output option
(TRACK 1.0) is presented below:
================================================-
============================
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 17.67 0.00 4
| 0.00 -2.74 0.00 5 |
291.7 | 0.00 1.15 0.00 5 | 16.26 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
583.3 | 0.00 4.61 0.00 5 | 13.97 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
875.0 | 0.00 7.44 0.00 5 | 10.78 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
1166.7 | 0.00 9.41 0.00 5 | 6.69 0.00 4
406 — STAAD.Pro
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
1458.3 | 0.00 10.33 0.00 5 | 1.10 0.00 5
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
1750.0 | 0.00 9.98 0.00 5 | -3.60 0.00 5
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2041.7 | 0.00 8.23 0.00 5 | -10.02 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2333.3 | 0.00 5.21 0.00 5 | -15.00 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2625.0 | 0.00 1.14 0.00 5 | -19.08 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2916.7 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -22.27 0.00 4
| 0.00 -3.79 0.00 5 |
3208.3 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -24.57 0.00 4
| 0.00 -9.35 0.00 5 |
3500.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.97 0.00 4
| 0.00 -15.34 0.00 5 |
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 0.0 IS 68.60 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 3500.0 IS 75.24 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 226.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 226.30
BOTTOM 0.00 203.02 203.02 203.02 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 3-10í 2-10í 2-10í 2-10í 3-10í
BOTTOM 2-12í 2-12í 2-12í 2-12í 2-12í
SHEAR 2 legged 8í 2 legged 8í 2 legged 8í 2 legged 8í 2 legged 8í
REINF. @ 100 mm c/c @ 150 mm c/c @ 150 mm c/c @ 150 mm c/c @ 100 mm
c/c
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
================================================-
==============================
9A1.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments per IS 456:2000.
Columns are also designed for shear forces as per Clause 7.3.4. All major criteria
for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456
have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. However following
clauses have been satisfied to incorporate provisions of IS 13920:
1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)

2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm.
For columns having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest
dimension of column shall not be less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
4. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular
dimension shall preferably be not less than 0.4. (Clause 7.1.3)
5. The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the
column, except where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause
7.3.3)
6. Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each
o
joint face, towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where
408 — STAAD.Pro
flexural yielding may occur. The length l shall not be less than a) larger
o
lateral dimension of the member at the section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6
of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1)
7. The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not
exceed ¼ of minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm
nor more than 100 mm. (Clause 7.4.6)
8. The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the
provisions for minimum area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular,
circular or spiral hoops, to be used as special confining reinforcement.
(Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
example of a column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
=================================================-
===========================
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 350.0 mm X 400.0 mm COVER: 40.0
mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 END JOINT: 2 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : - -
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : - -
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : - -
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : - -

** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5
Along Z Along Y
DESIGN SHEAR FORCES : 43.31 76.08
CONFINING REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 85 mm
c/c
over a length 500.0 mm from each joint face towards
midspan as per Cl. 7.4.6 of IS-13920.
--------------------------
Puz : 2261.52 Muz1 : 178.71 Muy1 : 150.75
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
================================================-
============================
********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN
RESULTS********************
9A1.6 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required
and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. Now two
bar diameters can be specified to calculate a combination of each bar to be
provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
ENDBAR COMBINATION
MD2 bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter. The typical output for
bar combination is shown below:
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
410 — STAAD.Pro
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| MAIN REINFORCEMENT |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | 0.0- 2166.7 | 2166.7- 6500.0 | 6500.0- 8666.7 |
| mm | mm | mm |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP | 6-20í + 1-25í | 2-20í + 1-25í | 2-20í |
| in 2 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 2330.22 | 1029.90 | 582.55 |
Prov| 2376.79 | 1119.64 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOTTOM | 4-20í | 2-20í | 2-20í |
| in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 1165.11 | 582.55 | 582.55 |
Prov| 1257.14 | 628.57 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld
gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
Sample example showing calculation of design shear force as per Clause 6.3.3
For Beam No. 1 and 2

Section Width b 250 mm
Depth D 500 mm
Characteristic Strength of Steel fy 415 N/sq. mm

Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck 20 N/sq. mm
Clear Cover 25 mm
Bar Diameter 12 mm
Effective Depth d 469 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 4000 mm
Ast_Top_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 339.29 sq. mm
Steps
Calculation of Simple Shear
Simple shear from Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 15600N
gravity load on span =
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * = 36768130.05
Resistance of End A ( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck) N
Mu, as =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * = 54003057.45
Resistance of End A ( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck) N
Micah =
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * = 54003057.45
Resistance of End A ( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck) N
Mu, bs =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_ = 36768130.05
Resistance of End A Top_B* fy / b * d * fck) N
Mob =
Calculation of Shear Force Due To Formation Of Plastic Hinge At Both
Ends Of The Beam Plus The Factored Gravity Load On Span
412 — STAAD.Pro
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT
Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -10137.69104
N
Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 41337.69104
N
FIG2: SWAY TO LEFT

Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] 53402.14022 N
=
Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] - 22202.14022 N

=
Design Shear Force
Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = 11.56 N
Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) 53402.14022
= N
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -6.44 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) 41337.69104
= N
For Beam No. 3
Section Width b 300 mm
Depth D 450 mm
Characteristic Strength of Steel fy 415 N/sq. mm
Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck 20 N/sq. mm
Clear Cover 25 mm

Bar Diameter 12 mm
Effective Depth d 419 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 3000 mm
Ast_Top_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 226.19 sq. mm
Calculation of Simple Shear

Simple shear from Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 11700N
gravity load on span
=
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * = 48452983
Resistance of End A ( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck) N
Mu,as =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * =
Resistance of End A ( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck) 32940364.5
Mu,ah = N
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * =
Resistance of End A ( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck) 32940364.5
Mu,bs = N
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_ =
Resistance of End A B* fy / b * d * fck) 63326721.3
Mu,bh = N
Calculation of Shear Force Due To Formation Of Plastic Hinge At Both
Ends Of The Beam Plus The Factored Gravity Load On Span
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT
414 — STAAD.Pro
Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -40463.862
N
Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 63863.862 N
Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 42444.3402

N
Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = -15144.34 N

Design Shear Force
Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = -10.31 N
Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( 42444.3402 N
Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) =
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -23.81 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( 63863.862 N
Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) =
9B. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS800:1984

9B.1 Design Operations
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
l Specify whether to perform member selection by optimization.
upon the design requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported.
Section 9B.13 describes the specification of steel sections.

Indian Standard code of practice (IS:800-1984) for structural steel design in
STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and
code checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major
failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability
considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable
stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses
and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The
code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and
reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria. It is
generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like
provision of stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange buckling and web
crippling.
9B.3 Allowable Stresses

stress design method as per IS:800 (1984). It is a method for proportioning
structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design
limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. It would not be
possible to describe every aspect of IS:800 in this manual. This section, however,
will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:800 and
implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during
the discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
l Axial Stress
l Bending Stress
l Shear Stress
l Combined Stress
9B.3.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800 is described
below.
The permissible stress in axial tension, s in MPa on the net effective area of the
at
sections shall not exceed
s = 0.6 f
at y
416 — STAAD.Pro
where,
y
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded
compression members shall not exceed 0.6f nor the permissible stress
y
sac calculated based on the following formula: (Clause: 5.1.1)
where,
s = Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa
ac
y
f = Elastic critical stress in compression = p2 E/l2
cc
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel, 2 X 105 Mpa
l=l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length to
appropriate radius of gyration
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based

on the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.1)
s or s = 0.66 f
bt bc y
where,
s = Bending stress in tension
bt
s = Bending stress in compression
bc
f = Yield stress of steel, in MPa
y
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum
strength (z-z axis), the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre
calculated on the effective section shall not exceed the values of maximum
permissible bending compressive stress. The maximum permissible bending
compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)

where,
y
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
f = Elastic critical stress in bending, calculated by the following formula:
cb
k = a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of flanges

1
between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on y, the ratio of the total
area of both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the corresponding
area at the point of greatest bending moment between such points of restraint.
k = a coefficient to allow for the inequality of flanges, and depends on w, the
2
ratio of the moment of inertia of the compression flange alone to that of the sum of
the moment of the flanges each calculated about its own axis parallel to the y-
yaxis of the girder, at the point of maximum bending moment.
1 = effective length of compression flange
r = radius of gyration of the section about its axis of minimum
y
strength (y-y axis)
T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the area of
horizontal portion of flange divided by width.
D = overall depth of beam
c ,c = respectively the lesser and greater distances from the section neutral
1 2
axis to the extreme fibres.
418 — STAAD.Pro
9B.3.3 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 6.4 of IS:800. For shear
on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consist of the product of the
total depth and the web thickness. For shear parallel to the flanges, the gross
section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange area.
9B.3.4 Combined Stress
Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned

accordingly to section 7 of IS:800. All members subject to bending and axial
compression are required to satisfy the equation of Section 7.1.1.(a) for
intermediate points, and equation of Section 7.1.1.(b) for support points.
For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section 7.1.2. is required
to be satisfied.
Cm coefficients are calculated according to the specifications of Section 7.1.3.
information regarding occurrence of sidesway can be provided through the use of
parameters SSY and SSZ. In the absence of any user provided information,
sidesway will be assumed.

In STAAD implementation of IS:800, the user is allowed complete control of the
design process through the use of design parameters. Available design parameters
to be used in conjunction with IS:800 are listed in Table 7B.1 of this section along
with their default values and applicable restrictions. Users should note that when
the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 and use in conjunction with this code, allowable
bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ), tension (FTY & FTZ), and allowable
shear stress (FV) will be printed out in Member Selection and Code Check output in
Mpa. When TRACK is set to 2.0, detailed design output will be provided.
Table 9B.1 - Indian Steel Design IS 800:1984 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is
minor axis.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is
major axis.
LZ Member Same as above except in local z-axis
Length (major).
FYLD 250 MPA Yield strength of steel.
(36.25 KSI)
members.
UNL Member Unsupported length for calculating
Length allowable bending stress.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction
of actual member length.
1.0 = No sidesway
CMY 0.85 for Cm value in local y & z axes
CMZ sidesway and
calculated for
no sidesway
MAIN 180 (Comp. Allowable Kl/r for slenderness
Memb.) calculations for compression
members.
TMAIN 400 (Tension Allowable Kl/r for slenderness
Memb) calculations for tension members.
420 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress critical member
stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member
stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output. If
there is deflection check it will also
print the governing load case number
for deflection check whenever critical
condition for design is not
DEFLECTION.
(see fig.8B.1)
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to
allowable stresses.
and those at locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate section forces at
twelfth points along the beam, design
at each intermediate location and
report the critical location where ratio
is maximum.
PROFILE - Search for the lightest section for the
profile mentioned.
for
deflection
check)
Note 1)
member calculation of "Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)
NOTES:

1. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
should be "4".
9B.5 Stability Requirements

appropriate maximum values. Section 3.7 of IS:800 summarizes the maximum
slenderness ratios for different types of members. In STAAD implementation of
IS:800, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio can be provided for each
member. If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided, compression members will
be checked against a maximum value of 180 and tension members will be checked
against a maximum value of 400.
9B.6 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial forces. So in
design no time is wasted in calculating bending or shear stresses, thus reducing
design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis
(like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as
a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
422 — STAAD.Pro
9B.7 Deflection Check
This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in the CODE CHECK
and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The deflection check may be controlled using
three parameters which are described in Table 7B.1. Note that deflection is used in
addition to other strength and stability related criteria. The local deflection
calculation is based on the latest analysis results.
9B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of
satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the
IS:800 (1984) requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections of the
members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections may be specified
using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION command. If no sections are specified,
the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends.
the critical condition (applicable IS:800 clause no.), governing load case, location
(distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are
also printed out.

section selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as originally
specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types of steel
sections listed in Section 7B.13 and user provided tables. Selection of members,
whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to
sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be performed on
members whose cross sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
in Table 8B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to
specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided,
the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles
may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each one.

9B.10 Member Selection By Optimization
Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization
method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic
multiple analysis. The user may start without a specifically designated section.
However, the section profile type (BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE etc.) must
be specified using the ASSIGN command (see Chapter 6). The optimization is
based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions.
An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design
iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be
used with caution.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a
a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed
b) TABLE refers to the INDIAN steel section name which has been checked
against the steel code or has been selected.
c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is
FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number.
d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the IS:800 code which governs the
design.
e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical
condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
f) LOADING provides the load case number which governs the design.
g) FX, MY and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y-axis and moment in
local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and
moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,MY and MZ are printed since
they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the
section where design forces govern.
i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the
table and will print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and
tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable
shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0 for all members
parameter code values are as shown in Fig 8B.1.
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (ISA )
424 — STAAD.Pro
***********************
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ----
-------- |
|MEMBER 7 * | | | AX = 72.4 |
| * | ST ISLB400 | | --Z AY = 32.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 27.5 |
| IS-800 * =============================== ===|===
SY = 86.8 |
| * SZ = 965.3 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.00 --->| RY = 3.1 |
|************* RZ = 16.3 |
| |
| 104.6( KN-METR) |
|PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM | IN NEWT MM|
|--------------- + -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 95.4 | FA = 84.8 |
| KL/R-Z= 18.4 + fa = 1.6 |
| UNL = 3000.0 | FCZ = 116.6 |
|C = 400.0 + FTZ = 165.0 |
| CMY = 0.85 | FCY = 165.0 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + FTY = 165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 | L3 fbz = 108.4 |
| NSF = 0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.0 |
| DFF = 325.0 92.7 FV = 100.0 |
| dff = 4383.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE |
| (WITH LOAD NO.) |

| |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR) |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z |
| |
| VALUE -23.7 61.3 0.0 0.0 104.6 |
| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION |
|
======================================================
|
| PASS IS-7.1.2 0.667 1 |
| 9.62 T 0.0 -104.6 0.00 |
| |
| DEFLECTION * PASS |
| RATIO: 0.074 LOADING: 3 LOCATION: 0.67 |
|* *|
|*******************************************************************
426 — STAAD.Pro
9B.12 Indian Steel Table
This is an important feature of the program since the program will read section
properties of a steel member directly from the latest ISI steel tables (as published in
ISI-800). These properties are stored in memory corresponding to the section
designation (e.g. ISMB250, etc.). If called for, the properties are also used for
member design. Since the shear areas are built in to these tables, shear
deformation is always considered for these members.
Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete listing of the sections
available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the
graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of all the types of sections available:
Rolled Steel Beams (ISJB, ISLB, ISMB and ISHB).
All rolled steel beam sections are available the way they are designated in the ISI
handbook., e.g. ISJB225, ISWB400, etc.
20 TO 30 TA ST ISLB325
NOTE:
In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an ‘A” on the
end., e.g. ISHB400 A, etc.
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
Rolled Steel Channels (ISJC, ISLC and ISMC)

All these shapes are available as listed in ISI section handbook. Designation of the
channels are per the scheme used by ISI.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST ISMC125
12 TA ST ISLC300
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available.
The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel, e.g. D
ISJC125, D ISMC75 etc.
21 22 24 TA D ISLC225

Rolled Steel Angles
Both rolled steel equal angles and unequal angles are available for use in the
STAAD implementation of ISI steel tables. The following example with
explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure:
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle
section. The standard section has local axis system as illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this
manual. The standard angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis ( i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-
V axis specified in the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention
used by some other programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD
provides for this convention by accepting the command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6 (RA denotes reverse angle)
Double Angles
equal angle either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD ISA50X30X5 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD ISA75X50X6
Rolled Tees (ISHT, ISST, ISLT and ISJT)

All the rolled tee sections are available for input as they are specified in the ISI
handbook. Following example illustrates the designated method.
1 2 5 8 TA ST ISNT100
67 68 TA ST ISST250
428 — STAAD.Pro
To designate circular hollow sections from ISI tables, use PIP followed by the
decimal section of the value provided for diameter. Following example will illustrate
the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP 213.2
(Specifies a 213 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness)
Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the outside and inside
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0ID 20.0

(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units)
Designation of tubes from the ISI steel table is illustrated below.
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6,

and a wall thickness of 0.5.
Note that only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE
Plate And Angle Girders (With Flange Plates)

All plate and angle grinders (with flange plates) are available as listed in ISI
section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in
understanding the input procedure.
A Plate and angle girder symbol.

B Web plate width in mm.
C Web plate thickness in mm.
D Flange angle (Flange angle key below):
E Flange plate width in mm.
F Flange plate thickness in mm.
SYMBOL ANGLE(A X B X t)(all in mm)
A 150X150X18
B 200X100X15
C 200X150X18
E 200X200X18
SINGLE JOIST WITH CHANNELS AND PLATES ON THE FLANGES TO BE USED AS

GIRDERS
All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used as girders are
available as listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with
explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.
A Joist Designation: IW450=ISWB450
430 — STAAD.Pro
B Top flange channel designation:
350=ISMC350
C Constant (always X).
D Top flange plate thickness in mm.
NOTE: D is 0 for no plate.
E Bottom flange plate thickness in mm.
NOTE:
The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more
efficient.
9B.13 Column With Lacings And Battens

For columns with large loads it is desirable to build rolled sections at a distance and
inter-connect them. The joining of element sections is done by two ways:
a. Lacing and b. Batten

Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be joined either by
lacing or by batten plates having riveted or welded connection.
Table 9B.2 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or batten design.
These parameters will have to be provided in unit NEW MMS along with parameters
defined in Table 9B.1.
Table 9B.2 Indian Concrete Design

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SPA 0.0 mm Spacing between double channels.
This parameter is used when member
properties are defined through user
provided table using GENERAL option.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
THETA 50 degree Angle of inclination of lacing bars. It
should lie between 40 degree and 70
degree.
DBL 20 mm Nominal diameter of rivet
FVB 2
100 N/mm Allowable shear stress in rivet
FYB 300 N/mm2 Allowable bearing stress in rivet
WMIN 6 mm Minimum thickness of weld
WSTR 108 N/mm2 Allowable welding stress
EDIST 32 mm Edge Distance
(Rivetted
Connection)
25 mm
(Welded
Connection)
DCFR 0.0 0.0 implies double channel back-to-
back.
1.0 Implies double channel face-to-
face.
COG 0.0 mm Centre of gravity of the channel. This
parameter is used when member
SPA 0.0 mm Spacing between double channels.
9C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS802

Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS802
432 — STAAD.Pro
Indian Standard code of practice (IS:802-1995 – Part 1) for structural steel design
for overhead transmission line towers in STAAD. The design philosophy and
procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the
principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing
sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and
the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design
loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is
selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program
checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading
condition and the governing code criteria.
9C.2 Allowable Stresses

stress design method as per IS:802 (1995). It is a method for proportioning
structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design
limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions.
This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by
IS:802 and implemented in STAAD.
Axial Stress
9C.2.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802 is described
below.
The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in various
members, multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum
guaranteed yield stress of the material.
Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension, s in MPa on the net effective area of
at
the sections shall not exceed
s =f
at y
where,
y
Compressive Stress

The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the
appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae
described below.
434 — STAAD.Pro
where,
F = allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa
a
F = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa
y
K = restraint factor,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm2
= largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of the member,

b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
Note : The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed
25.
9C.3 Stability Requirements

appropriate maximum values. Following are the default values used in STAAD:
Compression Members:
Redundant members and those carrying nominal 250
stresses

Leg Members, ground wire peak member and 120
lower members of cross arms in compression
Other members carrying computed stress 200
Redundant members and those carrying nominal 250
stresses
Slenderness ratios of compression members are determined as follows:
ELA NO. Type of members Value of KL/r
1 Leg sections or joint members bolted at L/r
connections in both faces
2 Members with concentric loading at both L/r
ends of the unsupported panel with
values of L/r up to and including 120
3 Member with concentric loading at one 30 + 0.75L/r
end and normal eccentricities at the
other end of the unsupported panel for
value of L/r up to and including 120
4 Members with normal framing 60 + 0.5L/r
eccentricities at both ends of the
unsupported panel for values of L/r up to
and including 120
5 Member unrestrained against rotation at L/r
both ends of the unsupported panel for
value of L/r from 120 to 200
6 Members partially restrained against 28.6 + 0.762L/r
rotation at one end of the unsupported
panel for values of L/r over 120 and up
to and including 225
7 Members partially restrained against 46.2 + 0.615L/r
rotation at both ends of the unsupported
panel for values of L/r over 120 and up
to and including 250
If ELA number given in the input for any particular member is such that condition
for L/r ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the
usual way of finding slenderness ratio using K*L/r formula.
Tension Members:
436 — STAAD.Pro
Slenderness ratio KL/r of a member carrying axial tension only, shall not exceed
400.
9C.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement

As per Clause7.1 of IS: 802-1995 minimum thickness of different tower members
shall be as follows:
Members Minimum Thickness, mm
Galvanized Painted
Leg Members, ground wire 5 6
peak member and lower
members of cross arms in
compression
Other members 4 5
9C.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of
satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the
IS:802 (1995) requirements. Axial forces at two ends of the members are utilized
for the code checking calculations.
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and
magnitudes of the governing forces are also printed out. Using TRACK 9 option
calculation steps are also printed.
9C.5.1 Design Steps
The following are the steps followed in member design.

Step 1
Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange thicknesses) is checked
against minimum allowable thickness, depending upon whether the member is
painted or galvanised.
Step 2
If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines whether the
member is under compression or tension for the loadcase under consideration.

Depending upon whether the member is under tension or compression the
slenderness ratio of the member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked
against allowable slenderness ratio.
Step 3
If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed.
Allowable axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension
and there is no user defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is
calculated by the program itself (Refer Section 8C.10). Actual axial stress in the
member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less than 1.0
or user defined value, the member has passed the check.
Step 4
Number of bolts required for the critical loadcase is calculated.
9C.6 Member Selection

section selected will be of the same type (either angle or channel) as originally
specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all angle or
channel sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose
properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to
sections in the user provided table.
in Table 9B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used
to specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is
provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three
(3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from
each one.
9C.7 Member Selection by Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization
method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic
multiple analysis. The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and
corresponding force distributions.
An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design
iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be
used with caution.
438 — STAAD.Pro
9C.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
----------------------
CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
---------------------------
TYPE : GALVANISED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 5.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 10.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
---------------------------
VALUE OF L/r : 90.16
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 105.08

ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
--------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
Cc : sqrt(2*3.141592*3.141592*E/fy) : 127.22
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 150.0 - 10.0 - 11.0 : 129.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28
(b/t)cal : 12.90
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy : 164.72
MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
--------------------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 250000.00 N
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS : 250000.00 / 2552.0 : 97.96 MPA
RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM
SHEARING CAP : 20.11 KN
BEARING CAP : 38.40 KN
BOLT CAP : 20.11 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 13
9C.9 Parameter Table for IS 802
Table 9C.1 Indian Steel Design IS 802 Parameters

NHL 0.0 mm Deduction for holes.
Default value is one bolt width plus 1.5 mm. If the
area of holes cut by any straight, diagonal or zigzag
440 — STAAD.Pro
line across the member is different from the default
value, this parameter is to be defined.
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis.
LY Member Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate
LZ Member Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate
FYLD 250 Yield Strength of steel
MPA
MAIN 1.0 Type of member to find allowable Kl/r for slenderness
calculations for members.
1.0 = Leg, Ground wire peak and lower members of
cross arms in compression (KL/r = 120)
2.0 = Members carrying computed stress
(KL/r = 200)
3.0 = Redundant members and members carrying
nominal stresses (KL/r = 250)
4.0 = Tension members (KL/r = 400)
10.0 = Do not perform KL/r check
Any value greater than 10.0 indicates user defined
allowable KL/r ratio. For this case KY and KZ values
are must to find actual KL/r ratio of the member.
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth.
cm.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output.
9.0 = Print design calculations along with expanded
output.
LEG 1.0 This parameter is meant for plain angles.
0.0 = indicates the angle is connected by shorter leg
1.0 = indicates the angle is connected by longer leg
ELA 1.0 This parameter indicates what type of end conditions
is to be used. Refer Section 8C.3.

CNSF 0.0 This parameter indicates whether user has defined
NSF or the program will calculate it.
0.0 = User has defined NSF
1.0 = Program has to calculate it
DANGLE 0.0 This parameter indicates how the pair of angles are
connected to each other. This is required to find
whether the angle is in single or double shear and the
net section factor.
0.0 = Double angle placed back to back and
connected to each side of a gusset plate
1.0 = Pair of angle placed back-to-back connected by
only one leg of each angle to the same side of a
gusset plate
DBL 12 mm Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts
and net section factor.
FVB 218 Allowable shear stress in bolt
MPA
FYB 436 Allowable bearing stress in bolt
MPA
GUSSET 5 mm Thickness of gusset plate.
Minimum of the thicknesses of the gusset plate and
the leg is used for calculation of the capacity of bolt in
bearing
NHL 0.0 mm Deduction for holes.
Default value is one bolt width plus 1.5 mm. If the
area of holes cut by any straight, diagonal or zigzag
line across the member is different from the default
value, this parameter is to be defined.
9C.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor

The procedure for calculating net section factor for angle section is described
below.
Single angle connected by only one leg
A =A +A xK
net 1 2 1
Where, A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
2
442 — STAAD.Pro
And
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg – 0.5x thickness
of leg)
Pair of angles placed back-to-back connected by only one leg of each

angle to the same side of a gusset plate
A =A +A xK
net 1 2 1
Where A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
2
And
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg – 0.5x thickness
of leg)
Double angles placed back to back and connected to each side of a gusset plate
A = gross area – deduction for holes
net
Net Section Factor
For angle section it is the ratio of the net effective area, A to the gross area.
net
For channel section net section factor is taken to be 1.0.
9C.11 Example Problem No. 28

A transmission line tower is subjected to different loading conditions. Design some
members as per IS-802 and show detailed calculation steps for the critical loading
condition.
Given: End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at
both ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r up to and including
120
Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm
Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm
Net Section Factor is to be calculated.

STAAD TRUSS
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4; 6 2.2 12 2.2;
7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4; 11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2;
13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9 2.4; 16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2;
18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 -1.4 24 1.4; 21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2;
23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9 -2.4; 26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2;
28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4 24 -1.4; 31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2;
33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 -2.4 9 -2.4; 36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2;
38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6; 40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2;
42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2; 44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2;
47 4.2 30 1.2; 48 4.2 27 -1.2; 49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2;
52 -7.2 27 1.2; 53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2;
56 -4.2 30 -1.2; 57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2;
60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61 0 35 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2; 10 11 13;
11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19 20; 18 20
12;
19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26 20 10;
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34 15 6;
35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42 19 10;
43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25 26; 50 26 27;
51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5 25; 58 6 26;
59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3; 66 3 24;
67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74 7 28;
75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30; 82 31 33;
444 — STAAD.Pro
83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39 40; 90 40
32;
91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29 39; 98 30
40;
99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35; 105 25 34;
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37; 112 28 39;
113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13; 119 34 14;
120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20; 126 32 12;
127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14; 133 35 16;
134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19; 140 39 18;
141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42; 147 2 41;
148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41; 154 42 2;
155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42; 161 41 47;
162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50; 168 50 48;
169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49; 175 45 48;
176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47; 182 22 45;
183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53; 189 53 51;
190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54; 196 54 32;
197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54; 203 42 56;
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51; 210 12 54;
211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58; 217 41 57;
218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58; 224 42 60;
225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59; 231 60 57;
232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240 15 25;
241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247 39 9;
248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41; 254 43 42;
255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61;

MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD ISA200X150X18 SP
0.01

19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144 155
156 -
159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10
27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228 231
232 251 -
252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6
CONSTANTS
E 2.05e+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5e-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
446 — STAAD.Pro
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
LY 2800 MEMB 28 LZ 2800 MEMB 28

MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1

ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH
Output of design result
----------------------
448 — STAAD.Pro
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
Cc : sqrt (2*3.141592*3.141592*E/fy) : 127.24
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 200.0 - 18.0 - 13.5 : 168.5 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28
(b/t)cal : 9.36
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1- 0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy :
195.15 MPA
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 1
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS :1742002.38 / 11952.0 : 145.75 MPA
RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
-------

BOLT DIA : 16 MM
BOLT CAP : 55.81 KN
----------------------
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------
450 — STAAD.Pro
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : K*L/r
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : TENSION
ALLOWABLE AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 249.94 MPA
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 3
ACTUAL AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 112909.27 / ( 2903.0*0.801 ) : 48.53 MPA
RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM
BOLT CAP : 43.83 KN
********** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN ***********
9D. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed

Steel Code
9D.1 General
Provisions of IS:801-1975, including revisions dated May, 1988, have been
implemented. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in
tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of
forming strengthening effects has been included as an option.

9D.2 Cross-Sectional Properties
shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables from IS:811-1987
(Specification for cold formed light gauge structural steel sections).
l Channel with Lips

l Angle without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical
file.
9D.3 Design Procedure

1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in
accordance with IS:801-1975. Code checking is carried out for locations specified
by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are
presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to
resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in
the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
2. Member Selection
database (IS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check
and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum
acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate
all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if
452 — STAAD.Pro
a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no
section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found,
the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the
code check or not.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clause
5.2.1.1. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are
checked for compliance with
l Clause 6.6.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in

Compression
l Clause 5.2.3, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
l Clause 5.2.4, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the
Standard as follows:
Members in tension
Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.1
Members in bending and shear
a) 6.4.1 Shear stress in webs,
b) 6.4.2 Bending stress in webs
c) 6.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
Members in compression
a) 6.2 Compression on flat unstiffened element,
b) 6.6.1.1 Shapes not subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
c) 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes of open cross
section or intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up
shapes having Q = 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
d) 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes or
intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q
< 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
e) 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
Members in compression and bending
a) All clauses for members in compression

&
b) 6.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
c) 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional or
torsional-flexural buckling
d) 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric
components of built-up shapes having Q=1.0 which may be subjected to
torsional-flexural buckling
e) 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric
components of built-up shapes having Q<1.0 which may be subjected to
torsional-flexural buckling.
Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided by the user.
The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design
variables and selection of design options. Note: Once a parameter is
specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
COLD FORMED STEEL DESIGN PARAMETERS
Parameter Default Descripti
Name Value
BEAM 1.0 When this
of the mem
equally sp
If the BEA
conducted
locations s
STAAD ma
and end lo
CMZ 1.0 Coefficien
IS:801-19
bending d
CMY 0.85 Coefficien
IS:801-19
bending d
CWY 0.85 Specifies w
effect sho
IS:801-19
Values: 0
1–
454 — STAAD.Pro
FLX 1 Specifies w
provided o
1975, 6.6.
Values:
0 – Section
1 – Sectio
FU 450 MPa Ultimate te
(4588.72
kg/cm2)
FYLD 353.04 Yield stren
MPa
(3600.0
kg/cm2)
KX 1.0 Effective le
fraction an
a column c
user speci
ratio for tw
compressi
KY 1.0 Effective le
Y-axis. It i
from 0.01
buckling)
compute t
axial comp
KZ 1.0 Effective le
axis. It is a
from 0.01
buckling)
compute t
axial comp
LX Member Unbraced
length units of len
member co
to any use
the KL/R r
axial comp

LY Member Effective l
length is input in
from 0.01
buckling)
compute t
axial comp
LZ Member Effective l
length is input in
from 0.01
buckling)
compute t
axial comp
MAIN 0 0 – Check sle
0 – Do no
NSF 1.0 Net sectio
DMAX 2540.0 Maximum
cm. of length.
RATIO 1.0 Permissib
TRACK 0 This parame
output is rep
0 - Prints
and PASS
1 - Prints
by TRACK
2 - Prints
that printe
TSA 1 Specifies wh
to satisfy the
Values:
0 – Do no
1 – Comp
456 — STAAD.Pro
9E. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800:2007
9E.1 General Comments
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual design forces with the capacities as
defined by the Indian Standard Code. The IS 800: 2007 Code is used as the basis
of this design.
A brief description of some of the major capacities is described herein.
The following commands should be used to initiate design per this code:
PARAMETER n
CODE IS800 LSD
Where:
n = optional integer (i.e. - 1, 2) which signifies the numerical order of parameter
command block (if multiple blocks are specified).
9E.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks.
1. Slenderness
2. Section Classification
3. Tension
4. Compression
5. Shear
6. Bending
7. Combined Interaction Check
All of the design check criteria are described in the following sections.
When a design is performed, the output file reports the maximum utilization ratio
from all the above mentioned checks.
9E.2.1 Slenderness
As per Section 3.8 Table 3, the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of compression members
shall not exceed 180, and the slenderness ratio (L/r) of tension members shall not
exceed 400.

The user can also edit the default values through MAIN and TMAIN parameters, as
defined in the Design Parameter list.
9E.2.2 Section Classification
The IS 800: 2007 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements.

Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion.
Steel sections are classified as Plastic, Compact, Semi-Compact or Slender element
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics.
This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section as well as
nature of the load the member is withstanding. The design procedures are
different depending on the section class.
STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes
and design the section for the critical load case accordingly.
The Section Classification is done as per section 3.7 and Table B2, for Outstanding
and Internal Elements of a section.
9E.2.3 Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of Tension members are based on:
l Design Strength due to Yielding in Gross Section

l Design Strength due to Rupture of Critical Section
l Design Strength due to Block Shear
elongation of the member, and the corresponding check is done as per section 6.2
of the code.
The Design strength, involving rupture at the section with the net effective area, is
evaluated as per section 6.3 of the code. Here, number of bolts in the connection
may be specified by the user through the use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The Design strength, involving block shear at an end connection, is evaluated as
per section 6.4 of the code. This criteria is made optional by the parameter DBS. If
the value of DBS is specified as 1, additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG
and ATN must be supplied to the program for that member.
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these three
limit states.
The Net Section Area may be specified by the user through the use of the
parameter NSF.
458 — STAAD.Pro
9E.2.4 Compression
The design capacity of the section against Compressive Force, the guiding
phenomenon is the flexural buckling.
The buckling strength of the member is affected by residual stress, initial bow and
accidental eccentricities of load.
To account for all these factors, the strength of the members subjected to axial
compression is defined by buckling class a, b, c or d as per section 7.1.2.2 and
Table 7 of the code.
Imperfection factor, obtained from buckling class, and Euler’s Buckling Stress
ultimately govern compressive force capacity of the section as per section 7.1.2.
9E.2.5 Shear
The design capacities of the section against Shear Force in major- and minor-axis
directions are evaluated as per section 8.4 of the code, taking care of the following
phenomena:
l Nominal Plastic Shear Resistance
l Resistance to Shear Buckling
Shear area of the sections are calculated as per sec. 8.4.1.1.
Nominal plastic shear resistance is calculated as per sec. 8.4.1.
Among shear buckling design methods, Simple post-critical method is adopted as
per sec. 8.4.2.2(a).
9E.2.6 Bending
The design bending moment capacity of a section is primarily dependent on

whether the member is laterally supported or unsupported.
User can control the lateral support condition of the member by the use of LAT
parameter.
If the member is laterally supported, then the design strength is calculated as per
the provisions of the section 8.2.1 of the code, based on the following factors:
l Whether section with webs susceptible to shear buckling before yielding

l Shear Force to Design Shear Strength Ratio
l Section Classification

If the member is laterally unsupported, then the design strength is calculated as
per the provisions of the section 8.2.2 of the code, based on the following factors:
l Lateral Torsional Buckling

l Section Classification
9E.2.7 Combined Interaction Check
Members subjected to various forces – axial, shear, moment, torsion - are checked
against combined interaction check.
This interaction check is done taking care of two aspects -
l Section Strength
l Overall Member Strength
Section Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.1 of the code.
Overall Member Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.2, taking
care of the design parameters PSI, CMX, CMY and CMZ.
9E.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in
Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used namely – I-shaped section, Channel,
Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility
except for the General and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
9E.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to
perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default
values, are listed in the following table.
Table 9E.1 - Indian Steel Design IS 800:2007 Parameters
Parameter
Name
FYLD 250 MPA Yield Strength of Steel in current units.
FU 420 MPA Ultimate Tensile Strength of Steel in current units.
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis. Usually, the Minor Axis.
460 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis. Usually, the Major Axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate Slenderness Ratio for buckling about local Y
LZ Member Length Same as above except in Z-axis (Major).
MAIN 180 Allowable Slenderness Limit for Compression Member (as per
Section 3.8)
TMAIN 400 Allowable Slenderness Limit for Tension Member (as per Sectio
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for Tension Member.

ALPHA 0.8 A Factor, based on the end-connection type, controlling the Ru
Strength of the Net Section
0.6 = For one or two bolts
0.7 = For three bolts
0.8 = For four or more bolts
(as per Section 6.3.3)

DBS 0.0 Check for Design against Block Shear –
0.0 = Design against Block Shear will NOT be performed.
1.0 = Design against Block Shear will be performed.
If DBS = 1.0, Non-Zero Positive values of AVG, AVN, ATG an
ATN must be supplied to calculate Block Shear Strength Tdb.
AVG None Minimum Gross Area in shear along bolt line parallel to externa
(Mandatory for force. This parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as pe
Block Shear check) Section 6.4.1).
AVN None Minimum Net Area in shear along bolt line parallel to external f
(Mandatory for This parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Sect
Block Shear check) 6.4.1).
ATG None Minimum Gross Area in Tension from the bolt hole to the toe o
(Mandatory for angle, end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of the force. This
Block Shear check) parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6

Parameter
Name
ATN None Minimum Net Area in Tension from the bolt hole to the toe of t
(Mandatory for angle, end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of the force. This
Block Shear check) parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6
KX 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Lateral Torsional Buckling (as per T
15, Section 8.3.1)
LX Member Length Effective Length for Lateral Torsional Buckling (as per Table-15
Section 8.3.1)
CAN 0.0 Beam Type -
0.0 = non-cantilever beams for bending check and deflection c
1.0 = cantilever beam
(as per section 8.2.1.2)
PSI 1.0 Ratio of the Moments at the ends of the laterally unsupported l
of the beam
= 0.8 : where Factored Applied Moment and Tension can var
independently
= 1.0 : For any other case.
(as per Section 9.3.2.1)
CMY 0.9 Cm value in local Y & Z axes
CMZ (as per Section 9.3.2.2)
CMX 0.9 Equivalent uniform moment factor for Lateral Torsional Bucklin
per Table 18, section 9.3.2.2)
LAT 0.0 0.0 = Beam is laterally unsupported
1.0 = Beam is laterally supported
(as per Section 8.2.1 and 8.2.2 respectively)
TRACK 0 Controls the levels of detail to which results are reported.
0 = Minimum detail
1 = Intermediate detail level
2 = Maximum detail
462 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
DMAX 1000 in. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses.
BEAM 1.0 0.0 = design at ends and those locations specified by the SECT
command.
1.0 = design at ends and at every 1/12th point along member
(default).
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See section 5.47.1 of the Technical
erence Manual for details.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection.
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection
member Length".
DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Leng
9E.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both, “Code Checking” and “Member Selection” options are available with the IS
800: 2007 code. For information on specification of these commands, refer to
section 5.
Example 1
Commands for code checking
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
ALPHA 0.7 ALL
DBS 1 ALL
CAN 1 MEMB 2

PSI 0.8 MEMB 2
TMAIN 350 MEMB 2
TRACK 2 MEMB 2
CHECK CODE MEMB 2
Example 2
Commands for member selection
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
MAIN 160 MEMB 7
KY 0.8 MEMB 7
KZ 0.9 MEMB 7
FYLD 350 ALL
SELECT ALL
464 — STAAD.Pro
Section 10
Japanese Codes
10A. Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per 1991

AIJ
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the AIJ
standard for structural calculation of Reinforced Concrete Structures (1991
edition). Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement
required for the member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties
and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the details
regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also reported in
the output.

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed:

l For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular and Square)
l For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)

section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. These are the D
(YD) and b (ZD) dimensions for rectangular or square cross sections and the D
(YD) for circular cross sections.
The following is an example the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
250 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 350 mm diameter.
Warning: It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross
section area (AX) as an input.

Slenderness effects result in additional forces being exerted on the column over
and above those obtained from the elastic analysis. There are two options by
which the slenderness effects can be accommodated.
The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an exact analysis.
Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the
relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements
are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments
are then evaluated.
The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic
analysis and design the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the
magnified moment is equivalent to the total moment comprised of the sum of
primary and secondary moments.
466 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To
utilize the first method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead
of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take
advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as
primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load
combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a
primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections.
Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be
provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The second
method mentioned above is utilized by providing the magnification factor as a
concrete design parameter (See the parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The column
is designed for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial moments if
the first method is used and for the axial load and magnified biaxial moments if the
second method is used.
10A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. The program considers 12
equally spaced divisions of the beam member. However this number can be
redefined by NSECTION parameter. All these sections are designed for flexure,
shear and torsion for all load cases. The results include design results for most
critical load case.
10A.5.1 Design for Flexure
Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of
section properties provided by the user. Program first try to design the section for
g=0 and pt = balanced reinforcement ratio. If allowable moment is lower than the
actual moment program increases g value for same pt and checks the satisfactory
conditions. If conditions are not satisfied this procedure continues until g reaches
to 1.0 and then pt value is increased keeping g = 1.0. This procedure continues
until pt reaches to its maximum value( 2 % ). But if the allowable moment for pt =
maximum value and g = 1.0 is lower than the actual moment the program gives
message that the section fails.
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design
the section. It arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the
effective depth and redesign the sections for this effective depth.
Notes:
l Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure
design

l MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment
l 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for
flexure design.
l STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and
considering the fact that Japan is a high seismic zone area.
10A.5.2 Design for Shear
The Design Shear value, QD, is evaluated for the beam. The update effective depth
is used to then calculate the allowable shear stress. The allowable shear stress of
concrete, fs, is automatically calculated from design load type (permanent or
temporary) and given density of concrete. The program then calculates the
required bar size, aw, and spacing of stirrups. The reinforcement ratio for the
strirrup, pw, is calculated for design Bar size and stirrup pitch and all the necessary
checking is done.
For seismic loading it is needed to increase shear force ≥1.5 times the actual value
and this can be done utilizing the Design Shear Modification factor, k (SMAG
parameter) without changing the Design Moment.
Notes:
l Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged

l Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal Weight Concrete is
2.3 kg/sq. cm
10A.5.3 Example of Input Data for Beam Design
UNIT KG CM
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FYSEC SRR295 ALL
FC 350 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
468 — STAAD.Pro
10A.5.4 Design for Torsion
Torsion design for beam is optional. If TORSION parameter value is 1.0, program
design that beam for torsion. Program first checks whether extra reinforcement is
needed for torsion or not. If additional reinforcement is needed, this additional pt is
added to flexure pt and additional Pw is added to shear design Pw.
10A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force, MZ moment, MY moment and shear force.
Both the ends of the members are designed for all the load cases and the loading
which produces largest amount of reinforcement is called as critical load. If Track 0
or Track 1 is used, design results will be printed for critical load only. But if Track 2
is used user can get details design results of that member. Pt needed for minimum
axial force, maximum axial force, maximum MZ, maximum MY among all the load
cases for both the ends will be printed. If MMAG parameter is used, the column
moments will be multiplied by that value. If SMAG parameter is used, column shear
force will be multiplied by that value.
Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For
rectangular and square sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY,
while for circular sections Pg value is calculated for MZ and MY separately.
Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If BIAXIAL parameter value 1.0,
program will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is
always uniaxial type.
Steps involved:
1. Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 .

2. If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and
checking allowable load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of
the column.
3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt
and checking is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than
the actual moment, program increases Pt and this procedure continues until
the column design conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the required
Pt is higher than Pt maximum value.
4. If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile
stress of steel only.
5. If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction

equation
6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 ´ (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 £ a £ 2.0,
Mycap, Mzcap & Pcap represents section capacity
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and
calculates Pcap, Mycap and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again
and this process continues until the eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt
exceeds its maximum limit.
8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation
is satisfied (if uniaxial design is performed successfully).
9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and
calculates no. of bars and details output is written.
Example
UNIT KGS CMS

CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FC 210 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN

To design a slab or a wall, it must first be modeled using finite elements and
analyzed. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and
Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual.
The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
as transverse reinforcement.
The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the slab or wall. The
following parameters are those applicable to slab and wall design:
470 — STAAD.Pro
1. FYMAIN — Yield stress for reinforcing steel - transverse and longitudinal.
2. FC— Concrete grade
3. CLEAR— Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the
bar. This is considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the
element.
4. MINMAIN — Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse reinforcing
bar
The other parameters shown in Table 10A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall
design.

used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed
to suit the particular design being performed. Table 9A.1 contains a complete list of
the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length
and force units as centimeters and Kilograms before performing the concrete
design.
Table 10A.1 - Japanese Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE JAPAN Design Code to follow. See section
Manual.
FYMAIN SR235 Steel grade. Acceptable values for
steel grade and their associated
yield stress values are shown in the
following table. Program
automatically calculates yield stress
value depending on design load
type (permanent or temporary).
FYSEC SR235 Same as FYMAIN except this is for
secondary steel.
FC 210 Kg/cm2 Compressive Strength of Concrete.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CLEAR 3.0 cm Clear cover for Beam or clear side
(beam) cover for column.
4.0 cm
(Column)
size.
bar size.
MAXMAIN 41.0 cm Maximum main reinforcement bar
size
MAXSEC 41.0 cm Maximum secondary reinforcement
bar size.
beam.
beam. (Note: Both SFACE & EFACE
are input as positive numbers).
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will
mean spiral.
MMAG 1.0 Design moment magnification factor
SMAG 1.0 Design shear magnification factor
LONG 0.0 Value to define design load type
0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
BIAXIAL 0.0 Value to define biaxial or uniaxial
design type for Column
0 = uniaxial design only
1 = design for biaxial moments
TORSION 0.0 Value to request for torsion design
for beam
0 = torsion design not needed
1 = torsion design needed
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This
472 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This
value defaults to YD as provided
NSECTION 12 Number of equally-spaced sections
to be considered in finding critical
moments for beam design.
0.0 = Critical section design
results.
1.0 = Five section design results &
design forces.
2.0 = 12 section design results &
design forces.
COLUMN DESIGN:
1.0 = Detail design results for
critical load case only.
2.0 = Design results for minimum
P, maximum P, maximum MZ and
maximum MY among all load cases
for both ends.
Table 10A.2 - Table of permissible Steel Grades and associated Yield Stresses
for FYMAIN and FYSEC parameters
Long Term Loading Short Term Loading
Steel
Tension & Shear Rein- Tension & Shear Rein-
Grade
Compression forcement Compression forcement
SR235 1600 1600 2400 2400
SRR235
SDR235
SR295 1600 2000 3000 3000
SRR295
SD295A 2000 2000 3000 3000
SD295B
SDR295
SDR345 2200 (2000) 2000 3500 3500
SD345

Long Term Loading Short Term Loading
Steel
Tension & Shear Rein- Tension & Shear Rein-
Grade
Compression forcement Compression forcement
SD390 2200 (2000) 2000 4000 4000
10C. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ

10B.(A) Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2002 AIJ
10B.1(A) General

the “Architectural Institute of Japan” (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design
(1986 and 2002 editions) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural
logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design.
Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major
failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability
considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also
checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are
recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.

l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
10B.2(A) Analysis Methodology
specifications and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
474 — STAAD.Pro
10B.3(A) Member Property Specifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel
section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the
syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table.
Members properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
10B.4(A) Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library
database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since
for these members during the analysis. An example of member property
be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point
should be excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:

should be excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12
T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
should be excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.
25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
476 — STAAD.Pro
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing in between them, are
available. The letter D in front of the section name is used to specify a double
channel.
17 TO 27 TA D C300X90X10
45 TO 76 TA D C250X90X11 SP 2.0
In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back to back double channel

C300X90X10 with no spacing in between. Members 45 to 76 are a double channel
C250X90X11 with a spacing of 2 length units.
Angles
specification is as follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the
legs and then the thickness of the leg, all in millimetres. The word ST signifies that
the section is a STandard angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with
the local YY axis specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the User's Manual.
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of
the User's Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as
shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
Double angles
Short leg back to back and long leg back to back double angles may be specified by
using the words SD or LD in front of the angle size. In the case of an equal angle,
either SD or LD will serve the purpose. The spacing between the angles may be

specified by using the word SP after the angle size followed by the value of the
spacing.
8 TO 25 TA SD L100X65X7 SP 2.0
36 TO 45 TA LD L300X90X11 SP 3.0
The first example indicates a short legs back to back double angle comprised of
100X65X7 angles separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back to back
double angle comprised of 300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be
performed on TUBE sections.
Pipes (Circular Hollow sections)

Circular hollow sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by
the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and an inside diameter of
20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on
PIPE sections.
Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE
478 — STAAD.Pro
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
* TUBE
* PIPE
FINISH
10B.5(A) Member Capacities
Member design and code checking per AIJ 2002 are based upon the allowable
stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using
design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the
appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure of member
capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of
applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc.
These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness
factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the
procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.

Design Capabilities
All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE,
TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will
automatically adopt the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design
is requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be
used for member property.
Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses
as required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three
steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties

Program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of
Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table
and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i (
radius of gyration needed for bending ), program calculates moment of
inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses following
formula:
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable

for I shape, H shape and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses

Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be
determined on the basis of the values of F given in the following table.
480 — STAAD.Pro
Table: Values of F (N/mm2)
Steel for Con-
struction Struc- Steel for General Structures Steel for Welded St
tures
SS400
SN400 SN490 SN490 STK400
SM400
Thickness SNR400 SNR490 SNR490 STKR400 SS490 SS540 SM5
SMA400
STKN400 STKN490 STKN490
SSC400
t≤ 40 235 325 235 275 375 235 325 35
40< t ≤ 215 295 215 255 - 215 295 33
100
Note: In checking members for temporary loading be the combination of

stresses described in Chap.3, allowable stresses specified in this chapter
may be increases by 50%
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:

i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses ( FT ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension
Actual compressive stress ( FC ) = Force / A
Allowable tensile stress ( ft )
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case)

= F ( For Temporary Case )
Allowable compressive stress

(fc) = {1 - .4x(λ/Δ2)} x F/v when λ ≤ Δ
= 2.77 x F/ (
= fc x 1.5 (for Temporary case)
where:
Δ = √(π2E/(.6 x F))
Δ=F
v = 3/2 + 2/3x(λ/Δ2)

ii. Bending Stress:
Actual bending stress for My for compression
( Fbcy) = My / Zcy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz
Actual bending stress for My for tension
( Fbty ) = My / Zty
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz
where, Zcy , Zcz are section modulus for compression and
Zty, Ztz are section modulus for tension
Allowable bending stress for My
(fbcy) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz
(fbcz) = { 1 - .4 x (lb / i)2 / (C λ2)} ft max
= 900/ (lb x h / Af )
For Temporary case, fbcz = 1.5 x (fbcz for Permanent case)
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) + 0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for My, fbty = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz, fbtz = fbcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C

directly.
iii. Shear Stress

Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula:
qy = Qy / Aww
Where:
Aww = web shear area = product of depth and web thickness
qz = Qz / Aff
Where:
482 — STAAD.Pro
Aff = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
Allowable shear stress, fs = Fs / 1.5, Fs = F / √(3)
3. Checking design requirements:
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design
requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all
the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO.
If for any condition value exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that
the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC/fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy/fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty-FC) / ft
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty) / ft
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy/fbcy-FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
New Output Format ( TRACK -- 3 )

One new output format has been introduced which provides details step by step
information of Steel Design for guiding load case only. If Section command is used
before Parameter command this output will provide details information for all the
sections specified by Section Command.
Note: This output format is available only when Beam parameter value is 0 and
Track parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design information
will be printed for two ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear
Design information will be printed.
Example:
SECTION 0.0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 ALL

PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
BEAM 0.0 ALL
TMP 0.0 MEMB 1 to 4

TMP 1.0 MEMB 5 to 8
TRACK 3 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Allowable axial stress in tension is calculated per section 5.1 (1) of the AIJ code. In
members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity
of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of
the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based
on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may
be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with
member selection or code checking.
The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the

procedure of section 5.1 (3). Compressive resistance is a function of the
slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the
slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. In the
absence of user provided values for effective length, the actual member length will
be used. The slenderness ratios are checked against the permissible values
specified in Chapter 11 of the AIJ code.
Allowable stress for Bending
The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such
factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of
the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. The allowable
stresses in bending (compressive and tensile) are calculated as per the criteria of
Clause 5.1 (4) of the code.
Allowable stress for Shear
Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. The allowable
stresses in shear are computed according to Clause 5.1 (2) of the code.
484 — STAAD.Pro
10B.6(A) Combined Loading
applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for
all modeled loading situations. Members subjected to axial tension and bending are
checked using the criteria of clause 6.2. For members with axial compression and
bending, the criteria of clause 6.1 is used.
10B.7(A) Design Parameters
Table 10B.1 - Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE - Use JAPANESE 2002 to invoke the
AIJ 2002.
Manual.
the minor axis.
the major axis.
LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis
Length
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in Megapascal.
members.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
1.0 = No sidesway
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = check for slenderness
1.0 = suppress slenderness check
stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for
member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for member.
TMP 0 0 = Permanent Loading
allowable stresses.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments or
those at locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth
points along the beam, and use the
maximum Mz location for design.
for
deflection
check)
Note 1)
486 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Note 1)
TMAIN 400 Allowable Slenderness Limit for
Tension Member
1.0 = suppress slenderness check .
Any value greater than 1 = Allowable
KL/r in tension.
CB 0 C value from the AIJ code. See
"10B.5(A) Member Capacities" on page
479 Bending Stress for how C is
calculated and applied.
Use 0.0 to direct the program to
calculated Cb.
Any other value be used in lieu of the
program calculated value.
NOTES:
1. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local
deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
should be "4".

10B.8 Code Checking
of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on
the structure. The adequacy is checked per the AIJ requirements.
(default), design will be based on the forces at the start and end joints of the
member. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start
joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
10B.9 Member sSelection
moments obtained from the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of
the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially
as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose
properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in
the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or
members listed as PRISMATIC.
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
488 — STAAD.Pro
SELECT ALL
10C. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ
10B.1(B) General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the
“Architectural Institute of Japan” (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design
(2005 edition) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based
on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are
available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes
are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The
basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks
the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to
adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.

l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005
from the AIJ 2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design
methods, etc., remain unchanged. Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for
additional details.
10B.2(B) Member Capacities
Member design and code checking per AIJ 2005 are based upon the allowable
stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using
design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the
appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure of member
capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of
applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc.
These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness
factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the
procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.

Design Capabilities
All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE,
TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will
automatically adopt the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design
is requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be
used for member property.
Methodology
as required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three
steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties

Program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of
Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table
and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i (
radius of gyration needed for bending ), program calculates moment of
inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses following
formula:
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable

for I shape, H shape and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses

Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses ( FT ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension
Actual compressive stress ( FC ) = Force / A
Allowable tensile stress ( ft )
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case)
490 — STAAD.Pro
= F ( For Temporary Case )
Allowable compressive stress

(fc) = {1 - .4x(λ/Δ2)} x F/v when λ ≤ Δ
= 2.77 x F/ (
= fc x 1.5 (for Temporary case)
where:
Δ = √(π2E/(.6 x F))
Δ=F
v = 3/2 + 2/3x(λ/Δ2)
ii. Bending Stress:
Actual bending stress for My for compression
( Fbcy) = My / Zcy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz
Actual bending stress for My for tension
( Fbty ) = My / Zty
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz
where, Zcy , Zcz are section modulus for compression and
Zty, Ztz are section modulus for tension
Allowable bending stress for My
(fbcy) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz

For Temporary case, fbcz = 1.5 x (fbcz for Permanent case)
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) + 0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for My, fbty = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz, fbtz = fbcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C

directly.
iii. Shear Stress

Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula:
492 — STAAD.Pro
qy = Qy / Aww
Where:
Aww = web shear area = product of depth and web thickness
qz = Qz / Aff
Where:
Aff = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
Allowable shear stress, fs = Fs / 1.5, Fs = F / √(3)
3. Checking design requirements:
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design
requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all
the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO.
If for any condition value exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that
the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC/fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy/fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty-FC) / ft
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty) / ft
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy/fbcy-FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear)
are calculated as for AIJ 2002. See "10B.5(A) Member Capacities" on page 479
10B.3(B) Design Parameters

Table 10B2.1 - Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE JAPAN Use JAPANESE 2005 to invoke the
AIJ 2005.
Manual.
the minor axis.
the major axis.
Length
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in Megapascal.
members.
1.0 = No sidesway
494 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member
stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output
3.0 = Print maximum details.
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for
member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for
member.
TMP 0 0 = Permanent Loading
allowable stresses.
or those at locations specified by the
SECTION command.
for
deflection
check)
Note 1)
Note 1)

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
TMAIN 400 Allowable Slenderness Limit for
Tension Member
1.0 = suppress slenderness check .
Any value greater than 1 = Allowable
KL/r in tension.
CB 0 C value from the AIJ code. See
"10B.5(A) Member Capacities" on
page 479 Bending Stress for how C is
calculated and applied.
Use 0.0 to direct the program to
calculated Cb.
Any other value be used in lieu of the
program calculated value.
NOTES:
1. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of

local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
should be "4".
496 — STAAD.Pro
Section 11
Mexican Codes
11A. Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC

1987
STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will calculate the
reinforcement needed for the specified concrete section. All the concrete design
calculations are based on the current: Complementary Technical Standards for the
Design and Construction of Concrete Structures – Nov. 1987. (Normas Técnicas
Complementarias para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras de Concreto) of the
Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District –Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de
Construcciones para el Distrito Federal).

The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete design.
For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), Trapezoidal and T-shapes

For Slabs Finite element with a specified thickness

UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
13 TO 79 PRISM YD 40. ZD 20. IZ 53333 IY 13333
11 13 PR YD 20.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 24. ZD 48. YB 18. ZB 12.
17 TO 19 PR YD 24. ZD 18. ZB 12.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20
cm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided,
will be assumed to be circular with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is
provided for these members. For concrete design, this property must not be
provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the program
calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the above example the IZ
and IY values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using YD and ZD.
This is a conventional practice which takes into consideration revised section
parameters due to cracking of section.
Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent
a T-shape and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties
(YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) provided, the program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM design will be done
accordingly.
498 — STAAD.Pro
by the Mexican code. Default parameter values have been selected such that they
are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values
may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 3.1 is a
complete list of the available parameters and their default values.
The manual describes the commands required to provide these parameters in the
input file. For example, the values of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used
in shear design), the distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a
beam, are assigned values of zero by default but may be changed depending on the
actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns are designed for moments directly
obtained from the analyses without any magnification. The factors MMAGx and
MMAGy may be used for magnification of column moments. For beams, the user
may generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the appropriate load
factors.
Table 11A.1 - Mexican Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Parameters
Name Value
FYMAIN 4200Kg/cm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel
FYSTIRR 4200Kg/cm2 Yield Stress for stirrup reinforcing steel
FC 200Kg/cm2 Compressive Strength of Concrete
clear_cover_ 3cm Clear cover for top reinforcement
top
clear_cover_ 3cm Clear cover for bottom reinforcement
bottom
clear_cover_ 3cm Clear cover for side reinforcement
side
MINMAIN** No 2.5 bar Minimum main reinforcement bar size (Number 2 -18)
MINSEC** No 2.5 bar Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size (Number 2
-18)
MAXMAIN** No 12 bar Maximum main reinforcement bar size (Number 2 -18)

Parameter Default
Parameters
Name Value
SFACE 0 Face to support location of start of beam. If specified,
for shear force at start is computed at a distance of
SFACE+d from the start joint of the member. Positive
number
EFACE 0 Face to support location of end of beam. If specified,
for shear force at start is computed at a distance of
EFACE+d from the start joint of the member. Positive
number.
REINF 0 Tied Column. A value of 1 will mean spiral.
AMAGx 1 A factor by which the column design moments will be
AMAGy magnified
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This value defaults to ZD
as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This value defaults to YD
as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES
NSECTION 12 Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in
finding critical moments for beam design
500 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Parameters
Name Value
TRACK 0 Beam Design
0 = Critical Moment will not be printed out with beam
design report.
1 = will mean a print out.
2 = will print out required steel areas for all
intermediate sections specified by NSECTION.
Column Design
0 = will print out detailed design results.
1 = will mean a print out column interation analysis
results in addition to TRACK 0 output.
2 = will print out a schematic interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction values in addition to all of the
above.
BARTYPE 2 0: IMPERIAL (No 3 to 18)
1: METRIC (4.2 to 60mm)
2: MEXICAN (No 2 to 18)
DIM_ TRUE TRUE: Precautions are taken to assure dimensions
PRECAUTION FALSE: Not precautions taken - Section reduction to
section 1.5 NTC Concrete
EXPOSED_ FALSE Exposition to soil or weather to define cover and min
SOIL_ Steel reinforcement
WEATHER
CONC_CLAS 1 Concrete class according to 1.4.1d) to define Modulus
of Elasticity
LIGHT_CONC FALSE Light Concrete to define development multipliers
according to table 3.1 NTC
COLD_ FALSE Cold formed Bar to define development multipliers
FORM_BAR according to table 3.1 NTC

Parameter Default
Parameters
Name Value
DUCTILE_ TRUE DUCTILE FRAMES ACCORDING TO SECTION 5. Some
SEISMIC _ design conditions are considered (not including, for
DESIGN the time being, geometric or confinment ones)
DIAM_AG *2 cm MAXIMUM DIAM AGGREGATE
BEARED_ TRUE Slab beared perimeter. To calculate min steel required
PERIM according to 2.1.2
DIRECT_ TRUE Beam Loads and reactions in direct compression Cl-
COMP 2.1.5.a.I 2nd paragraph
PHI 90 degrees Stirrups angle with the axis of the element
TORSIONAL_ FALSE Beam needed for torsional equilibrium Cl.2.1.6a) 2nd
paragraph
EQUILIBRIUM
Pfact 1.0 Part of the longitudinal steel considered to reduce
shear. 0(zero) is on the safe side. Value between 1 and
0.
ZB 0.0 IDEM ACI
YB 0.0 IDEM ACI
EIT *198000 CONCRETE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY
Kg/cm2
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
** When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in
actual ‘mm‘ units instead of the bar number. The following metric bar sizes are
available: 4.2mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm,
40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.
11A.5 Beam Design

beam loadings are prescanned to locate the possible critical sections. The total
number of sections considered is 12 (twelve) unless this number is redefined with
an NSECTION parameter. All of these equally spaced sections are scanned to
determine moment and shear envelopes.
502 — STAAD.Pro
Design for Flexure
Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of the
section properties provided by the user. If the section dimensions are inadequate to
carry the applied load, that is if the required reinforcement is greater than the
maximum allowable for the cross section, the program reports that beam fails in
maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections are also designed with compression
reinforcement.
Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half
the dia. of main reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper
bar sizes for the stirrups and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections
1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC Concrete are utilized to obtain the actual
amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and minimum required
steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and ROWMN in the output and
can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 11A.1). In addition, the
maximum, minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.
It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The
moment MY is not considered in the flexural design.
Design for Shear

moments. Shear forces are calculated at a distance (d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE)
away from the end nodes of the beam. SFACE and EFACE have default values of
zero unless provided under parameters (see Table 10A.1). Note that the value of
the effective depth "d" used for this purpose is the update value and accounts for
the actual c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design. Clauses
2.1.5-6 and 5.2.4 of NTC Concrete are used to calculate the reinforcement for
shear forces and torsional moments. Based on the total stirrup reinforcement
required, the size of bars, the spacing, the number of bars and the distance over
which they are provided are calculated. Stirrups due to geometric conditions are
assumed to be 2-legged, due to design conditions could be 2 or 4-legged.
Design for Anchorage
In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also provided. At any
particular level, the START and END coordinates of the layout of the main
reinforcement is described along with the information whether anchorage in the
form of a hook or continuation is required or not at these START and END points.
Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are obtained after taking

into account the anchorage requirements. Anchorage length is calculated on the
basis of the Clauses described in Section 3.1 of NTC concrete. In case the program
selects 2 different diameters for the main or compression reinforcement, only the
anchorage for the largest diameter is analyzed.
Output
ACTUAL OUTPUT FROM DESIGN

==========================================-
===========================
BEAM NO. 1 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE
PER CODE NTC FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF
CONCRETE STRUCTURES,DDF
LEN - 525.00(cm) FY - 4200. FC - 250. SIZE - 30.00 X 80.00(cm)
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
(cm) (cm) (cm) STA END
____________________________________________________
_________________
1 4. 8 - -NUM, 5 0. 39. YES NO
1 4. 1 - -NUM, 4 0. 39.
2 8. 3 - -NUM, 5 0. 39. YES NO
504 — STAAD.Pro
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL MOMENT=5978000.50 Kg cm AT 0.00 (cm)LOAD 1|
| REQD STEEL= 24.41 (cm2)ROW=0.0109 ROWMX=0.0190
ROWMN=0.0026 |
| REQD COMP STEEL= 0.00 (cm2) |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 24.14/ 3.18/ 3.45 (cm) |
| COMP MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00 (cm) |

| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 40.07/ 39.08(cm) |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 1015658.4
cm^4
3 77. 10 - -NUM, 4 0. 45. YES NO
4 73. 9 - -NUM, 4 0. 45. YES NO
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL MOMENT=5978000.50 Kg cm AT 0.00 (cm)LOAD 1|
| REQD STEEL= 24.17 (cm2)ROW=0.0107 ROWMX=0.0190
ROWMN=0.0026 |
| REQD COMP STEEL= 0.00 (cm2) |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 24.46/ 2.54/ 2.72 (cm) |
| COMP MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00 (cm) |
| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 32.00/ 44.81(cm) |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 1008728.7 cm^4
REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY :

-------------------------------
SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD(+VE/-
VE)
( CM ) (SQ. CM ) (KG -CM )

0.00 24.67/ 24.67 5978000./ 5978000.50 0/ 0
525.00 24.67/ 24.67 5978000./ 5978000.50 0/ 0
B E A M N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S – SHEAR
AT START SUPPORT - Vu=41850.00 Kg Vc= 6074.49 Kg Vs=44719.39
Kg
Tu= 0.00 Kg cm Tc= 0.00 Kg cm Ts= 0.00 Kg cm LOAD 0
NO STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.

REINFORCEMENT IS REQUIRED FOR SHEAR.
PROVIDE NUM. 2.5 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 7.(cm) C/C FOR 176.(cm)
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL
RESISTANCE = 0.00 (cm2)
AT END SUPPORT - Vu=37450.00 Kg Vc= 6074.49 Kg Vs=39219.39 Kg
Tu= 0.00 Kg cm Tc= 0.00 Kg cm Ts= 0.00 Kg cm LOAD 0
NO STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
REINFORCEMENT IS REQUIRED FOR SHEAR.
PROVIDE NUM. 2.5 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 8.(cm) C/C FOR 176.(cm)
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL
RESISTANCE = 0.00 (cm2)
11A.6 Column Design

Columns design in STAAD per the Mexican code is performed for axial force and
uniaxial as well as biaxial moments. All active loadings are checked to compute
reinforcement. The loading which produces the largest amount of reinforcement is
called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular
sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is always assumed to
be equally distributed on all faces. This means that the total number of bars for
these sections will always be a multiple of four (4). If the MMAGx & -MMAGy
parameters are specified, the column moments are multiplied by the
corresponding MMAG value to arrive at the ultimate moments on the column.
Minimum eccentricity conditions to be satisfied according to section 2.1.3.a are
checked.
Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method
506 — STAAD.Pro
Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy
Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003
Steps involved:
1. Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1% for ductile design

or according to section 4.2.2 ) is a good amount to start with.
2. Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed reinforcement.
3. Calculate PNMAX = Po, where Po is the maximum axial load capacity of the
section. Ensure that the actual nominal load on the column does not exceed
PNMAX. If PNMAX is less than the axial force Pu/FR, (FR is the strength
reduction factor) increase the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the
reinforcement exceeds 6% (or 4% for ductile design), the column cannot be
designed with its current dimensions.
4. For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, find the
uniaxial moment capacities of the column for the Y and the Z axes,
independently. These values are referred to as MYCAP and MZCAP
respectively.
5. Solve the Interaction Bresler equation:
Where α = 1.24. If the column is subjected to uniaxial moment: α = 1

6. If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar
sizes, find the uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If
the equation is satisfied now, the reinforcement details are written to the
output file.
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed reinforcement is
increased (ensuring that it is under 6% or 4% respectively) and steps 2 to 6
are repeated.
By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be
checked as beams and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement
adopted.

11A.7 Column Interaction
The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design parameter
TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a value of 2.0 is used for the
TRACK parameter, 12 different Pn-Mn pairs, each representing a different point on
the Pn-Mn curve are printed. Each of these points represents one of the several
Pn-Mn combinations that this column is capable of carrying about the given axis,
for the actual reinforcement that the column has been designed for. In the case of
circular columns, the values are for any of the radial axes. The values printed for
the TRACK 1.0 output are:
l P0 = Maximum allowable pure axial load on the column (moment zero).

l Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column.
l P_bal = Axial load capacity of balanced strain condition.
l M_bal = Uniaxial moment capacity of balanced strain condition.
l E_bal = M_bal / P_bal = Eccentricity of balanced strain condition.
l M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load.
l P_tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column.
l Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the
axial load for the critical load case.
l Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and
Mu is the bending moment for the appropriate axis for the critical load case.
l Mu = Ö (Mux.Mmagx)²+ (Muy.Mmagy)²
l e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column
11A.8 Column Design Output

The next table illustrates different levels of the column design output.
The output is generated without any TRACK specification:
==================================================
COLUMN NO. 1 DESIGN PER - AXIAL + BENDING
FY -4200.0 FC - 294.1 Kg/cm2 CIRC SIZE 100.0(cm)DIAMETER

AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 128.506
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI
----------------------------------------------------------
46 - NUMBER 6 1.669 1 END 0.700
508 — STAAD.Pro
(EQUALLY SPACED)
TRACK=1 generates the following additional output:
COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z/Y -AXIS (Kg-cm )
--------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(cm)
2095196.38 2095196.38 727411.12 29235398.00 40.2
M0 P-tens. Des.Pn 'Des.Mn e/h

20606994.00 -550620.00 0.00 20000000.00 NaN
--------------------------------------------------------
TRACK=2 generates the following output in addition to all the above:
Pn Mn Pn Mn
| 1934027.38 5373253.50 967013.69 27278232.00
P0 |* 1772858.50 11408365.00 805844.75 28658428.00
|* 1611689.50 16296947.00 644675.81 29473708.00
Pn,max|__* 1450520.62 20083028.00 483506.84 28901764.00
| * 1289351.62 23117562.00 322337.91 27205616.00
Pn | * 1128182.62 25462606.00 161168.95 24433192.00
NOMINAL| *
AXIAL| *
COMPRESSION| *
Pb|-------*Mb
| *
___________|____*_______
| * M0 Mn,
| * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT

11A.9 Slab Design
Slab are designed per Mexican NTC specifications. To design a slab, it must be
modeled using finite elements.
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of
the element. Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is
not performed at any other point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked
with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement
required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse
reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLEAR, DIM_PRECAUTION, and
EXPOSED_SOIL_WEATHER listed in Table 3.1 are relevant to slab design. Other
parameters mentioned are not used in slab design.
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY

----------------------
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y
/LOAD
(SQ.CM/M ) (T -M /M ) (SQ.CM/M ) (T -M /M )
1 TOP : Longitudinal direction - Only minimum steel required.
1 BOTT: Transverse direction - Only minimum steel required.
1 TOP : 2.239 0.00 / 0 3.252 983.00 / 1
BOTT: 3.758 983.00 / 1 1.684 0.00 / 0
510 — STAAD.Pro
1 SHEAR CAPACITY 3794.73 Kg ***PASS***
11B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican

Code
11B.1 General
The program is based in: Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and
Construction of Steel Structures – Dec. 1987. (Normas Técnicas Complementarias
para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras Metálicas) of the Mexican Construction
Code for the Federal District –Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de Construcciones para el
Distrito Federal).
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance
Method or Limit States Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD).
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states
at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of
limit-state are recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations
in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is
deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform
reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at
the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures,
members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit
states of strength, and stability. It allows to check deformation to verify
serviceability.
program checks that main code requirements for each selected section are met and
The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as
implemented in STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental
concepts is presented here.
11B.2 Limit States Design Fundamentals

The primary objective of the Limit States Design Specification is to provide a
uniform reliability for all steel structures under various loading conditions.

The Limit States Design Method uses separate factors for each load and resistance.
Because the different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads
and combinations of loads and of the accuracy of predicted strength, a more
uniform reliability is possible.
The method may be summarized by the inequality
Yi Qi < Rn FR
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the
various load effects, Qi, multiplied by their respective load factors, yi. The design
strength, on the right side, is the nominal strength or resistance, Rn, multiplied by
a resistance factor, FR.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the
user will use appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary
for analysis. The design portion of the program will take into consideration the
load effects (forces and moments) obtained from analysis. In calculation of
resistances of various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal
strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically considered.
Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican Code

11B.3 Member End Forces and Moments
Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads applied to the
structure. These forces are in the local member coordinate system. the following
figures show the member end actions with their directions.
512 — STAAD.Pro
514 — STAAD.Pro
The Limit States Design specification allows inelastic deformation of section
elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are
classified as compact (type 2), noncompact (type 3), or slender element(type 4),
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics, besides sections type
1 are able for plastic design. This classification is a function of the geometric
section class. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the
standard shapes and design accordingly.
11B.5 Member in Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states.
with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the
user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 11B.1), that always refers to
the gross section. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based
on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or code check
accordingly.
In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members
are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of
use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both
the member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a
slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other
11B.6 Axial Compression

The column strength equations take into account inelastic deformation and other
recent research in column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are
available, one for inelastic buckling and the other for elastic or Euler buckling. Both
equations include the effects of residual stresses and initial out-of-straightness.
Compression strength for a particular member is calculated by STAAD according to
the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the NTC. For slender elements, the
procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used.
The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of
the Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel
Structures (de los Comentarios, ayudas de diseño y ejemplos de las Normas
Técnicas Complementarias para el Diseño y Construcción de Estructuras Metálicas,

DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were implemented for the determination of design
strength for these limit states.
Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through
the use of the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member
length will be taken into consideration.
In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression members are
required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use
of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the
member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a
slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other
11B.7 Flexural Design Strength

In the Limit States Design Method, the flexural design strength of a member is
determined mainly by the limit state of lateral torsional buckling. Inelastic bending
is allowed and the basic measure of flexural capacity is the plastic moment capacity
of the section.
The flexural resistance is a function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally
unbraced length, limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and the
bending coefficient. The limiting laterally unbraced length Lu and flexural
resistance Mr are functions of the section geometry and are calculated as per the
procedure of Section 3.3.2 of the NTC.
The purpose of bending coefficient Cb is to account for the influence of the
moment gradient on lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can be specified by
the user through the use of parameter CB or CBy (see Table 11B.1) or may be
calculated by the program (according to LRDF USA specification) if CB is specified
as 0.0. In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0 will be used.
To specify laterally unsupported length, either of the parameters UNL and UNF
(see Table 10B.1) can be used.
It is taken into account the reduction of flexural resistance due to slender web
according to section 4.5.8 of the NTC
For the sections where the web and flange are slender the LRDF USA specification
was used.
Stress areas due to bending about y axis (MY)
516 — STAAD.Pro
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards;
the shaded area indicates area under compression; the area not shaded
indicates area under tension.
Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
11B.8 Design for Shear

The procedure of Sect. 3.3.3 of the NTC is used in STAAD to design for shear forces
in members. Besides combined bending and shear is checked according to section
3.3.4 of the NTC, considering also the limits for stiffeners of the web according to
sections 4.5.6/7 of the NTC. Shear in wide flanges and channel sections is resisted
by the area of the web/s..
11B.9 Combined Compression Axial Force and Bending

The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly symmetric shapes is
governed by formulas of the Section 3.4 of the NTC. These interaction formulas
cover the general case of biaxial bending combined with axial force. They are also
valid for uniaxial bending and axial force.

It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid
elements so that the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The
program has included formulas to include structures with lateral displacements in
the future considering for B2 the columns individually and not the complete floor
analysis.
It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are
angularly restrained.
11B.10 Combined Tension Axial Force and Bending

Based on Section 3.5 4 of the NTC.

Design per Mexican Standards is requested by using the CODE. Other applicable
parameters are summarized in Table 11B.1 below. These parameters communicate
design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to
control the design process to suit an application's specific needs.
The parameters DMAX and DMIN may only be used for member selection only.
Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 11B.1. Design Parameters According to Mexican Standards - Steel
Parameter
Name
KX 1.0 K value for flexural-torsional buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y axis- Usually minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z axis- Usually major axis
LX Member length Length for flexural-torsional buckling
LY Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local
axis.
LZ Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local
axis.
FYLD 2530 kg/cm2 Minimum Yield strength of steel
FU 4230 Kg/cm2 Ultimate tensile strength of steel
NSF 1 Net section factor for tension members
UNT Member length Unsupported length (L) of the top* flange for calculating flexu
518 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
strength . Will be used only if compression is in the top flang
UNB Member length Unsupported length (L) of the bottom* flange for calculating
flexural strength . Will be used only if compression is in the
bottom flange.
STIFF Member length Spacing of stiffeners for beams for shear design
Cb y Cby 1 Coefficient C defined per section 3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to 0.0 it
be calculated by the program according to LRFD USA
(CbMex=1/CbUSA). Any other value will be directly used in th
design.
TRACK 0 0 = Suppress all design strengths
1 = Print all design strengths
2 = Print expanded design output
DMAX 114 cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect and design strength
BEAM 0 0: Design at ends and those locations specified by SECTION
command.
1: Design at ends and at every y cada 1/12th point along me
length
Rigid_to_H_ TRUE Defines if the structure has elements to bear the wind load ( s
Loads walls, wind trusses or bracing rigid elements ) that restrict late
displacements and allow to disregard slenderness effects.
IRREG 0 Variable defined for the whole structure indicating if it is regu
irregular according to section 3.4 of the NTC.
IRREG=1 for columns being part of irregular structures.
I_NO_OXIG 0 Defined for I shapes or tubes
Curve Definition according to NTC.3.2.2.1a)
I_NO_OXIG.= 0 implies n=1.4
laminated I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plate
obtained from wider plates cuts with oxygen.
I_NO_OXIG.= 1 implies n=1
I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plates
n is defined by the program
IMAIN_MEM 0 IMAIN_MEM=0 MAIN MEMBER

Parameter
Name
IMAIN_MEM=1 Secondary and wind trusses
Ccomb 1 Cfactor for combined forces when there are transverse loads
members. Section 3.4.3.3.ii NTC
Ccomb=1 If members ends are restricted angularly.
Ccomb=0.85 If members ends are not restricted angularly.
DUCTILE_ TRUE DUCTILE FRAMES ACCORDING TO SECTION 11. Main design
SEISMIC _ conditions are considered (not including, at the moment,
DESIGN geometric ones)
KX 1.0 K value for flexural-torsional buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y axis- Usually minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z axis- Usually major axis
LX Member length Length for flexural-torsional buckling
LY Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local
axis.
LZ Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local
axis.
FYLD 2530 kg/cm2 Minimum Yield strength of steel
FU 4230 Kg/cm2 Ultimate tensile strength of steel
NSF 1 Net section factor for tension members
UNT Member length Unsupported length (L) of the top* flange for calculating flexu
strength . Will be used only if compression is in the top flang
UNB Member length Unsupported length (L) of the bottom* flange for calculating
flexural strength . Will be used only if compression is in the
bottom flange.
STIFF Member length Spacing of stiffeners for beams for shear design
Cb y Cby 1 Coefficient C defined per section 3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to 0.0 it
be calculated by the program according to LRFD USA
(CbMex=1/CbUSA). Any other value will be directly used in th
design.
TRACK 0 0 = Supress all design strengths
1 = Print all design strengths
2 = Print expanded design output
DMAX 114 cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect and design strength
520 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
BEAM 0 0: Design at ends and those locations specified by SECTION
command.
1: Design at ends and at every y cada 1/12th point along me
length
Rigid_to_H_ TRUE Defines if the structure has elements to bear the wind load ( s
Loads walls, wind trusses or bracing rigid elements ) that restrict late
displacements and allow to disregard slenderness effects.
IRREG 0 Variable defined for the whole structure indicating if it is regu
irregular according to section 3.4 of the NTC.
IRREG=1 for columns being part of irregular structures.
I_NO_OXIG 0 Defined for I shapes or tubes
Curve Definition according to NTC.3.2.2.1a)
I_NO_OXIG.= 0 implies n=1.4
laminated I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plate
obtained from wider plates cuts with oxygen.
I_NO_OXIG.= 1 implies n=1
I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plates
n is defined by the program
IMAIN_MEM 0 IMAIN_MEM=0 MAIN MEMBER
IMAIN_MEM=1 Secondary and wind trusses
Ccomb 1 Cfactor for combined forces when there are transverse loads i
members. Section 3.4.3.3.ii NTC
Ccomb=1 If members ends are restricted angularly.
Ccomb=0.85 If members ends are not restricted angularly.
DUCTILE_ TRUE DUCTILE FRAMES ACCORDING TO SECTION 11. Main design
SEISMIC _ conditions are considered (not including, at the moment,
DESIGN geometric ones)
* Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local
Z axis if SET Z UP is used.
For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 from Table 2.1 may be used. All
requirements remain the same.

Both code checking and member selection options are available in STAAD Mexican
Standards implementation.

CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the Mexican NTC which governed the
design.
If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be printed out.
522 — STAAD.Pro
Section 12
Russian Codes
12A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per Russian

Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*)
12A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* “Plain concrete and concrete structures” is based
on the method of limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* defines two groups of limit
states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the
following phenomena:
l brittle, plastic or other type of failure,

l loss by structure of stable form or position,
l fatigue failure,
l failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental
effects.

Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the
following phenomena:
l excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to

service conditions,
l excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of
the maximum (design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second
group of limit states is made in accordance with the operational (normative) loads
and actions. Ratio between design and normative loads is called reliability
coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 “Loads
and actions”.
Reliability coefficient g for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be
n
considered in determination of loads and their combinations.
Program STAAD/Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete
members according to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code
SNiP 2.03.01-84* inclusive. Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of
concrete linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells)
members are incorporated in program STAAD/Pro. Not only Code SNiP 2.03.01-
84* but also the “Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced concrete
structures from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84)”
have been used in creation of these algorithms.
It is possible using program STAAD/Pro to calculate reinforcement for beams of
rectangular or T section and for columns of rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
Figure 12A.1 - Notation of dimensions for rectangular, circular and T sections

Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle
BETA=0°, or at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180°.
12A.2 Input Data
524 — STAAD.Pro
Entry of data of cross-sections of beams and columns is made by the use of
MEMBER PROPERTIES command, and thicknesses of 2D members are entered
by ELEMENT PROPERTY command.
Example:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
* Columns of rectangular cross-section
1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350.
* Columns of circular cross-section
17 TO 22 PRI YD 350.
* Beams of T cross-section
23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200.
UNIT METER
ELEMENT PROPERTY
41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14
101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16
* Flange of T beams is located at the bottom zone of cross-
section
BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40
Commands for calculation of reinforcement are located in the
input data file after the command of analysis and as a rule,
after output commands to print results of calculation.
Example:
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
.
.* Output command to print results of calculation (according
to user’s judgment)
.
* Command of loading and their combinations considered in
design
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* Command to start reinforcement calculation procedure

CODE RUSSIAN
.* List of parameters being used in reinforcement calculation
.
.
BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22
CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40
DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40
CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252
.
.
.
* Command of beam reinforcement calculation
DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40
* Command of column reinforcement calculation
* Command of calculation 2D elements (slabs, walls, shells)
* Command of interruption reinforcement calculation
END CONCRETE DESIGN
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of

reinforcement for beams, columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is
presented. Values of parameters do not depend on UNIT command. In the file of
input data only such parameters have to be taken, the values of which differ from
determined in the program.
Table 12A.2-1 - Names of parameters for Concrete design accord-

ing to Russian Code -СНиП 2.03.01-84* for beams.
Parameter Default
No. Description
name Value
1 NLT 1 Number of long-term loading case
2 RCL 3 Class of longitudinal reinforcement:
526 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
name Value
Russian Grade:-
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:-
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
3 USM 1. Total product of service conditions

coefficients for longitudinal
reinforcement (g )
s
4 UB2 0.9 Specific service conditions coefficient
for concrete (g )
b2
5 DD1 16. Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement
bars in beam tension zone
6 DD2 16. Diameter of shear reinforcement bars
for beam;
7 BCL 15. Compression Class of concrete.
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37

Parameter Default
No. Description
name Value
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105
8 UBM 1. Product of service conditions

coefficients for concrete, except UB2
(g )
b
9 TEM 0. Parameter of concrete hardening
conditions:
l TEM=0, for natural hardening

conditions;
l TEM=1, for steam hardening
conditions
10 CL1 0.05 Distance from top/bottom fiber of
beam cross section to the center of
longitudinal reinforcement bar;
11 CL2 0.05 Distance from left/right side of beam
cross section to the center of
longitudinal reinforcement bar
12 WST 0.4 Ultimate width of short-term crack
13 WLT 0.3 Ultimate width of long-term crack
14 SSE 0 Limit state parameter for beam design
l SSE=0, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must be
carried out according to the
requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
l SSE=1, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must be
carried out according to the
cracking requirements (the
second limit state)
528 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
name Value
15 RSH 1 Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:-
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:-
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
16 FWT ZD Design width of beam top flange. Use

for beam design only with default value
provided as ZD in member properties.
17 FWB ZB Design width of beam bottom flange.
Use for beam design only with default
value provided as ZB in member
properties.
18 DEP YD Design depth of beam section. Use for
beam design only with default value
provided as YD in member properties.
19 SFA 0. Face of support location at the start of
the beam. Use for beam design only.
20 EFA 0. Face of support location at the end of
the beam. Use for beam design only.
21 NSE 13 Number of equally-spaced sections for
beam design. Use for beam design
only. Upper limit is equal to 20.
ing to Russian Code СНиП 2.03.01-84* for columns
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
Russian Grade:-

Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:-
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

reinforcement (g )
s
for concrete (g )
b2
5 DD1 16. Minimum diameter of longitudinal
reinforcement bars for column
6 DD2 16. Maximum diameter of longitudinal
reinforcement bars for column
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete:
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
530 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105

(g )
b
conditions:

conditions;
conditions
10 CL1 0.05 Distance from edge of column cross
section to the center of longitudinal
reinforcement bar
11 ELY 1. Column's length coefficient to evaluate
slenderness effect in local Y axis
12 ELZ 1. Column's length coefficient to evaluate
slenderness effect in local Z axis
13 RSH 1. Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:-
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:-
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

ing to Russian Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*) for slabs and/or walls
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
Russian Grade:-
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:-
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

reinforcement (g )
s
for concrete (g )
b2
5 SDX 16. Diameter of reinforcing bars located in
the first local (X) direction of slab/wall
6 SDY 16. Diameter of reinforcing bars located in
the second local (Y) direction of
slab/wall
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete:
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
532 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105

(g )
b
conditions:

conditions;
conditions
10 CL 0.05 Distance from top/bottom face of
slab/wall element to the center of
longitudinal reinforcing bars located in
first local (X) direction. (Main thickness
of top/bottom concrete cover for
slab/wall element)
11 CRA 0.05 Distance from top/bottom face of
slab/wall element to the center of
transverse reinforcing bars located in
second local (Y) direction (Secondary
thickness of top/bottom concrete cover
for slab/wall)
12 WST 0.4 Ultimate width of short-term crack
13 WLT 0.3 Ultimate width of long-term crack
14 STA 0 Parameter of limit state for slab/wall

Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
design:
l STA=0, if calculation of
nonsymmetrical reinforcement
must be carried out according to
the requirements of load carrying
symmetrical reinforcement must
be carried out according to the
requirements of load carrying
nonsymmetrical reinforcement
must be carried according to the
second limit state);
symmetrical reinforcement must
be carried according to the
second limit state)
15 SELX 0. Design length of wall member to
evaluate slenderness effect in local X
axis
16 SELY 0. Design length of wall member to
evaluate slenderness effect in local Y
axis
17 MMA 0 Design parameter of slab/wall
reinforcement:
l MMA=0, if reinforcement
calculation must be applied by
stresses in local axis;
l MMA=1, if reinforcement
calculation must be applied by
principal stresses
18 MMB 1 Design parameter of slab/wall
534 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
reinforcement:
l MMB=0, if the effect of additional

eccentricity is not taken into
account;
l MMB=1, if the effect of additional
eccentricity is taken into account
19 RSH 1. Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:-
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:-
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
12A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In
calculation of longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis and
torsional moments are considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending
moments in relation to local axis is ignored. In calculation of transverse
reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis and torsional moments are
taken into account.
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or
from conditions of open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE).
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculation of transverse
reinforcement.
In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times –
according to strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width
limitation. In reinforcement calculations from conditions of strength design values
of load have to be taken and in calculations from conditions of crack width

limitation – characteristic (normative) load values are used. Both calculations can
be carried out in one session with the use multiple analysis possibility of the
program STAAD.Pro.
In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a
part of loadings. In such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers
of loads considered in calculation are indicated. Number of permanent and long-
term loads equal to parameter NLT must be included into the list of considered
loads.
It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not
only on the width of opened crack but also in some cases, on design and
normative reinforcement resistances.
Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class
given in SNiP 2.03.01-84* and to any intermediate value as well.
It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse
reinforcement increases with the value of parameter NSE.
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculations of transverse
reinforcement. Beam 1 is shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of
which are: at the start of the beam 0.3m and at the end – 0.2m. In modeling of the
beam the following command can be used.
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
Figure 12A.2 - Diagram of a beam with rigid intervals

When command MEMBER OFFSET is used forces corresponding to the beam the
length of which is equal to the distance between points a and b are calculated and
then used in calculation of reinforcement. In such case it is necessary to take into
account default values of parameters SFA and ЕFA equal to zero.
536 — STAAD.Pro
When command MEMBER OFFSET is not used forces corresponding to the beam
the length of which is equal to the distance between points 10 and 11 are calculated
and then used in calculation of reinforcement. In this case it is necessary to
consider values of parameters SFA=0.3 and ЕFA=0,2 in reinforcement
calculation.
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same.
Calculated quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
For beam the following output is generated:
l beam number;
lmethod of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of
opened crack width);
l length and cross-sectional dimensions;
ldistance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to
bottom/top edge of the section;
l distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the
centroid of longitudinal bars located at this edge;
l concrete class;
l class of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement;
l assumed in calculations bar diameters of longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement;
l calculation results of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (in two
tables).
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the beam, мм
As- cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the bottom zone o
cross-section of the beam, if angle BETA=0°, or in the top zone, if
BETA=180° , sq.cm
As+ cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the top zone of
cross-section of the beam , if angle BETA=0°, or in the top zone, if
BETA=180° , sq.cm
Moments (-/+) values of bending moments, determining cross-sectional areas of
longitudinal reinforcement As- and As+ , kNm
Load. N. (-/+) numbers of loading versions, determining cross-sectional areas of
longitudinal reinforcement

Acrc1 short-term opened crack width*, mm
Acrc2 long-term opened crack width*, mm
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed
according to conditions limiting opened crack width.
In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the beam, mm
Qsw intensity of transverse reinforcement, kN/m
Asw cross-sectional area of transverse bars, sq.cm, if their step is 10, 15, 2
25 or 30 cm
Q value of shear force parallel to the local axis, kN
T value of torsional moment, kNm
Load N. number of loading version, determining intensity of transverse
reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below.
BEAM NO. 23 DESIGN RESULTS
(by limitation of crack width)
Length - 6000 mm.
Section: BF1= 550 mm, B= 200 mm, HF1=220 mm, H=450 mm.
Distance from top/bottom surface of beam to center of longitudinal
reinforcement - 40 mm.
Distance from side surface of beam to center of longitudinal
reinforcement - 30 mm.
Concrete class - В25.0 (Rb=13.05 MPa; Rbt=0.94 MPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 MPa; Rsc=365.0 MPa).
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars D=16 mm.
Class of shear reinforcement - А-I (Rsw=175.0 MPa).
Diameter of shear reinforcement bars Dw=10 mm.
LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT
Section As-As+ Moments(-/+) Load.N.(-/+) Acrc1 Acrc2
mm sq.cm kNm mm mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------
538 — STAAD.Pro
0. 10.92 0.41 -152. / 2. 6 / 4 0.237 0.121
500. 4.74 0.41 -60. / 0. 5 / 0 0.294 0.157
1000. 1.13 1.13 -5. / 17. 4 / 6 0.000 0.000
1500. 1.13 6.41 -8. / 75. 4 / 6 0.295 0.147
2000. 1.13 9.24 -11. / 115. 4 / 6 0.298 0.149
2500. 1.13 11.53 -14. / 139. 4 / 6 0.271 0.134
3000. 1.19 12.16 -18. / 144. 4 / 6 0.263 0.127
3500. 1.41 10.86 -21. / 132. 4 / 6 0.277 0.130

4000. 1.63 8.28 -24. / 103. 4 / 6 0.296 0.129
4500. 1.95 4.54 -27. / 56. 4 / 6 0.299 0.093
5000. 3.23 0.58 -39. / 9. 5 / 3 0.293 0.157
5500. 0.74 0.41 - / 0. 5 / 0 0.271 0.142
124.
6000. 16.89 0.41 - / 0. 5 / 0 0.155 0.078
226.
SHEAR REINFORCEMENT
Section Qsw Asw, cm^2, if Sw= Q T Load
mm kN/m 10cm 15cm 20cm 25cm 30cm kN kNm N.
2.15 2.87 -
0. 251.3 1.44 3.59 4.31 203.9 0.0 6
2.15 2.87 -
500. 251.3 1.44 3.59 4.31 168.9 0.0 6
1.50 1.99 -
1000. 174.5 1.00 2.49 2.99 133.9 0.0 6
0.55 0.73 -
1500. 63.9 0.36 0.91 1.09 98.9 0.0 6
Minimum detailing -
2000. requirements ! 63.9 0.0 6
Minimum detailing -
2500. requirements ! 28.9 0.0 6

Minimum detailing
3000. requirements ! 12.7 0.0 5
Minimum detailing
3500. requirements ! 47.7 0.0 5
Minimum detailing
4000. requirements ! 82.7 0.0 5
95.0 0.82 1.09 1.37 1.64
4500. 0.55 117.7 0.0 5
2.08 2.77 3.46 4.16
5000. 242.5 1.39 152.7 0.0 5
2.59 3.46 4.32 5.19
5500. 302.5 1.73 187.7 0.0 5
2.59 3.46 4.32 5.19
6000. 302.5 1.73 216.1 0.0 5
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required
according to calculation.
12A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be
calculated. Flexibility of columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of
usual analysis (command PERFORM ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by
parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should conform with recommendation
of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according to deformed
diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of
parameters ELY and ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01.
Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of
strength. Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes
and are taken into account in longitudinal reinforcement calculations.
For rectangular columns the following output is generated:
l column number;
l column length and cross-sectional dimensions;
l distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the
cross-section;
540 — STAAD.Pro
l concrete class;
l longitudinal reinforcement class;
l range of longitudinal reinforcement bar diameters assumed in calculation;
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained in calculation;
l total quantity of longitudinal bars;
l quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to
the local axis ;
l quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to
the local axis .
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT
the following output is presented:
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the column, mm
Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
Asy cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of se
directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm
Asz cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of se
directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm
Percent reinforcement percentage in the section
Nx, Mz, My respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation t
local axes and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement
Load.N. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudin
reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below.
COLUMN NO. 97 DESIGN RESULTS
(rectangular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Section: B= 350 mm, H=350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 40 mm.
Concrete class - В25.0 (Rb=13.05 МPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 МPa; Rsc=365.0 МPa).

Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation d=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot=6.
Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the
local Y axis Nyy =2.
Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the
local Z axis Nzz =3.
Section Astot Asy Asz Percent Nx Mz My Load
m sq.cm sq.cm sq.cm % kN kNm kNm N
0. 16.42 3.01 6.20 1.34 285.5 81.9 0.0 6
4000. 15.35 3.01 5.67 1.25 397.3 95.3 0.0 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as
well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section obtained from
calculation should be considered as recommendation. In this case arrangement of
reinforcement in the section depends on the orientation of the local axes and is as
follows:
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table

and they may differ from recommended on the lower side.
When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column
longitudinal reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is
derived.
For columns of circular section the following output is generated:
l column number;
l column length and diameter of cross-section;
l distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar to the edge of cross-section;
542 — STAAD.Pro
l longitudinal reinforcement class;
lassumed in calculation range of diameters of longitudinal reinforcement
bars;
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained from calculation;
l quantity of longitudinal bars.
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT the following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the column, mm
Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
Per percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
cent
Nx, respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in
Mz, My relation to local axis and , determining cross-sectional area
of longitudinal reinforcement
Load. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of
N. longitudinal reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is
presented below.
COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS
(circular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Diameter: Dс= 350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 50 mm.
Concrete class - В20.0 (Rb=10.35 МPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 МPa; Rsc=365.0 МPa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7.
Section Astot Percent Nx Mz My Load

m sq.cm % kN kNm kNm N
0. 17.96 1.87 195.1 59.8 0.0 5
4000. 21.86 2.27 195.1 80.2 0.0 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as
well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section should be
considered as recommendation.
Arrangement of reinforcement in section in this case is shown below:
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ

from recommended on the lower side.
When according to detailing provisions it is not possible to arrange in the column
longitudinal reinforcement obtained from calculation additional message is
derived.
12A.5 Two Dimensional Element (slabs, walls, shells)

In general case calculation of reinforcement for 2D members is carried out two
times – according to conditions of strength and conditions of limiting opened
width of cracks. If reinforcement is calculated according to conditions of strength,
design values of loads have to be used, and for conditions of limiting crack width –
characteristic (normative) loads are employed. Both calculations can be made in
one session taking advantage of multiple analysis possibility of the program
STAAD.Pro.
Symmetric or nonsymmetrical reinforcement of 2D members is calculated
according to conditions of strength or according to conditions of limiting opened
crack width (see for example STA).
In reinforcement calculation for 2D members it is necessary to pay attention to
arrangement of local axes of member and direction of reinforcement (see for
example CL and CRA).
544 — STAAD.Pro
An example of output of calculation results is presented bellow.
SLAB/WALL DESIGN RESULTS
(by stresses in local axes for limitation of crack width)
Element Asx Mx Nx Load.N. Asy My Ny Load
sq.cm/m kNm/m kN/m (X) sq.cm/m kNm/m kN/m N.
(Y)
60 TOP 0.00 - 4.9 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.5 0.00 1
BOT 3.53 - 9.9 0.00 3 3.46 - 8.9 0.00 3
61 TOP 0.00 - 5.3 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.7 0.00 1
BOT 3.87 - 10.7 0.00 3 3.65 - 9.4 0.00 3
62 TOP 0.00 - 5.6 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.8 0.00 1
BOT 4.10 - 11.2 0.00 3 3.77 - 9.6 0.00 3
Here:
Element number of finite element, TOP - “top” zone of member, BOT -
“bottom” zone of member (“top” zone of member is determined by
positive direction of local axis -see Fig.2)
Asx intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the local
axis ), sq.cm/m
Mx distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis ,
kNm/m
Nx distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis ,
kNm/m
Load N.(X) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in
the first direction
Asy intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to the local
axis ), sq.cm/m
My distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis
kNm/m
Ny distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local axis
kN/m
Load N.(Y) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in
the second direction

Figure 2 - Local coordinate system of 2D member and notation of forces
12B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code

SNIP 2.23-81* (Edition 1990)
12B.1 General
Design Code SNiP “Steel Structures” as majority of modern codes is based on the
method of limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
l The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability,
failure, qualitative changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-
allowable residual deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or
opening of cracks.
lThe second group is concerned with states of structures making worse
normal their service or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections,
deviations, settlements, vibrations, etc.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum
(design) loads and actions, which can cause failure of structures.
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service
(normative) loads and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is
referred to as coefficient of load reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85
“Loads and Actions”.
Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85
shall be taken in to account determining loads or their combinations.
In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed
assortment sections and also from compound such as double angles of T-type
546 — STAAD.Pro
sections, double channels are presented. Design of other members of compound
section will be presented in other versions of the program.
Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) s/R y presented in
y c
calculation results. A section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 – 0,95.
12B.2 Axial tension members

Stress in a section of axial tension member shall not exceed design strength R of
y
selected steel multiplied by coefficient of service conditions g (KY and KZ), table 6
c
of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Slenderness of tension member (CMM) shall not exceed
slenderness limit indicated in table 20 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* (default value
l =200, but another value can be defined). Net section factor (ratio A /A
u net gross
(NSF)) is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design cross-section
area.
12B.3 Axial compression members

All axial compression members are calculated as long bars, i.e., with allowance for
slenderness (l=l /i ). Calculation is performed in accordance with the clause
0 min
5.3 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, buckling coefficient j is determined by formula 8-10.
Effective bar lengths (within and out of plane) taking in to account role and location
of the bar in the structure, as well as fixation of ends (l =ml), are determined
0
according to requirements of chapter 6 or addition 6 to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* and are
set by specification of members. Slenderness of compression members (CMN) shall
not exceed limit values given in table 19 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Value of coefficient
a being used in table 19 is taken within limits from 0,5 to 1,0. Limit slenderness
value depends on stress acting in the member, section area, buckling coefficient
and design resistance of steel.
Since slenderness can be different in various planes the greatest slenderness is
assumed in calculations.
12B.4 Flexural members

Members subjected to the action of bending moments and shear forces are called
flexural members.
Calculation of flexural members consists of verification of strength, stability and
deflection.
Normal and tangential stresses are verified by strength calculation of members.
Normal stresses are calculated in the outermost section fibres. Tangential stresses
are verified in the neutral axis zone of the same section. If normal stresses do not
exceed design steel strength and tangential stresses do not exceed design value of

steel shear strength R g then according to clause 5.14 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*
s s
principal stresses are checked.
General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in
accordance with clause 5.15 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in
two planes – in accordance with “Guide to design of steel structures” (to SNiP
2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient j value is determined according to appendix 7 of SNiP
b
2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load (concentrated or distributed), numbers
of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of applied load are required.
For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient j =1,0.
b
Simply supported (non-continuous) beams can be calculated in elastic as well as in
elastic-plastic state according to requirements of clause 5.18 of SNiP 2.01.07.-
81*. Calculation can be selected by specification of structure in input data.
Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit
(through parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural
member allowing for load reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data.
Limit values of deflection are determined in accordance with SNiP 2.01.07.- 85
“Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10. Deflections and displacements”.
Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of review (CHECK) problem.
12B.5 Eccentric compression/tension members

Eccentric compression or tension members are subjected to simultaneous action of
axial force and bending moment. Bending moment appears due to eccentric
application of longitudinal force or due to transverse force.
Stress in eccentric compression/tension members is obtained as a sum of stresses
due to axial force and bending.
Following the requirements of clause 5.25 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* resistance of
eccentric compression/tension member taking into consideration condition
R <530 MPa, t<0,5R and N/(A R )>0,1 is calculated by formula 49, and in other
y s n y
cases-by formula 50. Calculations of stability verification are performed according
to requirements of clauses 5.27, 5.30, 5.32 or 5.34.
Calculation for strength of eccentric tension members is made according to
formula 50 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*.
When reduced relative eccentricity m >20 eccentric compression members are
ef
calculated as flexural members (N=0), when m <20 strength by formula 49 is not
ef
verified (clause 5.24).
548 — STAAD.Pro
12B.6 Input Data
Program STAAD/Pro gives opportunity to verify sections of steel structures by
codes of many countries including and Russian Code SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*.
Algorithms for selection and review of sections for steel members according to
assortments and databases of the main rolled steel producers from given countries
and according to international standards as well are included in STAAD/Pro
program. In this program version only assortment sections can be utilized.
Typical sections of members being checked and selected according to SNiP
2.01.07.- 81* are presented in tables 1 and 2.
Table 12B.6-1 - Typical Sections for Russian Steel Design
Section
No. Section Designation form
Type
1 I-beam (GOST 8239-89) ST I12
2 Regular I-beam (GOST ST
26020-83) B1-10
B1-
10
3 Broad-flanged I-beam ST
(GOST 26020-83) SH1-23
SH1-
23
4 Column I-beam (GOST ST
26020-83) K1-20
K1-
20

Section
Type
5 Channel (GOST 8240- ST C14
89)
6 Equal legs angle (GOST ST L100x100x7

8509-89) RA L100x100x7
7 Unequal legs angle ST L125x80x10

(GOST 8510-89) RA L125x80x10
8 Pipes (welded and for ST PIP102x5.5

gas piping) or
ST PIPE OD 0.102
ID 0.055
9 Roll-formed square and ST TUB160x120x3
rectangular tubes or
ST TUBE TH 0.003
WT 0.12 DT 0.16
Table 12B.6-2 - Compound Sections for Russian Steel Design
Section
Type
1 Double channels D C14 SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance between
channel walls)
2 Double equal legs angles LD L100x100x7
SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance between
angle walls)
550 — STAAD.Pro
Section
Type
5 Double unequal legs LD L125x80x10
angles with long legs back SP 0.01
to back (SP – clear
distance between
angle walls)
6 Double unequal legs SD L125x80x10
angles with short legs back SP 0.01
to back (SP – clear
distance between
angle walls)
7 Tee with flange at the top T I12
T B1-10
T SH1-23
T K1-20
Flange of Tee beams is at the top part of cross-section if angle BETA = 0°, or at the
bottom part if BETA = 180°.
For entry of cross-sectional dimensions command MEMBER PROPERTIES RUSSIAN
is used.
Example
UNITS METER
MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN
* I-beam
1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10
* Channel
7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14
* Unequal legs angle
12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125x80x10
* Round assortment pipe
31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102x5.5
* Round pipe of cross-sectional dimensions defined by client
47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055

* Square tube from assortment
61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120x120x3
* Rectangular tube of cross-sectional dimension defined by
client
69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
* Double channel (distance between walls 10 мм)
96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01
* Double unequal legs angles with short legs back
to back (distance between walls 10 мм)
104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125x80x10 SP 0.01
* Member of Tee section
106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23
* Flange of T-beams at the bottom of cross-section
BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126
* Orientation of the local angle axes in relation to the global
axes of the structure
BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
Commands of output data for check and selection of
sections are located after commands of analysis and, as a
rule, after output command to print results of calculation.
Example
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
* Command of loadings and their combinations considered
in design
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* Command to start design according to Russian Code
PARAMETER
CODE RUSSIAN
* List of parameters used in checking and selecting
BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
552 — STAAD.Pro
LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4
LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4
MAIN 1. ALL
SGR 3. ALL
SBLT 0 ALL
* Parameter of output amount of information on calculation
results
TRACK 2. ALL
.
* Command to start section check procedure
CHECK CODE ALL
* Command to start section selection procedure
SELECT ALL
.
* Command of output to print content of assortment tables
PRINT ENTIRE TABLE
* Command of output to print summary of steel according to
sections
STEEL TAKE OFF
* Command of output to print summary of steel according to
members and sections
STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
Information on parameters, data used for check and selection of sections in design
of steel structures according to Russian Code is presented in table 3.
In this version of calculation according to requirements of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* there
is common database of equal legs angles and unequal legs angles, therefore
solution of section selection problem may give equal legs angle as well as unequal
legs angle irrespective of set at the beginning. The same is and with rectangular
and square tubes.
Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of
parameters, which differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the
input data file.
Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and
the second group of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be

performed only according to the first group of limit states with subsequent
recalculation and verification of selected section with allowance for deflection.
Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members
according to strength and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity
to set slenderness limit for compression and tension members respectively for
their stability calculation, or refuse consideration of slenderness by setting default
parameters. In this case selection of sections will be performed with consideration
only of strength check.
Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable
relative deflection value) different from set in the program.
In the case of application of steel not defined by SNiP and/or GOST it is necessary
to set their design strength by parameters UNL and PY.
In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see
table 4).
Table 12B.6-3 - Names or parameters for Steel design according

to Russian Code (SNiP II – 23 – 81*, edition 1990)
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
1 KY 1.0 Coefficient of effective length in
respect to local axis Y (in plane XZ)
2 KZ 1.0 Coefficient of effective length in
respect to local axis Z (in plane XY)
3 LY Member Effective length in respect to local axis
[m] length Y (in plane XZ)
Default is selected member's length
4 LZ Member Effective length in respect to local axis
[m] length Z (in plane XY)
Default is selected member's length
5 SBLT 0 Number of lateral bracing restraints
along the span:
l SBLT = 0, if beam not fixed;
l SBLT = 1, one restraint in the
middle of the span;
l SBLT = 2, 3, etc. number of
554 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
uniformly spaced lateral supports
along the span
6 NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members

or web section area weakening factor
for bending members
7 MAIN 1 Standard of steel grade (GOST):
l MAIN = 1, if Standard of steel
grade is GOST27772-88;
grade is TY14-3-567-76
8 DFF 0. Allowable limit of relative local
deflection (Member length/Deflection
Ratio):
Default value 0 is valid if design is
applied without deflection limitation.
Set for deflection check only
9 SGR 1 Steel grade (STAL):
l SGR = 1, if Steel grade is C235;
l SGR = 7, if Steel grade is C345K;

Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
l SGR = 10, if Steel grade is
C390K;
C590K;
BCT3KP;
BCT3PC;
BCT3CP;
l SGR = 17, if Steel grade is 20;
16G2AF
10 СMM 0 Slenderness limit value for tension
members:
l СMM = 0, if slenderness is
suppressed;
l СMM = 2, if ultimate slenderness
value is "150";
value is "200";
value is "250";
value is "300";
value is "350";
value is "400
556 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
Set slenderness limit value not equal to
"0" for design with evaluation of
buckling effect
11 CMN 0 Slenderness limit value for

compression members:
l СMN = 0, if slenderness is
suppressed;
l СMN = 1, if slenderness limit
value is "120";
value is "210-60a";
value is "220-40a";
value is "220";
value is "180-60a";
value is "210-60a";
value is "210-60a";
value is "200";
value is "150";
Set slenderness limit value not equal to
"0" for design with evaluation of
buckling effect

Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
12 LEG 4 Type and position of loading on beam:
l LEG = 1, for loading
concentrated in the middle span;
concentrated in the quarter of the
span;
concentrated at the end of
bracket;
l LEG = 4, for loading uniformly
distributed on beam;
l LEG = 5, for loading uniformly
distributed on bracket
13 CB 1 Place of loading on beam:
l CB = 1, for loading on top

flange;
l CB = 2, for loading on bottom
flange
14 TRACK 0 Output parameter:
l TRACK = 0, for suppressed

output information;
l TRACK = 1, for extended output
information;
l TRACK = 2, for advanced output
information
15 TB 0 Indication of elastic or elastic-plastic
calculation:
l TB = 0, for elastic calculation
l TB = 1, for elastic-plastic
calculation
Set for members under bending or
non-axial compression/tension only.
16 RATIO 1.0 Ratio between design and
558 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
characteristic loads values
17 DMAX 1. Maximum allowable section depth
[m]
18 DMIN 0. Minimum allowable section depth
[m]
19 BEAM 1 Member design parameter:
l BEAM = 0, Design members for
forces at their ends or at the
sections defined by SECTION
command;
l BEAM = 1, Calculate the major
axis moment Mz at 13 points
along the beam and design beam
at the location of maximum Mz;
l BEAM = 2, Same as BEAM=1, but
additional checks are carried out
at beam ends and at critical inter
mediate section;
l BEAM = 3, Calculate forces at 13
points and perform design
checks at all locations including
the ends
20 GAMC1 1.0 Specific service condition coefficient
for buckling design
21 GAMC2 1.0 Specific service condition coefficient
for strength design
22 PY 0 Design steel strength (yield strength):
[MPa] If parameters MAIN according to
Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by
SGR according to Steel grade (STAL)
are not defined
23 UNL 0 Design steel strength (ultimate
[MPa] strength):
If parameters MAIN according to
Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by

Parameter Default
No. Description
Name Value
SGR according to Steel grade (STAL)
are not defined
Table 12B.6-4 - Steel types for design of steel structures accord-

ing to SNiP 2.01.07.-81* (table 51 and 51a)
Parameter Parameter For
Steel GOST
SGR MAIN members*
1 C235 1 GOST 27772- GT, F
88
2 C245 1 “ GT, F
3 C255 1 “ GT, F
4 C275 1 “ GT, F
5 C285 1 “ GT, F
6 C345 1 “ GT, F
7 C345K 1 “ GT, F
8 C375 1 “ GT, F
9 C390 1 “ F
10 C390K 1 “ F
11 C440 1 “ F
12 C590 1 “ F
13 C590 1 “ F
К
14 BS 2 GOST 10705- Tube
t3kp 80*
t3ps 3 80*
GOST 10706-
76*
t3sp 3 80*
GOST 10706-
76*
17 20 4 GOST 8731- Tube
87
18 16 5 TY 14-3-567- Tube
560 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Parameter For
Steel GOST
SGR MAIN members*
G2АF 76
*GT – members from sheet and roll-formed tubes
F – rolled section steel
12B.7 Section selection and check results

Output of selection and check results are given in suppressed, extended and
advanced forms. Form of output results depends on value of parameter TRACK.
Results are presented in tables. Three versions of output results are possible:
suppressed – results according the critical strength condition (TRACK=0),
extended - results according to all check conditions (TRACK=1) and advanced –
complete information on results of member design (TRACK=2).
In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated:
(TRACK=2).
In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated:
number of member;
type and number of cross-section;
result obtained (ACCEPTED – requirements are met, FAILURE – are not met);
abbreviated name of normative document (code, standard) (SNiP);
number of check clause;
safety of strength (ratio between design and normative values);
number of the most unfavorable loading;
value of longitudinal force acting in the member with subscript indicating its
direction (“C” – compression, “P” – tension);
bending moments in relation to local member axes Z and Y;
distance to section, in which the most unfavorable combination of forces acts.
In suppressed form (TRACK=0) results are presented according to the critical
check for given member with indication of SNiP clause number, according to which
strength safety of the member is minimum.
Example of output with TRACK=0 of calculation results of a member is given
below.
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE

====================================================
MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION
====================================================
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.12 0.73 2

0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
In extended form (TRACK=1) results are presented on the basis of all required by
SNiP checks for given stress state.
Example of output with TRACK=1 of calculation results of a member is given
below.
====================================================
MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/

====================================================
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.12 0.73 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.12 0.06 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.14 0.97 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.15 0.84 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
* 1 B1-30 FAIL SNiP- DISPL 1.59 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
562 — STAAD.Pro
In advanced form (TRACK=2) in addition to tabled results supplementary
information is presented.
Material characteristics:
Steel;
Design resistance;
Elasticity modulus;
Section characteristics:
Length of member;
Section area;
Net area;
Inertia moment (second moment of area) (I);
Section modulus (W);
First moment of area (S);
Radius of gyration;
Effective length;
Slenderness;
Results are presented in two columns, Z and Y respectively.
Design forces:
Longitudinal force;
Moments;
Shear force.
Signs “+” and “-“ indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments
and shear forces in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD.
Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate
parameters by formulas in analytical and numerical expression with indication of
SNiP clause.
Example of output with TRACK=2 of calculation results of a member is given in the
next page.
====================================================

MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/
LOADING/
====================================================
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.12 0.73 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00

1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.12 0.06 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.14 0.97 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
1 B1-30 PASS SNiP- 5.15 0.84 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
* 1 B1-30 FAIL SNiP- DISPL 1.59 2
0.000E+00 -8.750E+01 0.000E+00 4.167E+00
MATERIAL DATA
Steel = C285
Modulus of elasticity = 206.E+06 KPA
Design Strength (Ry) = 280.E+03 KPA
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - m)
Member Length = 1.00E+01
Gross Area = 4.19E-03
Net Area = 4.19E-03

z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 633.E-07 390.E-08
Section modulus (W) : 428.E-06 557.E-07
First moment of area (S) : 240.E-06 415.E-07
564 — STAAD.Pro
Radius of gyration (i) : 123.E-03 305.E-04
Effective Length : 100.E-01 333.E-02
Slenderness : 0.00E+00 0.00E+00
DESIGN DATA (units -kN,m)SNiP II-23-81*/1998
Axial force : 0.00E+00
z-axis y-axis
Moments : -875.E-01 0.00E+00

Shear force : 0.00E+00 -150.E-01
CRITICAL CONDITIONS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK
F.(28) M/Wmin=-875.0E-01/ 4.28E-04= 204.6E+03
F.(29) (QY*SZ)/(IZ*TW)=-150.0E-01* 2.40E-04/ 6.33E-05* 5.80E-
03= 980.9E+01
RS*GAMAC= 162.4E+03
F.(33) SQRT(SIGMz**2+3*TAUzy**2)<=1.15*RY*GAMAC
-312.5E+03**2+3* 980.9E+01**2<=1.15* 280.0E+03* 100.0E-02
313.0E+03<= 322.0E+03
TAUzy<=RS*GAMAC
980.9E+01<= 162.4E+03
F.(34) M/(FIB*Wmin)=-875.0E-01/ 8.75E-01* 4.28E-04= 234.0E+03
RY*GAMAC= 280.0E+03
ACTUAL SECTION DISPLACEMENT = 6.349E-02 M
MAXIMUM MEMBER DEFLECTION = 6.349E-02 M Loading No. 2
ULTIMATE ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION VALUE = 4.000E-02 M
Conventional notations assumed in presentation of results: “+”, “-“, “/”, “*”,”**”,

“SQRT”, their respective meanings – addition, subtraction, division, multiplication,
raising to the second power (squared) and square root. Conventional notations of
stresses, coefficients and characteristics of steel resistance comply with accepted in

SNiP, only Greek letters are changed by their names (e.g. , gс-GAMAC; a-ALFA; b-
BETA, h-ETA, j-FI, etc.).
566 — STAAD.Pro
Section 13
South African Codes
13A. South African Codes - Concrete Design Per

SABS-0100-1
STAAD has the capability for performing design of concrete beams and columns
according to the South African code SABS 0100-1. The 2000 revision of the code is
currently implemented. Design can be performed for beams (flexure, shear and
torsion) and columns (axial load + biaxial bending). Given the width and depth (or
diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required
reinforcement.

control the design to SABS 0100-1. These parameters not only act as a method to
input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the
actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for

conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 12A.1 contains
a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 13A.1 - South African Concrete Design SABS 0100-1 Param-

eters
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
FYMAIN *450 Yield Stress for main reinforcement
N/mm 2
FYSEC *450N/mm Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement

2
a. Applicable to shear bars in beams
FC * Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength
30N/mm 2

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25
28 32 36 40 50 60
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable
to shear reinforcement in beams
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size
Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
CLT 20mm Clear Cover for outermost top
reinforcement
CLB 20mm Clear Cover for outermost bottom
reinforcement
CLS 20mm Clear Cover for outermost side
reinforcement
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed
with beam design report. Column design
gives no detailed results.
and spacing. For columns gives a detailed
table of output with additional moments
calculated.
List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at each
section of member
568 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This value
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This value
default is as provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both directions.
1.0 = Column braced about local Y
direction only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Z
direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z
directions

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain
section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The
following example demonstrates the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.

*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)

14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area
(AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also
note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them
from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.
13A.4 Beam Design

Beam design includes flexure, shear and torsion. For all types of beam action, all
active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and
locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen.
From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is
developed. Design for flexure is carried out as per clause no. 4.3.3.4.
Shear design as per SABS 0100 clause 4.3.4 has been followed and the procedure
includes computation of critical shear values. From these values, stirrup sizes are
calculated with proper spacing. If torsion is present, the program will also
consider the provisions of SABS 0100 clause 4.3.5. Torsional reinforcement is
separately reported.
A TRACK 2 design output is presented below.
B E A M N O. 4 DESIGN RESULTS
LENGTH: 7500.0 mm SIZE: 380.0 mm X 715.0 mm COVER:
25.0 mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR
(in mm) | MZ Load Case MX Load Case | VY P Load Case
--------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 135.75 5 -3.44 5 | 152.06 50.62 4
| -295.92 4 |
570 — STAAD.Pro
625.0 | 189.16 5 -3.43 5 | 133.95 48.87 4
| -236.52 4 |
1250.0 | 231.25 5 -3.41 5 | 115.84 47.12 4
| -188.44 4 |
1875.0 | 262.01 5 -3.40 5 | 97.73 45.37 4
| -151.68 4 |
2500.0 | 281.46 5 -3.39 5 | 79.61 43.63 4
| -126.24 4 |
3125.0 | 289.59 5 -3.37 5 | 61.50 41.88 4
| -112.12 4 |
3750.0 | 286.39 5 -3.36 4 | -62.13 40.13 5
| -109.32 4 |
4375.0 | 271.88 5 -3.37 4 | -80.25 41.88 5
| -117.84 4 |
5000.0 | 246.05 5 -3.39 4 | -98.36 43.63 5
| -137.68 4 |
5625.0 | 208.89 5 -3.40 4 | -116.47 45.37 5
| -168.84 4 |
6250.0 | 160.42 5 -3.41 4 | -134.58 47.12 5
| -211.33 4 |
6875.0 | 100.62 5 -3.43 4 | -152.70 48.87 5
| -265.13 4 |
7500.0 | 29.50 4 -3.44 4 | -170.81 29.63 4
| -330.25 5 |
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA FOR FLEXURE DESIGN (Sq.mm)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged)
--------------------------------------------------------------------

0.0 | 1232.70/1256.64( 4-20í )| 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 8í @ 425
mm
625.0 | 960.90/ 981.74( 2-25í )| 754.32/ 791.70( 7-12í )| 8í @ 510
mm
1250.0 | 751.24/ 791.70( 7-12í )| 937.49/ 942.48( 3-20í )| 8í @
510 mm
1875.0 | 596.52/ 603.18( 3-16í )| 1075.72/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @
510 mm
2500.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1165.13/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @
510 mm
3125.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1203.00/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @
220 mm
3750.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1188.08/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @
220 mm
4375.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1120.87/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @
220 mm
5000.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1003.50/1005.30( 5-16í )| 8í @
220 mm
5625.0 | 668.18/ 678.60( 6-12í )| 839.38/ 904.80( 8-12í )| 8í @
220 mm
6250.0 | 849.99/ 904.80( 8-12í )| 632.84/ 678.60( 6-12í )| 8í @
220 mm
6875.0 | 1089.94/1206.36( 6-16í )| 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 8í @
220 mm
7500.0 | 1397.16/1407.42( 7-16í )| 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 8í @
220 mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TORSION REINFORCEMENT: Not required
13A.5 Column Design

requirements of SABS 0100-1 clause 4.7 are followed, with the user having
572 — STAAD.Pro
control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY
parameters as described in table 12A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using
the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is
short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial
bending, the recommendations of 4.7.4.4 of the code are considered.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For
rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be
arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases.
Table 12A.3 shows typical column design results.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0
would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage,
column size and critical load case.
TABLE 12A.3 -COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT
================================================-
=======================
LENGTH: 3660.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 750.0 mm X 460.0 mm
COVER:40.0mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 4 END JOINT: 1 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maddz and Maddy) : 0.00 0.00
REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 114451.62 Sq.mm.
(Equally Distributed)

SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET)
----------------------------------------------------------
Puz : 2160.42 Muz1 : 570.23 Muy1 : 563.74
13B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB

Standard SAB0162-1:1993
13B.1 General
The South African Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the SAB Standard
SAB0162-1: 1993, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. A steel section library
consisting of South African Standards shapes is available for member property
specification.
strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load
and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel
The next few sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation
of SAB0162-1: 1993. A detailed description of the design process along with its
574 — STAAD.Pro


I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows.
For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 720X200PG

Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)
C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example.
3 TABLE ST 127X64X15C
Double Channels
specified by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back
to back double channel section PFC140X60 without spacing in between should
be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D PFC140X60
A back to back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01unitlength

in between should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D 140X60X16C SP 0.01
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing
the spacing. The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with
a 25mm thickness is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate
angle specifications.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 70X70X8L
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the
local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-
Y’ axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles
assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y’-Y’ axis. To specify angles in
accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been
provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the
word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
100 TO 150 TABLE RA 45X45X3L
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6
of the STAAD Technical Reference manual.
Double Angles
576 — STAAD.Pro
To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for
long leg back to back) or SD (short leg back to back). For equal angles, either SD or
LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using the
word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section
designation.
100 TO 150 TABLE LD 50X50X3L

3 TABLE LD 40X40X5L SP 0.01
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 40X40X5
angles with a spacing of 0.01 length units.
Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T
specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE T IPE-AA180
will describe a T section cut from a IPE-AA180 section.

Rectangular Hollow Sections
These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the
SAB tables may be specified as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUB60X30X2.5
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for
width), and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUBE TH 3 WT 100 DT 50
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of
3mm. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in
current length unit.

Circular Hollow Sections
Sections listed in the SAB tables may be provided as follows:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIP34X3.0CHS
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be
specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter)
specifications.
For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIPE OD 50 ID 48
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside
diameter of 48 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters
must be provided in terms of current length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of South African shapes is shown below.
578 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE 30-Mar-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0;
8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5 11.4 0;
13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14;
10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14;
17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
2 TABLE T IPE120
3 TABLE ST 152X23UC
4 TABLE T 152X23UC
5 TABLE ST 812X200PG
6 TABLE T 812X200PG
7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C
8 TABLE D 178X54X15C
9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1
10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L
11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L
12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L
13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L
14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS
17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50
18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50
20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS
21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48
The SAB specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local
buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic
(Class 1), compact (Class 2), non compact (Class 3) or slender element (Class 4)
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and
Table 1 of SAB0162-1:1993). This classification is a function of the geometric
section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes
and user specified shapes. Design is performed for sections that fall into the
category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only. Class 4 sections are not designed by
STAAD.

outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as
members’ unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors,
unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program
automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate
member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for
calculating the member resistances.
All the members are checked against allowable slenderness ratio as per Cl.10.2 of
SAB0162-1: 1993.
Axial Tension
The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit
states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent
excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the
section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified
by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD
calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per
Cl.13.2 of SAB0162-1: 1993. Parameters FYLD, FU and NSF are applicable for
these calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the
code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the
compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross
section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness
580 — STAAD.Pro
factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity
calculations are:
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the
axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated
from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The
parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
2. For single angles, asymmetric or cruciform sections are checked as to whether
torsional-flexural buckling is critical. But for KL/r ratio exceeding 50,as
torsional flexural buckling is not critical, the axial compression capacities are
calculated by using Cl.13.3. The reason for this is that the South African code
doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The parameters
KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional
buckling into account. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide the
effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-torsional
buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for single
channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections
with axial compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a),
13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a),
K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of
computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of
the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member
length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as
being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is
computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one-
tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The
equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance
of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity
calculations are:
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is
calculated as
For Class 1 & 2 sections, Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections, Phi*Sy*Fy

Where Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Fy = Yield stress of steel
2. For single angles sections are not designed by STAAD, as the South African
code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric
shapes such as Tees and Double angles, SAB0162-1: 1993 stipulates in
Clause 13.6(b), page 31, that a rational method.
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these
equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is
accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these
equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter
(see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading
condition.
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using
interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks.
The actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical
equation.
Shear
Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting
on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of
the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have
failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be
within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for
safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users
may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
582 — STAAD.Pro
The design parameters outlined in table below may be used to control the design
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design
Table 13B.1 - South African Steel Design Parameters

Kt 1.0 K value for flexural torsional buckling
Ky 1.0 K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis
Kz 1.0 K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis
Lt Member length Length for flexural torsional buckling
Ly Member length Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r
Lz Member length Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r
Fyld 300Mpa Yield strength of steel
Fu 345Mpa Ultimate strength of steel
UNT Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression of top
resistance
UNB Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression of bott
resistance
Main 0 Flag for controlling slenderness check
0 - For Check for slenderness.
1 - For Do not check for slenderness
Cb 1.0 Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5,Value of Omega_
calculation
Equal to 0.0: Calculate Omega_2
Ssy 0 Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Y-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Y-axis.

Ssz 0 Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Z-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Z-axis.
Cmy 1.0 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis.
2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis
Cmz 1.0 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis.
2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis
Track 0 Track parameter
0 = Print the design output at the minimum detail le
1 = Print the design output at the intermediate deta
2 = Print the design output at maximum detail leve
Dmax 1000 Maximum allowable depth
Dmin 0 Minimum required depth
Ratio 1.0 Permissible ratio of applied load to section capacity
Used in altering the RHS of critical interaction equat
Beam 0 0 - Perform design at ends and those locations spec
1 - Perform design at ends and 1/12th section locati
Dff 0 Default is 0 indicating that deflection check is not pe
Dj1 0 Start node of physical member for determining defle
and should be set along with DFF parameter
Dj2 0 End node of physical member for determining defle
and should be set along with DFF parameter
13B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the current section
properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces obtained from the most
recent analysis. The adequacy is checked as per the SAB0162-1: 1993
requirements.
members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1 (which is also its default
value), moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam. When no
section locations are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero, design will
be based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels
584 — STAAD.Pro
the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing
load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing
forces and moments are also printed. Using the TRACK parameter can control the
extent of detail of the output.
PARAMETER
CODE SAB0162
MAIN 1 all
LY 4 MEMB 1
LZ 4 MEMB 1
UNL 4 MEMB 1
CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23
CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23
SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 1 TO 23
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

The member selection process involves determination of the least weight member
that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the

most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified
initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel
selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided
from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection
cannot be performed on members listed as PRISMATIC.

The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the SAB0162-1: 1993
specification, which governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, the output will be displayed as follows:
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
====================================================
* 1 ST PFC140X60 (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)

FAIL SAB-13.9 4.321 1
-20.00 0.00 82.53 0.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER- 1 UNIT - KN,M PHI =
0.90 |
| MRZ= 14.35 MRY= 3.86 |
| CR= 58.41 TR= 425.81 VR= 123.85 |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
586 — STAAD.Pro
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some
of the items printed out.
MRZ= Factored moment of resistance in z direction
MRY= Factored moment of resistance in z direction
CR = Factored compressive resistance for column
TR= Factored tensile capacity
VR= Factored shear resistance
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track
2.0 parameter is as follows.
**************************************
**************************************
LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
====================================================
* 1 ST PFC140X60 (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)

FAIL SAB-13.9 4.321 1
-20.00 0.00 82.53 0.00
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.95E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 4.50E+02
IZ = 6.05E+02 SZ = 8.64E+01 PZ = 4.24E+02

IY = 6.91E+01 SY = 1.73E+01 PY = 1.52E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 248.2 FU = 285.4

---------------------------------
CRY = 5.841E+01 CRZ = 2.947E+02
CTORFLX = 2.021E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 4.258E+02 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY =
5.841E+01
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 3.859E+00 MRZ =

1.435E+01
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 1.238E+02 VRZ =
1.168E+02
--------------------------
KL/RY = 239.051 KL/RZ = 80.789 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.500
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 =
1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 3.526E+01
Following is a description of some of the items printed out.

CRY Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about the loc
axis
CRZ Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about the loc
axis
CTORFLX Factored compressive resistance against torsional flexural buckling
TENSILE CAPACITY Factored tensile capacity
COMPRESSIVE Factored compressive capacity
CAPACITY
588 — STAAD.Pro
FACTORED MOMENT MRY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
RESISTANCE MRZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction
FACTORED SHEAR VRY = Factored shear resistance in y direction
RESISTANCE VRZ = Factored shear resistance in z direction
13B.11 Verification Problems

South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard

SAB0162-1:1993
Objective: - To determine the capacity of a South African I-section column in axial
compression. Column is braced at its ends for both axes.
Design Code: - South African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993))
Reference: - Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-
1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical
publication
Given: - FYLD = 300Mpa
Length = 6000mm
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength (kN)
Theory 1516
STAAD 1516
Difference No
****************************************************
**
* STAAD.Pro *

* Version Bld *
* Date= *
* Time= *
**
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD PLANE
2. START JOB INFORMATION
3. ENGINEER DATE
4. END JOB INFORMATION
5. INPUT WIDTH 79
6. ***********************************************
7. * STAAD.PRO GENERATED COMMENT *
8. ***********************************************
9. *1 0 0 0,2 0 6 0
10. ***********************************************
11. UNIT METER KN
13. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0
15. 1 1 2
16. MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
17. 1 TABLE ST 356X67UB
18. DEFINE MATERIAL START
19. ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
20. E 2.0E+008
21. POISSON 0.3
22. DENSITY 76.977
23. ISOTROPIC STEEL
590 — STAAD.Pro
24. E 2.00E+008
25. POISSON 0.3
26. DENSITY 76.8195
27. ALPHA 1.2E-005
28. DAMP 0.03
29. END DEFINE MATERIAL
30. UNIT MMS KN
31. CONSTANTS
32. MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
33. UNIT METER KN
34. SUPPORTS
35. 1 FIXED
36. LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
37. JOINT LOAD
38. 2 FY -1500
PROBLEMSTATISTICS
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 1
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 3
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 0 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
40. PARAMETER
41. CODE SAB0162
42. LZ 6 ALL
43. LY 3 ALL
44. FU 450000 ALL
45. BEAM 1 ALL
46. NSF 0.85 ALL
47. TRACK 2 ALL

48. FYLD 300000 ALL
49. CHECK CODE ALL
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
================================================-
=======================
1 ST 356X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SAB-13.8 0.989 1
1500.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 1.95E+04 SZ = 1.07E+03 PZ = 1.21E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.57E+02 PY = 2.43E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 1.516E+03 CRZ = 2.038E+03
CTORFLX = 1.516E+03
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.918E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 1.516E+03
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.561E+01 MRZ = 1.992E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.903E+02 VRZ = 6.461E+02
--------------------------
592 — STAAD.Pro
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00
50. FINISH

SAB0162-1:1993

Objective:- To determine the capacity of a South African I-section beam in
bending. The beam has torsional and simple lateral rotational restraint at the
supports, and the applied point load provides effective lateral restraint at the point
of application is braced at its ends for both axes.
Reference: - Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-
publication
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength (kN-m)
Theory 353.4
STAAD 353.3
Difference Small
****************************************************
**
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *

* Date= *
* Time= *
**
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD PLANE
3. ENGINEER DATE
5. INPUT WIDTH 79
6. UNIT METER KN
8. 1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0; 3 7 0 0
10. 1 1 3; 2 3 2
12. 1 2 TABLE ST 406X67UB
15. E 2.0E+008
16. POISSON 0.3
17. DENSITY 76.977
18. ISOTROPIC STEEL
19. E 2.00E+008
20. POISSON 0.3
21. DENSITY 76.8195
22. ALPHA 1.2E-005
23. DAMP 0.03
25. UNIT MMS KN
26. CONSTANTS
594 — STAAD.Pro
27. MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 2
28. UNIT METER KN
29. SUPPORTS
30. 1 3 PINNED
32. MEMBER LOAD
33. 1 CON GY -104 4
34. 1 UNI GY -26.4
35. 2 UNI GY -7.2
PROBLEMSTATISTICS
-----------------------------------
37. PARAMETER
38. CODE SABS0162
39. CB 0 ALL
40. UNL 4 MEMB 1
41. FU 450000 ALL
42. BEAM 1 ALL
43. NSF 0.85 ALL
44. FYLD 300000 ALL
45. TRACK 2 ALL
46. CHECK CODE MEMB 1
**************************************
**************************************

FX MY MZ LOCATION
================================================-
=======================
1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SHEAR 0.244 1
0.00 0.00 32.40 7.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
--------------------------
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = -1.565E+02
596 — STAAD.Pro
47. FINISH

SAB0162-1:1993
Objective: - To determine the elastic shear capacity of a South African I-section

which is simply supported over the span of 8 m
Reference: - Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-
publication
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength (kN)
Theory 687.1
STAAD 687.1
Difference No
****************************************************
**
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Date= *
* Time= *
**
* USER ID: *
****************************************************

1. STAAD PLANE
3. ENGINEER DATE
5. INPUT WIDTH 79
6. UNIT METER KN
8. 1 0 0 0; 2 8 0 0
10. 1 1 2
12. 1 TABLE ST 457X67UB
15. E 2E+008
16. POISSON 0.3
17. DENSITY 76.977
18. ISOTROPIC STEEL
19. E 2E+008
20. POISSON 0.3
21. DENSITY 76.8195
22. ALPHA 1.2E-005
23. DAMP 0.03
25. UNIT MMS KN
26. CONSTANTS
27. MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
28. UNIT METER KN
29. SUPPORTS
30. 1 2 PINNED
598 — STAAD.Pro
32. MEMBER LOAD
33. 1 UNI GY -70
PROBLEMSTATISTICS
-----------------------------------
35. PARAMETER
36. CODE SABS0162
37. FU 450000 ALL
38. BEAM 1 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL
40. TRACK 2 ALL
41. CHECK CODE ALL
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================-
======================
* 1 ST 457X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
FAIL CLASS 4 SECT 2.000
0.00 0.00 0.00
-----------------------------

IZ = 2.94E+04 SZ = 1.30E+03 PZ = 1.47E+03
IY = 1.45E+03 SY = 1.53E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 0.000E+00 CRZ = 0.000E+00
CTORFLX = 0.000E+00
--------------------------
42. FINISH
600 — STAAD.Pro
Section 14
American Aluminum
Code
14.1 General
STAAD is currently equipped with the facilities to perform design based on the
specifications for Aluminum Structures. The requirements of the Allowable Stress
Design, Sixth edition, October 1994, have been implemented.
The various issues related to the implementation of this code in STAAD are
explained in the next few sections.
14.2 Member Properties

In order to do this design in STAAD, the members in the structure must have their
properties specified from Section VI of the above-mentioned manual. The section
names are mentioned in Tables 5 through 28 of that manual. All of those tables
except Table 10 (Wing Channels) and Table 20 (Bulb Angles) are available in
STAAD.
Described below is the command specification for various sections:

Section 14 American Aluminum Code
Standard single section
memb-list TA ST section-name
Example:
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PipeX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RectX.500Wall
Double channel back-to-back
memb-list TA BACK section-name SPACING value
Example
3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5

5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75
Double channel front-to-front
memb-list TA FRONT section-name SPACING value
Example
2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0

4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5
Double angle long leg back-to-back
memb-list TA LD section-name SPACING value
Example
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
Double angle short leg back-to-back
memb-list TA SD section-name SPACING value
602 — STAAD.Pro
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
14.3 Design Procedure

The design is done according to the rules specified in Sections 4.1, 4.2 and 4.4 on
pages I-A-41 and I-A-42 of the Aluminum code. The allowable stresses for the
various sections are computed according to the equations shown in Section 3.4.1
through 3.4.21 on pages I-A-27 through I-A-40. The adequacy of the member is
checked by calculating the value of the left-hand side of equations 4.1.1-1, 4.1.1-2,
4.1.1-3, 4.1.2-1, 4.4-1 and 4.4-2. This left-hand side value is termed as RATIO. If
the highest RATIO among these equations turns out to be less than or equal to 1.0,
the member is declared as having PASSed. If it exceeds 1.0, the member has
FAILed the design requirements.
Note: The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not
implemented in STAAD.Pro.
14.4 Design Parameters

The following are the parameters for specifying the values for variables associated
with the design.
Table 14.1 Aluminum Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
ALLOY 34 This variable can take on a value from 1
through 40. The default value represents
the alloy 6061-T6. See Table 12A.2 in the
following pages for a list of values for this
parameter and the alloy they represent.
Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the
Aluminum specifications provides
information on the properties of the
various alloys.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
PRODUCT 1 This variable can take on a value from 1
through 4. They represent:
1 - All 2 - Extrusions
3 - Drawn Tube 4 - Pipe
The default value stands for All. The
PRODUCT parameter finds mention in
Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the
Aluminum specifications.
ALCLAD 0 This variable can take on a value of either
0 or 1.
0 - Material used in the section is not an
Alclad.
1 - Material used in the section is an
Alclad.
WELD 0 In Table 3.4-2 in Section I-A of the
Aluminum specifications, it is mentioned
that the value of coefficients Kt and Kc are
dependent upon whether or not, the
location of the section where design is
done is within 1.0 inch of a weld. The
WELD parameter is used in STAAD for this
purpose. The values that can be assigned
to this parameter are:
0 - Region is farther than 1.0in from a
weld
1 - Region is within 1.0in from a weld
604 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
STR 1 In Table 3.4-1 in Section I-A of the
UCTURE Aluminum specifications, it is mentioned
that the value of coefficients nu, ny and na
are dependent upon whether the structure

being designed is a building or a bridge.
Users may convey this information to
STAAD using the parameter STRUCTURE.
The values that can be assigned to this
parameter are:
1 - Buildings and similar type structures
2 - Bridges and similar type structures
DMAX 1000 in. Maximum depth permissible for the
units.
DMIN 0.0 in Minimum depth required for the section
during member selection. This value must
be provided in the current units.
UNL Member Distance between points where the
length compression flange is braced against
buckling or twisting. This value must be
provided in the current units. This value is
used to compute the allowable stress in
bending compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column
buckling in the local Y-axis. It is a fraction
and is unit-less. Values can range from
0.01 (for a column completely prevented
from buckling) to any user specified large
for determining the allowable stress in
axial compression.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
LY Member Effective length for overall column
length buckling in the local Y-axis. It is input in
the current units of length. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a column completely
prevented from buckling) to any user
compute the KL/R ratio for determining
the allowable stress in axial compression.
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column
buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction
and is unit-less. Values can range from
0.01 (for a column completely prevented
from buckling) to any user specified large
for determining the allowable stress in
axial compression.
LZ Member Effective length for overall column
length buckling in the local Z-axis. It is input in
the current units of length. Values can
prevented from buckling) to any user
compute the KL/R ratio for determining
the allowable stress in axial compression.
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional
buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from torsional
for twisting for determining the allowable
stress in axial compression. See Equation
3.4.7.2-6 on page I-A-28 of the
Aluminum specifications for details.
606 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
LT Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in
length the current units of length. Values can
prevented from torsional buckling) to any
user specified large value. It is used to
determining the allowable stress in axial
compression. See Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on
page I-A-28 of the Aluminum
specifications for details.
STIFF Member Spacing in the longitudinal direction of
length shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It
is input in the current units of length. See
section 3.4.21 on page I-A-40 of the
Aluminum specifications for information
regarding this parameter.
SSY 0.0 Factor that indicates whether or not the
structure is subjected to sidesway along
the local Y axis of the member. The values
are:
0 - Sidesway is present along the local Y-
axis of
the member
1 - There is no sidesway along the local
Y-axis of
the member.
The sidesway condition is used to
determine the value of Cm explained in
Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41 of the

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SSZ 0.0 Factor that indicates whether or not the
structure is subjected to sidesway along
the local Z axis of the member. The values
are:
0 - Sidesway is present along the local Z-
axis of the member
1 - There is no sidesway along the local
Z-axis of the member.
The sidesway condition is used to
determine the value of Cm explained in
Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41 of the
TRACK 2 This parameter is used to control the level
of detail in which the design output is
reported in the output file. The allowable
values are:
status.
2 - Prints the design summary in addition
to that printed by TRACK 1
3 - Prints the member properties and
alloy
properties in addition to that printed
by
TRACK 2.
4 - Prints the values of variables used in
design in addition to that printed by
TRACK 3.
608 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
BEAM 0.0 If this parameter is set to 1.0, the
adequacy of the member is determined by
checking a total of 13 equally spaced
locations along the length of the member.
If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location
check is not conducted, and instead,
checking is done only at the locations
specified by the SECTION command (See
STAAD manual for details). If neither the
BEAM parameter nor any SECTION
command is specified, STAAD will
terminate the run and ask the user to
provide one of those 2 commands. This
rule is not enforced for TRUSS members.
14.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the initially specified
member properties are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to the member due
to the loads on the structure. Code checking is done at the locations specified by
either the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter described above.
It is done with the aid of the command CHECK CODE described in the main STAAD
Technical Reference Manual.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Examples Manual for STAAD
provides an example on the usage of the CHECK CODE command.
14.6 Member Selection

The member selection process involves the determination of the least weight
have a channel selected for it. It is done with the aid of the command SELECT
MEMBER described in the main STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Example
Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Examples Manual for STAAD provides an
example on the usage of the SELECT MEMBER command.
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER

CODE ALUMIMUM
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
Table 14.2 - ALLOY PARAMETER :

Table 14.2 Alloy Parameter
Value Name
1 1100-H12
2 1100-H14
3 2014-T6
4 2014-T6510
5 2014-T6511
6 2014-T651
7 3003-H12
8 3003-H14
9 3003-H16
10 3003-H18
11 3004-H32
12 3004-H34
13 3004-H36
14 3004-H38
15 5005-H12
16 5005-H14
17 5005-H32
18 5005-H34
19 5050-H32
20 5050-H34
21 5052-H32
610 — STAAD.Pro
Value Name
22 5052-H34
23 5083-H111
24 5086-H111
25 5086-H116
26 5086-H32
27 5086-H34
28 5454-H111
29 5454-H112
30 5456-H111
31 5456-H112
32 6005-T5
33 6105-T5
34 6061-T6
35 6061-T6510
36 6061-T6511
37 6061-T651
38 6063-T5
39 6063-T6
40 6351-T5

612 — STAAD.Pro
Section 15
American Trans-
mission Tower Code
15A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel

Design per ASCE 10-97
15A.1 General Comments
The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specifications of
ASCE Standard 10-97 – Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures is now
implemented. This code is meant to supercede the older edition of the code,
available under the name ASCE Publication 52. However, in the interests of
backward compatibility, both codes are currently accessible in STAAD.Pro.
To access the ASCE 52 code, use the commands
PARAMETER
CODE ASCE 52

To access the ASCE 10-97 code, use the commands
PARAMETER
CODE ASCE
In general, the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING

procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design. It is assumed that the
user is familiar with the basic concepts of steel design facilities available in STAAD.
Please refer to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed
information on this topic. This section specifically addresses the implementation
of steel design based on ASCE 10-97.
Design is available for all standard sections listed in the AISC ASD 9th edition
manual, namely, Wide Flanges, S, M, HP, Tees, Channels, Single Angles, Double
Angles, Tubes and Pipes. Design of HSS sections (those listed in the 3rd edition
AISC LRFD manual) and Composite beams (I shapes with concrete slab on top) is
not supported.
15A.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE 10 - 97

Member selection and code checking operations in the STAAD implementation of
ASCE 10-97 are done to resist loads at stresses approaching yielding, buckling,
fracture and other limiting conditions specified in the standard. Those stresses are
referred to in the standard as Design Stresses. The appropriate sections of the
ASCE standard where the procedure for calculating the design stresses is
explained are as follows.
Design Axial Tensile Stress
Design tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in
section 3.10. The NSF parameter (see the Parameters table shown later in this
section) may be used if the section area needs to be reduced to account for bolt
holes.
Design Axial Compressive Stress
Design compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 3.6

through 3.9. For angle members under compression, the procedures of sections
3.7 and 3.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for
column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may
614 — STAAD.Pro
control the effective lengths for buckling using the LT, LY, LZ and/or KT, KY, KZ
parameters (see the Parameters table shown later in this section).
Design Bending Compressive Stress
Calculations for design bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor
axis are based on the procedures of section 3.14. Procedures outlined in sections
3.14.1 through 3.14.6 have been implemented.
Design Bending Tensile Stress
Calculations for design bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are
based on the procedures of section 3.14.2.
Design Shear Stress
Calculation of the design shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section
3.15 of the ASCE 10-97. The procedure of section 3.15.2 is followed for angles and
the procedure of section 3.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
15A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine

Pass/Fail status
These are Clause 3.4 for slenderness limits, Clause 3.12 for Axial Compression and
Bending, Clause 3.13 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 3.9.2 for Maximum w/t
ratios and Clause 3.15 for Shear.

Design per ASCE (10-97) must be initiated by using the command CODE ASCE. This
command should be the first command after the PARAMETER statement. Other
applicable parameters are summarized in the table shown later in this section.
These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific
modeling needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they
are frequently used numbers for conventional design.
Table 15.1 Steel Design Parameters for ASCE 10-97

Parameter
Name
KY 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about th

Parameter
Name
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about t
KT 1.0 Effective length coefficient for warping restraint (clause 3.1
LY Member Length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about the
LZ Member Length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about the
LT Member Length Effective length for warping.
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the top flange for calculating flexura
ural compression is on the top flange.
UNB Member Length Unsupported length of the bottom flange for calculating flex
flexural compression is on the bottom flange.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for member selection
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member selection
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio that determines the cut off point for pass/f
quantity indicates PASS while a value greater than this qua
BEAM 1.0 0 = Perform design at beam ends and section locations spe
command
1 = Perform design at the ends and eleven intermediate se
MAIN 2 Parameter that indicates the member type for the purpose o
CLAUSE 3.4, PAGE 3, ASCE 10-97)
= 10 : DO NOT PERFORM THE KL/R CHECK
= 1 : LEG MEMBER KL/R <= 150
= 2 : COMPRESSION MEMBER KL/R <= 200
= 3 : TENSION MEMBER KL/R <= 500
= 4 : HANGAR MEMBERS KL/R <= 375 (Clause 4C.4, p
= 5 : REDUNDANT MEMBERS KL/R <= 250
616 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
ELA 4 Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used from a
to determine the KL/R ratio.
l ELA=1 : EQN.3.7-4, Page 4 (VALID FOR LEG MEMBE

l ELA=2 : EQN.3.7-5, Page 4
ELB 1 Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used from a

10 and 3.7-12 thru 3.7-14 to determine the KL/R ratio.
l ELB=1 : EQN.3.7-8, Page 5, EQN.3.7-12, Page 5

l ELB=2 : EQN.3.7-9, Page 5, EQN.3.7-13, Page 5
l ELB=3 : EQN.3.7-10, Page 5, EQN.3.7-14,Page 5

0.0 = indicates that the angle is connected by both legs and
is 1.0FYLD.
1.0 = indicates that the angle is connected only by the shor
stress is computed per clause 3.10.2 as 0.9FYLD.
2.0 = indicates that the angle is connected by the longer le
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis
CMY 0.85 for sidesway Cm value in local y and z axes as defined in equation 3.12-1
CMZ and calculated for
no sidesway
DBL 0.75 in. Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts required
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
NHL 0 Number of bolt holes on the cross section that should be us
factor for tension capacity.
Note: All values must be provided in the current unit system.
15A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE 10-97
implementation. For general information on these options, refer to sections 2 and

5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
15B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel

Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
This document presents some general statements regarding the implementation of
the Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 52 –
Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition. The design
philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking is
based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features regarding the process of
calculation of the relevant allowable stresses and the stability criteria being used.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the
allowable stresses and the most economical section is selected based on the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the
slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness requirements and the
width-thickness requirements. It is generally assumed that the user will take care
of the detailing requirements like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects
like flange buckling, web crippling, etc. It general, it may be noted that the
concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING procedures are
similar to that of the AISC based design. It is assumed that the user is familiar
with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer
to Section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on
this topic. This document specifically addresses the implementation of steel design
based on ASCE Pub. 52.
15B.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52)

The member design and code checking in the STAAD implementation of ASCE
(Pub. 52) is based upon the allowable stress design method. Appropriate sections
of this publication are referenced below.
Allowable Axial Tensile Stress
Allowable tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in
section 4.10. The NSF parameter (Table 1.1) may be used if the net section area
needs to be used.
618 — STAAD.Pro
Allowable Axial Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 4.6

through 4.9. For angle members under compression, the procedures of sections
4.7 and 4.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for
column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may control
the effective lengths for buckling using the LX, LY, LZ and/or KX, KY, KZ parameters
(Table 1.1).
Allowable Bending Compressive Stress
Calculations for allowable bending compressive stress about the major axis and
minor axis are based on the procedures of section 4.14. Procedures outlined in
sections 4.14.1 through 4.14.6 have been implemented.
Allowable Bending Tensile Stress
Calculations for allowable bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis
are based on the procedures of Section 4.14.2.
Allowable Shear Stress
Calculation of the allowable shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in

section 4.15 of the ASCE Pub. 52. The procedure of section 4.15.2 is followed for
angles and the procedure of section 4.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status
These are Clause 4.4 for slenderness limits, Equation 4.12-1 for Axial Compression
and Bending, Equation 4.13-1 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 4.9.2 for
Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 4.15 for Shear.

Design per ASCE (Pub. 52) must be initiated by using the command CODE ASCE.
This command should be the first command after the PARAMETER statement.
Other applicable parameters are summarized in Table 15.1. These parameters may
be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The default
for conventional design.

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE Pub.
52 implementation. For general information on these options, refer to section 3 of
the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For information on specification of these
commands, refer to section 6.
15B.5 Parameter Definition Table

Table 15B.1 Steel Design Parameters for ASCE (Pub. 52) Based
Design
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KY 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression
buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis)
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression
buckling about the Z-axis (major axis)
KT 1.0 Effective length coefficient for warping
restraint (clause 4.14.4, pg 36)
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for
Length buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis)
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for
Length buckling about the Z-axis (major axis)
LT Member Effective length for warping.
Length
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
UNL Member Unsupported length of member for
Length calculation of
allowable bending stress
UNF 1.0 Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of
the member length
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable
stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for member
selection
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member
selection
620 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio that determines the cut
off point for
pass/fail status. A value below this quantity
indicates PASS while a value greater than
this
quantity indicates FAILURE.
BEAM 0.0 2.0 = Perform design using the section
locations specified according to the SECTION
command
3.0 = Perform design at the ends and

eleven intermediate sections of the beam
MAIN 2 Parameter that indicates the member type
for the purpose of calculating the KL/R
ratio
(SEE CLAUSE 4.4, PAGE 25)
= 10 : DO NOT PERFORM THE KL/R
CHECK
= 1 : LEG MEMBER KL/R <= 150
= 2 : COMPRESSION MEMBER KL/R <=
200
= 3 : TENSION MEMBER KL/R <= 500
= 4 : HANGAR MEMBERS KL/R <=
375
(Clause 4C.4, page 43)
= 5 : REDUNDANT MEMBERS KL/R <=
250

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
ELA 4 Indicates what type of end conditions are
to be used
From among Equations 4.7-4 thru 4.7-7 to
determine the
the KL/R ratio.
ELA=1 : EQN.4.7-4, Page 26
(VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY)
ELA=2 : EQN.4.7-5, Page 27
ELA=3 : EQN.4.7-6, Page 27
ELA=4 : EQN.4.7-7, Page 27
ELB 1 Indicates what type of end conditions are
to be used from among Equations. 4.7-8
thru 4.7-10 to determine the KL/R ratio.
ELB=1 : EQN.4.7-8, Page 27, EQN.4.7-12,
Page 28
ELB=2 : EQN.4.7-9, Page 27, EQN.4.7-13,
Page 28
ELB=3 : EQN.4.7-10, Page 27, EQN.4.7-
14,Page28
3.0 = indicates that the angle is connected
by both legs and allowable stress in axial tension is
1.0 FYLD.

only by the shorter leg and allowable tensile stress
is computed per clause 4.10.2 as 0.9FYLD.

by the longer leg.
DBL 0.75 in. Diameter of bolt for calculation of number
of bolts required and the net section factor.
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
622 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
NHL 0 Number of bolt holes on the cross section
that should be used to determine the net section
factor for tension capacity.
Notes:
l All values must be provided in the current unit system.

l Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is

624 — STAAD.Pro
Section 16
Steel Design per

American Petroleum
Institute Code
16.1 Design Operations

l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design;
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection;
l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and
l Specify design parameters to carry out punching shear checks.

upon the design requirements, but care should be taken when coupled with
manipulation of the punching shear LEG parameter.
The basic process is as follows:
a. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading and analysis.

b. Define the API code parameters with LEG 1.0.
c. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file and give
preliminary design results.
d. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary.
e. Reset the LEG parameter to 2.0 and re-run the analysis to read the modified
Geometry file for the final design results.
16.2 Allowables per API Code

as defined by the American Petroleum Institute (API-RP2A) Code. The 21st
edition of API Code, as published in 2007, is used as the basis of this design
(except for tension stress).
16.2.1 Tension Stress
Allowable tension stresses, as calculated in STAAD, are based on the API Code,
clause (3.2.1-1).
Allowable tension stress on the net section
F = 0.60F
t y
16.2.2 Shear Stress
Beam Shear Stress

Allowable beam shear stress on the gross section must conform to (3.2.4-2):
F = 0.4 F
v y
The maximum applied beam shear stress is:
f = V / 0.5 A (3.2.4-1)
v
Torsional Shear Stress
Allowable torsional shear stress
626 — STAAD.Pro
F = 0.4 F (3.2.4-4)
vt y
F is the maximum torsional shear stress per (3.2.4-3).
vt
16.3 Stress due to Compression

The allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded
compression members is calculated based on the formula 3.2.2-1 in the API Code,
when the largest effective slenderness ratio is less than C = . If

c
exceeds C the allowable compressive stress is increased as per formula (3.2.2-2)
c
of the Code.
For > 60 the lesser of F or F are substituted for F .

xe xc xy
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical elastic buckling
xe
coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
F = the inelastic local buckling stress. (3.2.2-4)
xc
16.4 Bending Stress
The allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a symmetrical
member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given in Section 3.2.3 is:

16.5 Combined Compression and Bending
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are
proportioned to satisfy API formula 3.3.1-1 and 3.3.1-2 when is greater than
0.15, otherwise formula 3.3.1-3 applies. It should be noted that during code
checking or member selection, if exceeds unity, the program does not

compute the second 3.3.1-1/2.
16.6 Design Parameters

values, are listed in Table 16.1. These parameters communicate design decisions
from the engineer to the program. (Also see section 5.44.1).
requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be
628 — STAAD.Pro
changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ
value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, wile in the real structure it
may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as
shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member
is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If
the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
Table 16.1 - American (API) Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis.
Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis.
Usually, this is major axis.
LY Member Length in local Y-axis to calculate
LZ Member Length in local Z-axis to calculate
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel.
members.
Length allowable bending stress
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a
fraction of actual member length
CB 1.0 Cb value as used in Section 1.5 of
AISC
0.0 = Cb value to be calculated
Any other value will mean the value
to be used in design
MAIN 0.0 1.0 = Main member
2.0 = Secondary member

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis
CMZ sidesway* and
calculated for
no sidesway
TRACK 0.0 1.0 = Print all critical member
stresses
100.0 = Suppress all checks except
punching shear
DMAX 0.0 Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 Minimum allowable depth
RATIO Permissible ratio of the actual to

allowable stresses
WELD 1 for closed Weld type, as explained in section
sections 3.1.1.
2 for open 1 = Welding is one side only
sections except for wide flange or tee
sections, where the web is always
assumed to be welded on both
sides.
2 = Welding is both sides. For
closed sections like pipe or tube,
the welding will be only on one
side.
or
those at locations specified by the
SECTION command.
630 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
2.0 = Same for BEAM 1.0, but
additional check is made at each
end.
WMIN 1.16 in. Minimum thickness
WSTR 0.4 X FLYD Allowable welding stress
LEG 1.0 To write out external parameters
2.0 file.
To read in the external parameters
file.
Note: The parameter names DMAX and DMIN are only used for member
selection.
16.7 Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate as per API. Code checking is done using
the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are
specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking.
members have passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of API code (like
any of the API specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of the
specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location (distance from
the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical condition occurs.
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2.2,
American Steel Design, of the Technical Reference manual.
16.8 Member Selection

i.e. the lightest section which fulfills the code requirements for the specified
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and
Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections.

Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created
table will be limited to sections in the user table.
input as prismatic.
16.9 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial force. So in
design, no time is wasted calculating the allowable bending or shear stresses, thus
reducing design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an
analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather
than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
16.10 Punching Shear

For tubular members, punching shear may be checked in accordance with the
American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 2A – 20th Edition Section 4. The
parameter PUNCH is used to identify joint types for each end of the member where
the punching shear check is required. The PUNCH parameter is only read in from
the external geometry file. The external geometry file is described in section
16.13. The PUNCH parameter is not specified within the STAAD input file ( .STD
file extension).
Req. Value of
Type of Joint and
Parameter
Geometry
PUNCH
K (overlap) 1.0
K (gap) 2.0
T&Y 3.0
CROSS 4.0
CROSS 5.0
(with/diaphragms)
Note: A value representing joint type and geometry must be provided for
parameter PUNCH, in the external file. On the first run where no external table
is present, LEG must equal 1.0.
16.11 Generation of the Geometry File

Automatic selection of the chord and brace members is performed with the
parameter LEG 1.0.
632 — STAAD.Pro
Two tubular members are used by the program to identify the chord member. The
chord members must be collinear (5 degree tolerance).
The chord member must have a greater diameter and thickness than the brace
member being considered.
The punching shear check is performed on the joint treating it as a T/Y joint. The
yield stress of the brace is used. In the 50% strength check the brace and chord
yield are assumed to be the same.
The major moment axis Mz is taken as In Plane Bending (IPB). To change this, the
parameter SWAP 1 should be used in the external geometry file.
Note: The in-plane/out-of-plane correspondence can be set by using the BETA
angle.
If the punching shear cannot be performed at the joint for the member being
considered, a message is written to the output file <filename>.ANL.
If a punching shear check is performed with the parameter LEG 1.0 used, then the
geometry data used to perform the check is written to the default external output
file APIPUN.
The default external output/input file name can be changed by using the command
line:-
CODE API <filename>.
This external output data file can be edited and used as an external input file to re-
perform the check using the parameter PUNCH 1.0 to 5.0.
This external input file allows can/stub geometry data to be specified and chords to
be assigned geometry where they could not be identified in the Automatic
selection.
The parameter LEG 2.0 must be used to read an external input file where the
default name is APIPUN.
The yield strength of the brace is used in the punching shear check. This can be
changed in the external geometry file. The user should ensure that the correct cord
member has been selected for the check.
16.12 Chord Selection and Q Parameter

f
Q is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal stress in the
f
chord. When calculating Q for the joints, the moments used in the chord stress
f
calculation will be from the computer node results and not the representative
moments underneath the brace. If the moment varies significantly along the chord,
it is more accurate to use the actual chord moment in the middle of the brace foot

print. The tests reported in Reference I[1] were performed with a constant
moment along the chord. Thus for a local joint check, the local chord moment
(under the brace) should be used.
STAAD calculates Q based on the moment at the chord member. The chord
f
member can be selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based
on geometry and independent of loading) or specified by the user in the External
file.
In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance)
are used to identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two
members based on the larger diameter then thickness or then by the minimum
framing angle; for T joints the first member modeled will be selected as the chord.
The user should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the
user is representative of the local chord moment for the brace in question.
_______________________________________________________________
______________________________
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ, Yura, JA and Hoadley, PW, Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints – Chord Stress
Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
16.13 External Geometry File

An example of the external geometry file is shown below:
BRACE CHORD PUNCH D T d T GAP FYLD
209 211 3 17.992 0.984 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00
209 210 3 17.992 0.984 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00
212 202 3 17.992 0.787 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00
The parameters used in the external file are defined as follows:

Table 16.2 - External File
Parameter Description
PUNCH Parameter for punching shear (See Section 12.10)
BRACE Member number of brace
634 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Description
CHORD Member number of chord
D Chord Diameter in inches
T Chord Thickness in inches
d Brace Diameter in inches
T Brace Thickness in inches
GAP Gap in inches (must be negative for overlap K-joint)
FYLD Local yield strength used for joint in KIPS
THETAT Angle of through brace in overlap K-joint in

Degrees
TW Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of the

weld throat thickness or thickness t of the thinner
brace in inches
SWAP If parameter SWAP 0 is used then major moment

Mz is taken for In Plane Bending (IPB). SWAP 1
uses the minor moment My as the IPB.
Notes:
l For overlap K-joints, the through brace is assumed to be the same diameter
as the brace being checked.
l If any of the parameters for diameter and thickness specified in the external
file are less than that for members being checked, then the member
properties specified in the STAAD file shall be used.
l The member diameter and thickness should be used in API equation (4.1-1);
in this check it has been assumed that the yield strength of the chord and
brace members are the same.

l The geometry file name is currently limited to eight characters (4 if an
extension as .TXT is used).
The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps.
These steps are explained in section 16.16.
16.14 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear
checks. It can be used in initial runs for member selection.
No classification of the joint is performed using the loading.
No hydrostatic checks are performed.
16.15 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

a. Member refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
b. TABLE refers to AISC steel section name which has been checked against the
steel code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT
is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AISC code which governs the
design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the
critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has
passed.
f. LOADING provides the load case number which governed the design.
g. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the
moment in local Z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the
cases.
h. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the
section where design forces govern.
i. If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the
table and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY &
636 — STAAD.Pro
FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and
allowable shear stress (FV).
16.16 The Two-Step Process

The overall procedure for performing the code check per the API code is as follows:
Step 1
Creating the geometry data file. This is done by specifying the name of the
geometry data file alongside the command line CODE API. If a file name is not
specified, STAAD automatically assigns the file name APIPUN to the geometry data
file. The parameter instructions in the .STD file should contain the LEG parameter
and it should be assigned the value 1.0.
Example Reading External Geometry File
UNIT INCHES KIPS

PARAMETERS
* All joint data will be written to external file GEOM1 for
punching shear.
CODE API GEOM1
LEG 1.0
* Joints to be considered as T and Y, i.e. PUNCH is set to 3.0.
FYLD 50.0 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
RATIO 1.0 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
After ensuring that your STAAD input file contains the above data, run the analysis.
Once the analysis is completed, you will find that a file by the name GEOM1 has
been created and is located in the same folder as the one where your .std file is
located. (In case you did not specify a file name - GEOM1 shown in the earlier
example - STAAD will create the file named APIPUN.
Step 2
The geometry data file (GEOM 1 or otherwise) should be inspected and modified as
required such as changing the PUNCH values and local section properties for the
punching shear checks.

Modify the .STD file so it reruns the code check process by reading the instructions
of the GEOM file. This message is conveyed by changing the value of the LEG
parameter to 2.0. After making this change, a re-analysis will result in the program
using the information in the geometry data file (GEOM1, APIPUN, or otherwise)
for performing the code check.
Example Reading an existing Joint Geometry Data File, GEOM1
UNIT INCHES KIPS

PARAMETERS
* All joint data will be read from the external file GEOM1 for
punching shear.
CODE API GEOM1
LEG 2.0
FYLD 50.0 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
RATIO 1.0 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
638 — STAAD.Pro
Section 17
ANSI/AISC N690
Design Codes
17A. ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as
defined by the 'Supplement No. 1 to the Specification of the Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Steel Safety-Related Structures for Nuclear Facilities' ANSI/AISC
N690 1994s1.
All the design steps are done as described in section 2.3 Allowable per AISC-ASD
(Ninth Edition) Code of Technical Reference manual except for allowable stress in
compression for AUSTENlTlC STAINLESS STEEL. Section Q1.5.9 is used to
calculate allowable compressive stress for Austenitic Stainless Steel. Correction
made in Supplementary s1 published in April 15, 2002 has been applied.

Note that, by default, N690 code uses Stainless Steel material in the design. Care
should be taken to assign the proper Stainless Steel material properties to the
members for the analysis. There is a parameter, STYPE, to change material type to
either Stainless Steel (STYPE=1) or Carbon Steel (STYPE=0).
The interaction equations Q1.6-1a, Q1.6-1b, Q1.6-2 and Q1.6-3 are checked.
17.2 Example 1
(C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case1.std)
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 30-Nov-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
640 — STAAD.Pro
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:

642 — STAAD.Pro
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r) max = 171.31
Yield Stress of Steel, Fy = 36 Ksi
Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel,

As,
17.3 Example 2
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
2 3 4;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195

ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
2 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
3 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
UNIT METER KIP
2 CON GY -2.24809 1
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
4 FX -1
1 1.0 2 9.5
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
644 — STAAD.Pro

Allowbale Compressive Stress for Austentic Stain Steel,
As,
17.4 Example 3
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
646 — STAAD.Pro
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
1 1.0 2 9.5
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

648 — STAAD.Pro
Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel,

As,
17B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code

For code checking of steel members, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the
allowable stresses as defined by the "ANSI/AISC N690-1984: Nuclear Facilities -
Steel Safety-Related Structures for Design, Fabrication, and Erection."
A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
17B.2 Design Process

The following Checks are to be performed on a Steel Member as per this AISC N690
– 1984 Code. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum
utilization from all of the checks.
17B.2.1. Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (K*L/r_min), as per

clause Q1.8.4 of the code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable
slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_min) shall not exceed 240 for main members and
300 for bracing members and other secondary members.
This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters
respectively.
The default value of MAIN is 200 and for TMAIN is 240.

17B.2.2. Check for Element Slenderness and Stress Reduction Factors
The permissible Width–Thickness Ratio of “Un-stiffened Elements under

Compression” is determined as per section Q1.9.1 and that of “Stiffened Elements
under Compression” is determined as per section Q1.9.2 of the code.
The permissible Width–Thickness Ratio of web is determined as per section
Q1.10.2.
17B.2.3. Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*Fy), but not more
than (0.5*Fu) on the Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1.
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF
parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is
transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of
the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. Q1.14),
A =C *A
e t n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section Q1.14.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not
implemented in STAAD.
17B.2.4. Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section
Q1.9, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by
Q1.5.1.3. The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic
stainless steel shall be in accordance to section Q1.5.9.
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r)
is less than Cc,
650 — STAAD.Pro
where,
2. When (Kl/r) is greater than C ,

c
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:

1. When (Kl/r) is less than or equal to 120,
2. When (Kl/r) is greater than 120,
If the provisions of the section Q1.9 are not satisfied,
A. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor Q is introduced.

s
Detailed values of Qs for different shapes are given in Section QC2.
B. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width b is
e
introduced.
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:

2. For other uniformly compressed elements:
Consequently, a reduction factor Qa is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded

compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements
shall not exceed
where,
17B.2.5.Bending Stress
Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as
given in section Q1.5.1.4 is:
A. Along Major Axis:

1. Tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or
built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their
652 — STAAD.Pro
minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection Q1.5.1.4.1.1 to
7, shall result in a maximum bending stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the
compression flange shall not exceed 65/√F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression
flange shall not exceed 190/√F .
y
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16
y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of
members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the
value of 76b /√F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
2. For non-compact and slender elements, section Q1.5.1.4.2 is followed.
3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60*F
b y
B. Along Minor Axis:
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements
of section Q1.5.1.4.1, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress
shall not exceed the following value as per section Q1.5.1.4.3:
F = 0.75*F
b y
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements
of section Q1.5.1.4.1, except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less
f f y
than 95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall
y
not exceed:
F = F [0.79 – 0.002(b /2t )√F ]
b y f f y
17B.2.6. Combined Interaction Check

proportioned to satisfy

and
when, f /F is greater than 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code.

a a
Otherwise,
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds

a a
unity, the program does not compute the second and third part of the formula,
because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the
coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4*(M1/M2)], but not less
than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to
satisfy
17B.2.7. Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. section Q1.10.5.2] is calculated as
where,
C = (45000k)/[F (h/t)2], when C is less than 0.8
v y v
= [190/(h/t)]√(k/F ), when C is more than 0.8
y v
k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2], when a/h is less than 1.0
= 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2], when a/h is more than 1.0
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total
depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken
as the total flange areas.
17B.4 Member Property Specification

654 — STAAD.Pro
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the
General and Prismatic member.
Manual.

changed to exactly model the physical structure
Table 17B.1 Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1984

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE AISC N690 Specifies to use the ANSI/AISC N690-
1984 1984 code for checking purposes.
KY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Compression
in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor
axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Compression
in local z-axis. Usually, this is major
axis.
Length buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis (major).
Length
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in cur-
rent units.
NSF 1.0 Net section Factor for tension members
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing net
effective net area of an axially loaded
tension member.
STYPE 0.0 0.0 = Normal Steel

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel
UNT Member Unsupported length of the top* flange
Length for calculating allowable bending
compressive stress. Will be used only if
flexural compression on the top flange.
UNB Member Unsupported length of the bottom*
Length flange for calculating allowable bending
flexural compression on the bottom
flange.
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent upon
moment gradient
0.0 = CB is calculated itself
Any other user-defined value is
accepted.
CMZ sidesway
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
TMAIN 240 for Slenderness limit under tension
main
member
300 for
“Truss”
member
PROFILE None Used in MEMBER SELECTION.
See section 5.47.1 for details.
656 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CAN 0 Used for Deflection Check only.
0 = Deflection check based on the
principle that maximum deflection
occurs within the span between DJ1 and
DJ2.
principle that maximum deflection is of
the cantilever type
STIFF Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder
length or design
depth
whichever
is greater
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which
results are reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth
allowable stresses.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum
(Mandatory allowable local deflection
for
deflection
check)
member calculation of "Deflection Length"
Notes:

1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION
command

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the AISC
N690 1984 code. For general information on these options, refer to section 3 of
17B.6 Example
Example problem to be added in a future update.
658 — STAAD.Pro
Section 18
American Society of
Mechanical Engineers
– Nuclear Facility
(ASME NF) Codes
18A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as
defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility (ASME
NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1974 Code is used as the basis of this design.
From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974
and NF-3000 1977 version of codes.

18A.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
Each one of the checks are described in the following sections.
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization
from all of the checks.
18A.2.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of

compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of
tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300
for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for
TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
18A.2.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more
y
than (0.5*F ) on the Net area.
u
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of
NF-3000 1974, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
18A.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-
2213 of NF-3000 1974.
(a) Gross Sections of Columns:
660 — STAAD.Pro
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) is less
than Cc,
where,

c
3. When (Kl/r) exceeds 120,
(b) Member elements other than columns:
(1) For Plate Girder Stiffeners, F = 0.60*F

a y
(2) For webs of rolled shapes, F = 0.75*F
a y
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the
element satisfies all the sub-sections of clause XVII-2224 of NF-3000 1974.
If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
(a) For un-stiffened compression element,
A reduction factor Qs is introduced. Detailed values of Qs for different shapes are

given in the clause XVII-2225.2 of NF-3000 1974.
(b) For stiffened compression element,
A reduced effective width b is introduced.
e

Consequently, a reduction factor Qs is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression
members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
where,
18A.2.4 Bending Stress
given in XVII-2214 of NF-3000 1974 is:
a. Along Major Axis:
a. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibers of

compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the
plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF
shall result in a maximum bending stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
662 — STAAD.Pro
a. Width-thickness ratio of un-stiffened projecting elements of the compression

flange shall not exceed 52.2/√F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall
not exceed 190/√F .
y
d/t = (412/√F )[1 – 2.33(F /F )]
y a y
except that it need not be less than 257/√F .
y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other
than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor
f y
20000/(d/A )F .
f y
b. For non-compact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5
of NF-3000 1974 are followed respectively.
c. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:

F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis:
For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of XVII-
2214.1(a) and (b) of NF-3000 1974, maximum tensile and compressive bending
stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
18A.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

and
when f /F is greater than 0.15,

a a
otherwise,

a a
satisfy
18A.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. XVII-2263.2 of NF-3000 1974] is
calculated as
where,

v y v
= [190/(h/t)]√k/F , when C is more than 0.8
y v
18A.3 Member Property Specification

Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for
the General and Prismatic member.
Manual.
664 — STAAD.Pro
value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it
Table 18A.1 - ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE CODE NF3000 Specified design code is followed for
1974 code checking purpose.
OR
CODE NF3000
1977
minor axis.
major axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio
Length for buckling about local Y axis.
Length (major).
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current
units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in
current units.

Parameter
Name
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for tension
member.
UNT Member Unsupported length of the top*
Length flange for calculating allowable
bending compressive stress. Will be
used only if flexural compression on
the top flange.
Length flange for calculating allowable
bending compressive stress. Will be
used only if flexural compression on
the bottom flange.
moment gradient

accepted.
CMZ sidesway and
calculated for
no sidesway
TMAIN 240 for main Slenderness limit under tension
member
300 for
“Truss”
member
666 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name

occurs within the span between DJ1
and DJ2.
principle that maximum deflection is
of the cantilever type
length or design
depth
whichever is
greater
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
allowable stresses.
for deflection
check)

Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units

2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER
SELECTION command
18A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-
3000 1974 and ASME NF-3000 1977 codes. For general information on these
options, refer to section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For
information on specification of these commands, refer to section 5.
18A.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive
load and 5 kip lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and
is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1974.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
668 — STAAD.Pro
1 TABLE ST W24X104
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5 FY -5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1974
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 0.9 ALL
KZ 0.9 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown as below.

18B. ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code
as defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility
(ASME NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1989 Code is used as the basis of this
design.
670 — STAAD.Pro
18B.2 Design Process
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
18B.2.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not
exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should
not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other
secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
18B.2.2 Tension
y
than (0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a),
n
(b) and (c), and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is
e
transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the
member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3).

18B.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable
compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as
required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member
elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic
stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:

than C ,
c
where,

c
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
672 — STAAD.Pro
c. Member elements other than columns:
1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners,

F = 0.60*F
a y
2. For webs of rolled shapes,
F = 0.75*F
a y
element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).
a. For un-stiffened compression element,

A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes are
s s
given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
b. For stiffened compression element,

e
Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced.

a
members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed

where,
given in NF-3322.1(d) is:
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of

F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression

y
y
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16
y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members
other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor
f y
20000/(d/A )F .
f y
2. For non-compact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-
3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively.

F = 0.60*F
b y
674 — STAAD.Pro
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-
3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress
shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less than
f f y
95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
y
F = F [1.075 – 0.005(b /2t )√F ]
b y f f y
18B.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

and

a a
otherwise

a a
because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient
Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4*(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4
for no side-sway.
satisfy
18B.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as

where,

v y v
y v
18B.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel
Section Library of STAAD may be used namely – I-shaped section, Channel, Tee,
HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section.
Manual.

value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it
676 — STAAD.Pro
Table 18B.1 - ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE CODE NF3000 Specified design code is followed
1989 for code checking purpose.
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this
is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this
is major axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate slenderness
ratio for buckling about local Y
axis.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in z-axis
(major).
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current
units.
current units.
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for tension
member.
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing
effective net area of an axially
loaded tension member. [Refer NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)]
UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the top*
flange for calculating allowable
bending compressive stress. Will
be used only if flexural
compression on the top flange.
UNB Member Length Unsupported length of the bottom*
flange for calculating allowable

Parameter
Name
bending compressive stress. Will
be used only if flexural
compression on the bottom flange.
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent
upon moment gradient
accepted.
CMZ sidesway and
calculated for no
sidesway
member
300 for “Truss”
member
occurs within the span between
DJ1 and DJ2.
is of the cantilever type
678 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
STIFF Member length Spacing of stiffeners for plate
or depth girder design
whichever is
greater
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to
which results are reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
allowable stresses.
(Mandatory for allowable local deflection
deflection check)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point
of member for calculation of "Deflection
Length"
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.

2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.

3000 1989 code. For general information on these options, refer to section 2 of the

STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For information on specification of these
18B.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip
compressive load and a uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole
span. The beam is assigned with B571806 steel member and is designed in
accordance with ASME NF3000 1989.
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 360 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
680 — STAAD.Pro
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1989
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

18C. ASME NF 3000 - 1998 Code
as defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility
682 — STAAD.Pro
(ASME NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1998 Code is used as the basis of this design.
18C.2 Design Process

1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
18C.2.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not
exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should
not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other
secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
18C.2.2 Tension
y
than (0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a),
n
(b) and (c), and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is
e
transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the
member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3).

18C.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable
compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as
required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member
elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic
stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:

than C ,
c
where,

c
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
684 — STAAD.Pro
c. Member elements other than columns:
1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners,

F = 0.60*F
a y
2. For webs of rolled shapes,
F = 0.75*F
a y
element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).
a. For un-stiffened compression element,

A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes are
s s
given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for
projecting elements of compression flanges of girder,
b. For stiffened compression element,

e
Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced.

a

members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed
where,
18C.2.4 Bending Stress
given in NF-3322.1(d) is:
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of

F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression

y
y
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16
y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
686 — STAAD.Pro
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other
than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor
f y
20000/(d/A )F .
f y
2. For non-compact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-
3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively.

F = 0.60*F
b y

3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress
shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less than
f f y
95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
y
F = F [1.075 – 0.005(b /2t )√F ]
b y f f y
18C.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

and

a a
otherwise

a a

satisfy
18C.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as
where,

v y v
y v
18C.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel
Section Library of STAAD may be used namely – I-shaped section, Channel, Tee,
HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section.
Manual.

688 — STAAD.Pro
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements
for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to
exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value
in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In
that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input
instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable
stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Table 18C.1 - ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CODE CODE Specified design code is followed for
NF3000 code checking purpose.
1998

minor axis.
major axis.
Length buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis (major).
Length
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current units.
current units.
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for tension member.
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing
effective net area of an axially loaded
tension member. [Refer NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)]

UNT Member Unsupported length of the top* flange
Length for calculating allowable bending

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
flexural compression on the top flange.
Length flange for calculating allowable bending
flexural compression on the bottom
flange.
moment gradient
accepted.
CMZ sidesway
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
member
300 for
“Truss”
member


690 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
occurs within the span between DJ1 and
DJ2.
principle that maximum deflection is of
the cantilever type
length or design
depth
whichever
is greater
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
allowable stresses.
for
deflection
check)
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for
Notes

1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER
SELECTION command.
18C.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

3000 1998 code. For general information on these options, refer to section 2 of
18C.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip
compressive load and a uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole
span. The beam is assigned with B571806 steel member and is designed in
accordance with ASME NF3000 1998.
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
692 — STAAD.Pro
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1998
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

694 — STAAD.Pro
Section 19
Norwegian Codes
19A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 /

NPD
19A.1 - General Notes
This user manual presents a description of the design basis, parameters and theory
applied to STAAD.Pro for performing code checks according to NS 3472 ref. [1]
and NPD ref. [5]. The code checks include:
l stability check (buckling)

l lateral buckling check
l yield check (von Mises)
l stability check including local plate buckling of un-stiffened pipe walls accord-
ing to NPD
The code check is available for the following cross-section types:
l wide flange profiles (HEA, HEB, IPE etc.)

l pipe (OD xx ID xx)

Section 19 Norwegian Codes
19A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD
l tube (RHS, HUP)

l channel
l angle type (only RA)
l rectangular massive box (prismatic)
l user table (wide flange, I-sections, tapered I, tube, channel and RA angle)
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l Double angles
l Tapered tubes
l Prismatic sections with too few section parameters defined
l Other sections that are not in the ‘available’ list above
Please note the following:
l NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available
through two separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.
l This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document
explains how, and which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been
implemented in STAAD.Pro.
l When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition.
l Weld design is not included in the Norwegian code checks.
l The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is
not identical to the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro anal-
ysis package.
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for
use of the
program.
Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1]

NS2 - refers to NS 3472 ref. [6]
NPD - refers to NPD94 ref. [5]
References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001

Prosjektering av stålkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
2. STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual, Release 2002
696 — STAAD.Pro
3. NS 3472 1.utg. 1973

4. Roark &Young`s 5th edition
5. NPD utg. 1994
Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av
stålkonstruksjoner. Sist
endret 1. oktober 1993.
6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984
19A.2 - Basis for Code Checking
19A.2.1 General
This section presents general information regarding the implementation of the

Norwegian codes of practice for structural steel design. This manual describes the
procedures and theory used for both NS and NPD.
In general NS is used for all cross sections and shapes listed in section 1 of this
manual. An exception is the treatment and check of pipe members in framed
structures. NS does not give specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section
3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS is selected for code checking.
The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the
effect of local buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In
addition, the NPD code gives joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections
for pipe members.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of
elastic analysis and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are
recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the
characteristic stresses or capacities and the most economic section is selected on
the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take

care of the detailing requirements like the provision of stiffeners and check the
local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
the parameters listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield
reasonable results in most circumstances. However, the user should control the
design and verify results through the use of the design parameters.
19A.2.2 Calculation of Forces and Bending Moments
Analysis is done for the primary loading conditions and combinations provided by
specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary load
combinations.
19A.2.3 Members with Axial Forces
For tension only members, axial tension capacity is checked for the ultimate limit
stress. For compression members, axial compression capacity is checked in
addition to lateral buckling and ultimate limit stress. The largest slenderness ratio
(λ) shall not be greater than 250 according to NS 11.7 Stability is checked as per
the procedure of NS 12.3. The buckling curves of NS fig. 3 have been incorporated
into the STAAD.Pro code check. The coefficient α (as per NS Table 10) can be
specified in both directions through the use of parameters CY and CZ. In the
absence of parameters CY and /or CZ, default a- value will be according to NS
table 11.
19A.2.4 Members with Axial Force and Bending Moments
For compression members with bending, interaction formulae of NS table 12.3.4.2

are checked for appropriate loading situation. All compression capacities are
calculated per the procedure of NS 12.3.
The equivalent moment factor β is calculated using the procedure of NS table 12.
Two different approaches are used depending upon whether the members can
sway or not. Conditions for sidesway and transverse loading can be specified
through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. For members that cannot sway,
without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and proper dimensioning
moments are used in the interaction formulae.
698 — STAAD.Pro
19A.2.5 Lateral Buckling
Lateral torsional buckling is checked as per the procedure of NS 12.3.4. The

procedure for calculation of ideal buckling moment for sections with two axis of
symmetry has been implemented. The coefficient can be provided by the user
through the use of parameter CB. In the absence of CB, a value of 1.0 will be used.
Torsional properties for crosssections (torsional constant and warping constant)
are calculated using formulae from NS 3472. This results in slightly conservative
estimates of torsional parameters. The program will automatically select the
maximum moment in cases where M is less than M .
vd zd
19A.2.6 Von Mises Yield Criterion
Combined effect of axial, bending, horizontal/vertical shear and torsional shear

stress is calculated at 13 sections on a member and up to 9 critical points at a
section. The worst stress value is checked against yield stress divided by
appropriate material factor. The von Mises calculates as:
19A.2.7 Material Factor and nominal stresses
The design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic material strength
by the material factor.
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF
parameter. The nominal stresses should satisfy
NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and
3.1.3 requires that the structural coefficient is considered.

Where:
S = reference stress or load effect resultant

d
f = characteristic capacity
k
f = design capacity
kd
γ = material coefficient
m
γ = structural coefficient
mk
γ is default set to 1.10.
m
γ shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members γ is a function of the
mk mk
reduced slenderness. In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated
automatically.
19A.2.8 Code checking according to NPD
The following parts of Chapter 3 in the NPD guidelines have been implemented.
a. Control of nominal stresses. (NPD 3.1.2).

b. Buckling of pipe members in braced frames, including interaction with local
shell buckling (NPD 3.2.2, 3.2.3).
c. Buckling of un-stiffened closed cylindrical shells, including interaction with
overall column buckling (NPD 3.4.4, 3.4.6, 3.4.7 and 3.4.9).
d. Joint capacity check for gap as well as for overlap joints (NPD 3.5.2).
Check b) provides the unity check based on the beam-column buckling interaction
formulae in NPD 3.2.2. The interaction between global and local buckling due to
axial load and hydrostatic pressure is accounted for through computation of an
axial characteristic capacity to replace the yield stress inn the beam-column
buckling formulae.
Note: Check b) handles members subjected to axial loads, bending moments

and hydrostatic pressure. In other words, check b) assumes that stresses
resulting from shear and torsion are of minor importance, e.g. in jacket braces.
Check c) provides the unity check based on the stability requirement for un-
stiffened cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending,
circumferential compression or tension, torsion or shear. The unity check refers to
the interaction formulae in NPD 3.4.4.1. The stability requirement is given in NPD
3.4.7.
700 — STAAD.Pro
19A.2.9 Aluminum Check
STAAD.Pro performs a stability check on aluminum alloys according to buckling

curve in ECCS (European recommendation for aluminum ally structures 1978). It is
possible to select heat-treated or non heat-treated alloy from the parameter list in
the STAAD.Pro input file.
For heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.1590, and for non heat-treated use CY = CZ =
0.2420.
Tracks 1.0 and 9.0 print buckling curve H for heat-treated, and buckling curve N for
non neat-treated. The yield check is the same as for steel.

structure.
Table 12.B.2.1 Design Parameters for Norwegian Steel design code
Parameter Default
Description Reference
Name Value
BEAM 0.0 Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL tells Sec. NS
the program to calculate von 12.2.2
Note: Mises at 13 sections along each
Must member, and up to 8 points at
be set each section. (Depending on
to 1.0 what kind of shape is used.)
CODE none NS3472 for NS

NPD for NPD
(NOR may also be used for
both)
CY Default Buckling curve coefficient, a Fig. NS 3
CZ see NS about local z-axis (strong axis). Sec. NS
3472 Represent the a, a0, b, c, d 12.2 NS
curve. Table 11
BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β Fig. NS 3
for weak axis buckling (y-y) Sec. NS
(NOTE: BY > 0.0) 12.3
BZ 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β, Fig. NS 3
for strong axis buckling (z-z) Sec. NS

Parameter Default
Name Value
(NOTE: BZ > 0.0) 12.3
FYLD 235 Yield strength of steel, fy (St37) Tab. NS 3
[N/mm2 ]
MF 1.1 Material factor / Resistance fac- Sec. NS
(NS3472) tor, γ 10.4.2
m
1.15 Sec. NPD
(NPD) 3.1
UNL Member Effective length for lateral buck- Sec. NS
length ling calculations (specify buck- 12.3
ling length). Distance between
fork supports or between effec-
tive side supports for the beam
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling coefficient, Y. Sec. NS2
Used to calculate the ideal buck- A5.5.2 Fig.
ling moments, M NS2
vi
A5.5.2a)-
e)
SSY 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β cal- Sec. NS
culated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in 12.3.4
local y-axis weak axis β =SSY Tab. NS 12
M
Sec. NPD
3.2.1.4
SSZ 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β cal- Sec. NS
culated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in 12.3.4
local y-axis weak axis β Tab. NS 12
M
Sec NPD
3.2.1.4
CMY 1.0 Water depth in meters for hydro- Valid for
static pressure calculation for the NPD
pipe members code only
CMZ 0.49 α for sections in connection Sec. NS
LT
with lateral buckling 12.3.4 Fig.
NS 6.
702 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Name Value
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Supress critical member
stresses. 1.0 = Print all critical
member stresses, i.e. DESIGN
VALUES 2.0 = Print von Mises
stresses. 9.0 = Large output, 1
page for each member. See sec-
tion 7 and Appendix A for com-
plete list of available TRACKs
and print examples.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to Sec. NS
allowable stresses. 12.3.4.2
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth of
[cm] steel section.
DMIN 0.0 [cm] Minimum allowable depth of
steel section.
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure
in pipe members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral
buckling moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to

the Norwegian steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* Code check according to NS3472

PARAMETERS
CODE NS3472
BEAM 1.0 ALL
FYLD 340 ALL
MF 1.10 ALL
CY 0.49 MEMB 1
CZ 0.49 MEMB 1
BY 0.9 MEMB 1
BZ 0.7 MEMB 1

SSY 1.1 MEMB 1

SSZ 1.3 MEMB 1
CB 0.9 MEMB 1
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 9.0 ALL
UNIT KNS METER
LOAD LIST 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
19A.4 - Stability Check According to NS 3472
19A.4.1 General Description
The stability check is based on the assumption that both ends of the member are
structural nodes. Buckling lengths and results for member with joints between the
structural nodes have to be evaluated in each separate case.
Effects from local buckling or external hydrostatic pressure on pipes and tubes are
not included.
The general stability criteria is: (ref. NS 12.3)
Buckling
n +k ×m +k ×m ≤1
max z z y y
Lateral Buckling
i = z,y
704 — STAAD.Pro
19A.4.2 Determination of β and β

z y
The equivalent moment factor β (for z and y) is calculated dependant on moment

distributions as shown in the following table:
β for different moment distributions
Moment diagram βM (βLT)
β = 1.8 - 0.7ψ
Mψ

Moment diagram βM (βLT)

β = 1.3
M0
β = 1.4
M0
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters:
β =SSY
y
β =SSZ
z
19A.4.3 Lateral buckling
The Ideal lateral buckling moment is calculated according to NS2 A5.5.2
concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input
parameter CB), L = member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw
and Ix , see section 5.
For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
Where:
706 — STAAD.Pro
α = distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting,

assumed to be on top flange.
The φ parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.
Fig A - ψ-koeffisienter for enkel bjelke

Fig B - ψ-koeffisienter for delvis innspent bjelke
708 — STAAD.Pro
Fig B - ψ-koeffisienter for tilnærmet fulltinnspente bjelke

Fig B - ψ-koeffisienter for utraget bjelke med enkel last og fordelt last. Stiplede
kurver gjelder last på overflens.
19A.4.4 Stability check of pipe members
The stability criteria applied for members with pipe cross section is:
Where:
and are given in NS 5.4.2.
For the print output option TRACK 9.0 K ≡ 1.0 and M ≡M

E vd d
710 — STAAD.Pro
19A.4.5 Angle profiles type RA (reverse angle)
The axial contribution to the total interaction ratio is checked according to the
modified EECS-method, see NS A5.4.
The stability criterion is:
Where:
N and N are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-
kyd kzd
axis, respectively.
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included
in the code check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
19A.4.6 Stability check of members with tapered section
Stability of members with tapered cross section is calculated as described in section

3.1. The cross section properties used in the formulae are calculated based on the

average profile height. (I.e. I , I values are taken from the middle of the
z y
member.)
19A.4.7 Lateral buckling for tension members
When compressive stress caused by large bending moment about strong axis is
greater than tension stress from axial tension force, lateral buckling is considered
as defined below.
σ = N/A (+ tension, - compression)

a
σ = ± M /W
bz z z
M = | σ + σ | W for σ + σ < 0 (compression)
warp a b z a b
IR = M /M +M /M ≤ 1.0
warp vd y,max yd
19A.5 - Stability Check According to NPD
19A.5.1 Buckling of pipe members
Tubular beam-columns subjected to compression and lateral loading or end

moments shall be designed in accordance with NPD 3.2.2
Where:
σ = N/A = axial compressive stress

c
ν = structural coefficient
mk
B = bending amplification factor = 1/ (1 - μ), B is taken as the larger of
B and B
z y
B = bending amplification factor about the Z-axis
z
B = bending amplification factor about the Y-axis
y
712 — STAAD.Pro
l = kl
k
k = effective length factor
f = characteristic buckling capacity according to NS fig. 5.4.1a, curve
k
A.
19A.5.1.1 Interaction with local buckling, NPD 3.2.3
If the below conditions are not satisfied, the yield strength will be replaced with
characteristic buckling stress given in NPD 3.4.
a. members subjected to axial compression and external pressure
b. members subjected to axial compression only
19A.5.2 Calculation of buckling resistance of cylinders
The characteristic buckling resistance is defined in accordance with NPD 3.4.4
Where:

σ = design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension

a
positive)
σ = design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment
b
(tension
positive)
σ = σ = design circumferential stress in the shell due to external
p Θ
pressure (tension positive)
τ = design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and
S
shear force.
f , f , f and f are the elastic buckling resistances of curved panels
ea eb ep eι
or circular cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression forces,
global bending moments, lateral pressure, and torsional moments
and/or shear forces respectively.
19A.5.3 Elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened, closed cylinders
The elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened closed cylinders according to NPD
3.4.6 is:
714 — STAAD.Pro
where k is a buckling coefficient dependent on loading condition, aspect ratio,

curvature, boundary conditions, and geometrical imperfections. The buckling
coefficient is:
The values of ψ, ζ and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading
cases.
Table 4.1 Buckling coefficients for un-stiffened cylindrical shells
ψ ζ p
Axial stress 1 0.702 Z
Bending 1 0.702 Z
Torsion and shear force 5.34 0.856 Z0.75 0.6

Lateral pressure 4 1.04 Z0.5 0.6
Hyrdostatic pressure 2 1.04 Z 0.5 0.6
The curvature parameter is defined by
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent
of shell length. For cases with , the elastic buckling resistance may be
taken as:
19A.5.4 Stability requirements
The stability requirement for curved panels and un-stiffened cylindrical shells
subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential compression or

tension, torsion or shear is given by NPD 3.4.7:

σ <f
j kd
where the design buckling resistance is
19A.5.5 Column buckling, NPD 3.4.9
For long cylindrical shells it is possible that interaction between shell buckling and
overall column buckling may occur because second-order effects of axial
compression alter the stress distribution as compared to that calculated from linear
theory. It is necessary to take this effect into account in the shell buckling analysis
when the reduced slenderness of the cylinder as a column exceeds 0,2 according
to NPD 3.4.4.1.
σ shall be increased by an additional compressive stress which may be taken as:
b
Where:
λ = slenderness of the cylinder as a column.

B, σ ,σ and μ are calculated in accordance with NPD 3.2.2.
a b
19A.6 - Yield Check

The yield check is performed at member ends and at 11 equally spaced
intermediate sections along the member length.
At each section the following forces are applied:
716 — STAAD.Pro
F max. axial force along member

x
F actual shear in local y-direction at section
y
F actual shear in local z-direction at section
z
M max. torsional moment along member
x
M actual bending about local y-axis at section
y
M actual bending about local z-axis at section
z
For all profiles other than angle sections absolute values of the stresses are used.
For
double symmetric profiles there will always be one stresspoint.
The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each
stress
point the von Mises stress is checked as follows:
Where:
σ =|σ +σ +σ |
tot x by bz
σ stress from hydrostatic pressure.
p
19A.6.1 Double symmetric wide flange profile
The von Mises stress is checked at 4 stress points as shown in figure below.

Section Properties
A , I , I and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database

x x y z
A = h × s Applied in STAAD.Pro print option PRINT MEMBER
y
STRESSES
A and A are not used in the code check

y z
ref. NS app. C3
T = dA × z
y
T = dA × y
z
718 — STAAD.Pro
General Stress calculation
Stress calculation at selected stress points
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The
reported torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional
stresses a separate evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress
distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at stress point and warping
resistance.
19A.6.2 Single symmetric wide flange profile and tapered section
The von Mises stress is checked at 9 stress points as shown in figure below.

Section properties
A , I , I and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for

x x y z
tapered sections where these values are calculated for each section
checked. (I.e. Iz, Iy values are taken from the middle of the member.)
A = h × s Applied in STAAD.Pro print option PRINT MEMBER
y
STRESSES
A and A are not used in the code check

y z
ref. NS app. C3
T = dA × z
y
T = dA × y
z
720 — STAAD.Pro
General Stress calculation
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The
reported torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional
stresses a separate evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress
distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at stress point and warping
resistance.

19A.6.3 Pipe profile
The von Mises stress is checked in 3 stress points as shown in figure below.
Section properties
d = D - 2t
r = 0.5 ( D-t )
a = tan-1 M /M
z y
Ax = π/4 (D2 - d2)
A = A = 0.5A
y z x
I = 2I =π/32 (D4 - d4)
x z
I = I = π/64 (D4 - d4)
y z
722 — STAAD.Pro
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values

are used for A , A and I , however this has insignificant influence
y z x
on the force distribution.
A = A = 0.6A
Y z x
I = 2πR3t
x
19A.6.4 Tube profile
Tube sections are rectangular or quadratic hollow uniform profiles. Critical stress is
checked at 5 locations as shown in figure below.

Section Properties
724 — STAAD.Pro
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.
19A.6.5 Channel profile
For channel profiles the von Mises stress is checked at 6 locations as shown in the
figure below.

726 — STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties
Stress calculations at selected stress points
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.f

19A.6.6 Angle profile type RA (reverse angle)
For angle profiles the von Mises check is checked at 8 stress points as shown in
figure below.
Axes y and z are principal axes.

Axes u and w are local axes.
728 — STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and z.
The second moment of area (Ty L TZ):
T =AZ
y
T =AY
z

An additional torsional moment is calculated based on:

M = F Z4
T y
M = F Y4
T z
This torsion moment is included in M if F and F exist.
x y Z
Beta-rotation of equal & unequal legged angles
Note: The order of the joint numbers in the member incidence command
specifies the direction of the local x-axis.
730 — STAAD.Pro

19A.6.7 Rectangular massive box (prismatic)
Code check of the general purpose prismatic cross section defined in the
STAAD.Pro analysis package is not available. The prismatic section is assumed to
be a rectangular massive box and the von Mises stress is checked at 3 locations as
shown in figure below.
Note: Note that ‘b’ may not be much greater than ‘h’. If that is the case, define
the member with h > b and Beta angle 90° instead.
Section Properties
732 — STAAD.Pro
General Stress Calculation
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e. point 2
19A.7 - Tubular Joint Check, NPD 3.5

For pipe members, punching shear capacity is checked in accordance with the NPD
sections 3.5.1 to 3.5.2, except 3.5.2.4. The chord is defined as the member with
the greater diameter in the joint. If the diameters are the same the program selects
the member with the greater thickness of the two. The chord members must be
collinear by 5 degrees.
The punching shear run sequence is performed in two steps. The program will first
identify all tubular joints and classify them as T type joints (TRACK99). The joints
to be checked will be listed in a file specified in the CODE NPD parameter list, below
called GEOM1. This file is used as input in the second run. The file is an editable
ACSII file saved under the file name given in the CODE NPD parameter. The TRACK

parameter is then set to 98 which directs the program to read from the file GEOM1
file and use it as input to the second run, i.e. the joint capacity checking. The
program will check the capacity for both chord members entering the joint. The
local y and z moments will be transformed into the plane defined by the joint itself
and the far end joints of the brace and chord, defined as in- and out-of plane
moments.
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints,
gap, can or stub dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required.
The program will not change the brace or chord definition if this is changed or
modified in the input file GEOM1. See Appendix A page xx for GEOM1 example
file.
Joint classification parameters in the file GEOM1 are:
KO K joint overlapped
KG K joint with gap
TY T or Y joint
X X joint
Input example for the classification run.
*CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS, TRACK 99

UNITS MM NEWTON
PARAMETER
CODE NPD GEOM1
FYLD 350 ALL
TRACK 99 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
6.1 Static strength of tubular joints
The basic consideration is the chord strength. The required chord wall thickness
shall be
determined when the other dimensions are given.
The following symbols are used:
T = Cord wall thickness

t = Brace wall thickness
734 — STAAD.Pro
R = Outer radius of chord

r = Outer radius of brace
Θ = Angel between chord and considered brace
D = Outer diameter of chord
d = Outer diameter of brace
a = Gap (clear distance) between considered brace and nearest load-
carrying brace measured along chord outer surface
ß = r/R
g = R/T
g = a/D
f = Yield stress
y
Q = Factor
f
Q = See table 6.1
g
Q = See table 6.1
u
Q d = See table 6.1
ß
N = Design axial force in brace
M = Design in-plane bending moment in brace
IP
M = Design out-of plane bending moment in brace
OP
N = Characteristic axial load capacity of brace (as governed by the
k
chord strength)
M = Characteristic out-of-plane bending moment capacity of brace
OPk
(as governed by the chord strength)
σ = Design axial stress in chord
ax
σ = Design in-plane bending stress in chord
IP
σ = Design out-of-plane bending stress in chord
OP
This section gives design formulae for simple tubular joints without overlap and
without gussets, diaphragms or stiffeners. Tubular joints in a space frame structure
shall satisfy:

Q is given in Table 6.1. Qf is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal

u
stress in the chord.
Table 19A.7.1 - Values for Qu

Type of load in brace member
Type of joint and
In-plane Out-of-plane
geometry Axial
bending bending
T and Y 2.5 + 19β 5.0√(γ)β 3.2/(1-0.81β)
X (2.7 + 13β)Q
β
K 0.90(2+21β)Q
β
but in no case shall Q be taken as less than 1.0.

g
When β ≥ 0.9, Q is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. For
f
cases with tension in the chord, Qf is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment
loading.
The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases:
736 — STAAD.Pro
a. Out-of-plane bending moment when β > 0.85

b. When the brace acts as a cantilever
c. When the rotational stiffness of the connection is considered in the deter-
mination of effective buckling length, and / or the structural coefficient γ =
mk
1.00 for the beam-column design of the brace or chord. See Section 3.1.3.
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment shall
be determined by:
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment

shall be determined by:
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction
equation should be satisfied:
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total
load component normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
where (see NPD fig. 3.10)
l = circumference for that portion of the brace in contact with the chord
l
(actual length)
l = circumference of brace contact with chord, neglecting presence of
overlap
N = characteristic axial load capacity of brace
k

t = the lesser of the throat thickness of the overlapping weld or the

w
thickness t of the thinner brace
l = length as shown in NPD fig. 3.10
2
The above formula for the capacity of overlapping joints is valid only for K joints,
where compression in a brace is essentially balanced by tension in brace(s) in the
same side of the joint.
19A.8 - Tabulated Results/ TRACKs

This section presents a table with the various TRACKs available with respect to
print out from the code check. Example prints and explanation to the information /
heading given on the print out is given in Appendix A.
Table 19A.8.1 - Available TRACKs
TRACK
Description
no.
0 Brief print of member utilizations (2 lines for each
member) sorted with highest utilized members first
1 Based on TRACK 3 with additional information regard-
ing stability factors and capacities
2 Simple print of stresses, incl von Mises stress
3 Brief print of member utilizations (2 lines for each
member)
9 Comprehensive print with detailed information about
member and member utilization(one page for each
member)
99 Used in connection with tubular joint check according
to NPD. This TRACK identifies tubular joints to be
checked and classifies all members entering the joint as
T connection
98 Used in connection with tubular joint check according
to NPD. This TRACK performs the joint capacity check
49 Prints member end forces for members entering each
joint (at the end of the member connected to the joint)
31 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces
(axial force defines max and min) at member end 1
32 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces
(axial force defines max and min) at member end 2
738 — STAAD.Pro
Tracks for member code checking
TRACK = 0.0

TRACK = 1.0
740 — STAAD.Pro
TRACK = 2.0

TRACK = 3.0
TRACK = 9.0
Member in tension:
742 — STAAD.Pro
Member in compression:

744 — STAAD.Pro
Member in compression (pipe - NPD):

746 — STAAD.Pro
Tracks for joint capacity code checking
TRACK = 99

TRACK = 98
748 — STAAD.Pro
Special prints (not code check)
TRACK = 49
TRACK = 31

TRACK = 32
750 — STAAD.Pro
Technical Support
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
l Service Ticket Manager — http://www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager —

Create and track a service ticket using Bentley Systems' online site for report-
ing problems or suggesting new features. You do not need to be a Bentley
SELECT member to use Service Ticket Manager, however you do need to reg-
ister as a user.
l Knowledge Base — http://appsnet.bentley.com/kbase/ — Search the Bentley
Systems knowledge base for solutions for common problems.
l FAQs and TechNotes — http://-
communities.bentley.com/Products/Structural/Structural_Analysis___
Design/w/Structural_Analysis_and_Design__Wiki/structural-product-tech-
notes-and-faqs.aspx — Here you can find detailed resolutions and answers to
the most common questions posted to us by you.
l Ask Your Peers — http://-
communities.bentley.com/forums/5932/ShowForum.aspx — Post questions
in the Be Community forums to receive help and advice from fellow users.

Technical Support
752 — STAAD.Pro
Actual Load 182
ACTUAL LOADS 185, 188, 191,
194, 197, 200
Actual Slenderness 183
AD 49
Index ADDITION MOMENTS

Adjusting
210
156
Displacements 156
A Ae 120
About 209 Ag 117
Abovementioned 103 AISC 60, 85, 142, 614, 618,
Acceptable 24, 227 629, 636
Acceptable bar 24, 227, 358 rules 142
According 23, 41, 92, 94, 127, Section 1.5 629

216, 233, 248-249, AISC ASD 9th 613
323, 621 AISC LRFD 614
Annex 41 AISI 108, 164-165
BS8007 94 ALB 17
BS8110 23, 94 ALCLAD 604, 610
Cl 233, 248 ALE 105
Clause 4.3 249 ALL 49, 77, 115, 148, 155, 161,
CSA STANDARD A23.3 127 237, 314, 320, 609
Design Strength 92 stands 604
ECCS 203 323 ALL UNITS ARE 119, 151, 157,
SECTION 620 162
Table 3.4.1 215 Allow 31, 97, 224, 358
According to 225 Geometric Nonlinearity 224
Account 300 Mxy 31, 97, 358
Load 299 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress618
Actual 181 Allowable Axial Tensile Stress618
ACTUAL DESIGN OUTPUT 28 Allowable Bending Compressive Stress619

Index: Allowable Bending Tensile Stress – Anticlockwise
Allowable Bending Tensile Stress619 Aluminum Structures 601

ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION186 American 89, 93, 108
, uses 89, 93
189
American
, Petroleum Institute 626,
192 632
,
American Steel Design 631
194
American Transmission Tower Code613-
, 615,
197 617-
, 620
200
Analysed 63, 86, 357
ALLOWABLE KL/R 152, 158,
163 ANALYSIS 128, 153
Allowable Net Final Local Deflection312 Analysis Consideration 5
Allowable Shear Stress 619 ANCHOR 28, 131
Allowable Value 181 AND 49, 77
Allowables 626 And 1 8, 206, 325
ALLOY 603 And Class 3 and Class 4 sections are checked236
ALLOY 35 ALL 609 And Table 25 249
ALONG 37 BS 5950 249
Along edges 38 ANGLE 31
ALPHA 310, 316, 320 Angle is fixed by 41, 250
ALPHA 1.2e 174 which leg 41, 250
ALPHA 5.5e 175, 184, 187, 190, ANGLES 14, 137, 349, 362
193, 196, 198, 316, ANL 633
320 Annex 41, 47, 66, 234, 303,
ALPHA 6.5e 114 310
Although STAAD 88, 636 according 41
Aluminum 2, 603 Annex H1 60
Section I-B 603 Annex H3 48
Aluminum Design 609 Annex I1 48, 60
Aluminum specifications for details603 Anticlockwise 31, 358
754 — STAAD.Pro
Index: API – B-2t
API 626, 628, 631-632, 635, Aug 214

637 Australian Steel Design Parameters18
Define 626 Australian Codes 5-6, 8, 10-13,
API-RP2A 626 17-18, 21-22
APIPUN 633, 637 Australian Concrete Design 10
Appendix 73, 142 Automatic 632
rules 142 Available in STAAD 225
Appendix-B 220 AX 6, 27, 340, 354
Appendix-C 220 AX.TENS 120
Appendix H1 85 Axes 300
Are provided 9, 206, 326, 355 Axial 110, 304
Are specified 102 AXIAL CAP 30
Area 141, 177, 208 Axial Compression 18, 141, 178,
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED 30 216, 333, 366,
615, 619
ARMER 26, 31, 95, 97, 229
Clause 3.12 615
ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT31
stress 215, 365
AS 3600 5, 8-10
AXIAL LOAD 30, 36
AS 4100 11, 17, 21-22
the effect 36
As defined in clause 6.4.2 of the100
Axial Tension 17, 46, 73, 143,
ASCE 614 178, 215, 334,
ASCE 10 613-615, 617 366, 615, 619
ASCE 10-97 615 Clause 3.13 615
ASCE 52 613 stress 215, 365
ASCE Manuals 618-620 Axially Loaded Members 234,
ASCE Pub 618-620 249
ASCE Publication 52 613 Design 234, 249
ASCE Standard 10 613 AY 27, 340
Associated Moments 52 AZ 27, 340
Assumed to be 36
B
At node 109
B-2t 76

Index: B-t – British Codes
B-t 76 Beams Prismatic 5

B1 89, 93 Behaviour 47, 73, 343
B2 89, 93 BEND 108
BAEL 1983 341 Bending 99, 108, 165, 176,
Bar 179, 216, 302, 333,
344, 366, 615, 619,
Height 28, 131 628
BAR INFO 28 Check 108, 304
BAR INFOrmation 131 Ratio 109
BASED ON 16mm BARS 31 Size Factor 180
Basic Inputs 303 Strength 302
Baumann 353, 357, 360 Stress 215, 330, 365
MUNICH 357 wy 168
Bc BETA 633
value 302 BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27 114
BEAM 36, 53, 66, 83, 98, 101, BETWEEN 35
115, 146, 148, 165, 221,
238, 334, 336, 367, 369, BETWEEN d1 39
488, 609-610, 621, 630 BIAXIAL BENDING 160
Beam Deflection 148 BOTH 77
BEAM DESIGN 9-10, 131, 203, Both SFACE 24, 130, 227, 338,
340, 356 359
Input Data 9, 132, 340, 356 BOTT 31, 226
Beam Design Brief BOTTOM 206, 226
following 324 BRACE 25, 29, 228, 326, 634
Beam in this case 62 Brace Diameter 635
Beam Resistance 148 Brace Thickness 635
Beam Shear Stress 626 BRACED 30
Beam Spacing 186, 195 BRACED LONG COLUMN 209
Beam/Column 153, 159, 311 British 32, 72, 89-90, 93-94
Beams 101, 233, 248, 353 British Codes 23, 41-43, 46, 49,
Design 248 63-66, 68-69, 87,
90-91, 93-99, 108
756 — STAAD.Pro
Index: British Standard – C45752
British Standard 68, 90 BS8110 23, 26-27, 30, 94-95

BRTISH 36 according 23, 94
BS 98, 310 design 23
BS-4.2.3 52, 81, 89 BS8110 Part 26, 29
BS-4.3 81, 89 BSI 50, 69, 77
BS-4.4.3.2 65 Buckling 17, 141
BS-4.4.3.3 65 characteristics 17, 141
BS-4.4.4.2 89 BUCKLING CALCULATIONS 52
0.203 89 BUCKLING CO 51, 77
BS-4.7 80 Bulb Angles 601
BS 5950 41, 54, 66, 97-99, 108, But may 46, 73, 215, 366
236, 240, 249, 251
and Table 25 249 C
Clause 5.2.2.2 108 C & MC 136
Provisions 97 C CHANNELS 140
BS 5950 Part 108 C14 310
BS 5950 Section 4.4 65 C16 310
BS 8110 32 C18 310
BS4360 56, 83, 92 C20 310
BS449 46, 72 C200X28 137
BS5400 90-91 C22 310
BS5950 41, 46, 49, 63-65, 68, C230X75X25 SP 0.5 14
72, 76, 86-88, 99, 239
C24 310, 313, 317
fastner 81
C250X37 SP 1.0 140
BS5950-1/2000 52
C27 310
BS5950-5-v1.0 121
C30 310
BS5950 4.7.3 83
C35 310, 338
BS5950/1990 80
C40 310
BS8007 94-97
C45 310
according 94
C45752 90, 94
design 95

Index: C50 – Characteristic Strength
C50 310 159

Calculate Omega 145 Canadian Wood Design 172
Calculate Omega_2 145 Canadian Wood Design Manual 183,
Calculated within 48 189,
192,
Calculating 633 195,
Calculations for 336 198
CAN 53, 134, 141, 146-147, CAPACITY 148
238 Case 117
13.2 141 Cb 59, 84, 145, 162, 368, 629
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 148, 153, bending 99
159
CEN 224, 245
CAN/CSA S16.1 148
Centre Technique Industriel 342
Canada 148, 153, 159
Centroidal 249
National Standard 148, 153,
159 shift 249
Canadian 135, 141, 173, 183, CH152X89 70

186, 189, 192, 195, CH203X89 70
198 CH305X102 SP 70
Canadian Codes 134-135, 141, Changing 46, 73, 215, 366,
144, 146-148, 637
164, 172
1.5 628
Canadian Glulam 185-186, 189
PUNCH 637
determine 183
the input 46, 73, 215, 366
Canadian Institute 148, 153,
159 Channel 108, 334, 349, 601,
614
Steel Construction 148, 153,
159 CHANNELS 14, 349, 362
Canadian Sawn 192, 198 Channels and Z 166
determine 192 Chapter II 341
CANADIAN SECTIONS 152, 157, Chapters 10, 13, 132

162 rules 131-132
Canadian Standards Association 148, Characteristic Strength 303
153,
758 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Characteristic Values – Clause
Characteristic Values 202, 303 Circular Hollow Sections 13

Concrete Strength 202 CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS 15,
Timber Species 303 351
Characteristics 17, 47, 73, 141 CISC 148, 153, 159
buckling 17, 141 CISC Example 148
Check 108, 304, 314, 318, 621 CISC Handbook 148
Bending 108, 302 CISC Handbook Example 153,

159
Compression 304
Cl 17, 141, 145, 233, 236, 248-
Shear 302 250, 309
Slenderness 314, 318 according 233, 248
Tension 304 refer 18
Torsional 302 Cl 6.2.4 249
CHECK CODE 193, 609 Cl 6.3 311
CHECK CODE ALL 151, 157, 162, Cl.13.6 145
182, 185, 188,
191, 196, 199, Cl.2.3.1.2 309
316, 320, 609 Cl.2.3.1.3 309
CHECK CODE MEMB 21, 115 Cl.5.1 18
CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21 115 Cl.5.2 18
Check Moment Cl.6.1.1 310
Taper Members 67 Cl.6.1.2 310
China 210 Cl.6.1.3 310
Chinese Codes 201-202, 206, Cl.6.1.4 310
209-211, 215- Cl.6.1.5 310
216, 221
Cl.6.2.2 17
CHIX 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,
194, 197, 200 Cl.6.3.2 311
CHIX 0.99 ALL 182 Cl.6.3.3 17, 311
CHORD 634 Cl.8.3.4 18
Chord Diameter 635 Class 46, 143, 247
Chord Thickness 635 Class 1,2 141
Circular 5, 127, 201, 353 Clause 148, 165, 176

Index: Clause 10.14 – CMM
Clause 10.14 128 Clause 5.5.4 177

Clause 13.3 141 CSA086 176
Clause 13.5 142 Clause 5.5.5 176
Clause 13.6 142 Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086 176
Clause 3.12 615 Clause 5.5.9
Axial Compression 615 CSA086 176
Clause 3.13 615 Clause 6.1 17
Axial Tension 615 Clause 6.1.1.1 10
Clause 3.15 615 Clause 6.5.6.5 176
Shear 615 CSA086 176
Clause 3.4 615 Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086 176
Clause 3.9.2 615 Clause 6.7.1 166
Maximum 615 Clause.4.3.2 179
Clause 4.15 619 Clause.5.4.5 180
Shear 619 Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.260
Clause 4.2, Maximum Flat Width Ratios Clauses 6.2 165
Elements in Compression 99 Clauses 6.2.3 249
Clause 4.3 249, 603 Clauses 6.3.1 165
according 249 CLB 129, 133
Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086 176 CLEAR 10, 24, 30, 34, 227,
Clause 4.4 619 338, 341, 359
Clause 4.7.7 59, 84 CLEAR 25 MEM 8
Clause 4.9.2 619 CLEAR 25 MEMB 10
Maximum 619 CLEAR 40 ALL 10
Clause 4C 621 CLS 129
Clause 5.2.2.2 108 CLT 129, 133
BS 5950 108 CM 65, 115, 151, 157, 162,

607
Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios
value 603
Elements in Compression 165
CM 66 347
Clause 5.4.4/6.4.3, Table 5.4.4179
CMM 75, 77, 238, 368
760 — STAAD.Pro
Index: CMN – COMPRESS
CMN 75, 77, 238 Coefficients nu 605

1.0 73, 77 value 603
Cms 332 Cold 164
CMY 105, 145, 162, 167, 336, Cold Formed Steel Sections 97
630 COLD WORK FYLD 120
CMZ 105, 145, 162, 167, 336, COLUMN 37, 192
630
Design 32
Co-efficients 78
Column Design 10, 132, 205,
CODE 627 341, 357
Code Checking 609 Input Data 10, 133, 341, 357
CODE AISI 115 COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT 30
CODE ALUMIMUM 609 Column Resistance 153, 159
CODE API 637 Column Stability 306
CODE ASCE 613, 619 Column unbraced 25, 228
CODE ASCE 52 613 Columns 47, 73, 353
CODE AUSTRALIAN 8, 10 Columns Prismatic 5
CODE BS5950 COLD 115 Combination 173
CODE CANADIAN 151, 157, selecting 173
162
Combined 99, 166
CODE CHECKING 21, 64, 87, 146,
243, 259, 614, Used 100, 165
618 Combined Bending and Shear166
commands 21, 146 Combined Loading 216
Code if 88 stress 215
Code No 329 Commands 21-22, 146-147
CODE TIMBER CAN 182 CODE CHECKING 21, 146
CODE TIMBER CANADIAN 184, 188, MEMBER SELECTION 22, 147
191, 193, Common 299
196, 199
Comp 336
CODE TIMBER EC5 316, 320
Composite 614
Coefficients Kt 604
COMPRESS 108
value 603

Index: COMPRESSION – CRITICAL COND
COMPRESSION 47, 73, 98, 110, Considering 360

155, 160, 165, Mxy 360
176, 179, 182,
304, 314, 627 Consisting 138, 172
Check 304 125X75X6 138
Size Factor 180 Sawn 172
Compression Capacity 122 CONSTANTS 114, 150, 155,

161, 174, 184,
COMPRESSION MEMBER KL 620 187, 190, 193,
Compressive 100 196, 199, 316, 320
value 100 Construction Metallique 342
Compressive limit 166 Contain 637
Compressive Strength 100, 302 LEG 637
Compressive Stress 330 Contains a complete list 6, 23, 96,
Computed for 142 202, 358
Concrete 2, 30 Contains a list 129
Concrete Design 5 Contents 3
1A.2 Section Types 5 STAAD 2
Concrete Design Per AS3600 5-6, Continuous 245

8, 10 Control 49
Concrete Design Per Egyptian Code323 Output Formats 49
Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2223- Corresponds 240
226 National Annex 258
Concrete Design Per GB50010201 Perry 47, 73
Concrete Strength 202 COVER 207, 209
Characteristic Values 202 CR 147
Concrete Structures 5 CR1 148, 152, 157, 162
Concrete Yield Stress 10, 227, CR2 148
358
Creates 626
COND CRITIQUE 347
Geometry file 626
Configuration and 75
CRITICAL COND 22, 88, 147,
Consider MLT 54 182, 185, 188,
Consider MX 54
762 — STAAD.Pro
Index: CRITICAL COND – Default Value
191, 194, 196, CV 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,

199, 636 194, 197, 200
Critical Conditions 618 CV 0.99 ALL 182
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK52CWY 105, 115, 168
Critical Moment 25, 130, 228, Cylindrical Tubular Sections 166
339, 359
CROSS 632 D
Cross-sectional 98, 165 D-2t 76
CROSS SECTION 209 D-t 76
Cross Section Capacity 48 D CH102X51 70
CRZ 148, 152, 157, 162 D U180 362
CSA 129, 134-135, 141, 144, D/t 88
146-148, 172-173, 176,
D1 37, 89, 93
178, 181-183, 186, 189,
192, 195, 198 D2 39
CSA 086 177 D30 310
CSA 136 165 D35 310
CSA S136 164 D40 310
Provisions 164 D50 310
CSA STANDARD A23.3 127-130, D60 310

132 D70 310
according 127 DAMP 0.03 114
CSA086 172, 176, 181-182, DAMP 0.05 187, 190
182
DBL 622
6.5.11 177
DD ENV 230
6.5.8.4 177
DD ENV 1993 230, 232, 234,
Clause 5.5.4 177 248
Clause 6.5.6.5 176 given in Annex F 248
CT 89, 93 DEAD 148, 193, 196, 199
CTORFLX 148 Deep 331
Curvature Factor Default Value 10, 18, 23, 32, 49,
Compression 179 76, 97, 236, 309,

Index: Default Value – DESIGN BEAM
358, 620, 628 Description 32

Defaults 10, 130, 204, 339 Descriptivity 239, 356
KZ 628 level 238, 356
YD 10, 130, 204, 339 Design 2, 5, 8, 10, 23, 32, 95,
ZD 10, 130, 204, 339 97, 130, 176, 206, 209-
210, 224-225, 230,
Define 626 234, 245, 248-250,
API 626 302, 325, 355, 613
STAAD 625 Axially Loaded Members 234,
DEFINE MATERIAL START114, 175, 249
184, 187, Beams 233, 248
190, 193, BS8007 95
195, 198,
315, 319 BS8110 23
Deflection Check 50, 83, 312 COLUMN 37
Deflection Length 59, 84, 146, Finding 303

239, 312 Flexure 5, 8, 130, 206, 325,
Degree/Level 312 355
Details 312 glulam 176
Degrees 635 HSS 614
Delphi 2 Latticed Steel Transmission Structures613
Delta 12, 42, 69, 128, 135, Shear 5, 8, 130, 206, 225,
211, 224-225, 361, 474 325, 355
DENSITY 0.00231749 316, 320 STAAD 10, 209
DENSITY 0.489024 114 Steel Structures 210
DENSITY 1.44676e 184, 187, Steel Transmission Towers 618

190 Structures 97
DENSITY 2.5e 174 Timber Structures 299
DENSITY 25 175, 193, 196, Torsion 225
198 Design Axial Compressive Stress614
DENSITY 8.68e 187, 190 DESIGN AXIAL FORCE 209
DEPTH 10, 25, 130, 204, 228, Design Axial Tensile Stress 614
339, 359
DESIGN BEAM 8
764 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Design Bending Compressive Stress – DOF
Design Bending Compressive Stress615 Determine 183, 192

Design Bending Tensile Stress615 Canadian Glulam 185
Design Code 52, 183, 186, 189, Canadian Sawn 192
192, 195, 198 Developing moments 245
DESIGN COLUMN 10 DFF 50, 84, 146, 239, 312, 336
DESIGN DATA 52, 122 value 49
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20 10 DFF/dff 62
DESIGN FORCES 209 Dia 71, 209, 351, 363
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY 207 DIN 354-355, 360, 369
Design output 312 DIN 1045 353-356
Design Per American Aluminum Code 601 DIN 1045 17.4.3 354
,
603 DIN 18800 360, 365-366
, DIN 4114 360, 365-366
609 DIN Code 360-361, 365-367,
Design Per BS5400 90-91 369
Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code164
DISK SPACE 150, 156, 161
Design Procedure 603 Displacements 156
Design Rules 342-343 Adjusting 156
Structural Steelwork 342-343 Distance 28, 30, 131
Design Shear Stress 615 Distribution about 204
Design Strength 49, 77, 92, 183, DJ1 50, 84, 146, 239, 312
186, 189, 192, joining 62, 85
195, 198
DJ2 50, 84, 146, 239, 313
according 92
DMAX 18, 64, 87, 168, 217,
Design Stresses 614 238, 243, 259, 335, 368,
Design Value 202 603, 620, 631
Strength 202 DMIN 18, 64, 87, 168, 217,
Detailer 9, 131, 206, 325, 355 238, 243, 259, 335, 368,
603, 620, 631
Details 312
DO NOT PERFORM THE KL 621
Degree/Level 312
DOF 150, 156, 161

Index: Double – EITHER
Double 142, 349, 362 EACH END 30

Double Angles 13, 613 EC 299, 302
Double Channels 13 Reference Table 2.3 300
DOUBLE ANGLES 14, 138, 350, Reference Table 3.1 300
363 EC2 223-226
DOUBLE CHANNELS 14, 137 including 223
Douglas Fir 173 EC3 230, 233, 237, 245, 247-
Drawn Tube 604 250, 259
Dry 186, 195 including 245
DT 138 EC3 DD 230, 232, 236, 243,
During 61, 85, 368 249
SELECT 49, 77, 367 EC5 299, 304
Dutch National Annex 246, 260 ECC 120
DX1 62 ECCS 203 323
DX2 62 according 323
DX2-DX1 62 ECCS203 324-326
DY1 62 ECCS205 323-326
DY2 62 Ee 97
DY2-DY1 62 EFACE 24, 130, 132, 227, 338,

359
DZ1 62
Effective Length 77
DZ2 62
Effective Length Factor 311
DZ2-DZ1 62
Local 311
E EFFECTIVE LENGTHS 77
EFFICIENTS 51, 77
E 1.10316e 316, 320
Egyptian
E 1.368E 193
Section 2.6.3 333
E 1.728e 195, 198
Egyptian Code No 330
E 4.176e 114
Egyptian Codes 323-326, 329,
E STEEL ALL 150, 155, 161
335
E/2 232
EITHER 84
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD123
766 — STAAD.Pro
Index: ELA – Equation 4.13
ELA 622 ,
Elastic 233, 248 153
,
Elasticity 180, 224, 232, 302 158
Mean Modulus 303 ,
ELB 622 163
ELEMENT DESIGN OUTPUT 30 END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT118

,
ELEMENT PROPERTIES 97 157
ELEMENTS 53, 150, 156, 161 END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS151
Elements in Compression 99, END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN 125
165
Enforced 167, 609
ELY 25, 29, 202, 228, 356, 360
TRUSS 167, 609
ELZ 25, 29, 205, 228, 356, 360
Engineer 23, 96
EMAX 33
give 23, 96
EMIN 33
ENGINEER DATE 315
EN 309
ENGINEER DATE 08 192, 195,
EN 1993 245, 247, 259 198, 319
specifying 246 ENGINEER DATE 10 184, 186,
EN 338 303, 314 190
End 11, 27, 32, 66, 130, 205, EQN.4.7-10 622
237 EQN.4.7-12 622
END CONCRETE DESIGN 8, 10 EQN.4.7-13 622
END DEFINE MATERIAL 114, 174, EQN.4.7-14 622
184, 187,
190, 193, EQN.4.7-4 622
196, 198, EQN.4.7-5 622
316, 320 EQN.4.7-6 622
END JOB INFORMATION 184, 186, EQN.4.7-7 622
190, 192,
195, 198, EQN.4.7-8 622
315, 319 EQN.4.7-9 622
End Joint 239 Equation 4.12 619
END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE117 Equation 4.13 619

Index: Equations – Figure
Equations 622 Extrusions 604

Equations 4.7 622
F
Equations for 143
provides 143 FA 636
EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO117 Face 130, 338
Equivalent moment 48 Support 130
Equivalent Moment Factors 52 Support Location 338
Equivalent slenderness 48 Factored Compressive 183
limiting 46 FACTORED LOAD 156, 161
Eurocode 224, 230, 232, 234, Factors 299

245, 247-249, 250, vectoral 240
258-259, 299, 353,
FAIL 18, 21, 66, 88, 98, 107,
357
143, 146, 165, 178, 181,
Steel Design 230, 232, 234, 221, 334, 369, 488, 603,
245, 247-250, 608, 615, 619, 636
258-259
FAILED 88
European 76
FAILURE 621
European Codes 223, 230, 247-
Fastener Control 54
250, 258-259,
299 Table 25 BS5950 54
EVERY OTHER OCCURING 95 Fastner 81
EX 173 BS5950 76
EXAMPLE 77 Fc 10, 24, 28, 30, 32, 129,

133, 203, 227, 338, 341,
EXAMPLE INPUT 94
358
Example Problem 609
FC 25 ALL 10
Examples Manual 1, 609
FC 35 ALL 8, 10
STAAD 609
FCY 636
Exceedance 210, 360
FCZ 636
Exceeding 331
Fe 510 237
Lu 331
FEBRUARY 31
External file 634
Fig 137
Extreme Fibre 179
Figure 68
768 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Finding – FYSEC 415 ALL
Finding 303 Formed Steel Design Manual 164

Design 302 FORTRAN 2
FINI 16, 352 French Codes 337, 342
FINISH 115, 141, 153, 158, French Steel Design 342
163, 175, 182, 185, FROM 27, 131
188, 191, 193, 196,
199, 215, 316, 320, 365 Ft0k 301
Fir 173, 187 FTY 636
Fir_SelStr_2X10_BM 174 FTZ 636
FIRST 95 FU 17, 105, 120, 141, 145,

152, 157, 162, 168, 238
FIXED 196, 316, 320
Fv 636
FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ 161
FVB 622
FIXED BUT FY MY MZ 156
FX 50, 77, 88, 316, 636
FIXED BUT MX MZ 155, 161
FX 0.6 115
FIXED BUT MY MZ 150
Fxy 36
FLANGE 1000 27
substituted 627
FLEXTURE 207
Fy 28, 30, 32, 141, 151, 156,
Flexural-torsional buckling capacity142 161, 184, 193, 320
Flexural Buckling 166 FY 144 199
Flexure 5, 8, 27, 130, 206, 325, FY 250 191
355
FYB 622
Design 5, 8, 130, 206, 325,
355 FYLD 18, 106, 115, 151, 157,
162, 168, 336, 622, 634
FLX 105, 168
FYLD 300000 ALL 151, 157,
Fmk 301 162
Following 219, 324 FYLD 330E6 MEMB 21-22
For axially 37 FYLD 55 ALL 115
For that 98, 165 FYMAIN 10, 30, 33, 133, 341
Force 110, 313, 317 FYMAIN 415 ALL 8, 10
5.0 kN 317 FYSEC 10
50.0 kN 313 FYSEC 415 ALL 8

Index: FZ – GUI
FZ 115 Getting Started Manual 3

Give 23, 96
G
Engineer 23, 96
G7 91 GIVEN 148, 154, 159
G8 91 Given in Annex F 248
GAP 634 DD ENV 1993 248
GB 1591 56, 83 GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E 187
GB1 232, 240, 247 GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E 184
GB50010 201-202, 206, 209 GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E 190
GB50017 221 Glu 174
GB50017-2003 210 Glu Laminated 174
Gen 32 Glued 301
GEN PIN 34 Glulam 172-173, 176
GENERAL 87, 165, 224, 243, design 176
259, 601
GlulamBEAM.STD 186
Generation 632
GLULAMCOLUMN.STD 183
GEOM 637
GlulamTENSION.STD 189
GEOM file 638
GM0 240
GEOM1 637
GM1 240
Geometric Nonlinearity 224
GM2 240
allowing 224
GOV 120
Geometry 632
Graphical User Interface 3
Geometry file 626, 633
Gross Area 51, 122
creates 626
Gross Section Property Tables 97,
modify 626 164
German 361 GROUP 53
German Codes 353, 360-361, Groupname J1 J4 J6 54
365-367, 369
GROUPS 53
Getting 3
Specification 53
Started 3
GUI 3, 53, 98, 164, 243
Getting Started 609
770 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Guide – Input
Guide 618 HSS 614

GUIDING LOAD CASE 209 Design 613
H I
H Shapes 214 I-Section 334

H/W 153, 158, 163 I.e 98, 165
HANGAR MEMBERS KL 620
Î
Having 603
PASSed 603 Î“m
HE 361 used 249
HE SHAPES 348, 362 Î“m0
HEA 52, 79 Corresponds 240
HEA 100 61, 85 Î“m1
HEA220 362 Corresponds 240
HEIGHT 28, 131 Î“m2
bar 27, 131 Corresponds 240
Height, Width 364 ID 135
Help 3, 173 Ie 109
PRISMATIC 173 In Plane Bending 633, 635
Hem 173 taken 635
Hem-Fir 173 INCH 115
HEM120 349 INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS151
Hence verified 111 Including 223, 245
HMAX 33 EC2 223
HMIN 33 EC3 245
HOLLOW SECTIONS 351 INITIAL MOMENTS 209
HP 136, 347, 614 Initiation 164, 166
HP SHAPES 136 Yielding 164, 166
HRB400 207, 209 Input 97

300 97

Index: Input Data – K_SCP
Input Data 9-11, 132-134, 340- 187,

342, 356-357 190
Beam Design 9, 131, 340, 356 ISOTROPIC SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM175
Column Design 10, 132, 341, ISOTROPIC STEEL 114
357 ISOTROPIC WOOD 315, 320
Slab 10, 133, 341 IX 116
Input File 113, 315, 319 IY 116, 152, 157, 162
INPUT WIDTH 79 113, 184, 186, IZ 115, 150, 156, 161, 305
190, 315, 319
Instantaneous 309 J
INTERACTION RATIO 210
Java 2
International Codes 627
Joining 62, 85
Intl 149, 155, 160
DJ1 50, 84
IPB 633, 635
JOINT COORD 13
IPE 348, 361
JOINT COORDINATES 113, 149,
IPE Shapes 348, 361 155, 160,
IPE120 362 175, 184,
187, 190,
IPE140 348
193, 195,
IPN 348 198, 315,
IPN Shapes 348 319
IS 206 JOINT DISPLACEMENT 118
IS NOT 90, 94 Joint Geometry Data File 638
ISECTION 66, 87, 90-91, 93, JOINT LOAD 115, 156, 161,
243, 259 184, 191, 193,
199, 316, 320
ISOTROPIC CONCRETE 187,
190 Joints 53
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_10X16_BM195 JUN 184, 186, 190, 192, 195,

198, 319
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_6X8_BM198
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO2_8X8_POST193 K
ISOTROPIC GLT_D 174, 187
K_SCP 176, 180, 185, 188,
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE 184, 191, 194, 197, 200
772 — STAAD.Pro
Index: K_SCP 0.99 ALL – KSLENDER
K_SCP 0.99 ALL 182 KLZ 311

K_T 176, 179 Km 300, 313, 318
K_T 0.99 ALL 182 value 300
K_T 1.0 ALL 196 Kmod 300, 313, 318
K_ZC 176, 180, 185, 188, 191, KN 49, 65, 77, 89, 121, 148,
193, 196, 199 154, 159, 176, 180, 183,
K_ZC 0.99 ALL 182 186, 189, 192, 195, 198,
313, 317
K_ZC 1.05 ALL 193, 196, 199
KN-m 185-186, 191, 194-195,
Kc 604 200
KC90 301, 310 KN-m/m 31
Kcy 307 KN 0.99 ALL 182
Kcz 307 KN MET 207
KD 176, 179, 185, 188, 191, KN*m 149, 154, 159
194, 196, 200
KN/m3 232
KD 0.99 ALL 182
KNM 30, 52, 121
KD 1.0 ALL 196
KNS 151, 157, 162
KH 176, 179, 185, 188, 191,
194, 197, 199, 301 KNS-MET 209
value 300 KSB 176, 179, 185, 188, 191,

194, 196, 200
KH 0.99 ALL 182
KSB 0.99 ALL 182
KH 1.1 ALL 199
KSB 1.0 ALL 196
Kilonewtons 49, 77
KSC 176, 179, 185, 188, 191,
KIP 113 193, 197, 199
KIPS 635 KSC 0.91 ALL 193, 199
KL 100, 152, 166, 177, 179, KSC 0.99 ALL 182
217, 605, 620
KSE 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,
Kl/r 80, 141, 216, 330, 366 194, 197, 200
KL/RY 152, 158, 163 KSE 0.99 ALL 182
KL/RZ 158, 163 Kshape 301
KLEF 311 KSI 120, 336, 620, 629
KLY 311 KSLENDER 34

Index: KST – LEG 1.0
KST 176, 180, 185, 188, 191, KZT 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,
194, 197, 200 194, 197, 200
KST 0.99 ALL 182 KZT 0.99 ALL 182
KSV 176, 179, 185, 188, 191, KZV 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,
194, 197, 200 194, 196, 200
KSV 0.99 ALL 182 KZV 0.90 ALL 196
KT 17, 144, 169, 185, 188, KZV 0.99 ALL 182
191, 194, 197, 200, 604,
614, 620 L
KX 106, 141, 177, 179, 619
L/Delta 62
KY 17, 41, 49, 77, 93, 106,
L/r 330
141, 144, 148, 154, 159,
169, 177, 179, 216-217, L= 89
237, 250, 344, 366-367, L200X200X25 137
605, 614, 619-620, 629
Lambda 142
KY 0.5 ALL 185, 191
Laminated veener 301
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 21-22, 609
Larch 173
KY KZ 77
Lateral 77, 177, 237
KZ 17, 41, 49, 77, 93, 106,
Laterally Unsupported Members166
141, 144, 169, 176, 179,
216-217, 237, 250, 344, Latticed Steel Transmission Structures613
366-367, 606, 614, 619- Design 613
620, 628
Lb 55, 241
default 628
LD 13, 70, 136, 349, 363
KZ 0.5 ALL 185, 191
LDC 300, 309, 316, 320
Kz 1.0 148, 154, 159
Le 91
KZB 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,
LEG 41, 54, 81, 239, 250, 621,
194, 196, 200
626, 631, 637
KZB 0.90 ALL 196
contain 637
KZB 0.99 ALL 182
Lvv 55, 82
KZCP 176, 180, 185, 188, 191,
Reset 626
194, 197, 200
setting 50, 237
KZCP 0.99 ALL 182
LEG 1.0 626, 632
774 — STAAD.Pro
Index: LEG 2.0 – LTB Moment Capacity
LEG 2.0 633 159, 184, 186, 190, 193,

LEG MEMBER KL 620 195, 199, 299, 313, 317
LEN 27 account 300
LENGTH 206, 209 LOAD COMB 150
Level 28, 131, 238, 356 LOAD COMBINATION 128
descriptivity 239, 356 Load Duration Class 309
LEY 185, 188, 191, 194, 197, Load Factors 224, 232, 247
200 LOAD LIST 150
LEZ 185, 188, 191, 194, 197, Load Perpendicular 310
200 LOADING 50, 77, 88, 117, 151,
Limit 46 157, 162, 185, 188,
50 46 191, 194, 196, 199,
636
equivalent slenderness 48
LOC 109
Limit State 17
LOCAL 109, 311
Limit States Design 148, 153,
159, 299 Effective Length Factor 311
Steel Structures 148, 153, 159 LOCATION 88, 121, 636
Timber Structures 299 LONG 309
Limitations 636 LONG LEG BACK TO BACK 138
Lips 97, 164 LONG LEGS BACK 352
LIST 33 LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK 16,

365
List of 36
Longitudinal reinforcement 203
LIST s1 39
LRFD 142
Listing 53
LRFD 1994 143
Members 50
LT 144, 165, 614
LIVE 148
LTB 67, 81, 89, 248
LIVE LOAD 193, 196, 199
LTB Coefficients 52
LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF 149
LTB for Taper members 67
LMAX 33
LTB Length 52
LMIN 33
LTB Moment Capacity 52
LOAD 27, 31, 110, 148, 154,

Index: LTC – Mbs
LTC 67 MAIN REINFORCEMENT 210

Lu 159, 331 MainBeam 53
exceeding 331 MainBeam J1 J3 J6 54
LUY 185, 188, 191, 194, 197, MainBeam J1 J6 54
200 MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6 54
LUZ 185, 188, 191, 194, 197, MainBeams 56
200
MAJOR AXIS BENDING 155
LVV 41, 55, 82, 239, 250
MATERIAL DATA 51, 122
LEG 54, 81
MATERIAL GLT_D 174, 187
LX 105, 141, 177, 179, 619
MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE 184,
LY 17, 41, 49, 77, 91, 105, 190
141, 144, 165, 177-178,
216, 234, 237, 249, 344, Material Property 300
365, 367, 605, 614, 619- MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb175
620, 628 MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 114
LY 3.7 ALL 157 MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 316,
Lyy 59, 84, 239 320
LZ 17, 41, 49, 77, 93, 107, MAX 55, 312
141, 144, 170, 177, 179, 4.8.3.3.1 52
216-217, 237, 250, 344,
366-367, 606, 614, 619- Maximum 615, 619
620, 629 Clause 3.9.2 615
LZ 3.7 ALL 157 Clause 4.9.2 619
Lzz 59, 84, 239 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS 118
Maxm 84, 146, 207, 336
M
MAXMAIN 10
M SHAPES 140 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 8, 10
M3 301 MAXSEC 10
M310X17 136 Maz 210
Ma 30 Mb 49, 66, 77, 99, 108, 149,
MAIN 18, 47, 50, 83, 143, 620, 155, 160
629 opposed 59, 84
specifying 47 Mbs 59, 84
776 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Mc – Members
Mc 136 319
MC CHANNELS 140 Member Length 51, 86, 122, 237,
MC250X42 136 367, 620, 629
Mcr 234, 248 MEMBER LOAD 115, 150, 188,

196
MCY 51, 78, 88
Member Moment Capacity 347
MCZ 51, 78, 88
MEMBER OFFSET 24, 227, 359
ME 99, 108
MEMBER PROPERTIES 10, 27, 114,
Mean Modulus 303 128, 152,
Elasticity 302 157, 162,
Medium 309 204, 228,
339, 359
MEM 49
MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN13
MEMB 108, 184, 187, 190, 237,
335 MEMBER PROPERTY 5, 66, 202,
316, 320,
Memb-list TA BACK 601 323, 354
Memb-list TA FRONT 601 MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 149,
Memb-list TA LD 601 155,
Memb-list TA SD 601 161
Memb-list TA ST 601 MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN1
MEMB INCI 13 MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH114
MEMBER 49, 87, 108, 149, 155, MEMBER PROPERTY tim 175
160, 259 MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN184
Member Properties 601 MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS150
Member Selection 609, 613, MEMBER SELECTION 22, 147,
617, 620 334, 614,
Member Buckling Resistance 48 618
Member Design 233, 248 commands 22, 147
MEMBER INCIDENCES 113, 149, Member Shear Capacity 347

155, 160, MEMBER TENSION 114
175, 184, Member Type 311
187, 190,
193, 195, Members 50
198, 315, Listing 53

Index: METE – MY2
METE 150, 155, 160 MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC209

METER KN 31 MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT210
Methodology 343 MOMY 30
MIDDLE 10, 205 MOMZ 30
Millimeter 6, 129, 202, 358 MPa 33, 105, 121, 145, 148,
MIN 24, 51, 108, 227, 358 154, 159, 165, 330, 333,
336, 344
4.8.3.3.1 52
MRY 51, 78, 88, 148, 152, 158,
Min Dec 329 163
Minimum 65 MRZ 51, 78, 88, 148
MINMAIN 10, 24, 227, 359 MTYP 311
Minor 51 Munich 353, 357
MINSEC 10 BAUMANN 357
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION 152 Muy 183, 185, 188, 192, 194,
, 197, 200, 347
158
Muy1 210
MLT 52
Muz 183, 185, 189, 192, 194,
MM 28-29, 109 197, 200, 347
Mm2 51, 65, 89, 122, 232 Muz1 210
MMAG 128 Mx 10, 30, 37, 52, 97, 117,
Mo 72 133, 341, 357
MOD 309 resulting 31, 97, 358
MODE 120 MX 100 161
Modification 300 Mxy 26, 31, 97, 229, 358, 360
Modify 626 allow 31, 97, 358
Geometry file 626 considering 360
Modulus 180 MY 10, 30, 36, 50, 88, 97, 105,
Moisture 300, 309 117, 133, 183, 185, 188,
191, 194, 196, 199, 225,
MOM 29, 109, 154 318, 341, 357, 635-636
Moment 102 MY1 30
Moment Capacity 52, 80, 122 MY2 30
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS210
778 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Myx – OFF
Myx 52 158
MZ 36, 50, 77, 88, 105, 117, Newton 6, 129, 202, 358
183, 185, 188, 191, 194, NHL 623
196, 199, 225, 238, 318,
367, 630, 633, 635-636 Ni 32
MZ 200 156, 161 Node numbers 38
MZ 300 156, 161 Noded Plate Elements 127
MZ1 30 Non 211
MZ2 30 Northern 174

Northern Species 174
N Notch Factor 180
N/mm 318 NOTE 117, 359
N/mm2 10 November 1989 353
N1 37 NS-EN 1993 246
N690-1984 655 NSC 17
Design Parameters 655 NSECT 359
Name SPACING 602 NSECTION 10, 27, 130, 205,
340
National Annex 245, 253, 258,
260 NSF 17, 57, 83, 92, 107, 141,
145, 170, 177, 179, 217,
corresponding 258
237, 336, 344, 367, 614,
National Annex Documents 245 618, 620, 629
National Application Documents 224, NSF-a 46, 73, 215, 366
231
NSF 0.85 ALL 21-22
National Standard 148, 153, 159,
NUMBER OF JOINTS 150, 156,
210
161
Canada 148, 153, 159
Ny 605
STAAD 210
NB 246 O
NEN-EN 1993 246 Od1 38
Net Area 51, 122 Odk 38
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION152 Odk list 38
,
OFF 153, 158, 163

Index: OMEGA – PDF
OMEGA 145, 152, 158, 163 157, 161, 182,

OMEGA-1 152, 158, 163 184, 188, 191,
193, 196, 199,
Omega_2 145 221, 316, 320,
Value 144 347, 369, 609,
OpenSTAAD 2 613, 619
Opposed 59, 84 Parameter Name 10, 620, 628
Mb 49, 77 Parameter PUNCH 632
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND150, 156, Value 632

161 Parameters 10, 23, 30, 49, 76,
Other embedded 2 245, 614, 637
Output 185, 188, 191, 193, see 614

196, 199 Parameters FYLD 17, 141
Output File 115 Parameters KX 141
Output Formats 49 Part 27, 108, 224, 299
Control 49 Part 1.1 General 245
Outstand 91 Partial 300
PASS 65-66, 89, 98, 107, 146,
P 165, 181, 221, 334, 369,
488, 603, 608, 615, 619,
PAGE 148
621, 636
PAGE 25 621
having 603
Page 26 622
Pass/fail 621
Page 27 622
PASSED 21, 88
Page 28 622
PASSes 22, 147, 221, 369, 609
Page 4_106 153
PC 51, 78, 88, 100, 110, 241,
Page 4_108 159 347
Page28 622 Pcs 110
PANEL 37 PDELTA 2, 26, 156, 325
Parabolic-rectangular 225 PDELTA ANALYSIS 8, 26, 128,
Parallel Flange Channels 14 325, 339, 354
PARAMETER 21-22, 75, 115, performing 128
146-147, 151, PDF 3
780 — STAAD.Pro
Index: PE – PRISM YD 450
PE 99, 108 369, 614

People's Republic Plant structures 2
China 210 PLASTIC 51
PER 13.8.2 148 Plate Girder 65
PERFORM ANALYSIS 8, 150, 161, PNL 65, 85
184, 188, Po 99, 108
196, 316,
320, 354 Point 166
Poisson's Ratio
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK115 224
Performed 15, 72, 350, 363 POISSON 0.15 174, 184, 187,
190, 193, 196,
PDELTA ANALYSIS 128 198, 316, 320
TUBE 15, 72, 350, 363 POISSON 0.17 187, 190
Permanent 309 POISSON 0.3 114
Permissible Ratio POISSON 0.3 ALL 150
Actual 181 POISSON STEEL ALL 155, 161
Perry 47, 73, 103 PR YD 300 27, 128, 340
corresponding 47, 73 PR YD 350 6, 202, 354
PFC200 16 Prescanned 8, 206, 355
PFC230 14 PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 115
PFC300 14 PRINT MEMB PROP 13
Pfy 219 PRINT MEMBER FORCES 156
Pfz 219 PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST115
Pg 36 620 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES175
PG9144 90, 94 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28114
PHI 143 PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS150
Pine 174, 184, 187, 190 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS115
PINNED 34, 150, 183, 187, PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073 316,
190, 192, 199 320
PIP 71, 351, 363 PRIS YD 0.748031 ZD 0.574147184
PIPE 15, 604 PRISM YD 450 6, 27, 128, 202,
PIPES 15, 140, 147, 351, 363, 354

Index: PRISM YD 450 ZD 300 – RA
PRISM YD 450 ZD 300 339 Ptype 39

PRISM YD 550 27 Pu 182-183, 186, 189, 192,
PRISMATIC 87, 147, 173, 201, 195, 198, 209
243, 259, 299, 334, PUNCH 632, 634, 637
353, 369 changing 637
help 173 PUNCH 1.0 633
Pro 2, 32, 68, 108, 148, 153, 5.0 633
159, 233, 236, 245, 247-
249, 251, 299, 613 Puz 210
Pro 2005 62 PV 51, 78, 88, 103, 112
Pro CODE CHECKING 51 PY 49, 77, 88, 92, 110, 143,

183, 186, 189, 192, 194,
Pro Extension 4 197, 200, 237, 367
PROBLEM 148, 153, 159 value 49, 76
Produce the 88 Pyf 65
PRODUCT 604, 610 PZ 51, 78, 183, 186, 189, 192,
PROFILE 335-336 194, 197, 200
Provide 141, 245
Q
equations for 143
user with 245 Q235 219
Q345
PROVIDE SHEAR AND TORSIONAL LINKS AS FOLLOWS29 219
Provided using 18, 143, 178 Q390 219
RATIO 18, 141, 176 Q420 219
Provided value 75 Qcr 89
ride 75 Qf
Provides the 178 calculating 633
Provisions 97, 142, 164, 216 Qw 65
13.8.1 142 Qy 37
BS 5950 97
R
CSA S136 164
R ratio 621
Section 215
RA 13, 41, 49, 69, 76, 135,
PT 49, 77, 88, 104, 108
782 — STAAD.Pro
Index: RA – REQRD/AVAIL
236, 249-250, 348, 361, Ref.Cl.8.4.5 18

475 Refer 12, 18, 42, 69, 135, 211,
Raa 82 238, 361, 475, 614, 618
RADIANS 118 Cl 17
RATIO 10, 18, 50, 66, 77, 87- Section 614, 618
88, 98, 100, 109, 141, STAAD Program Technical Reference211
144, 148, 153, 159, 165,
176, 179, 185, 188, 191, STAAD Technical Reference Manual 12,
194, 196, 199, 205, 237, 42,
243, 258, 302, 309, 336, 69,
344, 367, 603, 620, 629, 135
631, 636 Reference 148, 153, 159, 633
Bending 108 Reference EN338 310
provided using 18, 143, 178 Reference Table 2.3 300
RATIO 0.9 ALL 21-22 EC 299
RATIO 0.99 ALL 182 Reference Table 3.1 300
Rational method 143 EC 299
Rbb 82 Region 604
RC Designer Module 23 REI 2
REACTION 115 REINF 10, 129, 203, 206
Reading 100 Reinforcement bar 28, 131
Table 10 100 Relevant EC2 226
Recommendations 29, 76, 94- Relevant Effective Length 49
95 REPEAT LOAD 128
3.8.4.5 29 Reports 618-620
Rectangular 313, 317 Reports on Engineering Practice No618
Rectangular & Square 5, 353 Representing 47, 73
RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE 350 Strut Curve 47, 73
RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS15
Req 632
Reduced Moment Capacity 52 REQD 210
REDUNDANT MEMBERS KL 620 REQD STEEL 28
Ref.Cl.5.3 18 REQRD/AVAIL 150, 156, 161

Index: REQUIREMENTS – SD
REQUIREMENTS 31 Chapter 131

Research Engineers 1, 3, 90, 94 Chapters 132
Reset 626 Section 2c 143
LEG 626 Rvv 82, 241
Resistance moment 48 RX 118
RESISTANCES 120 Ry 91, 110
Restraint 237 Ryy 56, 82, 237
RESULT 64, 87, 259, 636 Rz 118, 152
Resulting 31, 97, 358 Rzz 56, 82, 237
Mx 30, 97, 357
S
RESULTS 64, 87, 259, 636
Results as 87 S SHAPES 140
REVERSE 137 S086 185, 188, 191, 193, 199
REVERSE ANGLES 13, 137, S1 39

365 S16 134-135, 141, 144, 146-
Revn 347 148
RFACE 209 S16.1 134, 148
Ride 75 S180X22 136
provided value 75 S180X22.8 136
Robertson 47, 73 Sagging/Hogging 207
Rolled Section 57, 83, 91 SAME 49, 77, 367
ROTAN 118 Sample File Containing Australian Shapes13
ROW = 28 Sawn 172-173, 176
ROWMN 28 consisting 172
ROWMX 28 SAWN_LUMBER_BEAM.STD 195
RP 2A 632 SBLT 65, 368
RT 331 SBLT is 88
Rules 131-132, 142 SBY 220
AISC 142 SBZ 221
Appendix 142 SCL 300, 309, 316, 320

SD 14, 71, 138, 350, 363
784 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Sd1 – SELECT MEMB
Sd1 37 Section Name 122

Sdj 37 SECTION PROPERTIES 51, 122
Sec 206, 209 Section VI 601
Second Edition 618 Sections 54, 81, 90, 98, 100,
SECTION 49, 66, 77, 91, 98-99, 142, 216, 603, 614,
108, 145, 165, 206, 618
237, 334, 336, 344, provisions 216
603, 609, 620, 628 refer 614, 618
according 621 Sections 4.1 603
SECTION 0.5 76 Sections Not Subject 166
use 72 Torsional 166
Section 1.5 629 See 49, 614
AISC 629 Parameters 614
Section 2.6.3 333 SEE 13.8.2 148
Section 2B 88, 243, 259 See BS 105
Section 2c 143 See Cl 143
rules 142 See Clause 11.2 141
Section 3.2.3 627 SEE CLAUSE 4.4 621
Section 3.4.1 603 See CSA 136 167
Section 3.8 10 See Equation 3.4.7.2 606
Technical Reference Manual 10 See Note 59, 84
Section 3.8.2.2 In 26 See Section 12.10 634
Section 3.8.3 26 See STAAD 105, 167, 609
Section 4.1.1 603 See Table 215
Section 4.6 46, 73 See Table 12A 603
Section area 177 See Table 6B 366
SECTION CAPACITIES 162 SELECT 49, 77, 367
SECTION CAPACITY 209 during 61, 85, 368
SECTION CLASS 51, 78 SELECT 1.0 636
Section I-B 603 SELECT ALL 609
Aluminum 603 SELECT MEMB 22

Index: SELECT MEMBER – SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
SELECT MEMBER 609 359

Selecting 173 Sfy 220
Combination 173 Sfz 220
Semi 245 SGR 49, 82, 92, 237, 368
Serial 28, 131 SHAPE 475
SERV 26, 229, 309 Shaped Members 166
Service Class 309 Shapes 361
Service Condition Factor Shear 5, 8, 27, 103, 112, 130,
Bending 179 145, 156, 165, 179, 206,
216, 225, 302, 325, 355,
Compression 179 366, 615, 619
Modulus 180 Check 304
Shear 179 Clause 3.15 615
Tension 179 Clause 4.15 619
Serviceability Limit States 95 Design 5, 8, 130, 206, 225,
Set 49, 66, 77, 88, 91, 98, 105, 325, 355
147, 165, 236, 245, 338, Size Factor 180
347, 609, 628, 636-637
Shear Area 52
0.0 49, 628
Shear Buckling 65
1.0 77, 88, 91, 105, 147,
167, 347, 604, 628, 636 Shear Capacity 52, 122
2.0 91 SHEAR FORCE 153, 158, 163
20 338 Shear Modulus 224, 232, 302
3.0 637 Shear Ratio 123
LEG 54, 239 Shear Strength 103, 302
TRACK 66, 98, 147, 165 Shear Stress 626
SET DIVISION 35 Shift 249
SET DIVISION 12 35 centroidal 249
SET ECHO OFF 113 SHORT 29, 309
Set Reinforcement Angle 31, 97, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK 138
358 SHORT LEGS BACK 352
SFACE 24, 130, 132, 227, 338, SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK 16,
786 — STAAD.Pro
Index: SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK – Sq.mm
365 SLENDERNESS 183, 185, 189,

Should be 8, 354 194, 197, 237,
314, 318
SI 209
Check 314, 318
SI SYSTEM 151
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB 153,
Sidesway 8, 336, 607, 630 158
Simple 245 SLENDERNESS RATIOS 209
Simplified 65 SLENDERNESS_Y 183, 185, 189,
SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD149 194, 197
Single Angle 81, 613 SLENDERNESS_Z 183, 185, 189,
SINGLE ANGLE AND RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS234 194, 197
Smax , 95
Soft Wood 248 314
SINGLE CHANNEL 234, 247- Softwares 2
248
Solid Timber 300
Singly 166
SP 69, 135, 361, 475
Singly Symmetric Sections 166
SPACE 113, 155
SIZE 27, 207
Spacing 14, 27, 137, 349
Size Factor 180, 301
0.5 14, 349
Bending 179
2.5 137
Compression 179
Species 173
Shear 179
Specification 53
Tension 179
GROUPS 53
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX 150,
156, Specifies 70
161 21.3 71
Sk 354, 356 EN 1993 245
Skew 97 MAIN 47
Sl 302 Spruce 174
Slabs 10, 127 Spruce-Pine-Fir 174
Input Data 11, 134, 342 SQ 29, 208-209, 367
SLENDER 29, 80 Sq.mm 208

Index: SQRT – START
SQRT 62 STAAD Program Technical Reference211

Square Hollow Sections 13 refer 211
Squash 80 STAAD Program User's
Squash Load 80 refer 361
SRA 26, 31, 97, 229, 357, 360 STAAD SPACE 13, 113, 315,
Srx 76 319
Sry 76 STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HAND
SSY 336, 607, 630

SSZ 336, 608, 630
ST 41, 43, 49, 76, 135, 234,
249-250 STAAD Technical Reference 137
5.2 236, 251 STAAD Technical Reference Manual 12,
z-z 55, 241 42,
69,
St 37 368 87,
St 52 368 135,
ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM 196 226,
609,
ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM 199 613,
ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST 193 617-
STA 28, 130 618,
620
STA,END 28, 131
refer 12, 42, 69, 135, 475
STAAD 10
STAAD.Pro 2, 98, 149, 164,
contents 3 248
Define 626 STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING 120,
design 10, 209 151,
Examples Manual 609 157,
162
National Standard 210
STAAD/Pro CODE CHECKING121
STAAD Examples Manual 1
Standard 135, 165, 186, 195
STAAD file 635
Standards Australia 11
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER175
Stands 604
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR GLULAM DESIGN INPUT FILE183
START 11, 205
788 — STAAD.Pro
Index: START CONCRETE DESIGN – Strength
START CONCRETE DESIGN 8, Eurocode 230, 232, 234,

10 245, 247-250, 258-
START JOB INFORMATION 184, 186, 259
190, 192, Steel Design Per
195, 198, DIN Code 360-361, 365-367,
315, 319 369
Start Joint 239 French Code 342-344, 346
START USER TABLE 66 Steel Design Per AS 4100 11-13,
Started 3 17-18,
Getting 3 21-22
States 28, 131 Steel Design Per BS5950 68-69,

87
Static Analysis 153, 159
Steel Design Per GBJ 50017 210
STATIC LOAD 117
STEEL DESIGN STRENGTH 49,
STATUS 120 77
STD 192, 198, 632 Steel Grade 49, 77
Std file 637 STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL 158,
StE 355 368 163
STEEL 2 Steel Structures 134, 148, 153,
Steel Section Library 13 159, 210
STEEL AREA 210 01 Limit States Design 134
Steel Bar 202 Design 210
Steel Construction 148, 153, Limit States Design 148, 153,

159 159
Canadian Institute 148, 153, STEEL TAKE 153, 158, 163

159 STEEL TAKE OFF ALL 153
Steel Design 22, 64, 87, 147, Steel Takeoff 153, 158
221, 230, 232, 234, Steel Transmission Towers 618
245, 247-250, 258-
259, 347, 369, STEM 250 27
613-615, 617-620, STIFF 166, 607
625-628, 631-634, Strength 202, 302
637
Bending 302
2B1.10 Tabulated Results 87
Design Value 202

Index: Stress – TA LD L80X40X6
Stress 215, 330, 365, 627 161, 184, 187, 190,

Axial Compression 216, 366 193, 196, 199, 316,
320
Axial Tension 215, 366
Suppported 614
Bending 216, 366
SUR 32
Combined Loading 216
Surface 32
Stress/force output printing 39
use 32
Strong axis 159
SURFACE CONSTANTS 35
STRUCT 610
SURFACE DIVISION 39
Structural Steelwork 342-343
SURFACE INCIDENCES 35
Design Rules 342-343
SWAP 633-634
STRUCTURE 605
SWAY 55
STRUCTURE TYPE 119
Sway Loadcase 55
Structures 97
Sy 143
Design 97
Symmetric Sections 166
Strut characteristics 47, 73
SZE_T 120
Strut Curve 47, 73
representing 47, 73 T
Substituted 627
T-SECTION 27
SUMMARY 117
T Shapes 214, 349, 362
SUMMARY OF PROVIDED REINF208
T6 603
SUMMARY OF REINF 208
TA 13, 69, 135, 348, 361, 475
SUMMATION FORCE 117
TA BACK 602
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN117
TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75 602
Supercedes 134
TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5 602
Support 130
TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0602
Face 130
TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75 15
Support Location 338
TA LD A75X50X6 14
Face 338
TA LD L150X100X16 138
SUPPORT REACTIONS 115
TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5 363
SUPPORTS 34, 114, 150, 155,
TA LD L80X40X6 350
790 — STAAD.Pro
Index: TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5 – TA ST UC356X406X287
TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5602 TA ST IPN380 348

TA RA A150X150X16 14 TA ST JO127X114A 70
TA RA L100X100X6.5 350 TA ST L200X100X20 137
TA RA L25X25X4 350 TA ST L20X20X2.5 363
TA RA L40X20X5 363 TA ST L30X30X2.7 349
TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6 14 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625 602
TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5 138 TA ST PFC125 13
TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25 603 TA ST PFC75 14
TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6 350 TA ST PIP180X5 15
TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5 363 TA ST PIP213.2 71
TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0 603 TA ST PIP21912.5 351
TA SD UA80X60X6 71 TA ST PIP40612.5 363
TA ST 602 TA ST PIP422.6 351
TA ST 1.50PipeX160 602 TA ST PIP602.9 363
TA ST 20X12RectX 602 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 15,
TA ST A30X30X6 14 351,
363
TA ST CH178X76 70
TA ST S510X98 136
TA ST CS12X11.8 602
TA ST TUB100603.6 364
TA ST HEA120A 348
TA ST TUB2001008.0 350
TA ST HEA160 362
TA ST TUB20202.5 15
TA ST HEB100 348
TA ST TUB50252.7 350
TA ST HEB300 362
TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.513
TA ST HEM140 348
TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5365
TA ST HP310X79 136
TA ST U70X40 365
TA ST I200 362
TA ST UA200X150X18 71
TA ST I8.00X13.1 602
TA ST UAP100 349
TA ST IPE140 348
TA ST UB200X25.4 13
TA ST IPEA120 348, 361
TA ST UC250X89.5 13
TA ST IPER140 361
TA ST UC310X96.8 13
TA ST IPER180 348
TA ST UC356X406X287 70

Index: TA ST UP305X305X186 – TABLE ST W310X143
TA ST UP305X305X186 70 Table 4.1.4 202

TA ST WB1200X455 13 Table 4.2.3 202
TA ST WC400X303 13 Table 4.3.2 179
TA ST WW900X347 136 Table 4.3.2.2 176
TABLE 66, 87, 259, 636 Table 4A 209
Table 14.1 Aluminum Design Parameters603Table 4B 216
Table 15B 620 Table 5.1.2 220
Table 1.1 619 Table 5.4.4 176
Table 10 100, 368, 601 Table 5.4.5 176, 180
reading 100 Table 5A 226, 341
Table 12.1 628 Table 5B
Table 13B 335 Refer 238
Table 14.2 - ALLOY PARAMETER609 Table 6.1 311
Table 15 75 Table 6.2.1 10
Table 1A 6, 11 Table 6.4.2 180
Table 1B 17 Table 6.5.7.4A 176, 180
Table 2.1 63 Table 6B 343-344
Table 20 601 Table 8A 356, 358
Table 25 54, 240 Table 8B 367
Table 25 BS5950 54 Table 9A 202
Fastener Control 54 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM196
Table 2A 28-30 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM199
Table 2D 96 TABLE ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST193
Table 3.1 313 TABLE ST I22B 214
Table 3.3 603 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.6 ID 0.55215
Table 3.4 604 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM175
Table 3.4.1 215 TABLE ST TM244X300 214
according 216 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.15 WT 0.8 DT 0.6215
Table 3A 128, 133 TABLE ST W310X129 155
Table 3B 141, 144, 177 TABLE ST W310X143 161
792 — STAAD.Pro
Index: TABLE ST W410X54 – Timber Structures
TABLE ST W410X54 150 The balance 9, 206, 326, 355

Tables 97, 164, 601 The code 233, 236, 248, 250
Tabulated Results The effect 36
Steel Design 259 axial load 36
Taken 635 The input 46, 73, 215, 366
In Plane Bending 635 changing 46, 73, 215, 366
Taper Members 67 The KL 621
Tapered 66 The Steel Construction Institute97
TB 52, 81 The user 102
Technical Reference 631 Thedefault 359
Technical Reference Manual 10, 30, Therefore, Glulam 177
82, 89, THETAT 634
93, 133,
137, THI 18 34
241, THICK 27
341, 357 Thickness 71, 363
Section 3.8 10 Through the 177
see 49 Thus, M310X17.6 136
TEE 127, 247-249 Thus, MC250X42.4 136
Tees 142, 614 Thus, OpenSTAAD 2
TENS 114 TIE REINFORCEMENT 210
TENSILE CAPACITY 163 Tied Column 130
Tensile Strength 99, 302 Timber Design 299
Tensile Stress 330 Timber Design Per EC 299, 302,
Tension 114, 179, 182, 189, 313, 317
198, 304 Timber Species 303
Check 304 Characteristic Values 303
Size Factor 180 Timber Strength Class 303, 310
Tension Capacity 122 Timber Structures 299
Tension Memb 336 Design 299
TENSION MEMBER KL 620 Limit States Design 299
TH 135

Index: TITLE – TOTAL REACTION LOAD
TITLE 153, 159 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115 13

TO 6, 8, 10, 13, 27, 32, 66, 69, TO 35 TA ST WC400X114 13
108, 128, 130, 132, 202, TO 39 114
340-341, 348, 354-356,
361, 475, 601 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060 114
TO 10 241 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18 71
TO 10 TA ST PFC380 13 TO 46 BY 348, 361
TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5 13 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1 13
TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0 13 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.7513
TO 11 175 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4 138
TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM175 TO 80 TA 70
TO 120 TA 137 TO BACK 349
TO 14 108 Together with 226
TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18114 Top 31, 96, 206, 226
TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4 137 Torsion 130, 225, 355
TO 150 TA ST WW400X444 136 Design 225
TO 150 TABLE ST DFL_SelStr_2X2_BM173 Torsional 166, 302
TO 150 TABLE ST Hem 174 Check 304

Sections Not Subject
TO 150 TABLE ST Northern_SelStr_3X12_BM174 166
TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_3X8_BM174 Torsional Buckling 242
TO 19 108 TORSIONAL RIGIDITY SHOULD CONFORM TO C
TO 19 28 TO 31 115 Torsional Shear Stress 626
TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30114 TOTAL 150, 156, 161
TO 200 TA ST W610X101 136 TOTAL APPLIED LOAD 117
TO 22 PINNED 114 TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM 150,

156,
TO 25 TA ST PIP33X2.5 139 161
TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075 114 TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS 210
TO 27 UNI GY 115 TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES 150,
TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0 13 156,
TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16114 161
TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8 13 TOTAL REACTION LOAD 117
794 — STAAD.Pro
Index: TR – UNIT
TR 147, 347 TYPE 153, 159

TRACK 10, 18, 21, 25, 49, 66,
77, 88, 98, 107, 115, U
130, 146-147, 151, 157,
U Channels 349, 362
162, 165, 205, 216,
228, 312, 316, 320, U180 362
347, 356, 366, 483, U260 362
608, 610, 620, 628, 636
U280 SP 0.5 362
setting 66, 98, 148, 165
U70X40 362
TRACK If 87
UAP150 349
TRACK 0.0 10, 30, 205, 207,
UAP250A 349
209
UAP250A SP 0.5 349
TRACK 1.0 10, 25, 30, 205,
209, 228 UB 13, 67
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 8 UB Shapes 13
TRACK 2.0 41, 65, 88 UB254X102X22 71
TRACK 9.0 209 UC 13, 66
TRANS 118 UC Shapes 13
Trapezoidal 201 UDL 368
TRUSS 105, 167, 609 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE 313,

317
enforced 167, 609
Ultimate Limit States 95
TSA 171
Un 41, 249
TSC 303, 310, 316, 320
UNB 145
TUBE 15, 72, 350, 363
Unbraced 36, 106, 170, 203,
performed 15, 72, 350, 363
249, 607
TUBES 15, 140, 147, 350, 363,
UNF 49, 77, 239, 345, 367,
369, 614
620, 629
Tutorials 3
Uni 33, 178
TW 634
Uni-axial 37
TWO 33
UNI GY 150, 188, 196
TWOLAYERED 34
UNIT 49, 77, 113, 149, 155,
Txt 636 160

Index: UNIT CM – VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY
UNIT CM 13, 66 199

UNIT CM KN 174 Unstiffened Flanges 166
UNIT FEET 113 Unsupported Length 56, 82
UNIT FEET KIP 113 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION
UNIT FEET POUND175, 184, 187,
190, 192, 195,
198 UNT 145
UNIT INCHES KIP 184, 187, Untreated 186, 189, 195, 198
190 UP 245
UNIT KGS CM 115 Use 32, 72, 89, 93
UNIT KIP INCH 115 American 89, 93
UNIT METER KN 13, 150, 155, SECTION 0.5 76
160, 184, 186,
190, 193, 195, Surface 32
199, 315, 319 Used 100, 165, 249
UNIT MM 8, 27 Combined 99, 166
UNIT MMS 114 Used in 88
UNIT MMS KN 149 USER 41, 66
UNIT NEWTON METER 21-22 USER ID 116, 149, 155, 160
UNIT NEWTON MMS 8, 10 User Table 12, 42, 69, 135, 211,
UNITS 31, 119 361, 475
UNITS ARE 119 USER TABLES 90, 94
UNL 49, 66, 77, 92, 142, 151, User with 245
216, 237, 343-344, 366- provide 245
367, 605, 620, 629 Using the LEG 41, 250
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 51, Usually with 50
151,
157,
V
162,
185, VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY622
188,
191,
194,
196,
796 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Value – WIDTH
Value 10, 46, 49, 73, 76, 88, VMIN 33

100, 129, 144, 202, 215, VPY 347
232, 247, 300, 302, 334,
337, 366, 603, 632, 636 VPZ 347
1.0 10, 88, 130, 203, 338, VR 148

636 VRY 152, 158, 163
1.0 is 215, 366
W
1.1 232, 247
180 334 W SHAPES 136
2.0 203 W200X42 138
3.0 203 W310X129 154
300 334 W310X143 159
4.0 203 W410X54 148
Cm 607 WALL 32
coefficients Kt 604 Wall Design 5, 10
coefficients nu 605 Web Ratio 89
Compressive 100 Webs 166
DFF 50 WEIGHT 153, 158, 163
Kh 301 WELD 60, 85, 604, 630
Km 300 Weld Type 60, 85
Omega_2 145 Welded Beams 13
Parameter PUNCH 632 Welded Columns 13
PY 49, 77 Welded Wide Flanges 136
Various alloys 603 WET 91
Vb 2, 65 Which leg 41, 250
VBA 2 angle is fixed by 41, 250
Vcr 89 WIDE FLANGE 65, 89, 91, 93,

234, 247-248
Vectoral 240
WIDE FLANGE COMPOSITE 89,
factor 237
93
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL115
Wide Flanges 136, 614
VMAX 33
WIDTH 10, 25, 130, 150, 156,

Index: WIDTH – ZD 750
161, 204, 228, 339, 359

Y
Will be 49
With/diaphragms 632 Y-AXIS 152, 158, 163
WMIN 631 Y AXIS 153, 158, 163
WOOD 26, 31, 95, 97, 229 YB 27
WOOD CONCRETE 1968 31 YB 300 202
Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN172- YB 350 27

173, YD 10, 25, 27, 38, 130, 173,
176, 204, 228, 339, 359
178, defaults 10, 130, 204, 339
181-
183, Yield Strength 141, 177, 237,
183, 620
186, Yield Stress 10, 24, 203, 227,
189, 338, 358
192, Yielding 164, 166
195,
198 Initiation 164, 166
WORDS 150, 156, 161 Yy 300, 302
WSTR 631
Z
WT 138
Z-AXIS 152, 158, 163
WW 136
Z-z 55, 122, 241
WW SHAPES 136
ST 49
WWF 142
ZB 200 202
Wy 168
ZB 250 27
bending 165
Zc 103
Wz
ZD 10, 25, 27, 130, 173, 204,
bending 165
228, 339, 359
defaults 10, 130, 204, 339
X
ZD 1000 27
X FLYD 631
ZD 250 6, 202, 354
X1 y1 z1 38
ZD 300 27, 128
Xd 38
ZD 750 202
798 — STAAD.Pro
Index: Zec – Zz
Zec 122
Zet 122
Zeta 368
ZIV 240
Zz 300, 302

International Codes V8i

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

International Codes V8i

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

STAAD.

International Design Codes Manual

International Design Codes Manual — i

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

International Design Codes Manual — iii

International Design Codes Manual — v

International Design Codes Manual — 1

1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands

About the STAAD.Pro Documentation

Getting Started and Tutorials

Technical Reference Manual

International Design Codes

International Design Codes Manual — 3

1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design Per AS3600 -

1A.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

l For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

1A.3 Member Dimensions

International Design Codes Manual — 5

1A.4 Design Parameters

Table 1A.1 Australian Concrete Design per AS 3600 Parameters

International Design Codes Manual — 7

1A.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration

1A.6 Beam Design

Design for Flexure

Design for Shear

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional

UNIT NEWTON MMS

International Design Codes Manual — 9

1A.7 Column Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS

1A.8 Slab/Wall Design

Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as

Figure: Element moments

UNIT NEWTON MMS

1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design Per AS 4100 -

International Design Codes Manual — 11

1B.2 Analysis Methodology

1B.3 Member Property Specifications

1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

These shapes are designated in the following way.

Welded Beams are designated in the following way.

Welded Columns are designated in the following way.

International Design Codes Manual — 13

Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel sections.

In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back to back double channel

Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)

6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5

Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)

1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0

International Design Codes Manual — 15

1B.5 Section Classification

1B.6 Member Resistances

The compressive strength of members is determined based on Clause 6.1 of the

International Design Codes Manual — 17

The allowable bending moment of members is determined as the lesser of nominal

Interaction of axial force and bending

1B.7 Design Parameters

Table 1B.1 Australian Steel Design Parameters

International Design Codes Manual — 19

TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only minimum design

1B.8 Code Checking

UNIT NEWTON METER

International Design Codes Manual — 21

Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic sections.